/
ISBN: 0-8194-3701-8
Text
ELECTRO-OPTICAL
IMAGING SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE
Gerald C. Holst
U U -' w>4
ELECTRO-OPTICAL
IMAGING SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE
Second edition
Gerald C. Holst
ч’л U iax£-cui
Си tV'AXj 4
V.AAoX’ fyf^t37 ,'
•JUn Vc^VJj? ^7
С ^ЛАЭ Л xZZjulJ \\i Лл/Xn-^U/
I 'j
Copublished by
JCD Publishing
Winter Park, Florida USA
and
SPIE OPTICAL ENGINEERING PRESS
A Publication of SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering
Bellingham, Washington USA
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Holst, Gerald C.
Electro-optical imaging system performance / Gerald C. Holst. — 2nd ed.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-8194-3701-8 (hard cover) - ISBN 0-9640000-6-7 (hard cover)
1. Electrooptical devices. 2. Imaging systems. 3. Infrared imaging.
4. Infrared detectors. 5. Quantum well. 1. Title
TA1750.H64 2000
621.36'72-dc21
00-024271
Copublished by
JCD Publishing
2932 Cove Trail
Winter Park, FL 32789
Phone: 407-629-5370
Fax: 407-629-5370
ISBN: 0-9640000-6-7 (hard cover)
email: jcdgch@aol.com
SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering
P.O. Box 10
Bellingham, WA 98227-0010
Phone: 360-676-3290
Fax: 360-647-1445
WWW: http://www.spie.org
SPIE Volume PM-84
ISBN: 0-8194-3701-8
Notice:
Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and
information, but the Author and Publishers cannot assume responsibility for the
validity of all materials or the consequences of their use.
Copyright © 2000 Gerald C. Holst
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form by any
means without written permission from the copyright owner.
Often we do not fully appreciate those
who have significantly affected our lives
This book is dedicated to Cathy
PREFACE to the SECOND EDITION
The first edition was published in 1995. Since then, infrared imagery
applications have exploded. From a modeling point-of-view, the subject of this
book, only a few significant changes have occurred. Uncooled technology is
based upon microbolometer and pyroelectric detectors. Systems with novel
semiconductors such as quantum well detectors are routinely produced. These
detectors, along with their characteristics, are described in this edition.
Although the material in most chapters is the same, the material in all
chapters has been rearranged for conciseness. Where appropriate, it has been
rewritten for clarification. Up-to-date references (1995 to 1999) have been
added. The Preface to the First Edition immediately follows this preface.
Significant changes are listed below.
Chapter 2 lists general detector types (classical semiconductors, novel
semiconductors, and thermal), provides applications, and describes their
operation. NVTherm, a new model that includes sampling effects, has a new eye
model. This comprehensive eye model (Chapter 6) considers the pupil diameter,
retinal response, and eye tremor. Neither the detector nor the optics can be studied
in isolation. The resolution of each is combined in Shade’s equivalent resolution
to create a system-level resolution metric (Chapter 12). This metric illustrates a
gradual change from detector-limited to optics-limited operation as the f-number
changes.
Sampling effects were known since the early days of television (circa
1930). How sampling affected target recognition and identification was not
quantified until 1999. The experimental results prior to 1995 suggested that
there was an optimum sampling rate. As a result, Chapter 14 was originally
entitled, Optimum Sampling. This chapter is now entitled Sampled-data Systems.
An image will appear at least one sample width wider than the sampled object.
Thus sampling can thought of as a blurring function. An increased width in the
space domain appears as a decreased width in the frequency domain. A larger blur
appears as if it the circuitry had a narrower modulation transfer function (MTF).
This apparent decrease (or contraction) in the frequency domain is called a
’’squeeze." The "squeeze" is used in NVTherm.
This edition contains more comparisons between mid-wave infrared
(MWIR) and long-wave infrared (LWIR) systems. Sun glints (Chapter 15) may
alter your selection. Chapter 18 has been completely rewritten. It includes the
specific detectivity (D*) for all the detector types. The noise equivalent
differential temperature (NEDT) is provided for each detector type. System
operation may either be background limited (BLIP) or Johnson noise limited
(JOLI).
FLIR92 only calculates the MTF and the minimum resolvable
temperature (MRT) up to the Nyquist frequency. This limit originally appeared
reasonable. Any spatial frequency above Nyquist frequency is aliased to a lower
frequency. However, the Nyquist frequency limit artificially limited range
performance. Two new models have emerged, NVTherm and TRM3, which no
longer have the Nyquist frequency limit (Chapter 19). Sampling effects are
incorporated through semi-empirical equations.
In 1995, Kennedy described a method for component tolerancing. By
tolerancing each input separately, it is possible to determine which subsystem
has the greatest influence on the MTF, NEDT, and MRT. The specifications of
that subsystem are reviewed. If cost effective, then the specifications are
tightened. Similarly, if the tolerancing on a subsystem shows little effect on the
MRT, then its specifications can be loosened and this implies reduced cost.
Kennedy created a shell around FLIR92. Each input is described by it mean and
standard deviation. The program then performed a Monte Carlo simulation by
selecting random values of the data set. The methods proposed by Kennedy
were commercialized into STADIUM FLIR (Chapter 19).
Target identification is a high-order target discrimination level that is at
the end of a complex process. The first task is searching the field-of-view to find
the target. Search (Chapter 21) may be random or systematic and it varies with
observer training and background. After the target is located, then a static
performance model (1975 NVL model, FLIR92, NVTherm, or TRM3) is used to
predict detection, recognition, and identification ranges.
The author extends his deepest gratitude to all his coworkers and
students who have contributed to the ideas in this book. They are too many to
mention by name. The author especially thanks Harold Orlando, Northrop
Grumman, who read a draft copy of this edition. Although he provided valuable
comments, the accuracy of the text is the sole responsibility of the author. Doug
Marks assisted with the graphics.
PREFACE to the FIRST EDITION
Typical examples of electro-optical systems include electronic still
cameras, image intensifiers, infrared imaging systems, low light level TVs
(LLLTV), machine vision systems, night vision goggles, solid state cameras, and
TVs. These systems have applications in aerospace, airborne reconnaissance,
astronomy, medical imaging, remote sensing, robotics, and spectroscopy.
In the 1950s, Shade predicted the resolution of photographic film and TV
sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of all models
used today. In the 1970s, Rosell and Willson applied Shade’s results to thermal
imaging systems and low light level TVs. Since then, most modeling efforts have
concentrated on infrared imaging systems.
Electro-optical system analysis is based upon the hypothesis that systems
are amenable to spatial and temporal frequency domain analyses. It further
assumes that noise interferes with perception in such as manner that the signal-to-
noise ratio is pertinent. Critical to the analysis is that vision can be modeled
sufficiently accurately so that useful performance predictions can be made.
The advances made in infrared system modeling can now be applied to
all imaging systems with only minor modification. An infrared imaging system is
just a subclass of all electro-optical imaging systems. Different forms exist to
accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies (scanning
versus staring, visible versus thermal imaging systems, etc.). Unless told, the
observer generally will not know the source characteristics nor the sensor's spectral
band pass. Since his primary experience is visual (i.e., 0.4 to 0.7 im), he can only
state if the image on the monitor resembles a visual scene.
Effective modeling requires an orderly integration of diverse
technologies and languages associated with radiation physics, optics, solid state
sensors, electronic circuitry, human interpretation of displayed imagery, and
computer modeling. Each field is complex and is a separate discipline. The system
analyst must be conversant in all these fields.
This book provides the methodology to analyze and optimize systems. It
also includes some practical limits that exist in real hardware. Therefore, this book
is also a practical guide to electro-optical system design. Many aspects of hardware
design can be found in the eight-volume The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems
Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental
Research Institute of Michigan and SPIE Press (1993).
After system optimization, subsystem design goals are established. Each
subsystem is then optimized to meet its goals. However, subsystem optimization
has led to popular rules-of-the-thumb and back-of-the envelope approximations.
These "rules” are not universally valid and must be considered in context with the
system design and application. For example, it is commonly stated that two
samples per detector-angular-subtense are required to maintain image fidelity. This
"rule” applies to those systems whose spatial response is limited by the detector’s
modulation transfer function (MTF). If the system is limited by the optical MTF,
this ’’rule” is inappropriate. But if used, it will increase hardware complexity and
cost.
Range performance is approached from a viewpoint of military tactical
thermal imaging systems. Two standard models are discussed in detail: the US
Army’s Static Performance Model (1975 model) and FLIR92. The results are
applied to visible systems where the minimum resolvable contrast (MRC) is
important. These models are the main analytic tools for deriving system
requirements and predicting performance for military systems. This book shows
the limitations of the current models and offers some methods to overcome the
limitations. It also provides some different MTFs that may be included as an
upgrade to the models.
The book is divided into five parts. The Introduction (Part 1) consists of
five chapters. Although Chapter 2, Principles of Operation, concentrates on the
evolution of thermal imaging systems it also applies to all electro-optical imaging
systems. Specifically, a staring array operating in the infrared region of the
spectrum is functionally the same as one operating in any other spectral band. The
radiometric equations apply to all electro-optical imaging systems.
While Part 2, System MTF, uses infrared imaging system terminology, it
applies to all linear systems. Depending upon the system design (with no
specification on spectral response), the analyst selects the appropriate MTFs for his
particular system.
Part 3, Image Quality, is nonspecific and applies to all electro-optical
imaging systems. Optimum sampling draws heavily upon military applications but
applies to any system used for target detection and recognition. It does not apply to
recognition of alphanumeric characters.
In Part 4, The Environment, the methodology to obtain the atmospheric
transmittance and MTF are extensions from data obtained in the visible region of
the spectrum. There are many references to the literature for other spectral band
analysis. Target signatures, as specified by a temperature differential, are unique to
the infrared imaging bands. For systems that are sensitive to radiation below 3 im,
signatures depend upon reflectivity differences.
Chapter 19 in Part 5, System Analysis, is based upon infrared imaging
system analysis. It is here that the Static Performance Model and FLIR92 are
presented. The three-dimensional noise model was developed to describe noise
processes in infrared imaging systems. This mathematical construct can be
extended to all electro-optical imaging systems. Target discrimination metrics
(Johnson Criteria) were originally developed for image intensifiers and have been
extended to infrared systems.
Electro-optical analysts or system analysts write computer codes, run the
performance models, and interpret the results. However, for success, the analysts
need the support of design engineers, test personnel, managers, and the customer.
All these people must understand the purpose and limitations of the models. In a
global sense, these individuals are part of the analy st team. This book is for the
entire team.
There are many other factors affecting design that cannot be easily
incorporated into any performance model and therefore are not covered in this
book. These include environmental issues, covertness, countermeasures, size,
weight, power consumption, cost, technology maturity, customer demand, and the
-ilities (maintainability, reliability, etc.).
This book does not include automatic target recognizers, target cuers, and
machine vision. Unfortunately, this becomes more difficult as nonlinear image
processing algorithms are incorporated into the systems. Indeed, today's systems
may be called a sensor with a built-in computer. Nonlinear models are beyond the
scope of this book.
The author extends his deepest gratitude to all his co-workers and
students who have contributed to the ideas in this book. They are too many to
mention by name. The author especially thanks all those who read draft copies of
the manuscript: John D'Agostino, US Army Night Vision and Electronic Sensors
Directorate; Herb Huey, Northrop; Howard Kennedy, Texas Instruments; Norman
Kopeika, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev; Harold Orlando, Northrop; Steven
Park, College of William and Mary; and Wendell Watkins, US Army Atmospheric
Sciences Laboratory. Don Davison provided the graphics.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION....................................................1
1.1. Imaging system nomenclature.................................3
1.2. System modeling.............................................5
1.3. Sensitivity and resolution limits...........................8
1.4. Infrared imaging systems...................................10
1.5. Infrared imaging system modeling...........................13
1.6. Model inputs...............................................14
1.7. References.................................................15
Exercises..................................................15
2. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM OPERATION..............................16
2.1. Optics.....................................................17
2.2. Scanners...................................................20
2.3. Detectors and coolers......................................24
2.3.1. Detector classification................................24
2.3.2. Specific detectors.....................................26
2.3.3. Detector operation.....................................27
2.4. Specific systems...........................................29
2.4.1. Line scanners..........................................29
2.4.2. Common module systems..................................30
2.4.3. EOMUX systems..........................................33
2.4.4. EMUX systems...........................................33
2.4.5. Second generation scanning systems.....................36
2.4.6. Staring array systems..................................36
2.5. System magnification.......................................37
2.6. References.................................................38
Exercises..................................................38
3. RADIOMETRY.....................................................40
3.1. Radiative transfer.........................................40
3.1.1. Planck's blackbody law.................................42
3.1.2. Extended source........................................44
3.1.3. Point source...........................................49
3.2. AT concept.................................................55
3.3. Photometry.................................................57
3.4. Normalization..............................................57
3.5. References.................................................60
Exercises..................................................61
4. MTF THEORY..........................................................62
4.1. MTF definition..................................................63
4.2. Linear filter theory............................................65
4.2.1. The EO system as a linear system...........................65
4.2.2. Cascading MTFs.............................................67
4.3. Superposition applied to optical systems........................68
4.4. Phase shifts....................................................71
4.5. References......................................................72
Exercises.......................................................72
5. SAMPLING THEORY.....................................................73
5.1. Sampling theory.................................................75
5.2. Aliasing........................................................75
5.3. Samplers........................................................77
5.3.1. The detector as a sampler..................................77
5.3.2. Spatial sampling...........................................80
5.3.3. A/D converter..............................................83
5.4. Microscan.......................................................84
5.5. Anti-aliasing filter............................................85
5.6. References......................................................86
Exercises.......................................................87
6. COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS...............................................88
6.1. Optics OTF......................................................89
6.1.1. Diffraction-limited OTF....................................90
6.1.2. Central obscuration........................................92
6.1.3. Aberrations................................................94
6.1.4. Defocused optics...........................................95
6.2. Detectors.......................................................97
6.3. Motion..........................................................98
6.3.1. Linear motion..............................................99
6.3.2. Sinusoidal motion.........................................102
6.3.3. Random motion (jitter)....................................104
6.3.4. Nonlinear scan mirror movement............................106
6.3.5. Low frequency motion......................................106
6.4. Electronic MTF.................................................106
6.4.1. Conversion: Electrical frequency to spatial frequency.....107
.6.4.2. Detector time constant...................................113
6.4.3. Amplifiers................................................113
6.4.4. Electrical filters........................................113
6.5. LEDs...........................................................116
6.6. Visual optics..................................................116
6.7. Eye response...................................................116
6.7.1. Conversion: Eye spatial frequency to spatial frequency....117
6.7.2. Eye MTF...................................................118
6.7.3. Noisy images..............................................123
6.8. System design example: Random motion effects..................124
6.9. Central limit theorem..........................................126
6.10. References....................................................127
Exercises......................................................128
7. EOMUX SYSTEMS......................................................130
7.1. Vidicon........................................................130
7.1.1. Conversion: Vidicon lines to spatial frequency............131
7.1.2. Vidicon MTF...............................................131
7.2. Video amplifiers and filters...................................132
7.2.1. Conversion: Video frequency to spatial frequency..........133
7.2.2. Boost circuitry...........................................133
7.2.3. Video amplifiers..........................................135
7.3. Monitors.......................................................135
7.4. System design example..........................................137
7.5. References.....................................................139
Exercises......................................................139
8. EMUX SYSTEMS.......................................................140
8.1. Motion.........................................................141
8.2. Detector.......................................................142
8.2.1. TDI.......................................................143
8.2.2. SPRITE detector...........................................145
8.2.3. Uncooled detectors........................................147
8.3. MTFs in the digital domain.....................................148
8.3.1. Conversion: Sampling frequency to spatial frequency.......149
8.3.2. Sample-scene phase........................................149
8.3.3. Digital filters...........................................150
8.3.4. Zoom......................................................156
8.4. Matching video subsystems to a sampled signal.158
8.4.1. Conversion: Video sampling frequency to spatial frequency..159
8.4.2. Sample-and-hold...........................................159
8.5. Post-reconstruction filter.....................................160
8.6. References.....................................................163
Exercises......................................................164
9. STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS...........................................165
9.1. Motion......................................................166
9.2. Detector Array..............................................166
9.3. Microscan...................................................168
9.4. References..................................................172
Exercises...................................................172
10. LINE SCANNERS..................................................173
10.1. Rectangular aperture.......................................177
10.1.1. Diffraction-limited MTF...............................177
10.1.2. Defocus OTF...........................................179
10.1.3. Ground coverage.......................................182
10.2. Scanner....................................................183
10.3. Motion.....................................................183
10.4. Electronic MTF.............................................183
10.5. AN/AAD-5 CRT MTF...........................................184
10.6. AN/AAD-5 film..............................................185
10.6.1. Conversion: Film response to spatial frequency........185
10.6.2. Film MTF..............................................185
10.7. References.................................................186
Exercises...................................................187
11. VERTICAL MTF...................................................188
11.1. Sampling Rate..............................................190
11.2. Interpolation..............................................194
11.3. References.................................................195
Exercises...................................................195
12. RESOLUTION.....................................................197
12.1. Analog metrics.............................................200
12.2. Sampled data systems.......................................203
12.3. System design based upon resolution........................206
12.4. Shade's equivalent resolution..............................209
12.5. References.................................................215
Exercises...................................................216
13. IMAGE QUALITY..................................................217
13.1. MTF........................................................218
13.2. Equivalent pass band.......................................220
13.3. Perceived signal-to-noise ratio............................220
13.4. Subjective quality factor..................................221
13.5. Square-root integral.......................................224
13.6. References.................................................225
14. SAMPLED-DATA SYSTEMS...........................................226
14.1. Samples per dwell..........................................228
14.2. Pixels on target...........................................231
14.3. Asymmetric sampling........................................236
14.4. Spurious response..........................................237
14.5. MTF squeeze................................................243
14.6. Aliased signal as noise....................................246
14.7. References.................................................246
Exercises....................................................247
15. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE......................................248
15.1. Atmospheric constituenl s..................................251
15.1.1. Water vapor............................................252
15.1.2. Aerosols...............................................255
15.2. Visibility.................................................258
15.2.1. Meteorological range...................................259
15.2.2. Contrast transmittance.................................261
15.3. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN...............................261
15.4. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance..............263
15.5. Weather conditions.........................................267
15.5.1. Average conditions.....................................267
15.5.2. Probability of occurrence..............................268
15.5.3. Navy model.............................................271
15.6. MWIR versus LWIR...........................................274
15.7. Signal-to-noise optimization...............................280
15.8. Sun glints.................................................283
15.9. Solar scattering...........................................285
15.10. Battlefield obscurants....................................286
15.11. References................................................287
Exercises....................................................288
16. ATMOSPHERIC MTF................................................289
16.1. Cn2........................................................290
16.2. Turbulence MTF.............................................293
16.3. Aerosol MTF................................................299
16.4. References.................................................300
Exercises....................................................302
17. TARGET SIGNATURES...................................................303
17.1. What is AT?....................................................304
17.2. Area-weighted AT...............................................306
17.3. Diurnal variations.............................................308
17.3.1. Solar heating..............................................308
17.3.2. AT cumulative probability..................................310
17.3.3. Environmental modifiers....................................311
17.4. Path radiance..................................................312
17.5. Sky background.................................................314
17.6. Active targets.................................................315
17.6.1. Fuel combustion............................................315
17.6.2. Frictional heat............................................315
17.7. Target signature modeling......................................315
17.8. Thermal structure metrics......................................317
17.9. References.....................................................317
Exercises........................................................319
18. SENSITIVITY and NOISE..............................................320
18.1. Scanning arrays (analog system)................................322
18.1.1. Noise equivalent bandwidth.................................322
18.1.2. Photon noise...............................................324
18.1.3. Johnson noise..............................................325
18.1.4. Amplifier noise............................................325
18.2. Staring arrays.................................................325
18.2.1. Photon noise...............................................326
18.2.2. Dark current...............................................326
18.2.3. Fixed pattern noise........................................327
18.2.4. Multiplexer noise..........................................328
18.3. Detector responsivity..........................................328
18.3.1. Classical semiconductors...................................329
18.3.2. Novel semiconductors.......................................330
18.3.3. Thermal detectors..........................................330
18.4. Specific detectivity...........................................331
18.4.1. BLIP.......................................................331
18.4.2. Johnson noise limited......................................333
18.4.3. D*BB to D*p conversion.....................................333
18.4.4. D*300......................................................3 3 4
18.5. Real systems...................................................335
18.6. System SNR.....................................................337
18.6.1 Scanning systems............................................337
18.6.2 . Staring systems..........................................338
18.7. NEDT.......................................................340
18.7.1. Scanning systems.......................................341
18.7.2. Staring systems........................................342
18.7.3. Background temperature.................................343
18.7.4. Boost..................................................344
18.7.5. Atmospheric transmittance..............................344
18.8. MWIR versus LWIR...........................................345
18.9. NEI........................................................346
18.10. Image reconstruction......................................348
18.10.1. Line-to-line interpolation............................349
18.10.2. Recursive and median filters..........................350
18.11. Sampling and aliasing.....................................351
18.12. References................................................352
Exercises...................................................354
19. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MODELS......................................355
19.1. Three-dimensional noise model..............................357
19.2. FLIR92.....................................................362
19.2.1. FLIR92 model...........................................364
19.2.2. SNRthandte.............................................368
19.2.3. Head movement..........................................370
19.2.4. 1975 NVL Model.........................................371
19.2.5. Scanning systems (default values)......................371
19.2.6. Staring systems (default values).......................372
19.2.7. Nonuniformity versus ow/uTVH...........................373
19.2.8. Two-dimensional MRT....................................374
19.3. NVTherm....................................................375
19.4. TRM3.......................................................377
19.5. STADIUM FLIR...............................................378
19.6. Minimum resolvable contrast................................380
19.7. General comments...........................................381
19.8. References.................................................383
Exercises...................................................384
20. TARGET DISCRIMINATION..........................................385
20.1. One-dimensional detection..................................386
20.1.1. Johnson criterion......................................386
20.1.2. Extended discrimination................................389
20.1.3. Target transfer probability function...................393
20.1.4. Clutter................................................397
20.1.5. Moderate aspect ratio targets..........................398
20.2. Two-dimensional discrimination...............................400
20.2.1. Pixels on target.........................................400
20.2.2. FLIR92 discrimination requirements.......................403
20.3. Hot spot detection...........................................406
20.4. References...................................................406
Exercises.....................................................408
21. RANGE PREDICTIONS................................................409
21.1. Range prediction methodology.................................411
21.1.1. Atmospheric transmittance................................411
21.1.2. ACQUIRE..................................................412
21.1.3. Range performance probability............................414
21.1.4. Sampling effects.........................................415
21.2. Two fields-of-view...........................................417
21.3. Resolution versus sensitivity................................418
21.4. Line-of-sight stabilization..................................421
21.5. Target size..................................................421
21.6. Electric zoom................................................423
21.7. STADIUM FLIR.................................................423
21.8. MWIR versus LWIR systems.....................................423
21.9. Real Targets.................................................424
21.10. Search.....................................................425
21.11. References.................................................427
Exercises.....................................................428
APPENDIX
f-number...........................................................429
Reference.....................................................430
INDEX
431
1
INTRODUCTION
Electro-optical imaging system analysis is a mathematical construct that
provides an optimum design through appropriate tradeoff analyses. A
comprehensive model includes the target, background, the properties of the
intervening atmosphere, the optical system, detector, electronics, display, and the
human interpretation of the displayed information (Figure 1-1). While any of
these components can be studied in detail separately, the electro-optical imaging
system cannot. Only complete end-to-end analysis (scene-to-observer
interpretation) permits system optimization.
Finding the optimum design is an iterative decision process. Every step in
the design process that has conflicting needs requires a tradeoff analysis. Many
performance parameters can only be increased at the expense of another. For
example, decreasing the resolution can increase sensitivity.
Figure 1-1. Generic sensor operation that applies to all electro-
optical imaging systems. The scanning mechanism will vary
according to the overall design and number of detectors.
Staring arrays do not have a scanner.
Effective modeling requires an orderly integration of diverse
technologies and languages associated with radiation physics, optics, solid state
sensors, electronic circuitry, human interpretation of displayed imagery (human
factors), computer models, and software that might be embedded in the system
Each field is complex and is a separate discipline. The system analyst must be
conversant in all these fields.
Eludson1 stated, System engineering is the discipline that offers an orderly
approach to the design of systems, and, in particular, to systems that are so
complex that no one individual can possibly understand all the pertinent details.
As the system complexity increases and technology advances, it is increasingly
necessary to succinctly define performance requirements for each subsystem to
insure that the overall system requirements are met. This is an ever-increasing
challenge to the system analyst.
System optimization starts with a conceptual design. Then the various
subsystems are designed. Each subsystem will behave slightly differently than the
original design due to hardware constraints (limited availability of components,
space limitations, power consumption constraints, etc.). The analyst must then
modify the model parameters to reflect the current design. As the system is built
up, real components will perform differently due to manufacturing tolerances.
Based upon actual components, the analyst can finalize his model parameters. It is
only now that the analyst can be assured that the predicted performance will match
measured values.
According to Shumaker and Wood,2 a model should answer four basic
questions:
1. What characteristics (specifications) must an electro-optical imaging system
have to do a given task?
2. What design parameters will enable a system to satisfy given specifications?
3. What laboratory performance values will verify that a design provides desired
characteristics?
4. Given an electro-optical imaging system design, how can it best be deployed
and what are the expected results?
There are many factors affecting design that cannot be easily
incorporated into any performance model. These include environmental issues,
covertness, countermeasures, size, weight, power consumption, cost, technology
maturity, customer demand, the -ilities (maintainability, reliability, etc.), and
support issues.
1.1. IMAGING SYSTEM NOMENCLATURE
Due to the atmospheric spectral transmittance, electronic imaging
system design is partitioned into seven generic spectral regions (Figure 1-2) of
which four are associated with thermal imaging systems. The ultraviolet (UV)
region ranges in wavelength from 0.2 to 0.4 pm. The visible spectral region
ranges in wavelength from 0.4 to 0.7 pm. Televisions, electronic still cameras,
and most solid state cameras* operate in this region. The near infrared imaging
spectral region (NIR) spans approximately 0.7 to 1.1 pm. Low light level
televisions (LLLTV), image intensifiers, star light scopes, and night vision
goggles operate in this region. For historical reasons, the UV, visible, and NIR
technologies have developed their own terminologies. The first infrared imaging
band is the short wavelength infrared imaging band (SWIR) which
approximately covers 1.1 to 2.5 pm. The second infrared band is the mid-
wavelength infrared (MWIR) spectral region that covers approximately 2.5 to
7.0 pm. (In older literature, the MWIR band was labeled as SWIR). The third
infrared band is the long wavelength infrared (LWIR) spectral band. It covers
the spectral region from approximately 7 to 15 pm. The fourth infrared band is
the far infrared (FIR) or very long wave infrared (VLWIR) region. It applies to
all systems whose spectral response extends past 15 pm. The MWIR and LWIR
regions are sometimes called the first and second thermal imaging bands.
Wavelength (pm)
Figure 1-2. Representative atmospheric transmittance over a
1-km path length. The transmittance varies with temperature,
relative humidity, and airborne particulates.
* Solid state cameras are popularly called CCD cameras because most contain
charge-coupled device detector arrays.
The word infrared has a different definition that depends upon the
technology. For example, film was invented to produce visible images. If the
film is sensitive to longer wavelengths, it is called infrared film. Infrared film is
sensitive out to about 0.85 pm. Imaging systems were also created to reproduce
visible images. If the spectral response was past 0.7 pm, it was called an infrared
device. Most of these systems used photosensitive detectors whose spectral
response went to about 1 pm. A variety of labels were attached to these devices.
This includes thermal imaging systems, and night vision devices.
Table 1-1 lists the wavelengths associated with specific systems. The
precise spectral response for any system depends upon the design. To say a
system is a LWIR system only means its response is somewhere in the LWIR
region. For example, a LWIR system may have a spectral response from 7.7 to
11 pm or 8 to 12 pm. The atmospheric carbon dioxide (CO2) absorption band
will completely attenuate all target information at 4.2 pm. As a result, a MWIR
system may have a spectral response from 3 to 4.2 or 4.3 to 5.5 pm.
Table 1-1
SPECTRAL NOMENCLATURE
(Continued next page)
Spectral band Wavelength range (pm)
Vacuum ultraviolet 0.05 to 0.20
Short ultraviolet (UV-C) 0.20 to 0.29
Mid-wave ultraviolet (UV-B) 0.29 to 0.32
Long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) 0.32 to 0.40
Visible 0.40 to 0.70
Violet 0.40 to 0.46
Blue 0.46 to 0.49
Green 0.49 to 0.55
Yellow 0.55 to 0.58
Orange 0.58 to 0.60
Red 0.60 to 0.70
Near infrared (NIR) 0.7 to 1.1
Short wavelength infrared (SWIR) 1.1 to 2.5
Mid-wavelength infrared (MWIR) 2.5 to 7.0
(Labeled as SWIR in older literature)
First thermal imaging band 3.0 to 5.5
Blue spike plume 4.1 to 4.3
Red spike plume 4.3 to 4.6
Long wavelength infrared (LWIR) 7.0 to 15.0
Second thermal imaging band 8 to 14
Table 1-1 (continued)
SPECTRAL NOMENCLATURE
Very long wavelength infrared (VLWIR) > 15.0
Extreme infrared 15 to 100
Near millimeter 100 to 1000
Millimeter 1000 to 10,000
1.2. SYSTEM MODELING
System modeling drives future design, system requirements and quality
assurance specifications (Figure 1-3). Connecting specifications to well understood
physical parameters makes the designer, manufacturer, and customer more
confident that the design objectives have been achieved.
Predictive modeling is a continuous process. The model is used to
optimize system design. As the systems are built with real hardware, new values
are used to refine range predictions. Simultaneously, modeling is used to help
select quality control specifications. Once a model is validated for a particular
design, it is used to develop the next design.
Figure 1-3. System modeling is a continuous process.
System modeling is the mathematical construct that includes system
characteristics, observer experience, scene content, atmospheric transmittance,
monitor settings and a variety of miscellaneous factors. These factors affect the
perceived image quality (Figure 1-4).
Figure 1-4. Image quality contributors. All these factors affect
the perceived quality.
Referring to a list of variables similar to that shown in Figure 1-4, Howe
stated,3 Although the list is by no means complete, it length underscores the
complexity of target acquisition. No single model... could possibly account for all
the factors listed; because of this, many models are specialized to a particular
handful of scenarios and system types. Frequently they incorporate simplifying
assumptions, and they are usually validatedfor only a small portion of the possible
mission or situations. Using a model to predict performance for scenarios where
the model is not validated or specialized can lead to very inaccurate predictions.
Models must be able to relate design parameters, laboratory
measureables, and operational performance. Three levels2 of models contribute to
satisfying these requirements:
ч
Component/phenomenology models
They include the system modulation transfer function (MTFsys),
atmospheric transmittance, target signature, and signal-to-noise ratio.
These models relate quantifiable design and environmental parameters to
higher level summary parameters.
System performance models
These models are built upon component-phenomenology models. They
characterize the total system performance for controlled tasks such as the
detection of a periodic bar pattern. They predict standard measures such
as the minimum resolvable temperature, minimum resolvable contrast,
and minimum detectable temperature.
Operational models
These models combine system models with other models to characterize
overall operational tasks. When operational models include target
signature models, they are used to calculate detection, recognition, and
identification ranges.
Each of the above models can be separated into three categories:
’’Standard” models
These are the models that are used most often by the modeling
community and are readily available.
Special application models
These are models that are unique to a specific application or a specific
design.
Nonlinear models
Nonlinear models cannot be described mathematically in closed-form.
They are used on a case-by-case basis.
Generic modeling equations apply to all imaging systems. Different
forms exist to accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies
(scanning versus staring, visible versus thermal imaging systems, etc.). Unless
told, the observer generally will not know the source characteristics or the sensor's
spectral band pass. Since his primary experience is visual (i.e., 0.4 to 0.7 pm), he
can only state if the image on the monitor resembles a visual scene.
In the 1950s, Shade4 predicted the resolution of photographic film and
television sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of all
models used today. In the 1970s, Resell and Willson extended Shade's work to
encompass thermal imaging systems and low light level televisions. Since then,
most modeling efforts have concentrated on infrared imaging systems.
Electro-optical system analysis is based upon the hypothesis that systems
are amenable to spatial and temporal frequency domain analyses. It further
assumes that noise interferes with perception in such as manner that the signal-to-
noise ratio is pertinent. Critical to the analysis is that vision can be modeled
sufficiently accurately so that useful performance predictions can be made.
The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is
SNRp
MTFsys EI x
system noise (eye spatial filter) (eye temporal filter)
(1-1)
where EI is the intensity difference between the target and its immediate
background, A is a proportionality constant that depends upon the aperture
diameter, focal length, and quantum efficiency, and MTFsysEI/(system noise) is
the signal-to-noise ratio at the detector output. The eye's incredible ability to filter
spatial and temporal noise increases the apparent SNR. A threshold value is
selected for SNRp.. This is where the target is just perceived. Then equation 1-1 is
inverted to determine the minimum detectable EI. For systems operating in the
visible or NIR, the minimum level is called the minimum resolvable contrast
(MRC). For systems operating in the MWIR and LWIR, the minimum value is the
minimum resolvable temperature (MRT) or minimum detectable temperature
(MDT).
1.3. SENSITIVITY and RESOLUTION LIMITS
An overwhelming majority of imaging quality discussions center on
spatial resolution or sensitivity. Resolution has been in use so long that it is
thought to be something fundamental that uniquely determines system
performance. It implies something about the smallest detail that can be perceived.
It may be specified by a variety of sometimes unrelated metrics such as the Airy
disk angular size, the detector angular subtense (DAS), or the Nyquist frequency
(specified by an angular sampling rate). Resolution does not include the effects of
system noise. Resolution considerations provide a back-of-the-envelope
approximation from which the target range can be estimated
» » target size
Range = R = —----------
resolution
(1-2)
Sensitivity deals with the smallest signal that can be detected. It is usually
taken as that signal that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity at the system
output. Sensitivity is dependent upon the light-gathering properties of the optical
system, the responsivity of the detector, and the noise of the system. It is
independent of resolution. Sensitivity limitations provide another back-of-the-
envelope approximation. The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is
SNR =
т M
i atm-ave
system noise
(1-3)
For infrared imaging systems, the target-background intensity difference is
specified by a differential temperature (AT). The system noise is taken as the noise
equivalent differential temperature (NEDT). This approximation only applies to
those targets whose angular subtense is large compared to the system's resolution
at the calculated range. The variable, Tatni_ave , is an average atmospheric attenuation
coefficient. The range predicted by Equation 1-3 can be quite different than that
given by Equation 1-2.
Overall system response depends on both sensitivity and resolution. As
shown in Figure 1-5, the MRT is bounded by sensitivity and resolution
considerations. Different systems (Figure 1-6) may have different MRTs. System
A has a better sensitivity. It has a lower MRT at low spatial frequencies. At mid-
range spatial frequencies, the systems are approximately equivalent and it can be
said they provide equivalent performance. System В has better resolution and can
display finer detail than System A. Figure 1-6 illustrates that neither sensitivity,
resolution nor any other single parameter can be used to compare systems.
Figure 1-5. MRT is bounded by the system's resolution and
the visual sensitivity limit.
Figure 1-6. Two systems with different MRTs. Whether
system A is better than В depends upon the specific
application.
1.4. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEMS
Infrared imaging is the remote sensing and display of infrared flux
variations. The variations in the displayed image intensity represent apparent
temperature variations across the scene. The detected radiation, which appears to
emanate from a target and its background, consists of self-emission, reflected
radiation, and atmospheric path radiance. To distinguish a target from its
background, the detected radiation must be different.
In 1969, Hudson6 listed over 100 separate applications for thermal
imaging systems. He divided the list into four major categories: military,
industrial, medical, and scientific. Each category was then subdivided into (1)
search, track, and range, (2) radiometry, (3) spectroradiometry, (4) thermal
imaging, (5) reflected flux, and (6) cooperative source. That list is surprisingly
complete.
In early 1970s, the U.S. Department of Defense suggested a modular
approach to thermal imaging system design. This resulted in "common module"
components that have influenced military design ever since. In 1976, the United
Kingdom and France also initiated the common module approach. All three
programs followed the same philosophy: Standardize the basic building blocks.
The parallel scan approach was adopted in the U.S. It used a linear array of 60,
120, or 180 HgCdTe detectors. The U.K. (Thermal Imaging Common Module or
TICM) and France (Systeme Modulaire Thermique) adopted a serial/parallel scan
system. The U.K. has since changed to SPRITE (signal processing in the element)
detectors. Most systems today are derivatives of military systems or at least have
components that were designed for military systems.
Today, two broad categories are in usage: military and commercial. Table
1-2 highlights a few applications in each category. Military and commercial
systems are similar in basic design; but each system is built for a specific purpose.
As a result, military and commercial systems tend to be described by different
performance parameters. Some generic differences are listed in Table 1-3. Imaging
systems have an observer as the image interpreter whereas hardware and/or
software assess machine vision imagery. An important subset of machine vision is
the infrared search and track type systems (IRST). These systems are designed to
detect point sources. The specific system design depends upon the application, the
atmospheric transmittance and availability of optics and detectors. This list is brief.
Detailed information on all phases of electro-optical systems can be found7 in the
eight-volume The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook.
Table 1-2
THERMAL IMAGING APPLICATIONS
COMMUNITY APPLICATIONS
MILITARY Reconnaissance Target acquisition Fire control Navigation
COMMERCIAL CIVIL Law enforcement Fire fighting Border patrol
ENVIRONMENTAL Earth resources Pollution control Energy conservation
INDUSTRIAL Maintenance Manufacturing Non-destructive testing
MEDICAL Mammography Soft tissue injury Arterial constriction
Table 1-3
TYPICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
DESIGN AREAS MILITARY COMMERCIAL
Vibration stabilized Required for very narrow fields-of-view Usually not required
Image processing algorithms Application specific (e.g., target detection or automatic target recognition) Menu-driven multiple options
Resolution High resolution (resolve targets at long distances) Typically not an issue since the image can magnified by moving closer
Image processing time Real time Real time not usually required
Target signature (sensitivity requirements) Usually just perceptible (low NEDT) Usually high contrast target (NEDT not necessarily a dominant design factor)
Key to the design of an electro-optical imaging system, is the overall
application. The design depends upon the mission and how the mission is to be
accomplished. Compare the requirements for pinpointing a target with that of
high-speed aircraft navigation. The military wants low noise with maximum
reliability. In the commercial world, low cost and ease of maintenance are
important: they are often willing to accept less performance. However, these
distinctions are getting blurred in today's environment. There is a desire for a
single imaging system to perform all functions. This may be possible as new
image processing algorithms are developed.
1.5. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM MODELING
The 1975 NVL model* was developed to predict8 the performance of
U.S. Army thermal imaging systems. It satisfied the Army’s need and it adequately
predicts the minimum resolvable temperature, MRT, at mid-range spatial
frequencies which corresponds to detecting modest sized targets at modest ranges.
The model was essentially one-dimensional and did not incorporate noise sources
other than random noise. To overcome these deficiencies, NVESD created FLIR90
that was subsequently updated9 to FLIR92.
FLIR92 predicts the performance of staring arrays up to the Nyquist
frequency. The Nyquist frequency limit created a ’’brick wall" in range
performance. NVTherm4 accounts for sampling effects beyond Nyquist frequency
by "squeezing" the system MTF.
Models are adequate for comparative analysis but may r£)t predict
absolute performance. If a model does not predict the situation, the following
questions must be asked. Are the underlying assumptions valid? Were the correct
equations used? Were some parameters left out that should have been included?
Were the correct values used (actual hardware values versus design values)? Are
the test results statistically sound? Was the test procedure appropriately controlled?
The biggest problem in modeling and performance predicting is
inadequate documentation. A model is composed of many approximations, each of
which has a limit. Although many models are said to be "validated," the region of
validation may be very restrictive. For example, the 1975 NVL model was
validated for modest-sized vehicles at modest ranges. As the result, this model is
excellent for range predictions for similar sized targets. It is pure extrapolation to
apply the model to the detection or recognition of people, highways, bridges,
aircraft, or aircraft hangars.
Mathematics and computer models have no bounds. Computers can
produce an output for nearly any input. The codes do not flash a message that says
"ERRORS MAY EXIST - READ DOCUMENTATION." The analyst must read
* Over the years, the U.S. Army's proponent agency for modeling and testing
infrared imaging systems has changed its name: Night Vision Laboratory (NVL),
Center for Night Vision and Electro Optics (CNVEO), Night Vision and Electro
Optical Laboratory (NVEOL), Night Vision and Electro Optical Directorate,
(NVEOD), and (as of this writing) Night Vision and Electronic Sensor Directorate
(NVESD). As a result, the Static Performance Model8 has been called by a variety
of names: the NVL model, Static Performance Model, Ratches (principal author)
model, CNVEO model, and NVEOL model. This book uses "1975 NVL model."
all the documentation to understand the limitations of the models so that he does
not extend the model past its region of validity.
1.6. MODEL INPUTS
Figure 1-7 lists the inputs required for infrared system modeling. The
MTFs tend to change as the system design changes and each generic system
design is listed in a different chapter.
Although many component descriptions and system level figures-of-
merit to be discussed are devoted to infrared imaging systems, the modeling
methods discussed are general and can be applied to most electro-optical imaging
systems with only minor modifications.
Figure 1-7. Many components are required for a complete
end-to-end analysis. The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 are
the main analytic tools for deriving thermal imaging system
requirements and predicting performance. Chapters 1 through
5 provide an introduction to modeling concepts. Chapters 12
through 14 discuss various aspects of image quality. The
information flows into the system performance model from
which target range can be predicted.
1.7. REFERENCES
1. R. D. Hudson Jr., Infrared System Engineering, pp. 10-11, John Wiley and Sons, New York (1969).
2. D. L. Shumaker and J T. Wood, ''Overview of Current IR Analysis Capabilities and Problem
Areas," in Infrared Systems and Components II, H. M. Li aw, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 890, pp. 74-
80 (1988).
3. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems
Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 60. This is Volume 4 of The Infrared and
Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Aibor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993).
4 . О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture
Systems," published in four parts in J SMPTE\ "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics,"
Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II. The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of
Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III. The
Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV: Image Analysis in
Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1955).
5. F. A. Resell and R. H. Willson, "Performance Synthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," Air Force
Avionics Laboratory Report AFAL-TR-72-229, Wright Patterson AFB, OH (1972).
6. R. D. Fludson Jr., Infrared System Engineering, Chapters 16 to 19, John Wiley and Sons. New York
(1969).
7. The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds.,
copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press,
Bellingham, WA (1993). This eight-volume set contains performance modeling and design methods
for many electro-optical systems.
8. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
9. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, User's Guide, NVESD document
UG5008993, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993).
10. R. G Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of
Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999).
EXERCISES
1. Explain why the observer's age, IQ, education, training, motivation, personality
and fatigue may affect subjective evaluation of image quality.
2. List three applications for an MWIR system. (Hint: Aircraft engines that are
approximately 800 К emit significant radiation in the MWIR region.)
3. List three applications for an LWIR system. (Hint: Most terrestrial objects that
are at 300 К emit significant radiation in the LWIR region.)
4. Figure 1-2 illustrates typical terrestrial atmospheric transmittance. On the other
hand, deep space has nearly unity transmittance at all wavelengths. A "star wars"
satellite has a detector system that has a spectral response of 4.2 to 4.3 pm. Why?
(Hint: Draw a picture depicting the earth, atmospheric layer and a missile.)
2
INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM
OPERATION
An electro-optical imaging system consists of many subsystems. Each of
which processes information differently. They may create artifacts or variations in
the processed image that were not present in the original scene. Figure 2-1
illustrates five major subsystems: optics and scanner, detector and detector
electronics, digitization, image reconstruction, and post reconstruction. The
specific design depends upon the number of detector elements and the required
output format. The optics images the radiation onto the detector(s). Scanners
optically move the detector’s instantaneous-field-of-view (IFOV) across the field-
of-view (FOV) to produce an output voltage proportional to the local scene
intensity. In a scanning system, the output of a single detector represents the scene
intensity across a line. With a staring array there is no scanner and adjoining
detector outputs provide scene variations.
Input
Electro-Optical Imaging System
Output
Figure 2-1. Generic electro-optical functional block diagram.
All systems have optics, detectors, detector electronics, and an
output. Staring arrays do not have a scanning mechanism. The
specific electronics design depends upon the detector
configuration and desired output.
The detector is the heart of every electro-optical system because it
converts scene radiation into a measurable electrical signal. Amplification and
signal processing creates an electronic image in which voltage differences
represent scene intensity differences due to the various objects in the field-of-view.
- Each detector will have its own amplifier. The amplifier outputs are
multiplexed together and then digitized. The number of channels multiplexed
together depends upon the specific design. Systems may have several multiplexers
and several A/D converters operating in parallel.
Figure 2-2. The optical system can be considered a single lens.
Pj and P2 are the principal planes. The effective focal length is
measured from the second principal plane. Although shown as
planes, the principal surfaces are typically spheres (see
Appendix).
CosineN0 shading is a geometrical phenomenon that reduces the intensity
reaching off-axis detectors. It depends upon the optical design and the physical
location of apertures and the detectors. With a single detector in a scanning system
(Figure 2-3 a), the detector is always on-axis and there is no cosineN0 shading. It is
the scanner that allows the detector to sense off-axis radiation. With a linear array
of detectors (Figure 2-3b), the cosineN0 variation is in the direction of linear array
(cross scan direction). Staring arrays exhibit radially symmetrical cosineN0 roll-off
as measured from the center of the field-of-view (Figure 2-3 c). Figure 2-4a
illustrates the signals from three different lines for the linear scanning array
depicted in Figure 2-3b. Figure 2-4b illustrates the signals for the staring array
shown in Figure 2-3c. Gain/level normalization minimizes this effect. Figure 2-4c
depicts the normalized signal as a function of line number for a system suffering
from extreme cosineN0 effects.
No CosineN0
(a)
(b)
Figure 2-3. CosineN0 Effect, (a) Single detector, (b) scanning
linear array consisting of 480><l, and (c) staring array
consisting of 480 x 480 detectors.
(c)
Signals are digitized because of the relative ease to manipulate digital
data. Current systems rely heavily upon software for gain/level normalization,
image enhancement, and line-to-line interpolation. To produce a linear input-to-
output system, a gamma correction algorithm removes the CRT-based nonlinear
response. The monitor may or may not be an integral part of the electro-optical
imaging system.
For convenience, targets are labeled as either hot or cold with respect to
the immediate background. For MWIR and LWIR systems, the term thermal is
misleading. Infrared imaging systems with photoconductive or photovoltaic
detectors do not sense warmth or cold (they are not thermometers) but sense the
radiation emitted by an object. All objects emit radiation in the thermal regions.
Hot refers to targets that appear warmer than its immediate background and cold
means the target appears cooler than its immediate background. The choice of hot
objects appearing white and cold objects appearing black is arbitrary. With
electronic polarity reversal available, either ’’white hot’’ or ’’black hot" targets can
be created. With "black hot," hot objects appear black or dark gray against a
neutral background. As the object becomes hotter, its representation on a monitor
becomes blacker. The reverse is true for "white hot." With "white hot," the target
becomes "whiter" as its apparent temperature increases relative to the background.
The output also can be mapped into pseudo-colors. Keeping with human feelings,
cold objects are often represented as blue and hot objects as red.
This chapter highlights the operation of the five major subsystems with
specific attention given to those subsystems that either add noise or modify image
fidelity. Image fidelity is specified by the modulation transfer function (MTF). For
thermal imaging systems, noise is incorporated in the noise equivalent differential
temperature (NEDT) and the three-dimensional noise model. Most systems
operating in the visible region of the spectrum have functional designs similar to
those operating in the infrared.
2.1. OPTICS
Most optical systems are composed of many individual lenses or mirrors.
Each element may have a different refractive index and shape to minimize the
aberrations. For analytic purposes, the optical subsystem is treated as a single
element with an effective focal length (Figure 2-2). The clear aperture is not
necessarily the diameter of an optical element. The clear aperture limits the
amount of scene radiation reaching the detector and is determined by optical
design.
Figure 2-4. CosineN0 effect. Line traces as a function of line
number for (a) a linear scanning array and (b) a staring array,
(c) The normalized output as a function of line number for a
linear scanning array. Gain/level normalization minimizes
cosineN0 and produces a cosmetically pleasing image.
It is well known that an off-axis image will have reduced incidance
compared to an on-axis image. In classical textbooks, the reduction is given as
cosine40. Real systems tend to have a less dramatic roll-off and the reduction is
cosineb0 where 2 <N <4. Whether an image is off-axis depends upon the optical
design. For a single detector system, the detector is always on-axis. It is the
scanner that moves the detector instantaneous-field-of-view around the system
field-of-view. For multi-element arrays, the optical design determines which
detectors are off-axis. Therefore, the cosineN0 factor can only be added on a case-
by-case basis.
Appropriately applied electronic amplification can compensate for the
cosineN0 shading. Here, high contrast images will appear cosmetically appropriate.
However, any amplification also will increase the noise so that the signal-to-noise
ratio remains constant. The NEDT is not affected by this electronic amplification.
2.2. SCANNERS
The function of the scanner is to dissect the image sequentially and
completely. That is, the scanner moves the detector IFOV around the system FOV
in a way that is consistent with the monitor requirements. A large variety of
scanning schemes is available. There is nothing inherently good or bad with any
particular scanning scheme: each has its own advantages and disadvantages. The
most common scanners are rotating drums, polygons, refractive prisms, and
oscillating mirrors. For this text, it will always be assumed that scanning is in the
horizontal direction.
With scanning systems, the detector output creates the image during the
active scan time and the detector output is ignored during the inactive scan time.
The inactive time provides the time necessary for the scanner to come into the
appropriate position for the next frame or scan line.
Detector characteristics may dictate the scan direction. Figure 2-5
illustrates a system with a single detector with unidirectional (raster) scan. SPRITE
(Signal processing m the element) detectors require an unidirectional scan. Figure
2-6 illustrates a linear array that uses bidirectional scanning (parallel scan). U.S.
common module systems employ bidirectional scanners.
Figure 2-5. Single detector scan pattern (serial scan)
employing unidirectional (raster) scanning.
Forward Scan Direction ►
Figure 2-6. Linear array employing bidirectional scan (parallel
scan) and 2:1 interlace.
Figure 2-7a illustrates a series of detectors whose outputs are summed together to
provide time-delay and integration (TDI). Systems with TDI usually require
unidirectional scan. Here, the scan velocity must be matched to the time delay in
the integrating element (Figure 2-7b). Scan linearity is important when using TDI
to avoid geometric distortion and MTF degradation. SPRITE detectors have an
inherent TDI and do not require the multiple delay circuits shown in Figure 2-7b.
The NEDT is inversely proportional to the detector dwell time. The dwell
time is the time it takes for a target edge to be swept across a detector element.
Single element systems will have the highest NEDT for a fixed frame rate. As
more detectors are added (Figure 2-6), the scan speed is reduced, the detector
dwell increases and the NEDT is lowered. Since each detector has a slightly
different responsivity, multiple element systems suffer from fixed pattern noise
that requires electronic correction. The inability to fully compensate produces
streaks in scanning arrays and residual fixed pattern noise in staring arrays.
With TDI, the noise is reduced by the square root of the number of TDI
detectors. A TDI arrangement has the additional advantage that if one detector
element fails, the remaining will still produce an output. With a parallel-scan
system (Figure 2-6), a defective element will produce a line with no information.
This leaves a space in the dissected scene.
-----Scan Direction
Signal
(b)
Figure 2-7. Multiple detectors operating in pure serial scan
mode, (a) Detector configuration and (b) TDI delay elements.
The noise is reduced by the square root of the number of TDI
elements.
Staring arrays, in principle, have the lowest NEDT since the dwell time
may be equal to a frame time. Staring arrays may not reach this theoretical limit
due to residual fixed pattern noise and multiplexer noise.
The scanning mechanism can be either inside or outside the optical
subsystem. When outside (Figure 2-8a), the mirror must be larger than the clear
aperture and provide a scan angle of ± 0scan/2. The mirror can be much smaller
when.inside the optical subsystem but then it must scan a larger angle of ±
Moptics0scan/2. Here, Moptics is the magnification of the afocal telescope (also called
the afocal power).
The relationship between the scan angle and FOV depends upon the
optical design. If the scanner is outside the optical system, the FOV. is 0scan + IFOV.
If the scanner is within the optical subsystem, the FOV may be 9scan + IFOV or tan
(9scan + IFOV). These designs are called f 9 (pronounced f theta) and f tan (9)
(pronounced f tan theta) respectively. For small angles they are equivalent: tan
(9scan +IFOV) »9scan +IFOV.
A full staring array (Figure 2-3 c) does not have a scanner. The field-of-
view depends upon the optical design. If the overall array size is darTay, the FOV
may be 2 tan-1(dan.ay/2 fl) or danay/tl. Again, for small angles, these are equivalent.
Figure 2-8. Location of the scanning mechanism, (a) Outside
the optical subsystem and (b) inside the optical subsystem.
Although shown as an astronomical telescope, it could be any
telescope (Cassegrainian, Galilean, etc.). The scanning
mechanism could be a rotating polygon, refractive prisms, or
(as shown here) an oscillating mirror.
2.3. DETECTORS and COOLERS
Current detector terminology lists detectors as cooled or uncooled. These
are only generic categories. Within each category, there are many different types
of detectors.
COOLED DETECTORS
LWIR photon detectors have to be cooled below 100K with 77K considered a
typical temperature. These temperatures can only be reached with a
mechanical cooler or with liquid nitrogen. Many MWIR detectors can operate
at 200 К and this temperature can be easily achieved with a thermoelectric
cooler (TEC). TECs appear to have an infinite lifetime whereas mechanical
coolers degrade over time. Coolers add cost, bulk, and consume power.
UNCOOLED DETECTORS
Thermal detectors can operate at room temperature and therefore are called
uncooled devices. Although called uncooled, these devices require a cooler to
stabilize the detector temperature. Usually a thermoelectric cooler is used.
Uncooled devices are lightweight, small in size, and easy to use. Because they
use very low power, they lend themselves to hand-held, battery-operated,
devices.
2.3.1. DETECTOR CLASSIFICATION
Detectors are classified as classical semiconductors, novel
semiconductors, and thermal detectors. Detector performance parameters and
therefore system performance parameters were developed for the classical
semiconductor and thermal detectors. More recently, novel semi-conductors such
as the Schottky barrier photodiode and quantum well have been introduced.
Classical theory is no longer appropriate and new measures of performance have
been developed.
There are many different types of infrared detectors. The following lists
the most popular types and some of their features.
CLASSICAL SEMICONDUCTORS
Photoconductive
The photoconductive detector requires a constant bias voltage. An absorbed
photon changes the bulk resistivity, which, in turn, changes the current. The
current change is monitored in an external circuit. Since current is
constantly flowing, the detector dissipates heat. As a result, very large
arrays are difficult to cool.
Photovoltaic
The photovoltaic detector is actually a p-n junction in a semiconductor. An
absorbed photon produces a voltage change that is sensed in an external
circuit. It does not dissipate heat and therefore can be built into very large
arrays. Since minimal current flows, it is relatively easy to couple the
detector to a low noise amplifier.
NOVEL SEMICONDUCTORS
Schottky barrier photodiode (SBD)
The SBD is a photoemissive device that produces a voltage. These detectors
are compatible with silicon fabrication technology. Therefore, it is relatively
easy to fabricate monolithic devices where the detector and readout are
fabricated at the same time. SBDs can be built into very large (5000 х 5000)
arrays.
Bandgap engineered photodetectors (quantum well)
The spectral response of quantum well detectors can be engineered (tuned)
to any wavelength. Unfortunately, it has a very narrow spectral response. Its
current limitation is that it requires significant cooling (below 60K).
THERMAL DETECTORS
Bolometer
As a bolometer absorbs heat, its resistance changes. It requires an external
bias. The change in current (due to the change in resistance) is monitored in
the external circuit. It somewhat difficult to dissipate the heat in large
arrays. Bolometers are usually optically chopped to improve sensitivity and
uniformity.
Pyroelectric
The pyroelectric detector can only sense a changing temperature. The
thermal changes alter the electrical polarization that appears as a voltage
difference. These AC devices create halos around high AT targets. These
systems typically have a chopper (to produce a changing scene) between
the lens system and detector. The chopper is synchronized with the frame
rate of the camera so that the displayed image appears uniform.
2.3.2. SPECIFIC DETECTORS
PHOTON DETECTORS
Silicide Schottky-barrier devices
The most popular is Pt: Si (platinum silicide) which is sensitive in the 1.0 to
5.5 pm region. It requires a filter to limit the spectral response (e.g., to
create a 3 to 5.5 pm system). Because of the low quantum efficiency, Pt:Si
has poor performance when the background temperature is less than 0°C.
Silicon technology is mature and very large arrays can be fabricated very
cheaply. The device is often cooled to 70K to reduce the dark current.
InSb (Indium antimonide)
InSb is a high quantum efficiency MWIR detector. It has generally replaced
Pt:Si in those systems using modest sized arrays (e.g., standard video
format with approximately 640x480 elements). It peak response is near 5
pm. A filter is used to limit the spectral response to the MWIR region.
HgCdTe (Mercury cadmium telluride)
Mercury cadmium telluride is also called merc-cad or MCT. Although
generally labeled as HgCdTe, it is a mixture (Hg^CdyTe). By varying the
ratio, the spectral response can be tailored to the MWIR or LWIR region.
The most popular is the LWIR detector with a peak response near 12 pm. A
filter is used to limit the response to the LWIR region. HgCdTe detectors
are used in all common module systems.
SPRITE (Signal processing in the element)
The SPRITE detector is a stretched HgCdTe filament that provides inherent
time-delay-and-integration (TDI). It was developed in United Kingdom and
has become the U.K. common module detector.
QWIP (Quantum well infrared photodetector)
The QWIP is based upon mature GaAs growth technology. The wells are
created by layers of GaAs/AlGaAs and the response can be tailored from 3
to 19 pm. The LWIR version typically has a spectral from 8.3 to 10 pm.
The responsivity and noise are temperature sensitive so that QWIP devices
are cooled to less than 60K.
THERMAL DETECTORS
As temperature sensors, thermal detectors can sense all wavelengths. Filters
are used to limit the spectral response. Thermal detectors generally have
much lower sensitivity (higher NEDT) than photon detectors. As a result,
they probably will not replace photon detectors in critical, low signal-to-
noise applications. A large variety of materials can be used as bolometer
and pyroelectric detectors.
2.3.3. DETECTOR OPERATION
The detector's electrical output is a temporal representation of target
spatial information. The detector electronics is matched to the detector
characteristics. For mathematical convenience, all noise sources are referred to the
detector output. Noise sources include photon noise, fixed pattern noise, 1/f noise,
detector internal noise, and amplifier or mux noise. The electronics may add
additional noise to the signal.
For many detectors, the specific detectivity, D* (pronounced dee-star), is
a figure-of-merit that combines the responsivity, R, with detector noise current, in\
R jAd kfe
D* = - ——
hi
(2-1)
where A/e is the noise equivalent bandwidth, R is the responsivity, and Ad is the
detector area. Since D is a measure of detector noise, it is incorporated in the
classical NEDT equation. As D* increases, the NEDT decreases. When the
dominant noise is due to the random arrival of photons, the system is said to be
background limited or operating in BLIP (background limited performance) mode.
Real detectors do not achieve this theoretical maximum but have a Z>*
that is a function of operating temperature (Figure 2-9) and detector bias. The
detector temperature depends upon the cooling capacity of the cooler, the ambient
temperature, and the heat load induced by the electronics near the detector.
DETECTOR TEMPERATURE (K)
Figure 2-9. Typical U.S. common module HgCdTe detector
temperature characteristics. Most detectors sensitive to LWIR
radiation are optimized to operate at liquid nitrogen
temperature (77 K).
If the optical FOV is less than the detector FOV (equivalently, the optical
f-number is greater than the cold shield f-number), the detector can sense radiation
from the housing. Since most systems amplify the difference between the target
and background, the veiling glare is not seen on the monitor. However, the glare
introduces photon noise and this increases the NEDT. For staring arrays, the
veiling glare partially fills the charge wells and this limits the available scene
dynamic range.
Each detector/amplifier combination will have a different gain and level
offset (Figure 2-10) and these variations produce fixed pattern noise (FPN). For a
linear array of elements (Figure 2-3b), each line may have a different gain and
offset. This produces FPN in the vertical direction only and will appear as
horizontal streaks. For staring arrays (Figure 2-3c), each detector will have a
different response resulting in a two-dimensional FPN. Electronic gain/level
normalization removes FPN. Incomplete removal results in residual FPN noise.
Single element systems (Figure 2-5) and pure serial systems (Figure 2-7) do not
have FPN.
Figure 2-10. Responsivity for three differences detectors (Db
D2, and D3). (a) Exaggerated nonlinear responsivities and (b)
detector outputs for three different input intensities.
Responsivity variation cause fixed pattern noise.
Figure 2-1 la illustrates a full focal plane array (no scanner) where the
detectors are contiguous. In many arrays, the detectors do not completely fill the
cell area (Figure 2-1 lb). The ratio of active detector element area to the cell area is
the fill factor. If a small object is imaged onto one of these dead areas between the
detectors, there will be no output. As the small object moves, its image will move
on and off the active detector element resulting in a twinkling of the object. As the
detector area decreases, the amount of radiation decreases so that the NEDT
increases. Thus, as the fill factor decreases the NEDT increases. High fill factors
increase the ability to detect point sources.
Full Focal Plane Array
(a)
Fill Factor = —-—
ACell
Low Fill Factor Focal Plane Array
(b)
Figure 2-11. Fill Factor definition, (a) 100% fill factor and (b)
finite fill factor.
2.4. SPECIFIC SYSTEMS
For many years, civilian systems were derivatives of the militarized
systems. However, military systems are usually designed for maximum sensitivity
(very low noise). For many civilian applications, usually there is a strong signal
(large temperature difference) so that low noise is not a major design concern.
Cost, weight, ease of use, and power consumption now drive civilian system
design.
Militarized systems evolved in the following chronological order:
2.4.1. LINE SCANNERS
A line scanner requires platform motion to create a two-dimensional
image. Typically used for reconnaissance, it relies on aircraft or spacecraft motion
to provide the cross-scan dimension. Airborne reconnaissance systems typically
provide wide-angle imagery. The imagery can be obtained either with pushbroom
systems or line-scanners. Since large linear arrays are easily fabricated from
silicon, visible imagery is often obtained with a pushbroom design. Infrared
technology limits the number of detectors that can be placed in an array and
therefore infrared imagery is usually obtained from line-scanners (Figure 2-12).
The very early infrared systems were downward looking line scanners.
When designed to look out the front of an aircraft, they were called forward-
looking infrared (FLIR) systems. The acronym FLIR is used generically to denote
an infrared imaging system.
Electronics
Figure 2-12. Representative line-scanner functional block diagram.
2.4.2. COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS
Figure 2-13 illustrates a diagram of the early common module system.
The detector converts the infrared spatial information into time-varying voltages.
The voltages drive light emitting diodes (LEDs) to create a visible image. By using
the back face of the scanning mirror for the visible image, the visible image is
always synchronized with the infrared image. They were called common modules
because the scanner, detector, pre-amplifiers, post-amplifiers, and light emitting
diodes (LEDs) were manufactured to common specifications. The term now
loosely refers to any LWIR system with bi-directional scan. These systems are
still in existence and lend themselves to small, lightweight man-portable
applications.
Based upon blackbody curves, terrestrial objects emit more radiation in
the LWIR region compared to the MWIR region. Further, for a fixed target-
background temperature difference, the radiance difference (as specified by the
thermal derivative) is about 10 times larger in the LWIR region than the MWIR
region. These facts prompted the design of LWIR common modules rather than
MWIR systems.
The designer's only options were changing the optics to achieve the
desired field-of-view, adding electronic filtering to maximize the signal-to-noise,
and modifying the visual optics to present an appropriate image to the observer.
The pre-amplifier is a low-noise fixed-gain amplifier whereas the post-amplifier
had a variable gain. Each post-amplifier was individually adjusted to compensate
for different detector responsivities and pre-amplifiers gains. Nearly all U.S.
systems today evolved from the common module design.
server
Figure 2-13. Representative common module block diagram.
Example 2-1
EQUIVALENT OPTICAL DESIGN
Design the smallest practical astronomical telescope for a "0.1 mil"
thermal imaging system using U.S. common module elements.
A "0.1 mil" FLIR has a detector-angular-subtense (DAS) of 0.1 mrad.
The common module reimager focal length is 2.67 inches with a f-number of 1.7.
The original common module detector size was 0.002" x 0.002" and is sensitive in
the 8 to 12 pm spectral region. Figure 2-14a provides a stylized optical layout.
As a design starting point, the Airy disk diameter is matched to the
detector size. Equivalently, the Airy disk angular subtense is matched to the DAS:
0 = DAS = 2A4—. (2-2)
D
Using an average wavelength of 10 gm the required clear aperture is Z> = 244 mm
= 9.6 inches. Assuming a f9 design, the detector subtends 0reimager = d/flreimaser =
0.002/2.67 = 0.75 mrad. Since the required system resolution is 0.1 mrad, the
afocal power must be Muptics = 0.75/0.1 =7.5. With an afocal telescope,
^=^ = ^^ = 7.5. (2-3)
For maximum throughput, the afocal telescope and reimager should have
the same f-number. The f-number is F~fl/D. Then
and flo = F D = 1.7 x 9.6 = 16.32 inches (2-4) fl„ = ——— = 16’32 = 2.18 inches . (2-5) Moptics 7.5
The afocal length is flo+fle= 18.5 inches. The equivalent focal length is flreitnagelM=
20 inches. Figure 2-14b illustrates the equivalent design and the detector subtends
d 0.002 _ t
DAS =----------------------------=--------= 0.1 mrad . (2-6)
equivalent focal length 20
(b) Equivalent Design
Figure 2-14. Optical layout, (a) A afocal telescope and (b) the
equivalent single-lens design. Although only three lenses are
shown, the system consists of many elements.
2.4.3. EOMUX SYSTEMS
The common module system permitted only one observer to view the
imagery. To provide multiple observers access, the LED output is scanned by a
vidicon. The vidicon converted parallel scanned infrared information into a serial
data stream consistent with the monitor requirements. As such, the vidicon
provided scan conversion. To offset any degradation in MTF, a boost amplifier
can be added in the video chain. The electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX)
system added the vidicon, boost, and monitor (Figure 2-15).
Figure 2-15. Representative EOMUX functional block diagram.
2.4.4. EMUX SYSTEMS
The EOMUX system employed LEDs and a vidicon to produce a data
stream consistent with the monitor requirements. This function can be performed
by a digital scan converter (DSC) to create an electronically multiplexed (EMUX)
system (Figure 2-16). Most scanning systems today are EMUX systems.
Gain/level normalization, image processing, and line-to-line interpolation are
typically performed digitally. The conversion from an analog signal to digital data
‘ introduces unique nonlinear effects. Quantization introduces an additional noise
factor whose value depends upon the relative magnitude of the least significant bit
(LSB).
Figure 2-16. Representative EMUX functional block diagram.
For scanning array systems with more than one detector in the vertical
direction, the output of every detector is collected nearly simultaneously at discrete
locations. That is, the scene is digitally sampled in columns as the detectors move
horizontally, In memory, the vertical data is read out horizontally in a format
consistent with monitor requirements. This conversion from a vertical input to
horizontal output is called digital scan conversion and the hardware is called the
scan converter.
In a digitally scan converted system, two different timings exist. The
detector electronics is matched to the scanning parameters in time and active scan
time. The digital data is placed in a digital memory and read out at a rate that is
consistent with monitor line rates.
Image processing algorithms can be used to enhance images, suppress
noise and provide boost. Boost increases the signal amplitude at specific spatial
frequencies but it does not necessarily affect the signal-to-noise ratio. For systems
that are not noise limited, boost may improve image quality. However, for noisy
images, the advantages of boost are less obvious.
Systems with detector arrays or scanning patterns that are not consistent
with analog video formats require image formatting. Monochrome video formats
may either be the U.S. standard1 RS 170 that displays 485 TV lines or may be the
European CCIR standard that displays 577 lines. Generally, infrared imaging
systems manufactured in the U.S. provide 480 active lines with five blank lines to
be consistent with RS 170. An LWIR common module system, which creates
infrared 360 lines, requires vertical interpolation. The interpolator increases the
line rate and may change the video sample rate to provide the number of TV lines
required by the monitor. Interpolation can be achieved by the duplication of lines
or may be a more complex algorithm. The interpolator can dramatically affect
vertical resolution and therefore can greatly affect the ability to resolve vertical
detail.
It is desirable to have a linear system such that if the signal intensity
doubles, then the monitor luminance doubles. However, CRT-based monitors tend
to be nonlinear in terms of output luminance versus input voltage. The slope of this
relationship on a logarithmic scale is the monitor gamma (Figure 2-17). To
provide a linear relationship, the inverse gamma is inserted as an image processing
algorithm (gamma correction). Here, there is no longer a linear relationship
between the analog output video voltage and the input signal intensity. This
nonlinear relationship affects all data collected from the analog video signal and
becomes a measurement problem.2 If a gamma correction algorithm is present,
linearity is only assured when viewing a CRT-based monitor. Flat panel displays
are linear (equivalently, gamma is unity) and therefore no gamma correction is
required.
The D/А converter provides an output that typically has a stair step
appearance. Each step occurs at each digital sample. The post-reconstruction filter
smoothes the data and removes the stair step. Its output is the analog video.
Figure 2-17. Definition of CRT-based monitor gamma.
2.4.5. SECOND GENERATION SCANNING SYSTEMS
The common module system was called a first generation system. In the
late 1980s, it appeared that LWIR scanning systems could be replaced with staring
arrays. At that time staring arrays were called second generation systems.
However, detector technology did not advance as quickly as anticipated so that a
serial/parallel scan mechanism was used - so called second generation scanning
systems. These systems contain arrays that consist of 480*4 TDI detector
elements. These systems tend to use staggered arrays (Figure 2-18).
The 480 elements are consistent with U.S. monitor requirements. Other
detectors available include 288*4 TDI. With interlace, these detectors provide 576
IR lines to be consistent with European formats.
Figure 2-18. Staggered array 480*4 TDI elements. The
staggered configuration increases the sampling frequency in
the vertical direction.
480
2.4.6. STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS
Figure 2-19 illustrates a typical staring array. It does not have a scanner.
Each detector output is digitized by the detector mux. While amplifiers and filters
exist in the mux, they do not process the signal in the same manner as a scanning
system.
Figure 2-19. Representative staring array functional block diagram.
Every detector/amplifier combination will have a different gain
(responsivity) and offset. These variations result in fixed pattern noise or spatial
noise. If large deviations in responsivity exist, the image may be unrecognizable.
As a result, systems employing more than one detector may require gain/level
normalization or nonuniformity correction (NUC) to produce an acceptable image.
Although most literature discusses NUC for staring systems, it applies to scanning
systems that have more than one detector in the cross scan direction (Figure 2-3b).
For good imagery, the individual detector outputs are normalized (made equal) for
several discrete input intensities. These normalization intensities are also called
calibration points, temperature references, or simply points.
Figure 2-10a illustrated the responsivity of three different detectors
before gain/level normalization. The outputs for input intensities Ib I2, and I3 were
shown in Figure 2-10b. Figure 2-20 illustrates the normalized output after
correction at two points. If all the detectors had linear responsivities, then all the
curves would coincide. As individual detectors deviate from linearity, the
responsivity differences become more noticeable.3 It is this variation in
responsivity that creates the residual fixed pattern noise after gain/level correction.
Figure 2-20. Responsivity curves after 2-point correction.
Responsivity deviations from linearity produce residual fixed
pattern noise.
2.5. SYSTEM MAGNIFICATION
There are two different magnifications present. One is the optical
telescope magnification that determines how large the image will be on the
detector plane. The other relates to the magnification seen by the observer. System
magnification is simply the ratio of the horizontal FOV subtended by the observer
and the system horizontal FOV.
M sys
FO Vobserver
FOVsys
(2-7)
The observer's field-of-view changes with the distance from the monitor. Since the
observer can move arbitrarily close to the display,
FO Fobserver
= 2 tan 1
2R,
(2-8)
where R is the distance to the display and W is the width of the display.
2.6. REFERENCES
1. "Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome TV," EIA Standard RS-170, Electronic Industry
Association, NY, NY.
2. G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pp. 57-60, JCD
Publishing, Winter Park, FL (1998).
3. N. Bluzer, "Sensitivity Limitations of IRFPAs Imposed by Detector Nonuniformities," in Infrared
Detectors and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp. 64-75 (1988).
EXERCISES
1. Referring to Figure 2-9, what D value would you use for the NEDT
calculation? When would you use another value? (Hint: consider ambient
temperature of an air-conditioned laboratory and operation in the desert).
2. An electro-optical imaging system has an FOV of 5ox5o. The user sits 36 inches
from a 14-inch (measured diagonally) display. If the observer moves 2 inches
toward the display, what is the system magnification change? Is system
magnification a useful parameter?
3. What is the smallest astronomical telescope needed for a 0.2 mil thermal
imaging system? A common module reimager is available (/7= 2.67" and F= 1.7).
The detector width is 0.0016 and the system is sensitive in the 8 to 12 pm region.
4. Using the values in Exercise 3, design a telescope for a system operating in the 3
to 5 pm region. Compare the answer to that obtained in Exercise 3. How would the
design change if the system operated in the visible region of the spectrum?
5. Plot the output MTF versus input MTF for a monitor with у = 0.7, у = 1, у = 1.4,
and у = 2. The MTF is (Vntax-Vnйп)/(Vnuif-Vnjif). Let the minimum and maximum
voltages be modified by Voui= VinY.
6. Contrast is C = (Z/ZB)-1 where LT is the target luminance and LB is the
background luminance. Assume that the video output, V, is proportional to the
input luminance and that the monitor has a gamma such that the monitor
luminance is Z = К F7. Derive the relation between the input contrast and output
contrast.
7. Figure 2-20 illustrated residual FPN as a function of input intensity with 2-point
correction. Sketch the output for 1-point, 3-point and 5-point correction.
8. Figure 2-4b illustrated how the signal level decreases according to cosineN0 for
a staring array. The responsivity can be made equal for all the detectors by
increasing the gain of each detector the appropriate amount. What effect would
this have on noise measurements?
9. Describe a scenario in which cosineNG correction is appropriate (Hint: during
low gain operation, the noise is below perceptibility).
3
RADIOMETRY
Radiometry describes the energy or power transfer from a source to a
detector. When the source size is much larger than the projected area of the
detector, the source is said to be resolved or the system is viewing an extended
source. Equivalently, the detector is flood-illuminated. The noise equivalent
temperature differential and minimum resolvable temperature apply to a system
viewing an extended source. As the source size becomes smaller, diffraction limits
the image size. The ratio of the actual response to the ideal response is the target
size function (TSF). As the source size approaches a point, the target size function
approaches a constant value called the point visibility factor, ensquared power
value, or optical shape factor.
The flux emanating from the source is attenuated by the intervening
atmosphere, focussed on to the detector by the optical system and then converted
into a measurable electrical signal by the detector. Planck's blackbody radiation
law describes the source's spectral radiant exitance. For scanning systems, the
power is usually specified in watts whereas for staring systems it is convenient to
use photons per second.
The sun, moon, or starlight illuminates scenes in the visible. Targets are
detected when reflectivity differences exist. The spectral radiant exitances are
typically integrated over the eye's spectral responsivity and photometric units are
used (e.g., lumens).
Although most thermal imaging systems respond to radiant flux
differences, it is convenient to specify the radiant flux difference between a target
and its immediate background by an equivalent temperature difference, AT.
Using average values of the various transmittances simplifies analyses.
However with broad spectral response systems, the average transmittance depends
on the source's spectral radiant exitance, the atmospheric and optical spectral
transmittance, and the detector spectral response.
3.1. RADIATIVE TRANSFER
Radiant sterance, Le, is the basic quantity from which all other
radiometric quantities can be derived (e.g., radiant exitance, radiant flux, or radiant
Radiometry 41
intensity). It contains both the areal and solid angle concept1 that is necessary to
calculate the radiant flux incident onto a system. It is the amount of radiant flux,
дФ, radiated into a cone of incremental solid angle dil from a source whose
incremental area is dAs (Figure 3-1):
Э2Ф w
dAsdCl m2 -sr
(3-1)
Similarly, Lq is the photon sterance in units of photons/(s-m2-sr). The quantities Le
and Lq are invariant for an optical system that has no absorption or reflections.
That is, Le and Lq remains constant as the radiation transverses through the optical
system.
For Lambertian sources, the spectral radiant exitance is related to the
spectral sterance by:
Ме (Л, Т) = лЬе{А, T) —-- (3-2)
m -pm
and the spectral photon exitance is
r photons
Mqi^T) - • (3“3)
s-m -pm
Figure 3-1. Radiant sterance.
42 Electro-optical imaging system performance
3.1.1. PLANCK’S BLACKBODY LAW
The spectral radiant exitance of an ideal blackbody source whose
absolute temperature is T, can be described by Planck's blackbody radiation law:
меа,г>=^-
1
(с2МЛ
(3-4)
where the first radiation constant is q = 3.74 1 8x108 watt-pm4/m2 and the second
radiation constant is c2 = 14388 pm-K. Figure 3-2 illustrates Planck's spectral
radiant exitance in logarithmic coordinates. Since a photo detector responds
linearly to the available power, linear coordinates may provide an easier
representation to interpret (Figure 3-3).
1E+08 т 4000 К
z
Q
S
s
О
111
CL
U)
1E+07
1E+06
1E+05
1E+04
1E+03
1E+02
1E+01
1E+00
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 3-2. Planck's spectral radiant exitance plotted in
logarithmic coordinates for T = 300, 400, ... , 4000 K. The
units are w/(m2-pm).
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 3-3. Planck's spectral radiant exitance plotted in linear
coordinates. The units are w/(m2-pm).
The spectral photon exitance is simply the spectral radiant exitance
divided by the energy of one photon (hdXy.
<3'5>
where the third radiation constant is c3 = 1.88365xlO27 photons-pm3/s-m2, Planck's
constant is h = 6.626х IO’34 J-s, and the speed of light is c=3x108 m/s. Figures 3-4
and 3-5 provide the spectral photon exitance in logarithmic and linear coordinates
respectively.
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 3-4. Planck's spectral photon exitance for T =300, 400,
... ,4000 K. The units are photons/(s-m2-pm).
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 3-5. Planck's spectral photon plotted in linear
coordinates. The units are photons/(s-m -pm).
When radiation is incident on an object, some of it is transmitted, some
absorbed, and some is reflected. Energy conservation requires that
^transmitted ^absorbed ^reflected Ф incident • (3-6)
Expressed as a ratio,
т(Л) + а(Л) + р(Л) = 1, (3-7)
where т(Л), а(Л), and р(Л) are the transmittance, absorptance, and reflectance
respectively. The emissivity, reflectivity, and absorptZvzTy can be calculated from
Maxwell's equations and represent the values for an ideal material. Real materials
deviate from the ideal properties and have emittance, reflectance, and absorptance.
Real blackbodies do not emit all the radiation described by Equation 3-4
but only emit a fraction of it. The ratio of actual radiant sterance to the theoretical
maximum, МВВ(Л,Т) is the emittance
,n_ MacluralO,O £{Л 1 — , мвво,т) (3-8)
By Kirchkoff s law, when an object is in thermal equilibrium with its environment,
absorptance is equal to emittance:
а(Л) = £ (Л). (3-9)
This leads to the popular saying "Good absorbers are good emitters." For ideal
blackbodies, e(2) = 1.
3.1.2. EXTENDED SOURCE
If an imaging system is at a distance Rr from a source (Figure 3-6), the
radiant flux incident onto the optical system of area Ao is
д Ф — т £_ д т lens -у s*sL atm * Ri (3-10)
where the small angle approximation was used and Tntm is the intervening
atmospheric transmittance. The on-axis radiant flux reaching the image plane is:
Radiometry 45
An
ф. - J ____9- л T . т
image e 2 5 optics * atm ">
^2
(3-11)
where xop6cs is the system's optical transmittance. By definition, the image of an
extended source is larger than the detector area (At-» Af/). That is, the detector is
flood illuminated.
Infrared Imaging
System Entrance
Aperture Area, д
Image of
Source
Area Aj
\ Detector
Figure 3-6. An imaging system directly viewing a source.
The radiant flux incident onto the detector is simply the ratio of the areas
detector
= ф .
image
(3-12)
Using the small angle approximation for paraxial rays
^s _
(3-13)
The radiant flux becomes
Ф detector
____________^e^o^d________________________________
,/Z2(l+4/npfa)2
optics ? atm
(3-14)
The optical magnification is Mop,ics=R2IRr Here, Rt and R2 are related to the focal
length,/?, by
1 1 1
+ R2 ~ fl '
(3-15)
Assuming a circular aperture and defining the f-number as F=fl/D (see Appendix)
detector
Л LeAd
4 F2(l + M„ptics)1
r . T
optics л atm ">
(3-16)
The voltage produced by a detector is proportional to the detector's
responsivity, Rd by
^d ^d detector
(3-17)
The system output, Vsys is simply Vd multiplied by the system gain, G. Since all of
the variables are a function of wavelength and the source spectral radiant sterance
depends on temperature
^2 Л ГЯ 1
Vsys = G |\, (Я) - g( ’ - ?optics (Я)^ (Я)<U. (3-18)
2 0 * Moptics)
Off-axis responses may be reduced by cosineN0
What is of interest is the signal difference produced by a source (target) at
temperature Tr and its immediate background at temperature TB
\Vsys = G (Я)E(Л’T WTatm(Я)</Я.(3-19)
2 4F1(1 + Mpptics)1
If the source and background are ideal blackbodies with unity emittance, then
л2
A^=G рг„(Я)
Л)Д („0)
4F2 (1 + M optics)2
When 7?!» R2 or equivalently when M—> 0,
= G рг,(Я) 1Д/еО>Гг) .(3-21)
When the wavelength is less than 3 im, targets are differentiated by
reflectance differences. Here, both the target and the background are assumed to
be illuminated by the same source (sun, moon, nightglow, or starlight)
Л г/ _ r f n / ; x [pr(^) PbW]Le(A,Tul)Ad
^^sys G I vO 2 ✓-« яж \2 opUcs^y^atm (3-22)
J 4Г2(1 + М0/,и„)2
The source radiant sterance is used since the illuminating source may not be an
ideal blackbody.2 The variables p7(2)and PbW are the spectral reflectances of the
target and background, respectively. If Planck’s blackbody law cannot describe the
source's spectral exitance, then the actual spectral radiance sterance must be used
in the appropriate radiometric equations. This is especially true for starlight and
nightglow conditions.2
The T-number is sometimes useful for evaluating different optical
designs. It is the f-number divided by the square root of the optical transmittance:
(3-23)
Then the extended source radiometric equation (Equation 3-21) becomes
ЛГ -r fff (n[^eO,Tr)-MeO,rB)l4d
△ *sys I d 1 atm (Л)аЛ . (3 -24)
I
System output does not infer anything about the source other than that of
an equivalent blackbody of a certain temperature would provide the same output.
This is true no matter what output units are used (volts, amps or any other arbitrary
unit). These units, by themselves, are not very meaningful for system-to-system
comparison. For example, can be increased by increasing the system gain G.
As such, it is dangerous to compare system response based upon only a few
numbers.
Example 3-1
\Vsys for a LWIR IMAGING SYSTEM
What is the expected output voltage difference for a US common module
system? The system is viewing an extended 3I0-K target against a 300-K
background in a collimator. The collimator optically places the target at infinity so
that Equation 3-21 is appropriate. Assume the HgCdTe detector has a peak
responsivity of 20,000 v/w, = 1, Toptics(f) = 0.70 (all independent of
wavelength), F= 3 and G= 10,000. Common module detectors are band limited
from 8 to 12 pm. Outside this region the response is zero. The detector element is
square with each side equal to 0.002 inches (5.08 x I0'3 cm) so that the detector
area is Ad = 2.58 x 10'9 m2. For convenience, the target and its background are
considered ideal blackbodies. Assume that the system focal length is 18 inches.
The responsivity of most photoconductors follows
W ~ ~ Rpeak •
peak
(3-25)
Then the output voltage difference for an on-axis detector is:
т AH 2
A Vsvs = G [-----\me (2,310) - Me (2,300)]</2. (3-26)
4F2 J 2 k
О
This can be approximated by
12 Л
LVsys = O.Ol^------Л/Д2,Д7’)Д2, (3-27)
8 Apeak
where - Mff,300). Using Simpson's rule, the integral is
evaluated numerically at the center of each increment. For example, when АЛ = 1,
the interval [8 pm, 9 pm], is evaluated at 8.5 pm (Table 3-1).
Table 3-1
AV CALCULATION
________________
Wavelength Qum) Z/ Xp Mc(X,310) Mc(X,300) X/kp-Mc(X, AT)
8.5 0.708 36.0 30.0 4.25
9.5 0.792 36.8 31.2 4.44
10.5 0.875 35.7 30.8 4.29
11.5 0.958 33.5 29.2 4.12
sum =17.1
Then &Vsys = (0.01)(17.1) = 171 mv. The wavelength interval, Az = 1 gm, was
selected for illustrative purposes only. For numerical integration, at least 20
intervals should be chosen.
Historical note: The early common module detectors were 0.002 inches by 0.002
inches. The size has changed to 0.0016 x 0.0024 inches. Since the array is still
linear and contains 180 elements, it is still called a common module detector.
3.1.3. POINT SOURCE
As the source area approaches zero, the source becomes an ideal point
source. Geometric optics predicts that the image size also will approach zero.
However, diffraction and aberrations will limit the minimum image size. The
differential system output, AVsys, depends on the relative size of the blur diameter
to the detector size. If the source solid angular subtense (A JR2) is much less than
the detector solid angular subtense (AJR22), the source is considered a point
source.
If the blur diameter is much less than the detector size,
ф . . t = ф .
detector image
(3-28)
The detector will sense radiant flux from the point source and the radiant flux from
the immediate background within the DAS. In Figure 3-7, Adas is the projected
area of the detector angular subtense m object space. The radiant flux is
proportional to
Ф detector = V, 77 )AS + Le(Л, TB ){Adas - As )] . (3-29)
Figure 3-7. Small target inside the projected area of a DAS.
The detector senses radiation from the target and the back-
ground.
The radiant flux difference between this detector and an adjoining detector
location is
ДФ = к {\be (Л, TT )As + Le (Л, TB )(Adas - As )] - Le (Л, TB )Adas } (3-30)
or
△Ф = к \Le a,TT)~Le (Л, Tb)]as .
By definition,
Adas
R\
Aq
Ri
(3-32)
and assuming a circular aperture and ideal blackbodies with unity emittance
/^2
=G (ДДЯ) ЦА f торас!!(Л)Та,т(Л)(1Л , (3-33)
i bF\l + Moptiay Adas
where LJf, AT) = -LffTfy Figure 3-8 illustrates the ideal (geometric)
image area as a function of source area and where Equations 3-19 and 3-33 are
applicable. The slope of the line is the ratio AJAdas. When As = Adas the two
equations are identical.
Source Area A s
Figure 3-8. Geometric relationship between source and image
areas. When As - Adas, Equations 3-19 and 3-33 are identical.
Diffraction and aberrations will limit the smallest image size that can be
achieved. Figure 3-9 illustrates three cases: (a) the geometric approach where there
is no diffraction, (b) when the blur diameter is less than the diameter of a detector,
and (c) when the blur is larger than a detector. Figure 3-10 illustrates the
relationships depicted in Figure 3-9. Curve A is the ideal case and is identical with
Figure 3-8. Curve В illustrates a system where the diffraction blur area is smaller
than the detector area. This case is equivalent to Figure 3-9b and Equations 3-19
and 3-33 are applicable as shown in Figure 3-8. For curve C, diffraction produces
a blur diameter that is larger than the detector. Here, Equation 3-19 is only valid
when curve C asymptotes to the geometric curve.
When diffraction is important, Equation 3-33 must be modified by the
aperiodic transfer function, ATF:
A Vsys =G $RdW A TF Wdx (3_34)
2 (1 + Moptics )
Equation 3-34 combines Equation 3-19 and 3-33. When the source is resolved,
ATF~ 1 and Equation 3-19 is obtained. When Ai<A(b Equation 3-33 is obtained.
Figure 3-11 illustrates the ideal and system ATFs and the applicable regions for
the equations. The ATF is the input-to-output transformation versus As
normalized to unity. Calculation of the system ATF is beyond the scope of this
book. However, the limiting case, where the image size becomes independent of
As, is of interest for this is the case when the system is viewing a point source.
Figure 3-9. Various image sizes, (a) No diffraction, (b) blur
diameter less than detector size, and (c) blur diameter greater
than detector size.
Source Area As
Figure 3-10. Relationship between image size and source size
for cases (a), (b) and (c) given in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-11. Aperiodic transfer function. Equation 3-34
asymptotes to Equation 3-19 for extended sources and to
Equation 3-33 for point sources.
The aperiodic transfer function depends on target size. For most range
predictions, the source is either considered a point source (IRST applications) or
resolved (general imagery). For point sources, the ATF is the point visibility factor
and for resolved sources, the ATF is one. The change from a point source to a
resolved source is gradual and depends upon range. Poropat3 predicted range
performance over these intermediate values.
The target size function (TSF) is
ATFSVS
TSF =-------= A TFtm
A TF y
‘ ideal
lDAS
when As < Adas (3-35)
and
TSF = A TF^ when As> ADAS .
(3-36)
Substitution yields
/1*2
A Vsys= G U TSF roptics{X)Talm (Я)dA. (3-37)
J 4F\1 + Moplicsy Adas
As As becomes smaller, the TSF approaches a constant (the point visibility factor
or PVF). The PVF is also called the blur efficiency, ensquared power,4 and optical
shape factor.5 As As approaches zero, it is appropriate to represent Le(A,AT)As by
the source radiant intensity /е(2,Л7) = /е(2,Тг) -IffTf). Point sources are assumed
to exist at a long distance from the imaging system so that M—> 0. Then
Л г/ — f J? < I PFV fQAT
AJ/yys ~ Fr I Rtf (/I) .2 a optics atm ' (3-38)
r 4F Adas
Substituting Equation 3-32 into Equation 3-38 provides the more familiar form of
the point source equation:
Д Vvs = G Гядл) PFV Topacs WTaan (Л)ал. (3.39)
, Ry
The maximum value of the PVF occurs when the image is centered on a
detector. As the image moves off-center, the PVF decreases and reaches a
minimum when the image center is exactly between detectors. While this phasing
effect is present in all systems, it is most noticeable in staring arrays. The PVF
refers only to the relationship between the detector size and the blur diameter. The
measured signal may be further modified in width and amplitude by electronic
MTFs.
The point visibility factor is omitted in some point source derivations.
This is appropriate if the detector size is small compared to the image size (PVF =
1). Phasing effects can significantly affect the PVF. However, the PVF can only be
calculated on a case-by-case basis since it depends upon the optical blur diameter,
detector size and the detector-to-detector spacing.
Example 3-2
POINT SOURCE
The system described in Example 3-1 is viewing a small target (As = 2x 10 9 m2)
in a collimator with flcol=60 inches. The point visibility factor is 0.65. What is the
expected output?
The projected detector area in a collimator focal plane is
flioi
DAS ~
fl
^d
(3-40)
Using Equation 3-38 and A/e(2,A7>4s=Ze(2,A7),
дк (—ме(л,лт) ал (3-41)
4^ Adas £ Ap
which is approximated by
ЛИ
sys
G ^icJ^Rp^k у (A, дПдя
4F
Л5РРГ
^DAS
(3-42)
From Example 3-1, the first bracket is 171 mv and the second bracket is 0.045.
Then AUSJS = 171 x (0.05) =8.6 mv. The output is significantly smaller than that
obtained for an extended source of the same temperature.
3.2. AT CONCEPT
It is convenient to express the small radiant exitance difference between a
target and its background by the temperature difference between the target and its
background. That is, it is desirable to express Af y,5 as a function ofJT and call the
proportionality constant the signal transfer function (SiTF). The SiTF is a
laboratory measure that does not include the atmospheric transmittance \Tatm(X) =
1]. For extended sources,
AK5J5 = SiTF AT.
(3-43)
This approach assumes that the target and background are ideal blackbodies with
unity emittance. The difference between two values can be expressed as a Taylor
series expansion
Ме(Л,Тв+ЛГ)-Ме(Л,Тв) =
(3-44)
аме(я,рв)
dT
ЛТ +
а2ме(я,тв)
дТ2
ДГ2
2
For small values of AT, the first term is used and then the radiant exitance
difference is proportional to the partial derivative of Planck's law with respect to
temperature ("thermal derivative")
where
дМе(Л,Тв)
дТ
дМе(Л,Тв)
дТ
= Ме(Л,Тв)
ЛТ\еС11хт -V)
(3-45)
(3-46)
The SiTF is
SiTF — G optics •
J dT 4Fl
Z1
(3-47)
The thermal derivative is a function of wavelength and the background
temperature (Figure 3-12). As a result, all performance predictions that use AT as
an input will be affected by the background temperature and system spectral
response. The AT concept is a matter of convenience. Infrared imaging systems
that have photo detectors do not measure temperature but respond to radiance
differences. While the AT concept may be useful for thermometers, it does not
uniquely specify system performance unless both the system spectral response and
the background temperatures are specified.
Figure 3-12. Thermal derivative of Planck's blackbody
radiation law for three different background temperatures. The
units are w/(m2-pm-K)
The 3 to 5 pm region is more sensitive to background changes than the 8
to 12 gm region. Since the MRT and NEDT are inversely proportional to the SiTF,
the MRT6'8 and NEDT increase as the ambient temperature decreases. The linear
approximation given by Equation 3-43 is only valid for small excursions about the
background temperature. Departures from linearity are apparent when AT> 10°C
in the LWIR and AT> 5° C in the MWIR. The nonlinearity can be avoided if all
calculations and measurements used watts or photons rather than AT. Since the AT
concept depends upon the system’s spectral response, different LWIR systems
(e.g., 7.5 to 11.5 pm and 8 to 12 pm) will produce different responsivity curves
when plotted as a function of AT. Nevertheless, AT has become an industry-wide
standard and the nonlinearity exists in all input-to-output transformations (e.g.,
SiTF, NEDT, MRT, and MDT).
3.3. PHOTOMETRY
Photometry describes the radiative transfer from a source to a detector
where the units of radiation have been normalized to the spectral sensitivity of the
eye. It applies to all systems that are sensitive to visible radiation (0.4 to 0.7 pm).
The luminous flux emitted by a source is
0.72
F = 683 eO,T)As dX lumens, (3-48)
0.38
where F(2) is the eye’s photopic responsivity9 normalized to unity at 0.555 pm.
Numerous photometric units exist (cgs, mks, and English).10
Photometric calculations may be carried out exactly as radiometric
calculations using the appropriate equations provided in this chapter.
3.4. NORMALIZATION
"Normalization .... is the process of reducing measurement results as
nearly as possible to a common scale.’’11 Normalization is essential to insure that
appropriate comparisons are made. Figure 3-13 illustrates the relationship between
the spectral response of a system to two different sources. The output of a system
depends upon the spectral features of the input and the spectral response of the
imaging system.
WAVELENGTH
Figure 3-13. Sources with different spectral outputs can produce
different system outputs. T2 provides more radiant flux than
The system output will be higher when viewing T2.
Variations in output can also occur if ’’identical” systems have different
spectral responses (Figure 3-14). Spectral mismatch is a major contributor to fixed
pattern noise in focal plane arrays when each detector has a different spectral
response.12 Equation 3-21 is integrated over the interval [2 b 2 2] for System 1 and
over the interval [23, 24] for System 2. Because of the spectral mismatch, Ф
bVsy*.* For example, an infrared imaging system whose spectral response is 8 to 12
pm may have a different responsivity than a system that operates 7.5 to 11.5 pm
although both systems are labeled as LWIR systems. Systems can be made to
appear as equivalent or one can be made to provide better performance by simply
selecting an appropriate source or atmospheric condition.
Figure 3-14. Different spectral response systems can produce
different outputs when viewing the same source.
It is sometimes useful to discuss average responsivity or average
transmittance. The term average represents the mean value of a function. If/(x) is
weighted by another function g(x), the average of/(x) over interval [a,b] is
ave
b
a
(3-49)
b
a
Using this methodology, the average optical transmittance becomes
^2
(3-50)
A
Similar equations exist for the average atmospheric transmittance. Equation 3-50
indicates that the average response depends on the source's spectral characteristics
(e.g., the source temperature) and its relationship to the detector spectral
responsivity.
The extended source radiometric equation becomes
Д1/ =Gt
r sys w L optics-ave
JRd (Я) Me (Л’ АГ)А-а ТаОя (Л) dA. (3-51)
J 4F2(1 + Mopdcs)2
In general, it not permissible to "pull out” each variable as an average value. This
back-of-the-envelope approximation is only valid if the parameters are
independent of wavelength over the spectral region of interest. As AX becomes
smaller, the approximation becomes more accurate and is correct for very narrow
band systems such as laser systems:
лг ~ г в Ме(Л,ЛТ)Аа т
^'sys optics-ave ^d-ave .r2z1 м \2 1 atm-ave '
(1 AZ Optics )
Example 3-3
AVERAGE OPTICAL TRANSMITTANCE
What is the average optical transmittance of a lens system for the LWIR
system described in Example 3-1? The optical spectral transmittance, Toptics(X), is
given in Table 3-2.
The average optical transmittance, Toptical.ave, is approximated by
^2
L Toptics (Л)Ме АЛ
t . = .h______________________________ {
optics-ave '
^«rf(A)Me(2,AT)AA
Я1
In Table 3-2, Simpson's rule is used to numerically evaluate the integral at the
center of each interval (Ai =1). The values for Me(f ЛТ) are given in Table 3-1.
Table 3-2
Toptical_ave OBTAINED by NUMERICAL INTEGRATION
X AMC ^optics O'") R„0.) МАЛТ) t011UcA)
8.5 0.708 60 0.8 33.98 42.48
9.5 0.792 56 0.8 35.48 44.35
10.5 0.875 49 0.7 30.01 42.87
11.5 0.958 43 0.6 24.71 41.19
sum = 124.2 sum = 170.9
The average transmittance is 124.2/170.9 = 0.727. The average transmittance could
be substantially different if the blackbody source had a different absolute
temperature. As with the previous examples, zfi= 1 im was chosen for illustrative
purposes. Smaller increments should be selected when performing the calculation.
3.5. REFERENCES
1. C. L. Wyatt, Radiometric System Design, Chapter 3, Macmillan Publishing Co. New York, NY
(1987).
2. D. Kiyskowski and G. H. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed., pp.
151-209. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and
D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
3. G. V. Poropat, "Effect of System Point Spread Function, Apparent Size, and Detector Instantaneous
Field of View on Infrared Image Contrast of Small Objects," Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(10), pp.
2598-2607 (1993).
4. L. M. Beyer, S. H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Circular Pupils with Off-center
Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991).
5. J. M. Lloyd, "Fundamentals of Electro-Optical Imaging System Analysis," in Electro-Optical
Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 18 This is Volume 4 of The Infrared
and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993).
6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers, "Applications of
Infrared Sensing Devices to the Assessment of Building Fleat Loss Characteristics," ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 101-1981, ASHRAE, Atlanta, GA (1983).
7. Y. M. Chang and R. A. Grot, "Performances Measurements of Infrared Imaging Systems used to
Assess Thermal Anomalies," in Thermal Imaging, I. R. Abel, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 636, pp. 17-
30 (1986).
8. G. В McIntosh and A. F. Filippone, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference (MRTD)
Testing: Equipment Specifications for Building Performance Diagnostics," in Thermosense IV, R. A.
Grot and J. Wood, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 313, pp. 102-111 (1981).
9. The photopic response curve can be found in many textbooks. See, for example, W. J. Smith,
Modern Optical Engineering, second edition, pp. 222-227, McGraw-Hill, New York (1990)
10. G. C. Holst, CCD Arrays, Cameras, and Displays, second edition, pp. 23-27, JCD Publishing,
Winter Park FL (1998).
11. F. E. Nicodemus, "Normalization in Radiometry," Applied Optics, Vol. 12(12), pp. 2960-2973
(1973).
12. N. Bluzer, "Sensitivity Limitations of IRFPAs Imposed by Detector Nonuniformities," in Infrared
Detectors and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp. 64-75 (1988).
EXERCISES
1. Using the approach in Example 3-1, calculate AE,lv for a source temperature of
100°C above an ambient background of 27° C. The SiTF is AF^/AT. Discuss the
difference in this calculated SiTF compared to the values given in Example 3-1.
2. For the system described in Example 3-1, calculate the SiTF for a target
temperature of 280 К on a 270-K background.
3. Using the approach in Example 3-1, calculate AEVJ4. for an MWIR system whose
spectral response is from 3 to 5 pm for a 320-K target against a 300-K
background. Assume 1^^ = 30,000 v/w, ro/,ftcv = 0.8, F=4, 6’ = 20,000, Ad=4 x 10 s
cm2, and fl= 10 inches. What is the SiTF?
4. Calculate Toptics_ave using the data given in Example 3-2 but assume the target
temperature is 800 K. Compare the answer with that obtained in Example 3-3.
5. The system described in Example 3-1 will be used as a spectroradiometer. It will
have band pass filters that are 1 pm wide centered at 8.5, 9.5, 10.5 and 11.5 pm.
Assume the noise voltage is 100 pv. What is the SNR for each band if the target is
at 310 K? What is the SNR for a target that is 800 К against a 300-K background?
Assume that each filter has a transmittance of 75%.
6. Depending upon the definition (see Appendix) either 1/(4F2+ 1) or 1/4F2 may be
used in the radiometric equations. Plot both factors as a function of the f-number.
4
MTF THEORY
The optical transfer function (OTF) plays a key role in the theoretical
evaluation and optimization of an optical system. The modulation transfer function
(MTF) is the magnitude and the phase transfer function (PTF) is the phase of the
complex-valued OTF. When an ideal system is viewing incoherent illumination,
the OTF is real-valued and positive so that the OTF and MTF are equal. When
focus errors or aberrations are present, the OTF may become complex valued.
Electronic circuitry also can be described by an MTF and PTF. The combination
of the optical MTF and the electronic MTF creates the electro-optical imaging
system MTF. The MTF is the primary parameter used for system design, analysis
and specifications.
When coupled with the three-dimensional noise parameters, the MTF and
PTF uniquely define system performance. The MTF and PTF are measures of how
the system responds to spatial frequencies. They do not contain any signal
intensity information.
The system MTF and PTF alter the image as it passes through the
circuitry. For linear-phase-shift systems, the PTF is of no special interest since it
only indicates a spatial or temporal shift with respect to an arbitrarily selected
origin. An image where the MTF is drastically altered is still recognizable whereas
large nonlinearities in the PTF can destroy recognizability. Modest PTF
nonlinearity may not be noticed visually except those applications where target
geometric properties must be preserved (i.e., mapping or photogrammetry).
Generally, PTF nonlinearity increases as the spatial frequency increases. Since the
MTF is small at high spatial frequencies, the nonlinear-phase-shift effect is
diminished.
Four conditions must be met to use MTF theory: (1) the radiation is
incoherent, (2) the signal processing is linear, (3) the image is spatially invariant,
and (4) the system mapping is single-valued (non-noisy and not digitized). These
last three conditions are violated by most electro-optical imaging systems. The
optical system will be spatially variant if its impulse response varies from the
center to the edge of the field-of-view due to aberrations. Each detector is noisy
and this violates the one-to-one mapping requirement. The analog electronics may
be noisy and nonlinear image processing may also be present.
MTF analysis is not strictly applicable to electro-optical imaging systems.
Electronic shaping may cause MTFs greater than unity and this causes
normalization (defmition) problems. Scanning systems typically have a low
frequency cutoff to reduce 1/f noise. With these systems, the MTF at zero spatial
frequency is zero. This also causes normalization problems. Finally the system has
frames of data and the image is not continuous in time. But this can be neglected.
MTF does not include dynamic (time-variant) phenomena.
A linear system merely modifies the amplitude and phase of the target.
No new frequencies are generated in the process. Sampling can create new
frequencies. The detector array samples the scene in the vertical direction.
Depending upon the design, scanning devices may sample in the horizontal
direction. Staring devices sample the scene in both directions. These effects are
discussed in Chapter 5, Sampling Theory.
In spite of these disclaimers, electro-optical systems are treated as quasi-
linear over a restricted operating region to take advantage of the wealth of
mathematical tools available to analyze linear systems. For modeling purposes,
electro-optical systems are characterized as linear spatial-temporal systems that are
shift-invariant with respect to both time and two spatial dimensions. Although
space is three-dimensional, an imaging system displays only two dimensions.
4.1. MTF DEFINITION
Modulation is the variation of a sinusoidal signal about its average value
(Figure 4-1). It can be considered as the AC amplitude divided by the DC level.
The modulation is
MODULATION = M = = —
5max + Bmin DC
(4-D
where Bmax and Binin are the maximum and minimum signal levels respectively.
The modulation transfer function is the output modulation produced by the system
divided by the input modulation at that frequency:
MTF ~ OUTPUT MODULATION
INPUT MODULATION
(4-2)
The concept is presented in Figure 4-2. Three input and output signals are plotted
in Figures 4-2a and 4-2b and the resultant MTF is shown in Figure 4-2c. As a
ratio, the MTF is a relative measure whose values range from zero to one.
Intensity
Figure 4-1. Definition of Target Modulation. The variable d is
the extent of one cycle. For optical systems, d is measured in
angular space and the spatial frequency is fx = Md. For
electronic circuitry, d is measured in time and the electrical
frequency isfHz = Md.
Input (Object) Output (Image)
Figure 4-2. Modulation transfer function, (a) Input signal for
three different spatial frequencies, (b) output for the three
frequencies, and (c) MTF is the ratio of output-to-input
modulation.
4.2. LINEAR FILTER THEORY
Linear filter theory was developed for electronic circuitry and has been
extended to optical, electro-optical, and mechanical systems. Linear filter theory
forms an indispensable part of system analysis.
Let 5{ } be a linear operator that maps one function, f(x), into another
function, g(x):
s{f(x)}=g(x). (4-3)
Let the response to two inputs,/^) and f2(x), be gr(x) and g2(x):
s{fi(x)} = gi(x) and s{f2(x)}=g2(x). (4-4)
For a linear system, the response to a sum of inputs is equal to the sum of
responses for each input acting separately. For any arbitrary scale factors, the
superposition principle states
S{alfl(x) + a2f2(x)} = aigl(x') + a2g2(x). (4-5)
4.2.1. THE EO SYSTEM as a LINEAR SYSTEM
An object can be thought of as the sum of an infinite array of impulses
(Dirac delta functions) located inside the target boundaries. Thus, the object can be
decomposed into a series of weighted Dirac delta functions, д(х-хо), д(у-уоУ
co co
Tj Т1О(Х°,У°№Х~Х°^У~У°^°&У°' <4’6)
*<,-«> Л-°°
As Axy and byo decrease in magnitude, Equation 4-6 becomes an integral. Figure
4-3 illustrates one-dimensional decomposition. Similarly, an electronic waveform
in time can be decomposed into a series of weighted Dirac delta functions.
Using the superposition principle, A{ } operates on each individual input.
The individual outputs are added to produce the image (Figure 4-4).
Mathematically,
co co
Figure 4-3. An electronic waveform or object can be
decomposed into a series of closely spaced impulses whose
amplitude is equal to the waveform at that value.
Figure 4-4. The linear operator, 5{ }, transforms each input
Dirac delta into an output point spread function. The sum of
all the point spread functions creates the image.
The object O(xo,yo) can be considered the weightings, afo in Equation 4-5.
That is, the input has been separated into a series of functions affx) + af2(x) +...
For small increments, this becomes the convolution integral
co co
/h>>’)= \ jo(x0,y0)S{3(x-x0)3(y-y0)}dx0dy0 (4-8)
— CO—CO
and is symbolically represented by
where * indicates the convolution operator. 5{ } is the system's response to an
input impulse. The impulse creates the point spread function for the optical
systems and impulse response for the electronic circuitry.
If the image is passed through another linear system, the superposition
principle is applied again:
(4-10)
or
Z(x, у} = O(x, y) * (x, y) * S2 (x, y). (4-11)
4.2.2. CASCADING MTFs
Time and spatial coordinates are treated separately. For example, optical
elements do not generally change with time and therefore are characterized only
by spatial coordinates. Similarly, electronic circuitry exhibits only temporal
responses. The detector provides the interface between the spatial and temporal
components and its response depends on both temporal and spatial quantities. The
conversion of two-dimensional optical information to a one-dimensional electrical
response assumes a linear photo-detection process. Implicit in the detector MTF is
the conversion from input flux to output voltage.
Time filters are different from spatial filters in two ways. Time filters are
single-sided in time and must satisfy the causality requirement that no change in
the output may occur before the application of an input. Optical filters are double-
sided in space. Electrical signals may be either positive or negative whereas optical
intensities are always positive. As a result, optical designers and circuit designers
use different terminology.
Symbolically, the optics and detector spatial responses are given by
OTFspatial(fx,fy)=MTFspatial(fx,fy) eJPTF^’O. (4-12)
Analog electronic circuitry operates on a serial stream of data (assumed to be in
the horizontal direction:
H elee (fxe) = MTFdec (fxe)e jPTF^>. (4-13)
With imaging processing algorithms (including line-to-line interpolation), the
circuitry can affect the vertical MTF:
H elec (.fye ) = MTFetec (fye ) e iPTF^ .
(4-14)
If multiple components exist in either the spatial or electronic domains, the
individual MTFs can be multiplied together. Equivalently, multiple convolutions
in space or time is equivalent to multiplications (or cascading) in the frequency
domain. Note that while individual lens elements have a unique MTF, the MTF of
the lens system is not usually the product of the individual lens-element MTFs.
This occurs because one lens may minimize the aberrations created by another
(i.e., the lenses are not decoupled).
With appropriate scaling, the electrical frequency can be converted into
spatial frequency. This is symbolically represented by fxe -+fx and fye fy. The
combination of spatial and electronic responses is some-times called the system
OTF. For independent (decoupled) subsystems, the system MTF is
MTF Sys (Jx * f у )
MTFsfaaal (fx, fy ) MTFelec (Jxe -> fx )MTFelec (fye -> fy )
(4-15)
and the system PTF is
PTFsys(.fx^fy) = e ^IPTF(f‘+PTF(S~-'F>+PTF(f„-yf11)]_
(4-16)
4.3. SUPERPOSITION APPLIED to OPTICAL SYSTEMS
If the MTF of a system is known, one can compute the image for any
arbitrary object. First, the object is dissected into its constituent spatial frequencies
(i.e., the Fourier transform of the object is obtained). Next, each of these
frequencies is multiplied by the system MTF at that frequency. Then the inverse
Fourier transform provides the image.
To illustrate the superposition principle and MTF approach, we will show
how an ideal optical system modifies an image. An ideal optical system is, by
definition, a linear-phase-shift system. The most popular test target consists of a
series of bars - typically three or four bars although more may be used. For
illustrative purposes, the periodic bars are assumed to be of infinite extent. A one-
dimensional square wave, when expanded into a Fourier series about the origin,
contains only odd harmonics:
1 .
—sin
n
2ЯПХ
where n = 1, 3, 5..., (4-17)
о
and Xo is the period of the square wave. The fundamental frequency fo is \!XO.
Taking the Fourier transform of the square wave provides discrete spatial
frequencies 1/XO, 3/Xo, 5/Xo, ... whose amplitudes are 4/л, 4/3tt, 4/5tt, ... ,
respectively.
Let a circular optical system image the square wave. The OTF for a
circular, clear aperture, diffraction-limited lens is
OTF<liffOx> = — cos
, (4-18)
when/^. < foco and foco, is the optical cutoff Since this optical OTF is always
positive, it is popularly called the MTF.
By superposition, the optical MTF and square wave amplitudes are
multiplied together at each spatial frequency
ЛЛ ) = MTFdiff (fx ) O(fx ). (4-19)
Taking the inverse Fourier transform provides the resultant image. Equivalently,
I(x) = MTFdiff(fo)
—sin(2^x f0)
71
(4-20)
MTFlUff(3f0)
—sin(6^x/„)
Зя
If fo is greater than f„J3, only the fundamental of the square wave will be
faithfully imaged by the optical system. Here, the square wave will appear as a
sine wave. As fo decreases, the image will look more like a square wave (Figure 4-
5). Since the optics does not pass any frequencies above foco, the resultant
waveform is a truncation of the original series modified by the optical MTF. This
results in some slight ringing. This ringing is a residual effect of the Gibbs
phenomenon.
RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT
(a)
Figure 4-5. Square waves imaged by a circular aperture. As
the square wave fundamental frequency increases, the edges
become rounded. Eventually, the square wave will appear as a
sinusoid when/0>/„„/3. (a)/«=/«</40, (b) fo=fKJ 10, and (c)
fo '
4.4. PHASE SHIFTS
A phase shift represents a displacement from an arbitrarily selected
origin. A phase shift moves the image in the optical plane and provides a time
delay in the electronic world. To use the superposition theorem, each input
waveform is decomposed into a Fourier series
(4-21)
For a linear-phase-shift system, 0n = n0o where 0o is the distance from the
origin. For optical systems, the shift can be in two directions representing
translation and rotation. For electronic circuitry, a phase shift is simply a time
delay from an arbitrarily selected origin. With a linear-phase-shift system, by
redefining the origin location, f)o becomes zero in the new coordmate system.
An optical system is isoplanatic if the translation or rotation of an object
produces a proportional translation or rotation of the image. An isoplanatic region
is that region within the field-of-view where the optical transfer function may be
considered shift-invariant within measurement accuracy for all spatial frequencies
of interest. Since aberrations do not generally change radically, it is reasonable to
treat a small area as isoplanatic or to call this area an isoplanatic patch. Most
optical systems are rotationally symmetrical, have minimal aberrations, and may
be considered isoplanatic. Tsoplanatism applies only to the optical subsystem.
Electronic circuitry is simply labeled as shift-invariant.
The ideal common module system is a linear-phase-shift system.
However, the mechanical scanning method emphasizes the electronic time delay.
Common modules use a bidirectional scan technique. The scene signal is
"reversed" in time (Figure 4-6). Since electronic circuitry has a phase shift, the
output will be delayed in time. This delay is constant in time. But since the scene is
"reversed" a vertical bar will be serrated.' In common module systems, this is
compensated for by physically moving a lens (phase shift lens) for the forward and
interlace scans. For EMUX systems, the timing is altered for each field so that the
detector outputs are summed together properly. Here, phasing effects that were
emphasized by hardware are compensated for in hardware.
Figure 4-6. Electronic delay in bidirectional scanning. The
time delay is "reversed" for the interlace scan. This serrates
vertical bars.
4.5. REFERENCES
1. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 103-108, Plenum Press, New York (1975)
EXERCISES
1. The MTF of a rectangular diffraction-limited aperture is MTF(f) = 1 -fjfoco.
Plot the image of a square wave where/, = /co/40, fo and fo =fJ3.
Compare these plots to Figure 4-5.
2. Assuming a phase shift of ^ = 7i/4, use Equation 4-19 to plot the image of the
three cases shown in Figure 4-5.
3. Instead of a linear phase shift of n0o, assume a nonlinear phase shift of nOJ2.
Plot the image of the three cases shown in Figure 4-5 where 0o=ti /4.
4. An electronic single-pole, low pass filter has an MTF of
MTF =
Plot the output when the input is a square wave with fo = f3dBlME ft = fW10, and
ft=A//ft3.
5. Assume that an ideal electronic low pass filter has an MTF of unity when f <
f3dB and zero elsewhere. Plot the output the input is a square wave with fo = f3dB!^,
fo = and/, = W3-
6. Discuss the differences between the plots obtained in Exercise 4 with the plots
obtained in Exercise 5. Which is better - the ideal lowpass filter or the single-pole,
low pass filter? Why?
5
SAMPLING THEORY
Sampling (digitization) is an inherent feature of all imaging systems.
Staring systems, because of detector location symmetry, tend to have equal
sampling rates in both the horizontal and vertical directions. With scanning
systems, the detector output in the scan direction can be electronically digitized at
any rate whereas in the cross scan direction, the detector locations define the
sampling rate. Therefore, in a scanning system, the sampling rate may be different
in the horizontal and vertical directions.
In most scanning systems, the detector output is a continuous analog
signal that is then digitized (sampled and quantized) by the system's internal A/D
converter. If the sampling rate is sufficiently high and the analog signal is band-
limited, the reconstructed signal will replicate the analog signal in frequency,
amplitude and pulse width. However, to conserve on memory requirements and
minimize data rates, scanning systems tend to operate at marginal sampling (clock)
rates. Consequently, the output signal amplitude and pulse shape will be modified.
Signals can be undersampled or oversampled. The highest frequency that
can be faithfully reconstructed is one-half the sampling rate. Any input signal
above the Nyquist frequency, fn, (which is defined as one half the sampling
frequency,^) will be aliased down to a lower frequency. That is, an undersampled
signal will appear as a lower frequency after reconstruction (Figure 5-1).
Undersampling is a term used to denote that the input frequency is greater than the
Nyquist frequency. It does not imply that the sampling rate is inadequate for any
specific application. Similarly, oversampling does not imply that there is excessive
sampling. It simply means that there are more samples available than that required
by the Nyquist criterion.
After aliasing, the original signal can never be recovered. Undersampling
creates moire patterns (Figure 5-2). Diagonal lines appear to have jagged edges or
"jaggies." Aliasing is not always obvious when viewing complex scenery and, as
such, is rarely reported during actual system usage although it is always present.
However, it may become apparent when viewing periodic targets such as fences,
plowed fields, and railroad tracks. Whether this is bothersome depends upon the
task. Photo interpreters rely on aliasing to emphasize railroad tracks!
Figure 5-1. An undersampled sinusoid will appear as a lower
frequency after reconstruction. T is the sample-to-sample
time. The sampling frequency is/ = MT.
Figure 5-2. Moire pattern. A raster scan system creates moire
patterns when displaying wedges or star bursts.
According to the sampling theorem, any frequency,/, sampled at fs > 2f,
can be uniquely recovered. However, the square wave is the most popular test
target. When expanded into a Fourier series, the square wave consists of an infinite
number of frequencies. Although the square wave fundamental may be
oversampled, the higher harmonics will not. Aliasing can distort periodic test
patterns such as the four-bar MRT target. Aliasing can increase the MRT at
selected frequencies.1 The appearance of the square wave after reconstruction
depends upon the relative values of the optical, detector, and electronic MTFs.
This is a system test problem.
5.1. SAMPLING THEORY
In a sampled-data system, the sampling frequency interacts with the
signal to create sum and difference frequencies. Any input f will appear as nfs ± f
after sampling (л = -co to +oo). Figure 5-3 illustrates a band-limited system with
frequency components replicated by the sampling process. The baseband (~fh to fh)
is replicated at nfs. To avoid distortion, the lowest possible sampling frequency is
that value where the baseband adjoins the first side band (Figure 5-3c). This leads
to the sampling theorem that a band-limited system must be sampled at twice the
highest frequency (fs > 2fh) to avoid distortion in the reconstructed image. The
sampling theorem applies to any periodic input frequency. The units can be either
spatial frequency or electrical frequency.
After digitization, the data resides in data arrays with nonspecific units.
The user assigns units to the arrays during image reconstruction. That is, the data is
read out of the memory in a manner consistent with monitor requirements so that
an image can be displayed. If the post-reconstruction filter limits frequencies to fn
and if/,, > fh, then the reconstructed image can be identical to the original image.
5.2. ALIASING
As the sampling frequency decreases, the first side band starts to overlap
the baseband and the power spectrums add (Figure 5-4). The overlaid region
creates distortion in the reconstructed image. This is aliasing. Once aliasing has
occurred, it cannot be removed. Within an overlapping band, there is an ambiguity
in frequency. It is impossible to tell whether the reconstructed frequency resulted
from an input frequency of/or nfs ± /
All frequency components above fn are folded back into the baseband so that the
baseband contains
co
О baseband ~~ ± f) where nfs±f< f„.
п=-<л
(5-1)
To avoid aliasing, the signal may be passed though a low pass filter (anti-
aliasing filter) to insure thatfh<fn.
RELATIVE FREQUENCY
(c)
Figure 5-3. Sampling replicated frequencies at nfs ± f. (a)
Original band-limited signal, (b) frequency spectrum after
sampling, and (c) when fs = 2fh, the bands just adjoin.
Figure 5-4. Aliasing alters both the signal and noise baseband
spectra. In a real system, signals and noise are not necessarily
band-limited and some aliasing may occur.
5.3. SAMPLERS
Three samplers may exist in an electro-optical imaging system: (1) For
scanning systems, the detector acts as a sampling aperture, (2) the discrete location
of the detectors spatially samples the scene, and (3) if the detector output is
digitized (as in most scanning systems), the A/D converter is the third sampler.
Any one of these samplers may limit performance.
5.3.1. THE DETECTOR as a SAMPLER
The detector OTF cannot exist by itself. Rather, the detector OTF must
also have the optical OTF to make a complete system. In one-dimension, the OTF
of a rectangular detector is
OTFdetector(fx) =
sin (тга fx)
ла fx
(5-2)
where a the detector angular subtense (DAS). Figure 5-5 illustrates the OTF in one
dimension. The OTF is equal to zero when fx = к/a. The first zero (k = 1) is
considered the detector cutoff, fko , because any higher frequency will not be
faithfully reproduced. Any input spatial frequency above detector cutoff will be
aliased down to a lower frequency. When A 1, there is precisely one cycle across
the detector. It is customary to plot the OTF only up to the first zero (Figure 5-6).
Since the OTF is positive in this region, it is also called the MTF.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 5-5. Detector OTF as a function of normalized spatial
frequency fx /fdco. Detector cutoff is fdco = l/«. The negative
OTF values represent contrast reversal: periodic dark bars will
appear as light bars.
Figure 5-6. Typical detector OTF representation as a function
of normalized spatial frequency fx !fdco. The OTF is usually
plotted only up to the first zero and is identical to the MTF in
this region.
О
The detector MTF representation from fx = 0 to fx = l/« has become so
wide spread that it often forgotten that the detector can respond to higher spatial
frequencies. It has become common practice to imply there is no response above
fdco . For a band-limited system, the sampling rate should be twice the highest
frequency present. This leads to the common parlance that there should be two
samples per DAS to avoid aliasing. This is only true if the optical signal is limited
to l/<z. That is, fdco > foco.
The detector's Nyquist frequency is fn = l/« and its effective sampling
rate is fs = 2/«. Any signal above fn will be aliased to a lower frequency according
to
О baseband
n=-<x>
ship а (я/, +Л)]
^«(«Л ±Л)
where nfs ± fx <fn . (5-3)
Figure 5-7 illustrates the replicated spectrum for the first side bands (n =
±1). This aliasing occurs at the detector and can only be eliminated by assuring
that the detector cutoff is greater than the optical cutoff (flc0 > foco). That is, if no
signal exists above foco, there is no signal to be aliased. Since f. = 2f(lco, when fdco >
foco, the optical system is sampled at twice the highest frequency present and the
Nyquist criterion is met for the optical system. All the frequencies imaged by the
optical system will be faithfully detectediffdeo^foeo-
Figure 4-5 illustrated how an optical system modified an infinite square
wave. The image contains all the spatial frequencies up to optical cutoff. The
detector then converts the spatial frequencies into electrical frequencies. Whether
the detector aliases these frequencies depend upon the relationship between the
optical cutoff and the detector cutoff. Aliasing occurs as fdco is reduced. However,
the aliased signal will be reduced in amplitude because the optical MTF reduces
the amplitude.
n=-1 n=0 n=1
LL
O
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 5-7. The detector acts as a sampling aperture where the
sampling frequency is fs = 2fdco. The baseband and first side
bands are illustrated. The optical MTF reduces the aliased
signal amplitude.
5.3.2. SPATIAL SAMPLING
Although not stated, the detector output shown in the previous figures
can only be obtained with a scanning device operating in an analog mode. Staring
arrays and the cross scan direction in a scanning array place the detectors at
discrete locations. These discrete locations sample the image at an effective spatial
sampling rate equal to the inverse of the effective detector center-to-center
spacing. If the detector center-to-center spacing is dcc, then the angular sampling
rate \sScc = dJfl.
Staring arrays can reproduce signals up to fn = l/25cc . Although the
individual detectors can reproduce higher spatial frequencies, the spectrum is
sampled &fs= \!SCC (Figure 5-8). Staring arrays are inherently undersampled when
compared to the detector spatial frequency cutoff (Figure 5-9).
The highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is the
system cutoff frequency. For oversampled systems, it is where the MTF
approaches zero. For undersampled systems, it is the Nyquist frequency. Systems
can detect signals whose spatial frequencies are above cutoff but cannot faithfully
reproduce them. For example, a high frequency (above system cutoff) 4-bar
pattern may appear as one low contrast blob in an oversampled system. For an
undersampled system, patterns above the Nyquist frequency are aliased to a
frequency below Nyquist and a 4-bar pattern may appear as a distorted 3-bar
pattern. From a design point of view, the MTF should be "high" over the spatial
frequencies of interest; this range of frequencies is application specific.
Example 5-1
SYSTEM CUTOFF
A staring array consists of detectors that are 40x40 pm in size. The
detector pitch is 60 pm. The effective focal length is 30 cm. The aperture diameter
is 15 cm and the average wavelength is 10 pm. What is the system cutoff?
System cutoff is defined as the smaller of the optical cutoff, detector
cutoff, or Nyquist frequency. The optical cutoff is foco=DIX = 15 cycles/mrad. The
DAS is 40x10'6/0.3 = 0.133 mrad and the detector cutoff is 1/DAS = 7.5
cycles/mrad. The detector pitch provides sampling every 60x10"6/0.3 = 0.2 mrad
for an effective sampling rate at 5 cycles/mrad. Since the Nyquist frequency is
one-half the sampling frequency, the system cutoff is 2.5 cycles/mrad. For staring
arrays, the Nyquist frequency is always smaller than the detector cutoff and is
typically also the system cutoff
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
(a)
(b)
Figure 5-8. Two arrays with different center-to-center spacing.
The DASs are the same for both. The spatial frequency axis is
normalized to fxlfdco. (a) Scc = «. This represents a 100% fill
factor staring array and a scanning array with one
sample/DAS. (b) A finite fill factor (fill factor of 50%) staring
array and the cross scan direction in a scanning array where
the overscan ratio is 0.5.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 5-9. The sampling frequency is inversely proportional
to the detector center-to-center spacing. For 100% fill factor
arrays, fs = l/2«. The base band and first side bands are
illustrated. See Figure 5-7 for comparison.
Example 5-2
STAGGERED ARRAY CUTOFF
The staggered elements, as illustrated in Figure 5-10, increase the vertical
spatial sampling rate. If the effective focal length is 40 cm, what is the system
cutoff?
The vertical DAS is 40><10‘6/0.4 = 0.1 mrad representing a 10-cycles/mrad
capability. The sampling is every 25*10’6/0.4 = 0.0625 mrad or at a rate of 16
cycles/mrad. The highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is 8
cycles/mrad. This represents 16/10 = 1.6 samples per DAS. This system is
considered (erroneously) undersampled since common parlance states that the
Nyquist criterion requires two samples per DAS. The system is undersampled only
if the optical system passes spatial frequencies above 8 cycles/mrad.
Figure 5-10. The vertical Nyquist frequency can be increased
with a staggered array. Staggered arrays are only used in
scanning systems.
5.3.3. A/D CONVERTER
In principle, the clock rate of an A/D converter can be set at any rate.
However, with real hardware, weight, power consumption, and size may limit the
clock rate to just satisfy Nyquist frequency.
Example 5-3
SYSTEM NYQUIST FREQUENCY
What are the horizontal and vertical Nyquist frequencies for an LWIR
common module system? The DAS is 0.2 mrad horizontally by 0.2 mrad
vertically. The field-of-view is a square format with 72 mrad on a side. Each
horizontal line (scan direction) is electronically digitized at two samples per DAS.
The optical cutoff is 15 cycles/mrad.
An LWIR common module system consists of 180 detectors that are
interlaced to produce 360 infrared scene lines. In the horizontal direction, there are
72/0.2 = 360 independent DASs. With two digital samples per DAS there are 720
digital samples in the horizontal direction. The Nyquist frequency is one-half the
sample frequency. Equivalently there are 360 cycles in the horizontal direction and
the Nyquist frequency is 720/(2x72) = 5 cycles/mrad. This is identical with 1/DAS.
In the vertical direction, there are only 360 independent samples (the number of
detectors) representing 180 cycles. Thus the vertical Nyquist frequency is
360/(2x72) = 2.5 cycles/mrad. Line interpolation may further degrade this value.
Example 5-4
SAMPLING CUTOFF
The LWIR system described in Example 5-3 is electronically digitized at
four samples per DAS. What is the horizontal system cutoff7
With four digital samples per DAS, there are 1440 digital samples in the
horizontal direction and the A/D converter Nyquist frequency is 10 cycles/mrad.
However, the highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced by the
detector is 5 cycles/mrad Oversampling minimizes phasing effects.
The required sampling rate depends upon the optical MTF, detector
MTF, and the amount of aliasing tolerated. Only a detailed study will determine if
the aliasing is unacceptable.
5.4. MICROSCAN
Staggered arrays increase the vertical sampling frequency in scanning
systems (Figure 5-10). Microscan2"5 effectively increases the sampling frequency
for staring arrays. With microscan, the detector line-of-sight is moved a fraction of
a DAS. This increases the sampling rate by reducing the effective center-to-center
spacing. While this improves image fidelity (Figure 5-11), it does have some
disadvantages. The detector integration time decreases for each microscan location
and this increases the NEDT. It also increases hardware complexity. The monitor
may limit the maximum amount of microscan. If the monitor can only display 480
lines, then the microscan should only create 480 lines. An array that consists of
640x480 detector elements should only be microscanned if the monitor can
display 1280x960 pixels.
worst phase
best phase
3x3 microscan
random phase
3x3 microscan
Figure 5-11. Microscan improves image fidelity. In-phase and
out-of-phase are also called best-phase and worst-phase
respectively. The array consists of 64x64 elements. The 3x3
microscan produces 192x192 pixels that must be converted
into a monitor format. (From reference 5).
5.5. ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
An anti-aliasing filter is a low pass filter that band-limits the system
before sampling to avoid aliasing. Optical band-limiting can be achieved by using
small diameter optics or by defocusing. Unfortunately, these two approaches also
degrade the MTF in the baseband and typically are considered undesirable.
In electro-optical imaging systems, the signal is band-limited by the
optics and detector. Subsequent electronics is designed to maintain signal fidelity.
On the other hand, noise is assumed to be generated in the detector. The noise is
assumed to be white (all frequencies are present). By selecting electronic filters
that minimize noise and maximize the signal, the signal-to-noise ratio is
maximized.
If the filter is just before the A/D converter, and its purpose is to
minimize aliasing, then the filter is called an anti-aliasing filter. These filters
cannot remove the aliasing that has taken place at the detector. They can only
prevent further aliasing that might occur in the A/D converter. Figure 5-12
illustrates the desired cutoff features of an ideal filter. The ideal filter is, of course,
unrealizable.
Figure 5-12. An ideal anti-aliasing filter passes all the signals
below fn and no signal above fn . For an appropriately sampled
scanning system, fn =foco.
5.6. REFERENCES
1. G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pp. 347-351,
JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL (1998).
2. D. J. Bradley and P N. J. Dennis, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays," in Infrared
Technology and Applications, A. Baker and P, Masson, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 590, pp. 53-60
(1985).
3. R. J. Dann, S. R. Carpenter, C. Seamer, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J Bradley, "Sampling Effects in
CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays - Practical Results," in Infrared Technology XII, I. J. Spiro and J.
Mollicone, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 685, pp. 123-128 (1986).
4. E. A. Watson, R. A. Muse, and F. P. Blommel, "Aliasing and Blurring in Microscanned Imagery," in
Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 242-250 (1992).
5. F. P. Blommel, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "The Effects of Microscan Operation on Staring
Infrared Sensor Imagery," in Infrared Technology XVII, B. F. Andresen, M. S. Scholl, and J. Spiro,
eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1540, pp. 653-664 (1991).
EXERCISES
1. List five different objects seen on television that appear jagged.
2. Describe the appearance of the objects listed in Exercise 1 as they move slowly,
at a moderate rate, and moving quickly.
3. A staring array consists of 512x512 detector elements. If the effective focal
length is 40 cm and the detectors are 50 x50 pm on 75 pm centers, what is (a) the
detector DAS, (b) the system FOV, and (c) the system Nyquist frequency?
4. For the system described in Example 5-3, calculate the optical resolution,
detector resolution, and system resolution both horizontally and vertically. Assume
that resolution is the inverse of the cutoff frequency.
5. Using the results from Exercise 4, calculate the "detection” range for a 2x2 m
target both vertically and horizontally. Discuss the differences in the "detection"
ranges. Let
„ target size
Range = —-----------.
resolution
6. Using the results from Exercise 4, calculate the horizontal and vertical
"detection" ranges for a U5 m and 5X1 m target both vertically and horizontally.
Discuss the differences in the ranges.
7. FLIR92 uses a two-dimensional approach where the effective system cutoff is
feff= Calculate the system "detection” ranges for a 1 x5 m and 5x 1 m target.
Discuss the advantages of the two-dimensional approach.
8. A staring array consists of 64x64 detector elements. The detectors are 40x40
pm on 80 x 80 pm centers. The focal length is 50 cm. What is the system cutoff
frequency? What is the cutoff with (a) 2x2 microscan, (b) 3x3 microscan, (c) 4x 4
microscan, (d) 5x5 microscan, (e) 6x6 microscan, (f) 7x7 microscan, (g) 8x8
microscan, (h) 9 x9 microscan, and (i) 10x10 microscan? What limits the highest
practical microscan?
6
COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS
Figure 6-1 illustrates a functional electro-optical block diagram of an
early common module system. The components were called common modules
because the scanner, detector, pre-amplifiers, post-amplifiers, and light emitting
diodes (LEDs) were manufactured to common specifications. The pre-amplifier is
a low-noise fixed-gain amplifier. The post-amplifier had a variable gain and was
adjusted for the desired displayed contrast.
The common module concept was initiated in the 1970s to reduce cost
through the economy of scale and competition. These systems are still in existence
and lend themselves to small, lightweight man-portable applications. The
designer’s only options were changing the optics to achieve the desired field-of-
view, adding electronic filtering to maximize the signal-to-noise ratio, and
modifying the visual optics to present an appropriate image to the observer. Nearly
all systems today evolved from the common module. Although a misnomer, the
derivatives are also called common module systems. For example, both EOMUX
and EMUX systems are sometimes called common modules to indicate that they
contain a scanning scheme similar to the original common design. Common
modules systems operate in the LWIR regions and employ HgCdTe detectors.
Figure 6-1. Common module components considered for
analysis.
For analysis purposes, the common module system consists of optics, a
stabilization element, detector, amplifiers, electronic filters, LEDs, visual optics,
and the eye. The detector response consists of both the spatial and temporal
responses that are characterized by OTFdetector, and MTFtconstant respectively. The
OTF is applied to spatial coordinates and the MTF is applied to time coordinates.
Using linear system theory, the OTFs and MTFs of the individual subsystem are
multiplied together to create the system OTF. The subscripts are self-explanatory.
OTFsys = OTFo^sOTF^nOTF^^MTFK<m^t
x MTFampMTFfilterMTFLEDMTFvoptiaMTFeye .
Since the spatial OTF is positive for most applications, the usual representation is
MTFsys = MTFopticsMTFmotlon MTFdetector MTFtconstant
x MTFampMTFр^МТР^рМТР^р^МТРеуе . ( '2)
All OTFs and MTFs are a function of frequency (which is omitted for equation
compactness). The optical OTF, OTFoptics is for the overall lens system. It is not the
product of the individual lenses since these OTFs may be correlated. While not
truly separable, for mathematical convenience the optical OTF is separated into
three components (diffraction, aberrations, and defocus)
OTFoptics * OTFdiffOTFaberratlonOTFdefocus . (6-3)
Motion consists of three different forms: linear, sinusoidal and random
OTFmotion -OTFlinearOTFsinusoidalOTFrandom . (6-4)
For modeling purposes, the system response is usually limited to those spatial
frequencies where the OTF is positive. For this limited region, the OTF and MTF
are identical.
All the MTFs apply to similarly designed imaging systems operating in
all spectral bands ranging from the UV to infrared. The components do not
"know" what created the signal.
6.1. OPTICS OTF
Lens systems consist of several elements with varying focal lengths and
varying indices of refraction. Different elements are used to minimize aberrations
and to control beam wander during scanning. Since one lens offsets the aberrations
of another, linear system theory cannot be applied to the individual elements.
While individual element OTFs are appropriate for specifying each lens, the lens
system must be considered in its entirety. For modeling purposes, the optical
system will be treated as a single lens that has the same effective focal length and
aberrations as the lens system.
While OTFdiff is exact, OTFabcnation and OTFdefocus are mathematical
approximations. The actual lens OTF can be computed from standard optical
design codes. Most performance models (limited to positive OTFs or, equivalently,
the MTFs) including FLIR92, allow the user to directly enter optical MTF values
and thereby bypass the approximations. The sagittal MTF is used as a horizontal
MTF and the tangential MTF is a vertical MTF component. If the system analyst is
creating his own performance model, he may wish to use a curve fit to the actual
MTF values.
Optical spatial frequency is two-dimensional with the frequency ranging
from -co to +co. By convention, the optical and detector OTFs are shown in one-
dimension with the spatial frequency ranging from zero to the cutoff frequency.
The highest spatial frequency that can be reproduced is limited by the optical
cutoff.
6.1.1. DIFFRACTION-LIMITED OTF
The diffraction-limited OTF (FLIR921 ARG-1) for a circular aperture is
OTF<njf=z:
cos
when f
When f x> foco, OTIdlff = 0. Since the OTF is positive, it is identical to the MTF.
The optical cutoff, foco, is
foco
Do _ aperture diameter
2 wavelength
(6-6)
Figure 6-2 illustrates MTFdiff as a function o£fx/foco. If Do has units of millimeters
and 2 has units of micrometers, then foco will have the usual units of cycles/mrad.
This equation is only valid for monochromatic light and the cutoff frequency is
dependent upon the wavelength. The extension to polychromatic light is lens
specific. Most lens systems are color corrected (achromatized) and therefore there
is no way to predict the MTF. As an approximation to the polychromatic MTF, the
average wavelength, 2Я1,е, is used in Equation 6-5. This average wavelength is
determined by the spectral content of the incident radiation and by what the
detector senses.
Figure 6-2. MTFdiff for a circular aperture normalized to fjfoco.
Since most systems are designed to measure the radiation difference
between a target and its background, the spectrally weighted average wavelength
is
z2
p Optics UK (л)ме (л, at) ал
_ A______________________________
ave ~
р<,рЛж(я)я(г(я)л/г(я,дт)<м
A
(6-7)
If ToPtics(^), ^/2), and Me(l,AT) are constant over the interval [21? 22], the average
wavelength may be approximated by
Q ~ +
^ave ~ -
(6-8)
The slope of MTFdifr is 4/я at zero spatial frequency. A straight line fit to Equation
6-4 provides the back-of-the-envelope approximation
MTF a# (J0*1 - ~ 4^-
71 foco
(6-9)
An ideal lens creates a diffraction pattern that consists of a series of
concentric rings with a bright center (resembles a bull's eye target). The central
portion is called an Airy disk. This radially symmetric pattern is described
mathematically by a Bessel function. Sometimes, the Airy disc intensity is
approximated with a Gaussian function for mathematical convenience. While this
approach maybe useful for intensity mapping, it is not prudent to use a Gaussian
MTF for MTFdiff.
6.1.2. CENTRAL OBSCURATION
A Cassegrainian telescope has a central obscuration (Figure 6-3). For an
optical system with a central obscuration, the diffraction-limited OTF is
a + в + c
where
OTFdiff ~
obs
Do
(6-10)
(6-П)
where Do is the overall diameter and is the obscuration diameter. Let
Л ... -V -i|1 + R2 - 4X2 | ,o.
X =-------, Y =—, and 6z = cos 1 ------------------- . (6-12)
foco К L 27? J
The variables A, B, and C are
A = r* I cos'1(X)-xVl-A'2 A = 0 elsewhere when 0 < 5 X< cl
B = со8-1(У)-у71-У2 71 when 0 cl
В = 0 elsewhere ,
(6-14)
С = -2Я2 when 0<A'< ——
2
„ 2R . 1 + й2 2(1-Я2)
C =---sin a +-----a-----------tan
when
1 + 1?
1-1?J
-2Я2
\-R v 1 + 7?
2 2
(6-15)
C = 0 when X > -- -
2
When JoZ)V-0, Equation 6-10 is identical to Equation 6-5. Figure 6-4 illustrates the
diffraction limited MTF for various obscuration diameters.
Do
Figure 6-3. Cassegrainian telescope. The aperture diameter is
Do and the obscuring diameter is dobs. The primary mirror is
usually a parabaloid and the secondary mirror is usually a
hyperboloid.
MTF
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-4. MTFdiff as a function of the obscuration ratio. The
obscuration ratio is R = dobsJDo. The spatial frequency is
normalized tofx /foco.
6.1.3. ABERRATIONS
It is mathematically convenient to represent an aberrated optical system
by two OTFs
OTFoptics^OTFd{ffOTFaberration .
(6-16)
Shannon2 developed an empirical relationship that encompasses most aberrations
of real lens systems
OTFaberration ~ I
1 - 4
when f
oco
(6-17)
where Wrms is the rms wave-front error expressed as a fraction of waves and A =
0.18. Marechal suggested3 that rms wave-front error is related to the peak-to-peak
wave-front error by Wrnts = WPP/3.5. Although ^^=0 could be used for diffraction
limited optics, apractical choice would be WPP= 0.25 or, equivalently, Wrms = 1/14.
This simulates the wave-front error that typically occurs during manufacturing.
Figure 6-5 illustrates the aberrated MTF for two different wave-front errors for a
clear aperture optical system. This approximation is valid for small wave-front
errors (ИрГ<0.5) which is a reasonable limit for well-designed optics.
Figure 6-5. MTFODtics for WPP = 1/2 and = 1/4 wave front-
errors. Shannon’s approximation was used for MTFaberration.
Aberrations can be approximated (FLIR92 ARG-2) by a Gaussian OTF
r aberration
@ (ifactorf )
(6-18)
Since a Gaussian response is always positive, the OTF is usually given as a MTF.
Although vdfactor has the dimensions of a blur diameter, it is not a measurable
quantity. It accounts for the degradation associated with the manufacturing quality
(material, design, fabrication and mounting). Here, OTFaberTation simply provides a
convenient mathematical representation that relates OTFoptlcs to the actual
(measured) data
OTFaberraUm = OTF^red = MTF„KasuKd _
OTFdiff MTFdiff
The approximation for aberrations is only valid for modest values. Any
computer program that includes the approximation must specify the region of
applicability.
6.1.4. DEFOCUSED OPTICS
Fixed focus systems can be grossly out of focus if the target is outside the
depth of field. The OTF for a circular, defocused, diffraction-limited lens4 is
OTF
'z' optics
cos
(6-20)
where
(6-21)
The focus shift, Af, in units of wavelength. When A; = 0, Equation 6-20 is identical
with Equation 6-5. Figure 6-6 illustrates the defocused MTF for a variety of errors.
There is a typographical error in Levi and Austing's original paper that has
propagated throughout the literature. The correct equation (shown above) has 4/я
in front of the integral rather than the erroneous 4/n a. This error was noted in their
errata.4
The OTF can be approximated by
OTFoptics « OTF^OTF^ .
(6-22)
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-6. Theoretical OTFs for a diffraction-limited circular
aperture as a function of focus error, A-. The spatial frequency
is normalized to fx lfoco. Negative OTFs represent a phase
reversal. Here, targets appear reversed in contrast: periodic
white bars appear black and black bars appear white.
Shannon5 reported an approximation that is good up to 2.2 waves
MTFdefocus(fx)
UWpp
(6-23)
where Jf ) is the first-order Bessel function. For wave-front errors less than 0.75
waves, Jfx) can be approximated by the first five terms of the infinite series
3 5 7 9
X X X X X
2 ~ 1? + 384 ~ 18432 + 1474560 '
(6-24)
If the defocus errors are less than 0.5 waves peak, then the first four terms provide
a good approximation. The approximation for defocus is valid for modest values.
Any computer program that includes this approximation must specify the region of
applicability. See also Section 10.1.2., Defocus MTF. Rather than use the
approximations, the complete Bessel functions can be used for defocus.6
6.2. DETECTORS
The detector OTF cannot exist by itself. Rather, the detector MTF must
also have the optical OTF to make a complete system. In one-dimension, the
spatial response of a rectangular detector (FLIR92 ARG-3) is
ZZ A • Z Z A Sin(^/x)
OTFdetector (fx ) SinC (ОС f x )
(6-25)
This assumes that the active area is rectangular and that the response is uniform
across the active area. Using the small angle approximation, a, the detector angular
subtense (DAS), is
~ „ 1 d detector size
a = DAS =-------- — =----------------------.
fdco fl effective focal length
(6-26)
The instantaneous-field-of-view (IFOV) is the angular cone over which the
detector senses radiation. It includes both the optical blur diameter and the DAS.
When the blur diameter is small compared to the DAS, the IFOV and DAS are
approximately equal. Using the DAS in Equation 6-25 does not neglect the blur
diameter. It is already included in MTFdiff.
Figure 6-7 illustrates the OTF in one dimension. The OTF is equal to
zero when fx = kla. The first zero (A'=l) is considered the detector cutoff, fdco,
because any higher frequency will not be faithfully reproduced. Any input spatial
frequency above detector cutoff will be aliased down to a lower frequency. When
k= 1, there is precisely one cycle across the detector.
It is customary to plot only the OTF up to the first zero (Figure 6-8).
Unfortunately, this representation may lead the analyst to believe that there no is
response above fdco. The absolute highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully
reproduced is limited by the optical system cutoff. The detector cutoff may be
either higher (optically limited system) or lower (detector limited system).
The detector temporal response is considered separable from the spatial
response. The detector's temporal MTF is presented in Section 6.4.2.
Figure 6-7. Detector OTF from 0 to +oo as a function of
normalized spatial frequency fx lflco. The negative OTF values
represent contrast reversal where periodic dark bars will
appear as light bars.
Figure 6-8. Typical detector OTF representation as a function
of normalized spatial frequency fjfdco. Since the OTF is
positive up to the first zero, it called the MTF.
6.3. MOTION
Motion produces a blurred image. Motion blurs detail and therefore the
net effect is to decrease the range at which target detail can be resolved. The
effects of motion during the entire integration and interpretation process must be
considered.7 If the motion is slow compared to the integration time or processing
time, the target appears to move.
Linear motion includes both target movement (relative to the imaging
system) and motion of the image across the detectors. Unbalanced scanning
mirrors may introduce a sinusoidal motion. Motors or turbines on aircraft and
vehicles also can induce sinusoidal motion through mechanical vibrations.
Mountmg structures may have resonant frequencies that induce sinusoidal motion.
High frequency random motion is simply called jitter.
Typically, an imaging system is subjected to linear, sinusoidal, and
random motion simultaneously
OTFmolil,„ = OTFUnear OTFslnusoidal OTFrmdom . (6-27)
The spectrum of these frequencies extends from very low frequency to high
frequencies. The magnitude of each motion must be quantified so that the
appropriate equations are used. In a laboratory, the system may be mounted on a
vibration-isolated stabilized table. Here, no motion is expected so that OTFmotion =
1. Systems may contain a stabilized mirror that reduces OTFmotion. The values used
for the various motional OTFs should be the values expected after stabilization is
in operation and not the movement of the platform.
Motion affects the ability to resolve detail. It does not necessarily affect
the ability to detect a target. The eye can follow a slow moving blob. However,
with all motion, the edges become fuzzy. As the speed increases, the edge
becomes less distinct.
6.3.1. LINEAR MOTION
The OTF degradation due to linear motion (FLIR92 ARG-7) is
OTFlinear (fx ) = sine (a{fx ) , (6-28)
where a, is the angular distance moved and is equal to vrtint. The variable, vr is the
relative angular velocity between the sensor and the target in the horizontal
direction. The integration time is tint . The precise value to be used for the
integration time depends upon the system application. When an observer views the
image, the eye blends many frames of data. For common module systems, the eye
integration time should be used. Although the exact eye integration time is
debatable, FLIR92 documentation recommends 0.1 s. The eye integration time is
further discussed in Section 19.2.2., SNRfa and te. For other applications, different
integration times may be appropriate. See Sections 8.1, 9.1, and 10.3, all entitled
Motion.
Figure 6-9 illustrates the OTF due to linear motion as a fraction of a
DAS Linear motion only affects the OTF in the direction of the motion. As the
motion increases, the OTF becomes negative. A negative OTF indicates that phase
reversal has occurred: periodic black bars appear white and periodic white bars
appear black.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-9. OTFlinear as a function of normalized spatial
frequency fxlf(ko. The linear motion is normalized to «//DAS.
In the laboratory a, is usually zero.
Multiplying the detector OTF and linear motion OTF provides the
composite OTF shown in Figure 6-10. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the linear
motion is less than about 20% of the DAS, it has minimal effect on system
performance. When linear motion becomes large, phase reversal can occur (Figure
6-11). Figure 6-12 illustrates a test pattern smeared by linear motion. At cutoff
(where the system OTF approaches the first zero), the bar pattern cannot be
resolved. Above cutoff, phase reversal is seen. The ability to see imagery above
cutoff is called false resolution or spurious resolution.
Blurring due to linear motion well known in photography. Movement of
the camera or the scene blurs the image. The shutter speed determines the
integration time. Staring arrays acts in a manner similar to still cameras. Scanning
systems do not.
With interlace scanning, continuously moving (linear motion) targets will
be at different locations from one field to another. That is, scanning takes time and
the target is constantly moving during this period. Here straight lines will appear
disjointed. For pure serial scan systems, a vertical line will appear as a diagonal
line. The offset from the vertical depends upon the relationship between the linear
motion and the frame time. For common module systems with bidirectional
scanning, time is "reversed” during the interlace field. Here, a vertical line may
appear serrated from line-to-line. These effects are not present with random or
sinusoidal motion since the target’s average location never changes.
Figure 6-10. OTFdetectorOTF,inear as a function of normalized
spatial frequency/^ /flco. When linear motion is 20% of a DAS,
OTFlinear is 0.935 at/x//Zc0=l.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-11. OTFdetectorOTFlinear as a function of normalized
spatial frequency fx /fdco for large movements. The movement
is expressed as a percentage of a DAS. The negative OTF
represents phase reversal.
< ц
ж ж ж
ORIGINAL IMAGE
LINEAR MOTION
Figure 6-12. A test pattern image when linear motion is
present. Since the motion is horizontal, the vertical resolution
is maintained. When the bar target frequency is equal to the
first zero of the OTFlinear, the bars blend into a blob. Higher
spatial frequency bars illustrate phase reversal: There appears
to be two black bars on a gray background. (From reference 8,
by courtesy of G. L. Conrad).
6.3.2. SINUSOIDAL MOTION
When sinusoidal motion is described by
в = as sin (cot}.
(6-29)
The image blur is twice the amplitude of the oscillatory motion as. If the total
viewing time is large such that many cycles are viewed,
(6-30)
Then the OTF degradation (FLIR92 ARG-9) is
OTFsinusoidal (fx ) = Jo (iHsrfx ) >
(6-31)
where Jo( ) is the zero-order Bessel function. Sinusoidal motion only affects the
OTF in the direction of the motion. Figure 6-13 illustrates sinusoidal peak-to-peak
motion as a fraction of the DAS. For x < 3, Jo( ) can be approximated by the first
five terms of the infinite series
4 + 64 2048 + 147456 '
(6-32)
If the OTF is plotted only up to fdco then the approximation can be used when 2as <
DAS. The approximation for sinusoidal motion is valid for modest values. Any
computer program that includes this approximation must specify the region of
applicability. Rather than use the approximations, the complete Bessel function
can be used for sinusoidal motion.6
Figure 6-14 illustrates OTFsinusoidalOTFdetector as a function of the
normalized spatial frequency fjfdco. As with linear motion, large movements can
produce negative OTFs. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the peak-to-peak motion is
less than about 20% of a DAS, system performance is not significantly affected.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-13. OTFsinusoidal as a function of 2a/DAS. In the
laboratory as is usually zero.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-14. OTFsjnusoidalOTFdetector as a function of normalized
spatial frequency fx !flco. Movement is expressed as a
percentage of2«v/DAS.
6.3.3. RANDOM MOTION (JITTER)
High frequency random motion can be described (FLIR92 ARG-8) by a
Gaussian OTF
OTF н (f } = е~2(тУг/х}
random \ J x ' c
(6-33)
where or is the rms random displacement in mrad. It is assumed that the image has
moved often during the integration time, tint, so that the central limit theorem is
valid. The central limit theorem says that a Gaussian distribution can describe
many random movements. Figure 6-15 illustrates the random motion OTF. Since
this OTF is always positive, it is given as an MTF.
Multiplying the detector OTF and random motion OTF provides Figure
6-16. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the rms value of the random motion is less
than about 10% of a DAS, system performance is not significantly affected.
MTF MTF
Figure 6-15. MTF degradation due to high frequency random
(Gaussian) movement as a function of or fx. In the laboratory,
or is usually zero.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 6-16. OTFrandomOTFdetector as a function of normalized
spatial frequency fx lflco. The rms movement is expressed as a
percentage of <rr./DAS. MTFrandom is always positive so that
phase reversal is not seen.
6.3.4. NONLINEAR SCAN MIRROR MOVEMENT
Since all calculations are performed in object space, any nonlinear scan
mirror motion must be referred to object space. Let the scanner be between the
afocal telescope and re-imager (see Figure 6-1). If the afocal telescope has
magnification Pafocai then the high frequency mirror movements in object space are
„ _ ^Imirror
al-m~ p
rafocal
„ — as-mirror _ аг-mirror o/i\
as-m-—----------, and crr-m=—---------• (6-34)
*afocal ^afocal
The linear and sinusoidal components of nonlinear movements are additive and the
random movements add in quadrature. The total motional values are
V2 2
<7r + a rm . (6-35)
The variables at_tot , as_tot, and vr_tot are used in Equations 6-28, 6-31, and 6-33,
respectively.
6.3.5. LOW FREQUENCY MOTION
Image blurring due to low frequency vibrations is a random process.
Quantification9'14 depends upon the initial phase of the motion and the exposure
time. Low frequency MTFs can only be handled statistically since no closed-form
solution is possible. Even though edges may be blurred, the eye can easily follow
low frequency movement.
6.4. ELECTRONIC MTF
While the optical OTF is two-dimensional, electrical circuits are causal
and one-dimensional in time. The Fourier transform is appropriate for optical
systems but the Laplace transform is more convenient for analyzing electrical
circuits.
Common module systems 107
6.4.1. CONVERSION: ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY TO
SPATIAL FREQUENCY
The electrical frequency,/,, is related15 to the spatial frequency by the
scan velocity,
fe~v
(6-36)
where r must have units of mrad/s to convert cycles/mrad (£) to Hertz (/). The
scan velocity is the ratio of the DAS to the detector dwell time
a
dwell
(6-37)
where Tdwel) is the time it takes a target edge to scan across the detector element.
Using the small angle approximation and assuming constant scan velocity, it is
~ dwell
Na/3risc
(6-38)
where N is the number of detectors operating in parallel (vertical direction), a is
the DAS in the horizontal direction, p is the DAS in the vertical direction, A is the
HFOV, В is the VFOV, Fr is the frame rate, i]os is the overscan ratio, and t]sc is the
scan efficiency.
The overscan ratio is given by
„ _PNscene /3 NR
os В В '
(6-39)
where Nscene is the number of scene lines per frame and R is the interlace ratio.
When t]os = 1, the entire scene is perfectly dissected by the detector array. When t]os
< 1, areas of the scene are missed and when tjos> 1, overlapping occurs (Figure 6-
17). The relationship between the overscan ratio and sampling rates is discussed in
Chapter 11, Vertical MTF. Substituting Equations 6-38 and 6-38 into 6-37 yields
A F N
г7 scene
(6-40)
Note that Nscene may not be the same as number of lines seen on the monitor.
EMUX, EOMUX, and staring array systems may employ line-to-line interpolation
to achieve monitor compatibility. Line-to-line interpolation can affect the vertical
MTF (discussed in Chapter 11, Vertical MTF).
Figure 6-17. Definition of overscan ratio. When *]os= 1, the
entire scene is perfectly dissected by the detector array. When
t]os < 1, areas of the scene are missed and when tjos > 1,
overlapping occurs.
The vertical field-of-view is specified by the effective vertical extent of the array,
dyarr(ly, and the effective focal length
FFOK = B = 2taii 1
у-array
(6-41)
where
dy-array = dcc (TV - 1) + dy + (/? - 1)^ , (6-42)
and dcc is the center-to-center spacing of the detector elements and dy is the
detector dimension in the vertical direction. The horizontal field-of-view is
determined by the optical design and the scan mirror angular movement.
The scan efficiency is the ratio of the amount of time that the detectors
actively sample the field-of-view in one frame, tactive, to the total time taken for one
frame, tfnme
t frame
Example 6-1
SCAN EFFICIENCY
What is the scan efficiency for an LWIR common module system?
The U.S. common module system contains 180 detectors that are
interlaced by an oscillating mirror to create 360 infrared scene lines (Figure 2-6).
As illustrated in Figure 6-18 the detector senses radiation from the FOV when the
scanner is between -5° and +5°. This is the active scan time. The scan mirror
requires time to decelerate, stop, reverse direction and accelerate to a linear
velocity as shown in Figure 6-19. The common module system operates at a frame
rate of 30 Hz. Each frame lasts 1/30 sec and each field lasts 1/60 sec. If the active
scan time is 12.5 ms for each field, then the scan efficiency is 12.5/16.7 = 75%.
During the inactive time (0 < -5° and 0 > +5°), the detector senses radiation from
parts of the scene and the housing. For background limited systems, this radiation
introduces scan noise if it reaches the detector during the active scan time.
Bidirectional oscillating mirrors typically have a scan efficiency over 75%.
An observer viewed the output of the original common module systems
(Figure 6-1). The frame rate must be sufficiently high such that the eye does not
perceive flicker. U.S. commercial televisions employ a frame rate of 30 Hz and
this value has become standard for nearly all imaging systems used in the U.S. The
scan frequency must be 30 Hz if the output is displayed on a standard monitor
(EOMUX, EMUX, and staring systems) but need not be used for common module
systems when viewing LEDs.
Figure 6-18. Beam location as a function of scan angle when
employing an oscillating mirror, (a) Scan angle = +5°, (b) scan
angle = -5°, and (c) mirror looking outside the field-of-view.
Figure 6-19. Scan angle as a function of time for an oscillating
mirror. The ratio of active scan time to one field time is the
scan efficiency.
Example 6-2
SCAN VELOCITY
A common module system employs 180 parallel detectors with 2:1
interlace and operates at 30 Hz. The scan efficiency is 0.80 and HFOV = 2.75°.
The 2:1 interlace provides 360 independent IR lines (t]os= 1). If the DAS is 0.1
mrad, what is the scan velocity and detector dwell time?
2.75°
v =------
1745™™f
deg )
(30 HzX360 lines)
(180 detectors^.^^)
^^mrad д
= 3600—-, (6-44)
s
and
a 0.1 __ _o
I dwell ~ — — ’
v 3600
(6-45)
Example 6-3
ROTATING POLYGONS
Figure 6-20a depicts a system that has a four sided rotating polygon for
horizontal scanning and a moving reflective mirror for vertical scanning. The
detector array is illustrated in Figure 6-20b. With a 1-m effective focal length, the
FOV is 8x8 mrad. The DAS in both the vertical and horizontal directions is 25
prad. What is the required polygon rotational speed and detector dwell time? The
monitor operates at 30 Hz.
Vertical Scanner
40
(a) (b)
Figure 6-20. Polygon scanner, (a) Scanning concept and (b)
the detector array contains 40 elements.
The monitor requirements determine the overall timing requirements.
The scanners must trace out the entire field-of-view within 1/30 sec. Precisely how
that is done depends upon the scanner and the scan efficiency. The scan speed and
scan efficiency drive the electronic filter design. With no overscan (t]os = 1), the
number of individual IR lines required to fill the VFOV is 8/0.025 = 320. With 40
elements in the array, there must be 320/40 = 8 sweeps to cover the VFOV or that
there must be 8:1 interlace. The rotating polygon and vertical mirror must be
synchronized to achieve the 8:1 interlace. Two options are available: (a) the
polygon can have all four faces parallel and the vertical scanning mirror provides
the interlace or (b) the polygon faces are cut at slight angles so that each face
moves the line-of-sight down one DAS (4:1 interlace). Then the vertical mirror
moves to provide another 2:1 interlace. The polygon must provide one full rotation
for each location of the vertical scanning mirror. Figure 6-21 illustrates the scan
pattern for the latter case.
The required rotation rate is
_ revs
rotation rate = 2------
frame Jy
3Q frames
s
- 60 rps - 3600 rpm . (6-46)
Rotating polygons typically have a scan efficiency of 50%. The active scan time is
1
1
I active
6O/7W facets j
(o.s)= 2.08 ms.
(6-47)
The scan velocity is 12/2.08 = 5760 mrad/s and r(hven = 0.1/5760 = 17.4 ps. The
frame time affects the scan velocity and detector dwell time. Usually the scan
efficiency is not compatible with monitor requirements. The data stream must be
reformatted in either a digital scan converter (EMUX system) or by a vidicon
(EOMUX system) to achieve monitor compatibility.
Detector
1
Polygon
Effect
Detector
40
Detector
1
Detector
40
Figure 6-21. Scan pattern.
6.4.2. DETECTOR TIME CONSTANT
The detector temporal response is assumed to follow a simple RC
network response where Td is the detector electrical time constant (FLIR92 ARG-
H)
MTFfconstant (fe ) “
_____1
71 + (2^/J2
The 3 dB frequency is f(i3dB=^^Td • The total detector MTF is the combination of
its spatial response and its electrical response.
6.4.3. AMPLIFIERS
The common module pre-amplifier and post-amplifier responses can
each be described by a single-pole, low pass filter whose fe3dB frequency is
between 100 kHz and 500 kHz. The 3-dB frequency is often called the amplifier
bandwidth.
^TFamp(fe) =
(6-49)
Since common modules have both pre-amplifiers and post-amplifiers, the total
response is
MTF - MTF MTF
amps л pre- amp post-amp •
(6-50)
6.4.4. ELECTRICAL FILTERS
The common module amplifier bandwidth is usually much broader than
that required by the signal. The signal is assumed to be band-limited by the
detector spatial frequency cutoff. Low pass filters are added to limit the noise
bandwidth and, ideally, match it to the signal bandwidth. These filters can be in
many forms. A system may have just one or may have several in series. The
common module design typically has a filter on the pre-amplifier and one on the
post-amplifier. The exact location of the filters in the circuit is at the discretion of
the designer.
With the desire to amplify all signals and minimize noise, a rule-of-the-
thumb suggests that the "ideal" low pass filter should be matched to the detector
cutoff. Here it is assumed that the signal is limited by the detector cutoff, fdco
(Figure 6-22). The "ideal" filter is
filter
when fe< —
a
(6-51)
MTFfll{er = 0 elsewhere .
While the ideal filter is useful for illustrative purposes, it is not physically
realizable. The MTF for a N-pole, low pass filter (also called a N-pole Butterworth
filter) (FLIR92 ARG-13) is
MTFfilter{fe) =
(6-52)
When N—>co, it becomes an ideal filter. The precise filter selected depends upon
the application. Since the eye tends to ignore high frequency noise, a higher cutoff
may be used. On the other hand, electronic detection is very sensitive to noise and
a lower cutoff may be appropriate.
Figure 6-22. Ideal low pass filter as a function of normalized
spatial frequency fx !fdco . The electrical response has been
referred to object spatial frequency. The ideal filter does not
attenuate any signal passed by the detector.
Common module systems are AC coupled to remove the large
uninformative background. The difference between the target and its background
is amplified and displayed. AC coupling is achieved with a high-pass filter, The
AC cut on frequency should be as low as possible to minimize AC coupling
artifacts (e.g., droop and overshoot). For a N-pole, high-pass filter used for AC
coupled systems (FLIR92 ARG-12)
MTFfiUer{fe) =
(6-53)
Example 6-4
FILTER BAND WIDTHS
The purpose of the low pass filter is to limit the noise bandwidth without
significantly affecting the signal. The ideal filter, shown in Figure 6-22, will pass
the entire signal. Physically realizable circuits do not have the ideal shape and
therefore there is a tradeoff between signal fidelity and noise bandwidth.
Many texts suggest that a bandwidth equal to one-half of the reciprocal of
the detector dwell time will pass most of the signal energy. However, to faithfully
reproduce the signal temporal characteristics, a wider bandwidth is required. When
using a single-pole, low pass filter, a range of bandwidths may be bounded by
(6-54)
Usmg the system described in Example 6-2, r(hvell = 27.78 ps,/eC/ = 18 kHz and/eC2
= 72 kHz. Figure 6-23 illustrates the response, MTFdetectorMTFfllter, for these single-
pole filters. An electrical filter response is usually plotted in log-log coordinates.
Since linear coordinates are used, the shape of the MTF curve looks different than
that shown in electrical engineering texts (where log-log plots are used). While a
single-pole filter with feC2 = 72 kHz does not significantly affect the signal, it does
produce an excessive noise bandwidth because the noise bandwidth is proportional
to MTFfllter Vortman and Bar-Lev16 provided a formal approach to filter
optimization. High order Butterworth filters can approximate the ideal filter
characteristics. But these filters increase circuit complexity and cost.
Figure 6-23. MTFdetectorMTFfllter for two single-pole, low pass
filters. When fe3(lB = 72 kHz, the signal is only slightly
degraded but the noise bandwidth may be excessive.
6.5. LEDS
In a common module system, the LEDs are modeled (FLIR92 ARG-16)
as rectangular shaped emitters
OTFLED (Л ) = sine (aLED fx),
(6-55)
where ar Fn is the LED angular subtense that is determined by the LED size and the
effective focal length of the visual optics lens system.
6.6. VISUAL OPTICS
The visual optics couples the output of the LEDs to the eye. It effectively
places the LEDs at infinity for comfortable viewing. The appropriate functional
form of OTFoptics is used for the visual optics. Here, Xave is the average wavelength
of the LED radiation.
6.7. EYE RESPONSE
The sine wave response (SWR) is used as an approximation to the eye-
brain MTF. The SWR depends on diffraction by the pupil, aberrations of the lens,
finite size of the photoreceptors, ocular tremor, and neural interconnections within
the retina and brain. Diffraction and aberrations vary with overall luminance,
monitor brightness, and chromatic composition of the light. Since the retina is
composed of rods and cones of varying densities, the location and size of the
object significantly affect the SWR. The usual measurement is to determine the
minimum contrast required to just perceive a target. The sine wave response is the
inverse of the contrast demand curve normalized to unity. It is sometimes called
the human visual system MTF or HVS-MTF.
The SWR ignores spatial noise, background luminance, angular
orientation, and exposure time. Each of these parameters significantly affects the
interpretation of image visibility. The MTF in the purest sense is noise
independent but the eye's response is very sensitive to spatial and temporal noise.
Therefore, the SWR is only an approximation to the true response. Furthermore,
the overall population exhibits large variations in response. Any MTF
approximation used for the eye therefore is only a crude approximation and
probably represents the largest uncertainty in the overall MTF analysis approach.
Factors that affect observer performance include angular subtense of the monitor
(usually selected to reduce raster effects), minimum subtense of the target, target-
background contrast, brightness of the background immediately around the target,
overall illumination, gamma of the monitor, observation time, and dynamic range
of the monitor. Visual psychophysical data can be found in texts by Farrell and
Booth17 and Biberman.18
6.7.1. CONVERSION: EYE SPATIAL FREQUENCY to
SPATIAL FREQUENCY
The spatial frequency presented to the eye depends upon the monitor
size, W, and the distance the observer is from the monitor, R, and the electronic
zoom, Z (if present). In the visual psychophysical literature, feye has units of
cycles/deg
A x
2 tan-1 -------------
I 2x17.45хЯ^Их Л
\ Л-
(6-56)
The factor, 17.45, converts degrees to mrad. The small angle approximation may
nofbe valid since the observer can get arbitrarily close to the monitor. However, it
is appropriate when the eye is centered on the monitor center and the target is
small. Here,
eye
17 AS* HFOV
I R)
(6-57)
where W/R is the visual angle subtended by monitor. The system magnification is
M
1 sys
FOV subtended by observer W Z
HFOV ” R HFOV *
(6-58)
Then, for small angles
feye
M
1 sys
(6-59)
Although early common module systems did not have electronic zoom, it is
included here for completeness. Electronic zoom may be used in any system that
digitally processes the video signal. These conversions assume that there is no
distortion in either the imaging system field-of-view or the monitor.
6.7.2. EYE MTF
The eye's detection capability depends upon the visual angle subtended
by the target size and the distance from the monitor to the observer. As shown in
Figure 6-24, in the absence of noise, the eye's contrast threshold is characteristi-
cally J-shaped. The eye is most sensitive to periodic targets whose spatial
frequencies19 range between 3 and 8 cycles/deg. The decrease in sensitivity at low
frequencies is due to the eye's inhibitory signal processing component.
Spatial Frequency (Cycles/Deg)
Figure 6-24. Representative observer contrast threshold curve.
LT and Ln are the target and background luminances
respectively.
Various researchers modeled the inverse of the contrast threshold curve
and labeled this the MTF (Figure 6-25). MTF values for spatial frequencies less
than 0.5 cycles/deg are simple extrapolations and should not be considered as
accurate. Nill20 recommended
0.19 + 0.81
(6-60)
Schulze21 recommended
-0.1138Д,е _ е-0.325Д,в
(6-61)
the Campbell-Robson data22 can be approximated by
-1-4 logj„
MTFeye(feye)^10 L
J eye
fpeak
(6-62)
and deJong and Bakker21 used
-.2
M7^(AjJ~sin2
(6-63)
Since there is significant interest is in detecting small targets, or
equivalently, seeing detail, only the high frequency (feye > fpeak) has been modeled
by several researchers. That is, they neglected the low frequency inhibitory
response. Komfeld and Lawson24 (FLIR92 ARG-25) suggested that when ocular
tremors are included, the MTF can be represented by
y-, feye
MTFeye(feye)*e~ ™ , (6-64)
where Г is a light-level dependent eye response factor that was presented in tabular
form25 by Ratches et. al. Figure 6-26 shows the data and a 3rd order polynomial fit
given by
г = 1.444 - 0.344log(s) + 0.039log2 («)+ 0.00197 log3 (s), (6-65)
and В is the monitor brightness in foot-lamberts.
Figure 6-25. Various mathematical approximations to the
eye's MTF.
Figure 6-26. Gamma variation. The squares are the data25
given in Ratches et. al. and the smooth curve is the 3rd order
approximation.
LLoyd26 suggested the eye's line spread function can be modeled as a
Gaussian function whose MTF is
MTF^ 2
(6-66)
where 0.0115 < < 0.0172. Figure 6-27 illustrates these representations.
Considering the large variation in observer responses, these curves have a similar
shape when f^e > fpeak. The original NVL 1975 model25 and FLIR92 use the
Kornfeld-Lawson eye model. This model was validated by the U.S. Army when
detecting tank-sized targets at modest ranges. This translates into modest spatial
frequencies.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/deg)
Figure 6-27 Gaussian, Kornfeld-Lawson, and Mill's eye
model. The Gaussian curves illustrate veye = 0.0115 and veye =
0.0172. For mid to high spatial frequencies (6 to 16
cycles/mrad) the curves are similar to within a multiplicative
factor.
With the introduction of NVTherm29 (which accounts for sampling
effects), NVL suggested an eye model introduced by Overington’ and used by
Barten.31 The overall eye response depends upon several elements: pupil, retina,
and tremor:
MTF = MTF , MTF MTF
ivi 11 eye ivi 11 retinaivii l tremor •
(6-67)
The pupil MTF is
where
MTFpupil{feye) = enp -
2.504/eje
pupil
f pupil = exP (3.663- 0.026lD2upil logpupil) ’
(6-68)
(6-69)
and
N =
pupil
0.7155 +
0.277
’D pupil
(6-70)
The pupil diameter depends upon the display brightness В (units of foot-lamberts).
For monocular viewing
logg
Dpupil = -9.011 +13.25 e 21-082 .
(6-71)
For binocular viewing, the pupil diameter is reduced by 0.5 mm
DpupU = -9.511 + 13.25/2' »82 . (6-72)
The retina and tremor MTFs are
MTF • (f )-e °-01179-f^1,21
11 retina eye ) e
(6-73)
and
2
MTF ( f ) - e °'001458Л^
1 J tremor \J eye'
(6-74)
Figure 6-28 compares the NVTherm model to the other models.
Figure 6-28. NVTherm eye model (binocular viewing with В
= 50 Ft-L) compared to Nill, Kornfeld-Lawson, and Gaussian
(aeye= 0.0172) models.
The MRT should follow, in part, the shape of the eye's threshold curve.
Measured MRT data exhibits departures from the predicted MRT when using the
NVL 1975 model and FLIR92 for low and high spatial frequencies. As a result
deJong23 and others27,28 suggested that better MRT predictions are possible when
using an MTF similar to that shown in Figure 6-25.
The Komfeld-Lawson and the NVTherm eye model appear to follow the
other eye models (to within a multiplicative factor) for mid-range spatial
frequencies. This multiplicative factor becomes a normalization issue for the MRT.
Insufficient data exists to say with certainty which eye model is best. Because of
this uncertainty, range predictions cannot be placed on an absolute scale. All
analyses, no matter which eye model is used, must only be used for comparative
performance purposes.
Two operational scenarios are possible: the observer is allowed to move
his head or the head is fixed in space. Since the eye's detection capability depends
upon the angular subtense of the target, head movement may provide different
results than if the head is fixed in space. In the laboratory, the distance to the
monitor is not usually specified or limited in any way. To maximize detection
capability (stay on the minimum of the contrast threshold curve), an observer
subconsciously moves toward the monitor to perceive small targets and further
away to see larger targets. By allowing the observer to adjust his viewing distance
to the monitor, he apparently optimizes several interrelated detection criteria that
include striving for apparent edge sharpness and maximizing his perceived signal-
to-noise ratio. This apparently results in an equal detection capability for all spatial
frequencies such that eye's contrast sensitivity approaches a constant. This results
in a nearly constant MTF that is called the "non-limiting eye MTF" (FLIR92
ARG-24)
MTFeye (feye ) = 1 when movement is allowed . (6-75)
6.7.3. NOISY IMAGES
Although the contrast threshold is reported as J-shaped, the actual shape
depends upon the noise power spectral density.32'34 If the noise is restricted to
certain spatial frequencies, then the detection of targets of comparable spatial
frequencies becomes more difficult. The observer’s ability to see a specific spatial
frequency target depends upon the noise content in the neighborhood of that
spatial frequency (Figure 6-29). Low spatial noise frequency components will
interfere with detecting low frequency targets (large objects). Mid-spatial
frequency noise increases the contrast threshold curve at mid-frequencies and so
on. These noise factors are included in the FLIR92 model via the three-dimensi-
onal noise model. As such, they are not included in the eye MTF.
Frequency Noise
Noise Only
High Frequency
Noise Only
No Noise
о
о
Mid Frequency
Noise Only
100
Spatial Frequency (cycles/deg)
Figure 6-29. Effects of spectral noise on the contrast
threshold. The MRT should approximately follow the shape of
the contrast threshold curve.
6.8. SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLE: RANDOM MOTION
EFFECTS
A common module FLIR (0.1 mrad) has the following characteristics: an
effective focal length = 20 inches, input aperture = 10 inches, or = 50 grad rms,
scanner efficiency = 80%, frame rate = 30 Hz, interlace ratio = 2:1, detectors array
= 180x1 elements, detector element size of 0.002x0.002" on 0.004" centers, low
pass filter with a 3 dB point of 21.6 kHz, and horizontal field-of-view = 48 mrad.
What is the system’s horizontal MTF at the output of the pre-amplifier? What
component limits the system MTF?
SinceXco=Z>o/2 = (25.4 mm/10 pm) = 25.4 cycles/mrad,
The detector DAS is a = 0.002/20 = 0.1 mrad and
MTFdetector (fx ) = sinc (0-1 fx ) •
(6-77)
The 2:1 interlace ratio provides 360 IR lines. The scan velocity is
AF N
rJ scene
^sc
48 x 30 x 360 _ mrad
= 3600
180x0.8------------5
(6-78)
Then ffco =fe3dBN=21600/3 600 = 6 cycles/mrad and
MTFamp(fx) =
(6-79)
The system MTF is plotted in Figure 6-30. Random motion is the
limiting MTF. As shown in Figure 6-16, when the rms value of the random
motion is greater than 10% of the DAS, the system MTF is affected. It is
essential to reduce jitter for system improvement. If the random motion is
reduced to 10 grad though appropriate hardware design, the system MTF
increases (Figure 6-31). While further reduction in random motion will improve
the MTF, it may not be cost-effective to do it. It is usually cost-effective to
make all subsystem MTFs equal over the spatial frequencies of interest. Here the
random motion need only be 20 grad (Figure 6-32). Since each component
provides roughly the same MTF, it is now prudent to increase the MTF by
making the change that is least costly.
Figure 6-30. Component and system MTFs. cr = 50 grad.
Stabilization (high frequency jitter) is the limiting MTF. The
detector cutoff at 10 cycles/mrad is assumed to be the system
cutoff.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 6-31. Component and system MTFs. vr = 10 prad.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 6-32. Component and system MTFs. o; = 20 grad. The
subsystem MTFs are approximately equal over the region of
interest: zero to fdc0.
6.9. CENTRAL LIMIT THEOREM
The central limit theorem suggests that the product of a series of
monotonically decreasing subsystem MTFs will tend toward a Gaussian shape.
Specifically, the MTFs need to be roughly equivalent with approximately the same
cutoff values. This applies to MTFs such as MTTontic„ MTFtconstant, and MTTfi|ter. It
jl jl uptivs" iCAjiibidiii? niter
does not apply to MTFdetector. When the system is not detector-limited the Gaussian
representation may be adequate for back-of-the-envelope calculations
where asys is simply a system constant and has no physical meaning.
6.10. REFERENCES
1 FLIR92 uses many of the equations given here. ARG-1 refers to Equation 1 in FLIR92 Thermal
Imaging Systems Performance Model, Analyst's Reference Guide, Document RG5008993, Ft. Belvoir,
VA, January 1993.
2. R. R. Shannon, "Aberrations and their Effect on Images," in Geometric Optics, Critical Review of
Technology, R. Fischer, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 531, pp. 27-37, (1985).
3. M Bom and E. Wolf, Principles of Optics, 3rd edition, pp. 468-469, Pergamon Press, New York
(1965).
4. L. Levi and R. Austing, "Tables of the MTF of a Defocussed Perfect Lens," Applied Optics, Vol.
7(5), pp. 967-974 (1968) and Errata, Applied Optics, Vol. 7(11), pg. 2258 (1968).
5. In "A Useful Optical Engineering Approximation," Optics & Photonics News, pp. 34-37, (April
1994), R. R. Shannon references W. H. Steel, "The Defocused Image of Sinusoidal Gratings," Optica
Acta, Vol. 3(2), pp. 65-74 (1956).
6. W. H. Press, В. P. Flannery, S. A. Teukolsky, and W. T. Vettling, Numerical Recipes, pp. 172-173,
Cambridge University Press, New York, (1989).
7. J. M. Hilkert, M. Bowen and J. Wang, "Specifications for Image Stabilization Systems" in Tactical
Infrared Systems, J. W. Tuttle, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1498, pp. 24-38 (1991).
8. G. Conrad, "Reconnaissance System Performance Predictions Through Image Processing," in
Airborne Reconnaissance XIV, P A. Henkel, F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 138-145 (1990).
9. D. Wulich and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting From Mechanical Vibrations,"
Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 529-533 (1987).
10. M. Fisher, O. Hadar, and N. S. Kopeika, "Numerical Calculation of Modulation Transfer
Functions for Low Frequency Mechanical Vibrations," in Airborne ReconnaissanceXIV, P A. Henkel,
F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 72-83 (1990).
ILS. Rudoler, O. Hadar, M. Fisher, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from
Mechanical Vibrations, Part II: Experiment," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(5), pp. 577-589 (1991).
12. O. Hadar, F. Fisher, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from Mechanical
Vibrations, Part III: Numerical Calculation of Modulation Transfer Function," Optical Engineering,
Vol. 31(3), pp. 581-589 (1992).
13. O. Hadar, I. Dror, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from Mechanical
Vibrations, Part IV: Real-time Numerical Calculation of Optical Transfer Functions and Experimental
Verification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(2), pp. 566-578 (1994).
14. A System Engineering Approach to Imaging, N. S. Kopeika, pp. 411-440, SPIE Optical
Engineering Press, Bellingham, WA (1998).
15. W. N. Peters and D. Schribner, "Transformation for the Unified Linear Analysis of Optics and
Electronics," Applied Optics, Vol. 24(9), pp. 1247-1248 (1985).
16 J. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Optimal Electronic Response for Parallel Thermal Viewing Systems,"
Optical Engineering, Vol. 23(4), pp. 431-435 (1984).
17. R. J. Farrell and J. M. Booth, Design Handbook for Imagery Interpretation Equipment, Reprinted
with corrections, Report DI80-19063-1, Boeing Aerospace Company, Seattle Wash, February 1984.
18. L. M. Biberman, ed., Perception of Displayed Information, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
19. В. O. Hultgren, "Subjective Quality Factor Revisited," in Human Vision and Electronic Imaging:
Models, Methods and Applications, В E. Rogowitz and J. P. Allebach, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol
1249, pp. 12-22 (1990).
20. N. Nill, "A Visual Model Weighted Cosine Transform for Image Compression and Quality
Measurements," IEEE Trans Comm, Vol. 33(6), pp. 551-557 (1985).
21. T. J. Schulze, "A Procedure for Calculating the Resolution of Electro-Optical Systems," in
Airborne Reconnaissance XIV, P A. Henkel, F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 317-327, (1990).
22. F. W. Campbell and J. G. Robson, "Application of Fourier Analysis to the Visibility of Gratings,"
J. Physiol. Vol. 197, pp. 551-566 (1968).
23. A. N. deJong and S. J. M. Bakker, "Fast and Objective MRTD Measurements," in Infrared Systems
- Design and Testing, P. R. Hall and J. S. Seeley, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 916, pp. 127-143 (1988)
24. G. H. Komfeld and W. R. Lawson, "Visual Perception Model," Journal of the Optical Society of
America, Vol. 61(6), pp. 811-820 (1971).
25. J. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night
Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," US Army Electronics
Command Report ECOM Report 7043, pg. 11, Ft. Monmouth, NJ (1975).
26. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, pg. 125, Plenum Press, New York (1975).
27. M. A. Karim, M. L. Gao, and S. H. Zheng, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model:
a Critical Evaluation," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1788-1796 (1991).
28. J. G. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Improved Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model
for Infrared Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 492-498 (1987).
29 R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and B. O'Kane, "Sampled Imaging Sensor Design using the
MTF Squeeze Model to Characterize Spurious Response," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling, and TestingX, G. C. Holst ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 61-73 (1999).
30.1 . Overington, Vision and Acquisition, Pentech Press, London (1976).
31. P. Barten, "The SQRI as a Measure for VDU Image Quality," Society of Information Display 92
Digest, pp. 867-870 (1992).
32. S. Daly, "Application of a Noise Adaptive Contrast Sensitivity Function in Image Data
Compression," Optical Engineering, Vol. 29(8), pp. 977-987 (1990).
33. H. Pollehn and H. Roehrig, "Effect of Noise on the Modulation Transfer Function of the Visual
Channel," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 60, pp. 842-848 (1970).
34. A. Van Meeteren and J. M. Valeton, "Effects of Pictorial Noise Interfering With Visual Detection,"
Journal of the Optical Society of America A, Vol. 5(3), pp. 438-444 (1988).
EXERCISES
1. Plot the back-of-the envelope approximation OTFdifr (Equation 6-9) and the
theoretical OTFdiff (Equation 6-5) on the same graph. For what spatial frequencies
is the approximation valid?
2. Plot Equation 6-22 using the approximation given in Equation 6-23. Assume a
peak-to-peak wave-front error of 0.75 waves. Compare the plot with Figure 6-6.
3. Plot MTFopticsMTFdetector for when//cy/,co equals 0.2, 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, and 2.0. Is
there an optimum ratio? Is there an advantage to using an infinitely small detector
or is there a reasonable limit on detector size?
4. Why would you design a system where fiJfoco = 0.5? (Hint: review Section
3.1.2., Extended Source).
5. List three causes for (a) linear motion, (b) sinusoidal motion, and (c) random
motion.
6. A common module system operating in the LWIR spectral region has an 8-inch
aperture and a DAS of 0.1 mrad. Calculate MTFdiffMTFdetectorMTFrandom at 4, 6, and
8 cycles/mrad. Let ur vary from 0 to 50% of the DAS in increments of 5%. Plot the
MTF for each spatial frequency as a function of ur in both linear and logarithmic
coordinates. Is there an optimum value (maximum acceptable value) for <7r?
7. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume the optical diameter is 4 inches. Comment on the
differences between the results.
8. What is the required scan velocity for an array consisting of 480x4 elements.
The frame rate is 30 Hz and the scan efficiency is 0.80. The HFOV is 48 mrad.
The DAS is 0.1 mrad. What is the detector dwell time?
9. Plot the MTF for a N-pole Butterworth filter (Equation 6-52 for N = 2, 4, 6, 8,
and 10. Also plot the ideal filter (Equation 6-51). How many poles (what value of
N) are required to approximate the ideal filter? Assume both have the same cutoff
fe3dB'
10 The high pass filter (Equation 6-53) is often used to reduce detector 1/f noise.
The 1/f noise knee may vary from a few hertz to 1 kHz. Plot
MTFopticsMTFdetectorMTFfllter for the system described in Example 6-2. The optical
aperture is 10 inches. Let fe3dB be 10, 100, 300, 600, and 1000 Hz. What effect does
fe3dB have on the system MTF?
7
EOMUX SYSTEMS
The common module system described in Chapter 6 permitted only one
observer to view the imagery. To provide multiple observers access, a vidicon
scanned the LED output. The vidicon converted parallel scanned infrared
information into a serial data stream consistent with the monitor requirements. As
such, the vidicon provided scan conversion. To offset any degradation in MTF, a
boost amplifier can be added in the video chain. MTFoptics, MTFmotion, MTFdetector,
MTFtconstant, MTFamp, MTFflIter, MTFled , MTFvoptics , and MTFeye are identical to
those described in Chapter 6. The electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX) system
added the vidicon, boost and monitor (Figure 7-1). The pre-amplifier, post-
amplifier, filters, and LEDs are matched to the detector and scan velocity whereas
the vidicon and boost amplifier responses are matched to the monitor
requirements.
Careful electronic design insures that the circuitry has linear phase over
the frequencies of interest. By using an MTF approach to model each subsystem, it
is assumed that each subsystem has linear phase. The equations provided in this
chapter are found in many text books. Real circuit responses may deviate from
these theoretical responses. The system analyst must consult with the electronic
designers to insure that the circuits are modeled correctly.
Telescope Detector
Optics
Figure 7-1. Electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX) system.
7.1. VIDICON
The vidicon scans the LED outputs in a manner consistent with monitor
timing requirements. The vidicon converts the number of IR lines, Nscene, into the
numbers of lines displayed on the monitor, Nmonitor. Implicit in the MTF is the
conversion from input brightness on the vidicon to output voltage.
7.1.1. CONVERSION: VIDICON LINES TO SPATIAL
FREQUENCY
Vidicon tube response is typically given in units of lines referenced to the
picture height (lines/РН). There are 2 TV lines per cycle. The conversion from
lines, f^, to spatial frequency is:
fM=2VFOVfx .
(7-1)
If the resolution is given simply as lines, it is assumed that the units are lines/PH.
7.1.2. VIDICON MTF
Many imaging tubes can be modeled1 as
MTFvidicon
(7-2)
where Fra is the value where MTF = e-1. The MTF is experimentally obtained for a
variety of frequencies. A plot of -log(MTF) versus frequency becomes a straight
line in logarithmic coordinates. Both Nv and Fres depend upon the particular device
selected. Nv typically ranges from 1.1 to 2.1. When Nv = 2, the MTF is Gaussian
distributed. Figure 7-2 illustrates three vidicon MTFs. Figure 7-3 provides the
same MTF curves in linear coordinates. Vidicons typically have a gamma of about
0.6 and therefore are nonlinear. As a result, the MTF is only valid for small
signals.
Vidicons sometimes have a nonsymmetric MTF about Fres. Here, two
exponents are used: Nvl and Nv2:
/ f
— I J tvl I
MTFvidicon = e when f^d <Frea, (7-3)
and
/ f \^v2
I J tvl
MTFvidicon = еГ'е' whenftvl > Frea • C7”4)
When fh>[=Fres, MTF = e1 and the MTF is independent of Nv.
Figure 7-2. -Log(MTFvidicon) versus frequency (lines/РН) for
three different tubes and a Gaussian distribution (Nv = 2). The
values in parentheses are (Nv, Fres}.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (lines/PH)
Figure 7-3. MTFvidicon versus frequency (lines/PH) for three
different tubes and a Gaussian distribution. The values in
parentheses are (Nv, Fres).
7.2. VIDEO AMPLIFIERS and FILTERS
Both active circuits and tuned circuits can provide boost. Boost simply
refers to any circuit whose MTF is greater than unity. It can compensate for almost
any MTF degradation caused by other subsystems. In the early literature, each
subsystem was called an aperture. Therefore, any circuit that improved a
subsystem MTF provided "aperture correction." Each electronic filter must be
carefully designed to provide a linear phase over the range of frequencies of
interest. Nonlinearities will cause signal distortion.
7.2.1. CONVERSION: VIDEO FREQUENCY TO SPATIAL
FREQUENCY
Boost amplifiers and video filters operate on the video signal. The
bandwidth of these filters must be consistent with monitor requirements. The video
frequency,/,, is related to spatial frequency by
HFOV
t J'
* line
(7-5)
where tline is the active line time of the monitor. Table 7-1 gives some nominal
values. The actual values may vary by 10% from the nominal value.
Table 7-1
STANDARD VIDEO TIMING
Standard Number of active lines, N monitor Active line time, tlme
525 lines (RS 170) 485 52.25 ps
875 lines 809 31.1 ps
625 lines (European standard) 577 53 ps
7.2.2. BOOST CIRCUITRY
The boost amplifier can be an active analog circuit whose peaking
compensates for any specified MTF roll-off. Originally, boost was achieved with a
time-delay feedback circuit because it had a linear phase. Today, a variety of
circuits are available. Its MTF (FLIR92 ARG-14) is:
MTFboost
1 - COS Л
(7-6)
K \
1N >
where К is the boost amplitude, N is the boost order (usually 7V=1) and/oorf is the
boost frequency. When K= 1, no boost occurs.
Figure 7-4 illustrates the boost MTF for several values of К with 7V= 1.
When used with the all the other subsystem MTFs, the resultant MTFsystem is
typically less than one for all spatial frequencies. If the boost amplitude is too
large, ringing may occur. Since the boost circuitry modifies a serial data stream,
ringing will only occur in the horizontal direction.
Tuned filters can also provide boost:
(7-7)
where Q is the quality factor and equal to boost amplitude when/, = fboost. A net
lead circuit can also provide boost. The boost frequency is determined by the
relationship between the flead and the other subsystem MTFs.
(7-8)
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 7-4. MTFboost for several different boost amplitudes as a
function of fjfboost with N = 1. Excessive boost will cause
ringing on edges in the horizontal direction.
7.2.3. VIDEO AMPLIFIERS
The video may have other filters to limit the bandwidth. Section 6 4.4.
Electrical Filters listed several different types. For example, in the video domain,
the N-pole Butterworth is
MTFvid =
(7-9)
The 3-dB electrical frequency is often called the video bandwidth.
7.3. MONITORS
The monitor MTF is a composite MTF that includes both the internal
amplifier response and the CRT phosphor response. Implicit in the MTF is the
conversion from input voltage to output monitor brightness. The same functional
form can describe vidicon and monitor MTFs:
ftvl
TV
MTF = e
л monitor
res
(7-Ю)
Although not explicitly stated, Equation 7-2 and Equation 7-8 imply radial
symmetry: The MTF is the same in both the vertical and horizontal directions. If
Fres is measured in the vertical direction, then it should be multiplied by the
monitor aspect ratio to obtain the resolution in the horizontal direction.
If the monitor is spot size limited and spot size is Gaussian then
2
MTF = e
* monitor c
2-.^. raster
I mnm
nlf/rn r-p
( Zoom
(7-И)
When the electronic zoom is unity, the equation reduces to FLIR92 ARG-21.
Manufacturers of monitors use different methods to characterize monitor
resolution. They include (1) TV limiting response where the MTF is equal to
0.025, (2) the value where the MIT is 10%, (3) when the luminance is down 3 dB,
(4) shrinking raster, (5) when the output drops to 50% of the amplitude, (6) the
value where the MTF is 50%, and (7) where the amplitude is e'1. Table 7-2
provides the approximate relationships between these measures. For example, if
the resolution is expressed as the TV limiting resolution, 7Vft,, then апюп = 1/(2.31
With televisions, each line is created by an electron beam and the
phosphor brightness is assumed to be Gaussian. If the individual lines are
separated, there are dark bands between the lines that create a modulation whose
frequency is fraster (raster frequency). Using the Nyquist criterion, fraster requires two
times more lines than the number available on the monitor. This fictitious number
is often used for monitor calculations. The literature relates monitor resolution to
this fictitious number ("half-cycles"). Therefore, there is a factor of two difference
between the values shown in Table 7-2 and the literature.2
Table 7-2
MONITOR CONVERSION FACTORS
LINES to a GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTION
Resolution metric (lines) Conversion
TV limiting 2.-? 1 ^ШОП
MTF1TO 2.9 j crmon
TV3dB 3. j3 ctmon
Shrinking raster
Amplitude = 50%
mtf50% □ .3 J crпюп
Amplitude = e-1 5.66 ctmon
If the TV limiting resolution is not known, it is assumed to be equal to
the number of monitor lines
/V = N
1 1 tv 11 monitor
(7-12)
and/„„„= VFOVfx. Table 7-1 provides some typical Nmonitor values.
For EOMUX, EMUX, and staring systems, the user typically supplies the
monitor. Thus, at least two calculations are necessary. One for laboratory
measurements and one for the monitor used during actual operation. If other
monitors are used for field testing, then those monitor characteristics must be used
for performance predictions. The system should not be monitor-limited. High
resolution monitors do not offer any "extra" resolution for the entire system.
Rather, high resolution monitors just insure that all the information available is
displayed.
A side issue here is whether the raster is visually obvious. It may be
better to accept poorer vertical MTF to suppress the raster pattern. An obvious
pattern is disturbing to the observer and he will claim the image quality is poor.
7.4. SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLE
The system described in Section 6-8 has been EO multiplexed. The
LEDs, relay lens, vidicon, boost filter, and monitor MTFs are unity over the spatial
frequencies of interest. A stabilized mirror reduces the high frequency jitter to is
20 prad. The 14-inch square monitor has a brightness of 10 fL. The observer is
initially at a distance of 29 inches but then moves to 13.45 inches to see more
detail. What is the effect of observer viewing distance on the horizontal MTF?
, . FOV subtended by observer / \ z
Magnification =-------------------------[electronic zoom) (7-13)
System FOV
Zoom.
u sys
(7-14)
At the 29 inch viewing distance,
0eye - 2 tan
' D
2R
480 шгш/ and 0sys=48mrad . (7-15)
With no electronic zoom, Msys= 10. Using Equation 6-65, when В = 10, Г = 1.07.
Using the Komfeld-Lawson eye model (Equation 6-64)
(7-16)
Figure 7-5 illustrates all the subsystem components considered. Here, the
observer is too far from the monitor and his eye limits his ability to see detail (high
spatial frequencies). Three choices are available to improve system performance:
(a) move closer, (b) use a larger monitor, or (c) use electronic zoom. Electronic
zoom is equivalent to moving closer to the monitor. However, excessive zoom
may create an unacceptable blocky image
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 7-5. Observer 29 inches from monitor. MTFoptics,
MTFt,ctccl0„ MTFoptics, MTFmotion, and MTFfilKr are identical with
the MTFs given in Figure 6-33. The observer's eye MTF limits
the system MTF.
At 13.45 inches,
eye
= 2 tan 1
= 960 mrad
(7-17)
and Msys = 20. As shown in Figure 7-6, the MTFs of all the subsystems are
approximately equal. Therefore to improve performance further, modify the
subsystem that is the least costly to change. Figures 7-5 and 7-6 assume that the
observer is at a fixed distance from the monitor. With head movement MTFeye = 1
and the overall system MTF is shown in Figure 6-32.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 7-6. Observer 13.45 inches from monitor.
7.5. REFERENCES
1. C. B. Johnson, "A Method for Characterizing Electro-Optical Device Modulation Transfer
Functions," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14(6), pp. 413-415 (1970).
2. L. M. Biberman, "Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. M. Biberman, ed.,
pp. 16-19, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
EXERCISES
1. A vidicon manufacturer reported that the MTF is 0.8, 0.5, and 0.2 at 200, 500,
and 1000 lines respectively. What are Nv and Freft
2. A vidicon response is Gaussian. What is a if the MTF equals e'1 when the input
is 800 lines?
3. An imaging system contams an array of 480x480 detector elements. The output
is RS 170. Table 7-1 indicates that RS 170 displays 485 lines. What value should
be used in Equation 7-10?
4. A common module system produces 360 independent IR lines. Its output is
interpolated to produce 480 TV lines. What value should be used in Equation 7-
10?
5. A boost circuit has been added to the system described in Figure 7-5. The boost
amplitude, K, is 4. Plot the resultant MTFsys when fboost is 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz,
5.51 MHz, 7.35 MHz, and 9.19 MHz. The HFOV is 48 mrad and the output is in an
RS 170 format. Is there an optimum boost frequency?
6. An observer is free to move his head when viewing the imagery. Here, the non-
limiting eye MTF is used. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume that the eye MTF is unity.
Is there an optimum boost frequency?
7. Discuss the differences and similarities between the plots obtained from
Exercise 6 and Exercise 7.
8. Using the system described in Figure 7-5, add a net lead circuit (Equation 7-6).
Let fead be 0.92 MHz, 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz and 7.35 MHz. Is there an
optimum value for feaf>
9. Does boost alter the signal-to-noise ratio? If so why? If not, why not? What is
the advantage of boost?
10. A technician has three monitors available with resolutions (TV limiting) of
300, 500, and 1000 lines. Which monitor would you recommend for the system
described in Figure 7-5? The monitors cost $20, $500, and $5,000 respectively.
Would you change your recommendation?
7.5. REFERENCES
1. C. B. Johnson, "A Method for Characterizing Electro-Optical Device Modulation Transfer
Functions," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14(6), pp. 413-415 (1970).
2. L. M. Biberman, "Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. M. Biberman, ed.,
pp. 16-19, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
EXERCISES
1. A vidicon manufacturer reported that the MTF is 0.8, 0.5, and 0.2 at 200, 500,
and 1000 lines respectively. What are Nv and Freft
2. A vidicon response is Gaussian. What is a if the MTF equals e'1 when the input
is 800 lines?
3. An imaging system contams an array of 480x480 detector elements. The output
is RS 170. Table 7-1 indicates that RS 170 displays 485 lines. What value should
be used in Equation 7-10?
4. A common module system produces 360 independent IR lines. Its output is
interpolated to produce 480 TV lines. What value should be used in Equation 7-
10?
5. A boost circuit has been added to the system described in Figure 7-5. The boost
amplitude, K, is 4. Plot the resultant MTFsys when fboost is 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz,
5.51 MHz, 7.35 MHz, and 9.19 MHz. The HFOV is 48 mrad and the output is in an
RS 170 format. Is there an optimum boost frequency?
6. An observer is free to move his head when viewing the imagery. Here, the non-
limiting eye MTF is used. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume that the eye MTF is unity.
Is there an optimum boost frequency?
7. Discuss the differences and similarities between the plots obtained from
Exercise 6 and Exercise 7.
8. Using the system described in Figure 7-5, add a net lead circuit (Equation 7-6).
Let fead be 0.92 MHz, 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz and 7.35 MHz. Is there an
optimum value for feaf>
9. Does boost alter the signal-to-noise ratio? If so why? If not, why not? What is
the advantage of boost?
10. A technician has three monitors available with resolutions (TV limiting) of
300, 500, and 1000 lines. Which monitor would you recommend for the system
described in Figure 7-5? The monitors cost $20, $500, and $5,000 respectively.
Would you change your recommendation?
The "front-end" includes all the subsystems up to the DSC. Timing for
these systems is matched to the signal requirements as determined by the optics,
scanner and detector. The "back-end" includes all the subsystems after the DSC.
Monitor requirements dictate the timing requirements for back-end subsystems.
As technology evolved, it became common usage to separate the system
into two major groups: pre-filter and post-filter. While these terms are appropriate
for sampled-data systems, the terminology is used loosely for analog systems. Pre-
filter MTFs are those that occur before sampling. The optics, detector spatial MTF,
and image motion MTFs belong in this class. The post-filter MTFs are those that
occur after the sampler. Noise filters, as the name implies, are those subsystems
that modify the noise spectrum. Precisely which MTFs belong in which group
depends upon the design and is also author dependent.
After sampling, the data is simply an array of numbers residing in a
memory. The data array is manipulated into a format that is consistent to the
monitor requirements. For example, the common module system collects 360
independent infrared lines and most monitors require 480 lines. Expansion into
480 lines can be by achieved simply by replicating some lines or by a more
complicated scheme such as bilinear interpolation. Similar processes may be
employed for formatting the horizontal data. This process of data reformatting is
called image reconstruction. The reconstructed data array is then clocked-out into
a data stream that is consistent with the monitor timing requirements. Then the
digital data passes through a digital-to-analog converter. Post-reconstruction
filtering removes the blockiness associated with the D/А process. The post-
reconstruction filter is sometimes simply called a reconstruction filter.
8.1. MOTION
The effects of relative motion during the entire integration and
interpretation process must be considered. Blur (MTF degradation) depends upon
the amount of movement during the viewing (integration) time (See Section 6-3.,
Motion). There are two different integration times to be considered.
For EMUX systems, the first integration time is the time to convert the
analog data into digital data. Most systems used flash converters which means that
the conversion takes place in less than 1 psec. Motion is usually negligible during
this process and MTF « 1.
Historically, EMUX systems employed a bi-directional scanner. Here,
motion distorts the image: vertical lines may be serrated, mis-registration may
occur field-to-field, and image size may vary depending upon the type of motion.
Machine vision systems, which typically operate on a single field of data, are not
necessarily affected by the image motion seen by an observer. These systems are
affected by the image distortion. Many test procedures analyze a single field of
data. If this is done, MTFmotion will be approximately unity and this is precisely how
the system operates without the observer. Single field analysis cannot include the
eye integration factor. Image blur data is dependent upon the measurement
technique selected.1 If using frame averaging, tint is proportional to the number of
frames averaged.
For the observer, each frame is overlaid on the monitor. Since each image
is at a different location, the combined images will appear smeared on the monitor.
It is the integration of the monitor (persistence of the phosphor) and the integration
within the eye that creates the blur. For EMUX systems, the integration time is
assumed to be equal to the eye integration time. Here tint = te^ 0.1 sec (See Section
19.2.2., SNRth and te).
Thus, two separate system performance calculations are required for
classical EMUX systems: one to predict laboratory values and one to predict field
performance. For laboratory measurements, the system is typically placed on a
vibration-isolated table so the motion may be considered negligible. Although
machine vision analysis is not included in this text, the analyst must be aware of
image motion effects on automatic target recognizers, target cuers, and any
software embedded in the sensor that operates on a field or frame of data.
For scanning integrating detectors, an additional MTF degradation may
be present. It is due to charge accumulation during the finite integration time while
scanning. For a perfectly motionless scene, scanning integrating detectors will still
smear an edge. The linear smear MTF (FLIR92 ARG-5) is
OTFlinear = sine (v /int fx ), (8-1)
where tint is the detector integration time and v is the scan velocity. The function
has the usual meaning: sinc(x)=sin(7ix)/(7ix).
8.2. DETECTOR
Equation 6-25 provides the MTF for rectangular detectors. A TDI
arrangement requires a highly linear scanning system so that the outputs of the
TDI detectors are appropriately added. An error in the scan velocity degrades the
MTF.
SPRITE detectors are more difficult to model due to diffusion broadening
and the dependence upon bias voltage. Uncooled detectors (pyroelectrics) have the
same spatial response as a rectangular detector but have a different electrical
response.
8.2.1. TDI
For common module systems and EOMUX systems, the LED outputs
were scanned by the back face of the scanner. Therefore, any variation in scene
dissection was exactly mimicked in the visible image. As such, those systems
were relatively insensitive to scan velocity errors.
TDI offers noise reduction by having the same area sampled by several
detectors. If N detectors are in series, the SNR increases by Vn. For this concept
to work, the electronic time delay must correspond precisely with the spatial
distance between the elements. If there is a discrepancy in either sync pulse
timing or the scan velocity, the output is smeared and this adversely affects the
MTF.
TDI misalignment degrades the detector2 MTF by
MTFtdi -
s\n(7iNTDIaerror
NTDI Sin(7T«error f x)
(8-2)
where NTDI is the number of TDI elements and aerror is the effective angular error
in aligning the samples. MTFtdi is simply the MTF of an averaging filter for
Ntdi samples displaced aerror one relative to the next (see Section 8.3., MTFs in
the Digital Domain). The effective sampling rate for sample summation is
error
(8-3)
When aerror approaches zero, MTFtd1 approaches unity. Ns is the delay between
the TDI samples expressed as the number of intervening samples, Av/v is the
scan velocity error, and f. is the angular sampling frequency (Figure 8-2). For
systems providing one sample per DAS,/s= \!as. Figure 8-3 portrays the MTF
for four detectors for several different angular errors expressed as a function of
error'
Figure 8-2 Definition of aerror and7Vv.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 8-3. MTF degradation due to mismatch between the
scan velocity and the TDI sample rate expressed as a function
of terror • ^TDI=^-
Figure 8-4 illustrates the effect on scan velocity mismatch for four
detectors with the detector MTF added. As the number of detectors increases,
aerror must decrease significantly to avoid MTF degradation. Equivalently, scan
linearity is a driving design consideration for TDI systems. For staggered arrays
(Figure 8-5), two separate design considerations exist. The first is where only
the detectors on a single line are considered as TDI elements. The second is with
the registration between lines. Improper registration will cause serrations in
vertical lines. While this is not a true MTF degradation, if the individual lines
are below what the eye can resolve, the lines appear to blend so that improper
registration may be considered an MTF degradation. Similarly, if line-to-line
interpolation is used, serrations appear as a MTF degradation. Figure 8-5
illustrates the number of effective number of TDI elements that should be used
in Equation 8-2. Here, the effective number of TDI elements is the total
horizontal extent of the array divided by Ns. This effective number is used only
to assess the MTF degradation caused by scan velocity mismatch. For signal-to-
noise ratio considerations, only the actual number of detectors on one line is
used is used. Staggering effectively increases A7W and scan linearity becomes a
dominant design consideration in these arrays. Fabrication constraints may
ultimately limit the advantages of TDI.
Figure 8-4. MTFdetectorMTFTDI as a function of aenw/DAS The
spatial frequency is normalized to fyfdco. А'Пя^4.
r*-Ns->
nsntdi
(Effective)
Figure 8-5. Effective number TDI elements in a staggered
array.
8.2.2. SPRITE DETECTOR
For SPRITES, the bias voltage is set so that the carrier drift velocity
equals the image scan velocity. Most standard video systems employ four to 12
SPRITE elements. If more elements are used, the scan velocity decreases and the
bias voltage must be similarly reduced. With SPRITES, the responsivity depends
on the bias voltage and low voltage reduces the responsivity. Although more
detectors reduce noise in common module systems, the opposite is true in SPRITE
based systems.
The SPRITE detector MTF is affected by diffusion broadening of the
minority carrier charge as it drifts down the element length. The SPRITE MTF is
dependent upon the bias voltage3 and the detector geometry.4 If these detectors are
long and have a tapered readout, the MTF can be approximated by
MTFdetector ~ MTFeiement MTFdiffusion , (8-4)
where MTFelement is a sine function due to the readout length. As a spatial detector,
it would be appropriate to define the response by an OTF. When diffusion is
added, the detector response tends to remain positive and therefore is labeled as an
MTF. Then (FLIR92 ARG-4)
MTFdetector ~ Sine (Lrd fx) p ’ (&-5)
i+(2^e/x)2
where Lrd is the readout length in mrad. As of this writing, for most SPRITES, the
readout length is 50 pm and then Lrd = (50 pm)/fl. The variable Q is the angular
subtense of the ambipolar diffusion length. Since the ambipolar diffusion length is
typically 25 pm, then Q = (25 pm)/fl. Other applications (such as line scanners)
will require different scan velocities and therefore different bias voltage. These
systems may have a detector MTF that is substantially different.
Figure 8-6 illustrates the SPRITE MTF for a system with a 0.5-m focal
length. Because of the MTF reduction caused by diffusion, electronic boost is used
to compensate for the MTF loss.5 Diffusion broadening also makes it difficult to
assign a DAS to a SPRITE detector. Anamorphic optics (focal length is different in
the scan and cross scan directions) is also used to optimize SPRITE performance.
Fredin6 presented a method to optimize the boost filter parameters along with the
anamorphic ratio. Equation 8-5 provides the scan direction MTF. In the cross scan
direction, the MTF is simply a sine function whose DAS is the detector's physical
width divided by the effective focal length in the cross scan direction.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 8-6. SPRITE MTF. £„,= 50 pm, 2 = 25 pm, and/7=0.5
m. Diffusion broadening degrades the MTF.
8.2.3. UNCOOLED DETECTORS
A pyroelectric detector has the same spatial frequency response as other
rectangular detectors
OTFdetector sillC (df f x ) .
(8-6)
The temporal response7 is composed of a thermal component and electrical
component
or
MTFpyro ^TFfHermal MTFeieCtrical ’
MTFpyro
bCTtfe________1
Vi+(2^,/j2
(8-7)
(8-8)
For scanning systems,vfx. For staring systems that have an internal chopper, fe
is inversely related to the chopping frequency. The detector's thermal time
constant, Tt, is equal to
C _ heat capacity
G thermal conductance
Pyroelectric detectors are inherently AC coupled. The response at zero frequency
is zero and increases until /c~l/(27iTz) (Figure 8-7). The thermal time constant is
dependent upon the thermal properties of the material and the detector size and
thickness. The electrical time constant те depends upon the relationship between
the detector's capacitance and resistance compared to the pre-amplifier capacitance
and resistance.
Figure 8-7. Electrical MTF for a typical pyroelectric detector.
The time constants are tt = 0.1 s and te = 0.001 s.
8.3. MTFs in the DIGITAL DOMAIN
Although MTFs are associated with sampling and digital processing, their
effects are not seen until after the conversion into the analog domain. Sampling is
nonlinear and, as a result, has no unique MTF. We shall ignore this distinction and
use approximations for the MTFs.
For system modeling purposes, we assigned average MTFs for some
more common image processing algorithms. Because average MTFs are used,
only an average system performance can be predicted. Performance can vary
dramatically depending upon the target phase with respect to the sampling lattice.
Sampling alters the MTF and affects image fidelity. Phasing effects
between the sampling lattice and the location of the target introduce problems at
nearly all spatial frequencies. This has been called8 sample-scene phase.
8.3.1. CONVERSION: SAMPLING FREQUENCY to
SPATIAL FREQUENCY
The sampling frequency, fse, in the electrical time domain is related to the
time between samples, T, by
se
(8-10)
Conversion to object space provides
f N
J se _ sample
Js~ v ~ HFOV - DAS ’
(8-11)
where Nsample is the number of samples across the horizontal field-of-view. The
Nyquist frequency is one-half of the sample frequency: fn=fJ2 or fne=fse/2. Since
the HFOV is much greater than the DAS,
N
J sample
HFOV
(8-12)
8.3.2. SAMPLE-SCENE PHASE
Sampled data systems are not shift invariant and do not have a unique
MTF.8'13 In general, the "MTF" is14
(8-13)
£
T ’
where 0X is the phase angle between the target and the sampling lattice. For
example, when/, =fn , the MTF is a maximum when 0X = 0 (in-phase) and a
minimum when 0X = л/2 (out-of-phase). To approximate a median value for
phasing, 0X is set to л/4. Here, approximately one-half of the time the MTF will be
higher and one-half of the time the MTF will be lower. The median sampling MTF
(FLIR92 ARG-6) is
4
MTFphase =cos у A =cos 5 A
Jse ) I2 Js J
At Nyquist frequency (fx=fn =fJT), MTFphase is 0.707. This is the Kell factor so
often reported when specifying the resolution of monitors. An average sampling
MTF is sometimes represented by
MTFphase
(8-15)
Figure 8-8 illustrates the difference between the two equations. Since these are
average type MTFs, they may be considered approximately equal over the range
of interest (zero to the Nyquist frequency). For laboratory measurements where the
target phase is adjusted to obtain the maximum output, MTFphase= 1.
Figure 8-8. Average and median scene-sample phase MTFs
normalized to fe lfse. The MTF is defined only up to the
Nyquist frequency.
8.3.3. DIGITAL FILTERS
There are many image reconstruction algorithms. Only a few of these can
be described mathematically in closed-form and only these can be included in an
end-to-end system performance model. The performance of the remaining
algorithms can be inferred only by viewing the system output for a few
representative inputs. Since the system is not spatially invariant, predicting system
performance when viewing any other target is pure conjecture.
Digital filters provide any variety of pass bands to modify the frequency
features of a digital stream of data. There exists many software design programs
that are easy to use. Rather than discuss the theoretical procedure to design the
filter, we will discuss the relationship between spatial frequency requirements and
the inputs to the digital filter programs. These are one-dimensional filters that
operate on a serial stream of data. Two-dimensional filters are more difficult to
analyze. If the two-dimensional filter function is separable [i.e., the vertical and
horizontal operations are independent: MTF(£ , fy) = MTF(/v)MTF(/p], then the
horizontal filter affects only the system horizontal MTF and the vertical filter only
affects the system vertical MTF. Vertical digital filters are discussed in Chapter 11,
Vertical MTF.
To use most programs, you must first specify the allowable tolerance on
the output waveform. Figure 8-9 illustrates a tolerance scheme that may be
employed for a low pass filter. A transition band that allows a smooth transition
from the pass band to the stop band must be defined. As the width of the pass band
becomes narrower, filter complexity generally increases. Like wise, in the pass
band and stop band, there must be an allowable tolerance in which the filter
exhibits some ripple. As the tolerance becomes smaller, again, filter complexity
increases. In the pass band the tolerance total width is 2<5P In the stop band, the
total tolerance is <52. The stop band may either be always positive or the filter
response may fluctuate about zero with an excursion of ±<52 /2. After designing a
filter, a plot of the frequency response will verify that the correct filter has been
designed.
Frequency
Figure 8-9. Tolerance limits for an approximation to an ideal
low pass filter.
Digital filters have a symmetric response in which they repeat themselves
at harmonics of the sampling frequency (fs, 2fs, 3f, ...). The highest frequency of
interest is the Nyquist frequency (Figure 8-10).
2 T
-0.5
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 8-10. Digital filter frequency response. The filter
response is symmetrical about the Nyquist frequency and
repeats at multiples of the sampling frequency. MTFs greater
than unity are possible. NOTE: Electrical filter response is a
complex-valued function. The ’’negative MTF" in Figure 8-10
represents a phase change of л radians. It is convenient to plot
the "negative MTF" rather than provide two graphs: the MTF
that is always positive and the PTF.
There are two classes15 of digital filters: infinite impulse response (HR)
and finite impulse response (FIR). Both have advantages and disadvantages. The
FIR has a linear phase shift and the HR does not. IIR filters tend to have excellent
amplitude response whereas FIR filters tend to have more ripple. FIR filters are
typically symmetrical in that the weightings are symmetrical about the center
sample. They are also the easiest to implement in hardware and/or software. Figure
8-11 illustrates two FIR filters. The digital filter design software provides the
coefficients, Д . The central data point is replaced by the digital filter coefficients
as they operate on the neighboring data points. The filter is then moved one data
point and the process is repeated until the entire data set has been operated upon.
There exist edge effects with any digital filter. The filter illustrated in Figure 8-1 la
requires seven inputs before a valid output can be achieved. At the very beginning
of the data set, there are insufficient data points to have a valid output at data point
1, 2, or 3. The user must be aware of edge effects at both the beginning and the
end of his data record. In effect, this states that edges cannot be filtered. The
following MTF equations are only valid where there are no edge effects. For FIR
filters where the multiplicative factors (weightings) are symmetrical about the
center, the filter is mathematically represented by a cosine series (sometimes called
a cosine filter).
Pixel Values
A3
A2 Ai
Aq _Aj
a3 Multiplexer
Pixel Values
(b) Even Number
Multiplexer
Figure 8-11. Symmetrical digital filters, (a) 7-tap (odd
number) filter and (b) 4-tap (even number) filter.
For an odd number of samples (also called taps) summed (FLIR92 ARG-17),
TV-1
MTFtfUfer
For an even number of samples (FLIR92 ARG-18),
N
ТЯ l Л. >
(8-17)
The sum of the coefficients should equal unity so the MTF is one at//0
E^=i.
(8-18)
By appropriate selection of digital filter coefficients, peaking can be created
(Figure 8-12). Excessive peaking can cause ringing at sharp edges. Since these are
horizontal filters, the ringing appears in the horizontal direction only.
With an averaging filter, all the multipliers shown in Figure 8-11 are
equal. For example, if two samples are averaged together,
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 8-12. A symmetric (cosine) 7-tap digital peaking filter
normalized to fJfse.AQ = 0.7609, Л = 0.9115, Л2 =-0.2100,
and A3 = -0.4624. The MTF is illustrated only up to fn. See
- NOTE after Figure 8-10.
EMUX systems 155
If three samples are averaged together,
MTFdfilter -
1 2
— + — cos
3 3
(8-20)
An averaging2 filter can be represented by,
MTF^iter -
sin Xave
e
(8-21)
where Xave is the number of samples averaged together. The averaging filter has its
first zero at fe =fsJNave . Figure 8-13 illustrates filters that average two and three
samples. Kennedy2 provided MTFs for unequal weightings. Converting into object
space, MTFdetectorMTFdfllter becomes
MTFdetec,or MTFdflUer = sine (a fx ) Л)
sine(SCCH fx)
(8-22)
where SCCH is the angular subtense of the detector pitch (SCCH = dCCH/fTy
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 8-13. MTF of averaging filters, (a) average of two
samples and (b) average of three samples normalized to fjfse.
Image fidelity is maintained when f, <fJNave. See NOTE after
Figure 8-10.
For a 100% fill factor array, SCCH = a and then
MTFdetector MTFdfilter sillC (NaveOL f x ) .
(8-23)
Equivalently, the averaged response is equal to the MTF of a detector whose
angular subtense is Navea.
The MTFs used for the digital filters are approximations to the actual
system response. Image reconstruction may include data removal (decimation) or
data expansion (interpolation). The effective sampling frequency and aliasing
change with these processes.15’19 Complex interpolation schemes can be used for
image reconstruction. For example, if bilinear interpolation is used, then
MTFdfilter
(8-24)
The bilinear filter introduces a sinc2(x) MTF in both the vertical and horizontal
directions.
Careful digital design insures that the circuitry has linear phase over the
frequencies of interest. By using an MTF approach to model each subsystem, it is
assumed that each subsystem has linear phase. Actual digital circuit responses may
deviate from the theoretical responses due to digital truncation problems. The
system analyst must consult with the digital circuit designers to insure that the
circuits are modeled correctly.
8.3.4. ZOOM
Detection and recognition range capability is sometimes limited by the
visual angle subtended by the size of the image on the monitor. This can occur if
the monitor is too small and the viewing distance is fixed or if the viewing distance
is too large. If the detail is too small, typically the observer moves toward the
monitor. If the observer cannot move (e.g., a pilot strapped into a seat), zoom can
be employed to enlarge the image. Three types of zooms are possible: optical,
electronic and electro-optical. Moving toward the monitor is a continuous process
in which the observer can select an appropriate viewing distance whereas
electronic zoom is usually discrete (e.g., 2x, 3 x,4x, etc.).
Optical zoom increases the resolution by changing the focal length of the
system. Because continuous-zoom optical systems tend to be expensive, many
systems have two or three discrete fields-of-view. The system focal length is
modified by adding or removing optical elements. The elements may either be on
a slide or may be rotated into the optical path. If the f-number is maintained as the
field-of-view is changed, the overall system MTF maintains its shape with the only
change in spatial frequency axis values. This assumes that the optical MTF has not
changed significantly.
For example if the field-of-view is magnified by a factor or two (focal
length is doubled), the DAS cut in is half and the detector cutoff doubles. With
fixed f-number, the aperture diameter doubles and the optical cutoff doubles. Since
the scan velocity is reduced by two, the conversion from electrical frequency to
spatial frequency is halved and the overall MTF shape remains constant. If the f-
number is not maintained, the system MTF will change and in extreme cases, the
system may move from being optically limited to detector limited. Here, it is
difficult to optimize the system for the various fields-of-view.
The simplest form of electronic zoom, replicates pixels equally in both
the horizontal and vertical directions. That is a 1><1 image will appear as a 2x2
image when 2x zoom is employed. With electronic zoom, only part of the image
can be seen on the monitor. With 2x electronic zoom, only 25% of the image will
be presented on the monitor. Electronic zoom does not increase resolution. It
provides some performance improvement if the monitor is small (MTF limited by
the eye). It is equivalent to physically moving toward the monitor. However, with
excessive zoom, the image becomes blocky and maybe considered unacceptable.
The blockiness may be diminished by filtering.1619 Linear models do not include
any adverse visual effects from sampling effects such as blockiness. When pixels
are smaller than about 0.58 mrad (1/30 deg), the eye blends the pixels to form a
continuous image. This phenomenon is used in halftone printing to create an
apparent gray level. When the pixels are larger than 0.58 mrad, the eye can resolve
the individual pixels and we say that the image appears blocky. Indeed, if an image
appears blocky, we tend to move away from it to achieve an aesthetically pleasing
picture (view Figure 8-14 from 10 feet to appreciate this phenomenon). Similarly,
raster-based monitors are usually designed such that individual raster lines are not
discernible. Generally, the viewer will adjust his viewing distance such that the
raster is not visible. For commercial televisions (525 line system), this viewing
distance is approximately four to eight times the picture height.
Electro-optical zoom is used to oversample the image. The same number
of pixels is collected on each frame but the angular spacing is less. This effectively
increases the sampling frequency. Electro-optical zoom increases resolution only if
the system was originally Nyquist frequency limited. It diminishes the effect of
sample-scene phasing and the image is not as blocky as electronic zoom.
Figure 8-14. An enlarged halftone image used in printing.
When viewed at a distance of 10 feet, the individual pixels are
below the eye's resolution and the tones appear continuous.
8.4. MATCHING VIDEO SUBSYSTEMS to a SAMPLED
SIGNAL
After image reconstruction, the digital data is clocked-out at a rate that is
consistent with monitor requirements. To preserve image fidelity, the video
electronics is matched to the signal cutoff frequency (as measured in object space).
8.4.1. CONVERSION: VIDEO SAMPLING FREQUENCY
TO SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Since
HFOV
t
* line
N
J sample
HFOV
(8-25)
the video sampling frequency, f,s, is
fvs
N
J sample
Vine
(8-26)
Standard values for tline are provided in Table 7-1.
8.4.2. SAMPLE-AND-HOLD
After the D/А converter, the analog signal exists only at discrete times.
The sample-and-hold circuitry extends the data into a continuous analog signal.
The MTF of a zero-order sample-and-hold (FLIR92 ARG-23) is
MTFS&H
(8-27)
and is shown in Figure 8-15 for normalized spatial frequency. Higher order filters
have different MTFs.20
Figure 8-15. Zero-order sample-and-hold MTF normalized to
The sample-and-hold acts as a low pass filter.
8.5. POST-RECONSTRUCTION FILTER
After the D/А conversion, the image is still blocky due to the discrete
nature of the digital signals. The ideal post-reconstruction filter removes all the
higher order frequencies (Figure 8-16) such that only the original smooth signal
remains. The output is delayed by 1/2Г (See Section 4.4., Phase Shifts)
Figure 8-16. The post-reconstruction filter removes the blocky
(stair step) effect created by the sample-and-hold circuitry.
An ideal post-reconstruction filter will just pass the signal information
contained in the originally sampled bandwidth. If the monitor is an integral part of
the imaging system, then the monitor electronics can be used for post-
reconstruction filtering. The monitor MTF includes this filter. In all other systems,
it is prudent to include an appropriate post-reconstruction filter. For an ideal
system, the post-reconstruction filter MTF is unity up to the cutoff frequency
HFOV D ,
vco =---------if optics limited ,
fine
HFOV 1 ,
vco =---------if detector limited
fine &
and
vco = —~ If Nyquist frequency limited .
2
(8-28)
(8-29)
(8-30)
The Fourier transform of a rectangular pulse is sinc(x). Therefore an ideal
rectangular filter in the frequency domain interpolates the data points in the time
domain with a sinc(x) function.
Referring to Figure 8-9 real filters will have some roll off and fvco should
be sufficiently large so that it does not affect the in-band MTF. Filters can be in
many functional forms. The most common are the Nth-order Butterworth and bfh-
order Chebychev filters.
The Nth-order Butterworth low pass filter MTF is
MTF
post-recon
(8-31)
and the Nth-order Chebychev MTF is
MTF
л post-recon
_______1______
71 + (Л2-1)С„2
(8-32)
The recursive formulas are
G
G
G
G
Jv 'J vco
=W-1
= 2(/;,/f„JG-;-G-2
The ripple in dB is RippledB = 20 log(S4) or
Ripple
Л = 10 20
(8-33)
An alternate representation is
MTF
post-recon
(8-34)
where e2 = A2 -1. The 3 dB points are
hdB = cosh
cosh ^l/^)
TV
(8-35)
Figure 8-17 illustrates two different Chebychev filters that may be used for post-
reconstruction. Figure 8-18 illustrates the effect of two Chebychev filters when
combined with a detector MTF. Filters with ripples of 1 dB do not provide
adequate MTF over the regions of interest.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 8-17. 4th and 5th order Chebychev filters normalized to
Figure 8-18. 4tb order and 5th order Chebychev filters with the
detector MTF. The spatial frequency is normalized to fx/fdco.
Example 8-1
POST-RECONSTRUCTION FILTER
What is the object spatial frequency cutoff for an ideal post-
reconstruction filter if the desired output is RS 170 and the digital format provides
1440 samples per line? The HFOV is 28°. For RS 170, tline is 52.25 ps.
and
vco
1 1440____
2 52.25 xlO’6
= 13.8 MHz,
1 1440 cycles
vco ~ 2 28x17.45 ~ * mrad
(8-36)
(8-37)
8.6. REFERENCES
1. G C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pg. 274, JCD
Publishing, Winter Park, Fl (1998).
2. H. V. Kennedy, "Miscellaneous Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) Effects Relating to Sampling
Summing," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed.,
SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 165-176(1991).
3. G. V. Poropat, "The Effect of Bias Voltage on SPRITE Detector Modulation Transfer Function
(MTF)," Infrared Physics, Vol. 26(1), pp. 9-15 (1986).
4. G. D. Boreman and A. E. Plogstedt, "Spatial Frequency Performance of SPRITE Detectors," in
Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings
Vol. 1309, pp 158-166 (1990).
5. A. Campbell, С. T. Elliot, and A. M. White, "Optimization of SPRITE Detectors in Anamorphic
Imaging Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 27(2), pp. 125-133 (1987).
6. P. Fredin, ' Optimum Choice of Anamorphic Ratio and Boost Filter Parameters for A SPRITE
Based Infrared Sensor," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G.
C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol 1969, pp. 139-149 (1993).
7. D. G. Crowe, P. R. Norton, T. Limperis, and J. Mudar, "Detectors," in Electro-Optical Components,
W. D. Rogatto, ed., pp. 200-201. This is Volume 3 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems
Handbook, S. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute
of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
8. S. K. Park and R. A. Schowengerdt, "Image Sampling, Reconstruction and the Effect of Sample-
scene Phasing," Applied Optics, Vol. 21(17), pp. 3142-3151 (1982).
9. S4 E. Reichenbach, S. K. Park, and R. Narayanswamy, "Characterizing Digital Image Acquisition
Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(2), pp. 170-177 (1991).
10. W. Wittenstein, J. C. Fontanella, A. R. Newberry, and J. Baars, "The Definition of the OTF and the
Measurement of Aliasing for Sampled Imaging Systems," Optica Acta, Vol. 29(1), pp. 41-50 (1982).
11. J. C. Felz, "Development of the Modulation Transfer Function and Contrast Transfer Function for
Discrete Systems, Particularly Charge Coupled Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 29(8), pp. 893-904
(1990).
12. S. K. Park, R. A. Schowengerdt, and M. Kaczynski, "Modulation Transfer Function Analysis for
Sampled Image Systems," Applied Optics, Vol. 23(15), pp. 2572-2582 (1984).
13. L. deLuca and G. Cardone, "Modulation Transfer Function Cascade Model for a Sampled IR
Imaging System," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(13), pp. 1659-1664 (1991).
14. F. A. Resell, "Effects of Image Sampling," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F.
Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., pg. 217, NRL Report 8311, Naval Research Laboratory, Wash D.C.
(1979).
15. There exist a variety of texts on digital filter design. See, for example, Digital Signal Processing,
A. V. Oppenheim and R. W. Schafer, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey (1975).
16.1 . Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in
Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G. Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2-
12(1985).
17. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete
Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and
Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985).
18. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation,"
Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973).
19. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol.
33(3), pp. 725-729 (1994).
20. Sampling, Aliasing, and Data Fidelity, G. C. Holst, pp. 147-154, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL
32789 (1998).
EXERCISES
1. What is the scan velocity error sensitivity for a TDI system employing four
detectors? Let Ns = 2DAS and/s = l/DAS. Plot the MTF normalized to fjfdco for
various values ofzfv/v.
2. For a staggered TDI array (Figure 8-5), the effective number of TDI elements is
20. What is the scan velocity error sensitivity? Let 7Vv = 2DAS and fs = l/DAS. Plot
the MTF normalized to fjfdco for various values of Av/v. Compare these plots with
those obtained in Exercise 1.
3. What boost amplitude and boost frequency (Equation 7-6) would you use so
that a SPRITE detector had an MTF that approximated a rectangular detector. Let
/7=50 cm, £n/=50|im, and 2=25 pm.
4. When would you use a sample-scene phase MTF? Are there conditions when
you would not?
5. Can a digital filter (Figure 8-12) approximate a boost filter (Figure 7-6)?
6. When would an averaging filter be appropriate?
7. An observer is viewing a 14-inch square monitor that provides RS 170. At what
viewing distance will the raster lines just be visible?
8. What is the allowable maximum ripple for a 5th order Chebychev filter so that
the detector MTF is not degraded (Figure 8-18).
9. The system described in Section 6.8 has been modified to include a digital scan
converter (converted to an EMUX system). Assume <rr = 20 grad (Figure 6-31).
What is the allowable maximum ripple for a 5th order Chebychev filter so that the
system MTF is not degraded. Compare the answer to the results of Exercise 8.
9
STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS
Figure 9-1 illustrates a typical staring array. It does not have a scanner.
Each detector output is digitized by the detector mux and therefore the system does
not have a pre-amplifier, post-amplifier, or the filters associated with those
amplifiers. The detector time constant does not affect spatial information and
therefore is not included in staring array assessment. Staring arrays do introduce
new MTFs: the dominant one is that due to charge transfer. The other subsystems,
MTFoptics , MTFdetector , MTFmotion , MTFphase , MTFS&H , MTFdfllter , MTFpost_recon ,
MTFmonitor, and MTFeye are essentially the same as described in previous chapters.
Telescope
Detector Digita|
Array Ffter
Reimager
Reconstruction Observer
(Sample & Hold) Monitor
Figure 9-1. Typical staring array functional electro-optical
block diagram.
Many infrared staring arrays are modest in size (i.e., 128x128 or
256x256). Systems with these arrays require image interpolation1'4 to expand the
number of infrared lines up to the number of monitor lines. Microscan can be
employed to increase the effective sampling rate and simultaneously match the
monitor requirements. Inefficient microscanning may degrade the MTF. For ideal
conditions, with a 4:1 step-stare, the integration is one-fourth of its value without
microscan. Practically, the integration time may be further reduced to assure that
no movement takes place during the stare time. Reducing the integration time
increases the noise (increases the NEDT).
For scanning systems, the HFOV depends upon the scanning mechanism.
For staring arrays,
ЯГОИ = 2 tan1
~l)dCCH + dH
2/7
(9-1)
and
l'FOP' = 2tan 1
(7V^ - l)dccl/ + dy
(9-2)
where the horizontal and vertical number of detectors is NH and Nv, respectively.
The detector pitch in the horizontal and vertical directions is dCCH and dccv ,
respectively. The rectangular detector has dimensions dH^dv . The small angle
approximation is often used for large arrays to provide
Hfov = Nrr^CH (9.3)
and
VFO V = Nri^ . (9-4)
9.1. MOTION
The effects of motion during the entire integration and interpretation
process must be considered The motional MTFs described in Section 6.3, Motion
are the functionally appropriate forms to use for staring arrays. For systems
operating at 30 Hz, tint is approximately 1/30 sec. However, the integration time
varies according to the application. If too many photons are available (i.e.,
sufficient to cause saturation), the integration time may be decreased and thereby
act as an AGC circuit. In some systems, the integration may be purposely reduced
if significant motion is present. If an observer views a monitor, then tint is the larger
value of the detector integration time or the eye integration time. Although the
precise value for the eye integration time is debatable, FLIR92 documentation
recommends 0.1 s.
9.2. DETECTOR ARRAY
Charge-coupled device (CCD) performance is characterized by the
transfer efficiency and number of transfers. With incomplete charge transfer, a few
carriers are left behind which combine with the next charge packet. This, in effect,
"smears" the charge and acts as if the charge came from several detector elements.
An MTF that accounts for incomplete transfer of electrons, or smearing of charge,
(FLIR92 ARG-22) is
MTF\ransfer ^Xp /V
trans
1 - COS
(9-5)
ts
where fts is the clocking spatial frequency, is the total number of charge
transfers from a detector to the output amplifier, and £ is the charge transfer
efficiency. The clocking frequency is
/V
1 trans-H
,s HFOV - DAS
(9-6)
where ^ап5_н is the number of transfers in the horizontal direction. Since the
HFOV is much greater than the DAS
, ~ N trans-H
Jts~ HFOV
(9-7)
This MTF depends upon the number of transfers. If the target image is located
right next to the readout, the number of transfers is small. On the other hand, if
the image is at the extreme end of the array so that the charge must be
transferred across the entire array, Ntrans is equal to the number of elements in
the array. For an average response, Ntrans should be one-half the maximum
number of transfers. This is mathematically equivalent to (MTFtransfer)'/2 where
Ntrans is the maximum number of transfers. As the number of transfers increases,
the efficiency must increase to insure that the MTF is not adversely affected.
For arrays that employ interline transfer, the maximum value of is
the number of detectors. Transfers may be either in the vertical direction (column
readout) or horizontally (row readout). MTF^fe,. only applies to the transfer
readout direction: Horizontal readout affects MTF(£) and vertical readout affects
MTF(/p. Figure 9-2 illustrates МТР^^ for several values of transfer efficiency.
Figure 9-2. MTFtransfer as a function of normalized spatial
frequency, fx/fts, for several values of transfer efficiency. Ntrans
= 240. The Nyquist frequency is
9.3. MICROSCAN
For staring arrays, the sampling frequency is created by the detector
center-to-center spacing, dcc. The angular sampling frequency is Scc ~ fl/dcc. and the
array Nyquist frequency is
n-array
Scc
fl
^dcc
(9-8)
2
With 100% fill factor arrays, fn.array is one-half of the detector cutoff, fdco.
The effective sampling frequency can be increased5 9 with a microscan or
dither technique. Here, the line-of-sight moves a fraction of flldcc . At each
location, the detector stares at the scene but for a reduced integration time. If the
step-stare configuration allows four independent stares, then the integration time at
each location must one-fourth of that used without microscan. Microscan can be
either in one direction or in two directions. The number of detector elements and
monitor requirements determines whether microscan in the vertical direction is
appropriate. Microscan increases the sampling frequency and thereby permits
faithful reproduction of higher spatial frequencies (Figure 5-11). The reduced
integration time increases the system noise for background limited systems.
With an ideal microscan configuration, the line-of-sight moves a fixed
amount and then the detector stares. While it is moving, the detector is off (i.e., it
is not integrating). In some situations, the detector may be integrating while the
line-of-sight is moving. Here, the image is smeared and the MTF may be adversely
affected.
Figure 9-3 illustrates a step-stare movement in which the rise time
follows a simple exponential function. This simulates the time response of a
simple servo-driven microscan interlace mechanism. If the rise and fall times are
short compared to the total time 7, then it approximates the ideal step-stare. Here,
the MTFm- гяп is one. On the other hand, if the rise and fall times are long, the
motion will appear linear and MTFmicroscan approximates a linear smear (a sine
function). In this figure, a 2><2 microscan is assumed and it takes four successive
fields to create one frame. For display, the four fields are combined by an image
reconstruction algorithm.
Figure 9-3. Step-stare interlace with an exponential rise and
fall for a 2x2 microscan. The step is one-half of the detector
center-to-center spacing. It may be different in the vertical and
horizontal directions.
Figure 9-4 illustrates a continuous nutation scan that follows a sinusoidal
motion. Here the amplitudes in both the horizontal and vertical directions may be
different such that the scan pattern is elliptical. The "average" location should be
SCJ2. This requires a sinusoidal motion whose peak-to-peak amplitude is SCCN2.
If s(t) is the relative time-displacement between the optical image and a
detector element and the total integration time is T, then7
MTF
1 * microscan
Jcos(2tt/x $(/))<# +
Jsin (2л* fxs(t))dt
0
(9-9)
Figure 9-4. Nutation interlace scan with a sinusoidal
movement. The peak-to-peak amplitude is SC(J^2 for 4:1
interlace.
For the exponential scan,
s(Z) = Scc
(9-Ю)
Substituting into Equation 9-5 and numerically integrating provides the curves
illustrated in Figure 9-5. Here, MTFmicm<;can is plotted as a function of т/T. The
J UllVlOoUcUi 1
spatial frequency has been normalized to/.cc = 1/5Cc. For the ideal case, t=0 and
MTF
x x microscan
is one.
For the nutation scan,
s(Z) =
sin (2 7Г jnutation
0,
(9-И)
where f„uMU is the scan rotational speed (Figure 9-6).
MTF MTF
Figure 9-5. MTFmicroscan for a step-stare interlace with an
exponential rise and fall as a function of normalized spatial
frequency fx/fscc. and = For short time constants, т/T« 1,
the MTF is one. For long time constants, т/T » 1, the MTF
approaches the familiar linear smear sine function (Equation
Figure 9-6. MTFmicrmran for a nutation interlace scan with a
iiiiuiuscaii
sinusoidal movement as a function of normalized spatial
frequency. fnutateT= 1/4 for 4:1 interlace scan.
9.4. REFERENCES
1.1. Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in
Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G. Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2-
12(1985).
2. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete
Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and
Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985).
3. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation,"
Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973).
4. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol.
33(3), pp. 725-729 (1994).
5. D. J. Bradley and P. N. J. Dennis, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays," in Infrared
Technology and Applications, A. Baker and P. Masson, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 590, pp. 53-60
(1985).
6. R. J. Dann, S. R. Carpenter, C. Seamer, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "Sampling Effects in
CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays - Practical Results," in Infrared Technology XII, I. J. Spiro and J.
Mollicone, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 685, pp. 123-128 (1986).
7. E. A. Watson, R. A. Muse, and F. P. Blommel, "Aliasing and Blurring in Microscanned Imagery," in
Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 242-250 (1992).
8. F. P. Blommel, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "The Effects of Microscan Operation on Staring
Infrared Sensor Imagery," in Infrared Technology XVII, B. F. Andresen, M. S. Scholl, and J. Spiro,
eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1540, pp. 653-664 (1991).
9. R. A. Honzik, "MTF Loss Due to Microscan Interlace Smear," Martin Marietta Report CPD
70802000-000-IR7, Orlando, FL (1984).
EXERCISES
1. Plot MTFdetectorMTFtransfer as a function normalized spatial frequency. Let =
240. Assume that the array contains 480x480 elements. Let the charge transfer
efficiency be 0.9999, 0.999, and 0.99.
2. A push broom sensor consists of 1024 elements. Two outputs are used such that
each output transfers a maximum of 512 charge packets. What is MTFtransfer for
charge transfer efficiencies of 0.9999, 0.999, and 0.99.
3. Based upon the results of Exercises 1 and 2, what is the desired charge transfer
efficiency?
4. Plot MTFdetector for a staring array with 64% fill factor. What is the array Nyquist
frequency with no microscan, 2x2 and 3x3 microscan?
5. Plot MTFmicroscanMTFdetector for a nutating microscan system (Figure 9-6).
Estimate MTFmirrn4ran values from the graph. Discuss the tradeoff between
increasing the Nyquist frequency with the reduced MTF.
10
LINE SCANNERS
Airborne reconnaissance applications typically require wide-angle
imagery. The imagery can be obtained either with pushbroom systems or
line scanners. Since large linear arrays are easily fabricated from silicon, visible
imagery is often obtained with a pushbroom design. Infrared technology limits the
number of detectors that can be placed in an array and line scanners are typically
used for infrared imagery. Although this chapter discusses infrared line scanners
(IRLS), the equations apply to pushbroom systems with the notable distinction that
the scanner rotational speed is replaced with the detector integration time.
An IRLS is an imaging system that contains a few detectors. For each
rotation of the mirror, the detector array senses a narrow swath on the ground.. The
forward motion of the aircraft provides the vertical extent (multiple swathes). The
data obtained is continuously displayed in a waterfall manner. That is, the imagery
constantly moves down the monitor screen as the platform moves forward. Figure
10-1 illustrates a system that provides a linear swath.
Figure 10-1. Swath width produced by a line scanner. ACT is
the across-track direction (produced by the scanner) and ALT
is the along-track dimension (produced by the forward motion
of the aircraft).
The time to scan one swath must be matched to the aircraft velocity, V,
and the altitude to avoid swath overlap or missed areas
V VFOV^wath
---=--------(10
H t
Although it is customary to use H in the equations, it is the slant path to the ground
that determines the correct VFOV^Jt requirement. The ratio, V/H, appears in
nearly every line scanner equation. As such, V/H is typically a system
specification.
For a first approximation, the earth is considered nominally flat. As the
V/H ratio changes, both the spin-mirror rotation rate and the number of detectors
used can be varied to accommodate a wide range of V/H ratios. Usually the spin-
mirror rotation rate is changed in fixed increments. The AN/AAD-5 remote
reconnaissance system uses 2:1 speed change for higher V/H ratios and
automatically selects one to 12 parallel detectors to provide full ground coverage
with minimal overlap.1 For wide angle imagery, the slant path increases
dramatically as the scan angle increases. This produces a bow tie shaped swath on
the ground. Bow-tie compensation is achieved by changing detectors (a concept
used both in the AAD-5 and ATARS airborne reconnaissance systems) or through
digital image processing
With a variable V/H ratio requirement, it is nearly impossible to design a
system that does not contain some underscan, overscan, or both. The imagery may
not be usable at wide scan-angles for several reasons. First, the ground resolution
increases dramatically with scan-angle. Objects that can be resolved at nadir may
not be resolved at large scan angles. The path length increases with scan-angle so
that the atmospheric transmittance may reduce the target signature below the
system noise level. Finally, the objects are viewed obliquely. At large scan angles,
the sides of objects are viewed. For example, roads and railroad tracks may not be
discernible at oblique angles.
Because of the forward motion of the aircraft, the imagery is produced in
a waterfall mode. The film transport speed is synchronized to the aircraft V/H ratio
so that complete imagery is captured (Figure 10-2). The CRT may be replaced
with a high-speed digital data recorder. Then data can then either be RF linked to
the ground or may be replayed later (a concept proposed for ATARS1).
Figure 10-2. An IRLS functional electro-optical block
diagram where the imagery is captured on film.
Scanners2 may be axe-head, split aperture, or conical. Figure 10-3
illustrates a split aperture system. As the spin mirror turns off-nadir, the projected
aperture of one facet (A) narrows while the other widens (B). For a square mirror,
the total aperture area3 as a function of scan-angle from nadir is
total A + В C
COS 0scan
4 )
+ sin 0scan
(Ю-2)
where C is the area of one facet. At nadir, the aperture area is ^2 C. Thus there is a
maximum of ^2 difference in energy collected over the scan-angles. The MTF also
varies with scan-angle. Line scanners are typically fixed focussed at infinity. At
low altitudes, the system is out of focus.
To achieve different resolutions, separate detector arrays may be used
(Figure 10-4). The smaller detectors are typically used for high altitude flight
whereas the large detectors are used for low altitude flight. Because the VII ratio
drops for the higher altitude, the mirror rotation speed is reduced when the smaller
detectors are used.
Figure 10-3. Kennedy split aperture line scanner. As the
mirror rotates, the apertures A and В change in size.
Array Centerline
12 10 8
6
NFOV
11 9 7 5 3
Figure 10-4. With a fixed focus optical system, different
DASs are achieved by using different detector arrays. These
arrays are within the same dewar. The WFOV array is used for
low altitude mapping. By using detectors that are separated,
full ground coverage is possible. In this figure, the aircraft
moves from left to right and the scan direction is top to bottom
This chapter discusses only the MTFs that are unique to line scanners.
The subsystem MTFs given for the common module, EOMUX, and EMUX
systems also apply to line scanners. This chapter does not cover the geometric
distortions such as the bow-tie effect and panoramic distortion. Description of
these effects and image rectification can be found in McCracken3, Estes4 et. al.,
and Bernstein.5 As with any wide-angle camera, the imagery contains geometric
distortions such as the bow-tie effect and panoramic distortion. Methods to remove
the distortions are called image rectification. In general, image rectification cannot
be performed in real-time.
10.1. RECTANGULAR APERTURE
While most systems use circular apertures, the split aperture, by its very
design, is rectangular. Line scanners are typically designed with a fixed focus. As a
result, at low altitudes, the image will be out of focus. The amount of defocus will
vary with scan-angle since the slant path increases with scan-angle. The blur is a
maximum at nadir. It decreases as the altitude and the scan-angle increase. Simply
said, the blur is a maximum at the shortest distance and that occurs at nadir.
10.1.1. DIFFRACTION-LIMITED OTF
For a linear (rectangular) aperture, the diffraction limited OTF is
OTFdiff = 1 - -y- ^hen f < foco
J oco
OTFdljj = 0 elsewhere ,
where the optical cut off,/w„, is given by
D aperture width
°CO ^ave average wavelength '
(W-3)
(10-4)
and2eve is determined by Equation 6-7 or 6-8. For split apertures (Figure 10-3), the
OTF is weighted by the areas A and В
A В
°TFM = OTFdi/rA + OTFdiff_B , (10-5)
where OTFdiff.A is the OTF due to A and OTFdiff.B is due to B. Figure 10-5
illustrates the OTF when fOC(^A =10 cycles/mrad and/,ca.B = 20 cycles/mrad. Since
the ALT length is fixed, A can be replaced with ACTa and В can be replaced with
ACTBAf
r ACT a j r ACT в zip. z-x
/x<--------- and fx<-------------, (10-6)
&ave Aave
then
OTFdi/f (Ю-7)
Jave
where
ACT^ + ACiy ACT^
J ave z» и л • (10 o)
For the Kennedy type scanner, as one aperture increases, the other decreases so
that the optical cutoff frequencies change with scan-angle. Therefore, the system
MTF depends upon the scan-angle. System performance must then be separately
assessed at each scan-angle. The along-track aperture size is fixed and invariant
with scan-angle
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 10-5. OTFdiff for a split aperture system. foco.A =10
cycles/mrad and foco.B = 20 cycles/mrad. Sine the OTF is
positive, it is labeled as an MTF.
Line scanners 179
10.1.2. DEFOCUS OTF
The defocused OTF for rectangular apertures is
OTF =
optics
1-
sine
SWPP
(Ю-9)
or
OTFoptics - OTFdijf OTFdejocus ,
(10-10)
where WPP is the peak-to-peak wave-front error that can be estimated from the
defocus shift. While an approximation was used for a defocused circular apertures
(Equation 6-23), Equation 10-9 is exact. Using Newton's relationship for paraxial
rays, the distance from the focal point is
(10-11)
where Xt is the focal shift or the distance from the focal point to the image plane
and X2 is distance from the focal point to the object. The variable X2 is the error in
the focus location for a system focussed at infinity when the object is at X2 + fl.
Since X2 is usually very large, the equation can be approximated by
(10-12)
The peak-to-peak wave-front error, WPP, can be estimated from the defocus shift
where NA is the numerical aperture:
Xi(№4)2
2Я
NA =
IF
(10-13)
(10-14)
(see Appendix, f-number for an alternate definition). Then
w - W
PP 8 H Aave F2
Figures 10-6 and 10-7 illustrate MTFoptics for various wave-front errors.
The first zero remains constant at fave until WPP reaches 0.5 waves. Then the first
zero abruptly jumps to fave /2. For greater defocusing, the spatial frequency at
which the MTF is equal to zero slowly decreases as the defocus increases.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 10-6. OTFoptics normalized tofx/foco for various amounts
of peak-to-peak wave-front error.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 10-7. OTFoptics normalized tofxlfoco for various amounts
of peak-to-peak wave-front error.
Table 10-1 lists the aperture sizes for the AN/AAD-5. At 2 = 10 pm, for
the along-track dimension, fOC() = 19.6 cycles/mrad and in the across-track
dimension, foco = 5.64 cycles/mrad for a focal length of 11 inches. Table 10-2 lists
the wave-front error as a function of altitude. While the wave-front error appears
significantly different, the difference in foco provides nearly the same OTF for both
the across-track and along-track directions (Figure 10-8) at low altitudes. Although
the calculated wave-front error approaches zero as the slant path increases, a
practical limit that includes manufacturing tolerances is ИрР=0.25 waves. This is
indicated in Table 10-2 by listing WPP as less than 0.25 waves for 5650 feet in the
across-track direction.
In the laboratory, the target is usually placed in a collimator so that it
appears at infinity. Therefore, special efforts are required to measure the amount of
defocus in the laboratory. As a result, there are two performances analyses
required: one for the field and one for the lab.
Table 10-1
AN/AAD-5 APERTURE SIZE at NADIR
ALT 7.75"
ACTa 2.075"
ACTB 2.365"
ACT 1 ave 2.22"
Table 10-2
AN/AAD-5 WPP WAVE-FRONT ERROR (Waves)
ALTITUDE ALT ACT
50 feet 28.3 10.0
200 feet 7.07 2.5
500 feet 2.83 1.00
2000 feet 0.71 0.25
5650 feet 0.25 <0.25
OTF
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 10-8. AN/AAD-5 OTFoptics for the ALT and ACT
directions for different altitudes. The OTFs are approximately
equal at low altitudes.
10.1.3. GROUND COVERAGE
Line scanners are often designed for constant ground coverage. As the
altitude decreases the image defocuses and the area from which the detectors sense
radiation depend upon the aperture size. For low spatial frequencies (/X«Z?C„)
OTFdejocus
sine 8 WPP
(10-16)
Using Equation 10-15, OTFdefocus can be approximated by
OTFdefoCuS ~ SinC 71 f x
(10-17)
This function will go to zero at fx = HID or we can say that it has an equivalent
angular subtense of DFI. This leads to the approximation that the system has an
effective angular subtense of
<2 eff ~ DAS + ——, (10-18)
H
and the projected area is
10.2. SCANNER
The AN/AAD-5 scanner is a four-faceted rotating reflective polygon. For
a reflecting surface, the reflected beam scan velocity is twice the rotational speed
due to angle doubling
v -- 2 (speed in RPM}
1 min
60 5
360°
rev
л rad
180°
rad
s
(10-20)
The field-of-view is changed by switching to a different detector array (Figure 10-
4). The same electronics is used for the NFOV and WFOV. To insure that f, scales
properly from NFOV to WFOV, the scan mirror velocity changes. Table 10-3
provides the scan mirror velocity and related parameters.
Table 10-3
AN/AAD-5 SCAN MIRROR PARAMETERS
NFOV WFOV
Mirror velocity (RPM) 3000 6000
Scan velocity, v (rad/sec) 628 1256
FOV (Degrees) 60 120
10.3. MOTION
Line scanners are not affected by motion in the usual sense. The high
mirror spin rate produces a small detector dwell time is so small that image smear
is not important. Jitter in the rotating scanner can cause pixel mis-registration from
swath-to-swath resulting in serrated vertical lines. Scan nonlinearities appear as
rarefaction or condensations of the images. These effects cannot be described by
linear system theory and can only be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.
10.4. ELECTRONIC MTF
Line scanners produce very high data rates. The detector time constant
can dominate the system MTF In spatial frequency space,
MTF
1ГЛЛ я (constant
________1_______
^l + (2^rrfv/x)2
The AN/AAD-5 time constant for the WFOV detector is 450 ns and 250 ns for the
NFOV detectors (Figure 10-9). The reduced MTF can be partially compensated
for with a boost filter (Section 7.2.2., Boost Circuitry) or a digital filter (Section
8.3.3., Digital Filters).
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
(a) WFOV
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
(b) NFOV
Figure 10-9. The AN/AAD-5 detector time constant affects
the overall detector MTF. (a) WFOV: DAS = 0.5 mrad and (b)
NFOV: DAS = 0.25 mrad. When fx < flco the OTF is always
positive and is labeled as an MTF.
10.5. AN/AAD-5 CRT MTF
ч
The amplified detector output drives a CRT that writes onto the film.
Various monitor MTFs were described in Section 7.3., Monitors. For AN/AAD-5,
the CRT is modeled as
With a CRT spot of 0.001 inches and film width of 4.55 inches, the system can
place 4550 independent "spots" on the film. If the "spot" size is the beam diameter
at the 1/e intensity points, then
5.66 x 4550 lines '
(10-23)
and
17.45 * HFOV
(10-24)
Then <jmon is 0.163 in the WFOV and 0.0813 in the NFOV. HFOV is the field-of-
view in the across track direction (scan direction) measured in degrees. Table 7-2
describes the relationship between other definitions of spot size and o.
10.6. AN/AAD-5 FILM
The AAD-5 provides imagery on film. Film response is often provided in
a graphical format. A polynomial fit to the graphical data provides an approximate
closed-form mathematical representation.
10.6.1. CONVERSION: FILM RESPONSE to SPATIAL
FREQUENCY
Film response is usually given m cycles/mm. The conversion to object
spatial frequency is
HFOV
film width
(10-25)
For AN/AAD-5 film, kt= 18.11 in the WFOV (120°) and k2= 9.05 in the NFOV
(60°).
10.6.2. FILM MTF
A 3rt-order polynomial has been fitted to the Kodak EK-2494 film
response curve (Figure 10-10). The film MTF is the smaller of
2 3
MTFfnm — + a^fm + a-ifm + ^зУ/и
or
(10-26)
MTFfllm -1
(10-27)
and is zero when
The constants are
aQ = 1.0435
«! =-8.4571 x 10'3
a2 =-1.6503 x 1 O'5
«3 = 1.9437xl0’7
This polynomial fits the film MTF for all spatial frequencies up to film
cutoff, ffco. Since film data is often only given when where the film MTF departs
from unity, it is convenient to list the MTF as unity for low spatial frequencies.
This is not strictly true since adjacency effects can produce MTFs greater than
unity for low frequencies.
Figure 10-10. MTFf(lm for Kodak film EK-2494.
10.7. REFERENCES
1. Jane's Avionics 1992-1993, Eleventh edition, D. Brinkman, ed., pp. 136-137, Jane's Information
Group, Surrey, UK (1992).
2. W. L. Wolfe, "Optical-mechanical Scanning Techniques and Devices," in The Infrared Handbook,
Revised edition, W. L. Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., pp. 10-17 to 10-20, Environmental Research
Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI (1985).
3. W. L. McCracken, "Infrared Line scanning Systems," in Passive Electro-Optical Systems, S. B.
Campana, ed., pp. 9-19. Th.s is Volume 5 of the Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S.
Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
4. J. E. Estes, E. J. Hajic, and L. R. Tinney, "Fundamentals of Image Analysis: Analysis of Visible
and Thermal Infrared Data," in Manual of Remote Sensing, 2nd edition, R. N. Colwell, ed., pp. 987-
1124, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls Church, VA (1983).
5. R. Bernstein, "Image Geometry and Rectification," in Manual of Remote Sensing, 2nd edition, R. N.
Colwell, ed., pp. 873-922, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls Church, VA (1983).
EXERCISES
An airborne reconnaissance line scanner (Figure 10-3) is mounted on an
aircraft whose cruising speed varies between 300 and 450 knots. The system will
be operated at altitudes ranging from 200 to 3000 feet. The detector array consists
of six detectors aligned in the ALT direction. The detector ALT dimension is 0.01
inches and the center-to-center spacing is 0.02 inches. The system focal length is
20 inches and the ALT aperture is 10 inches.
1. What is the range of VIH ratios at nadir?
2. If the system is refocused at every altitude, what is the range of scanner
rotational speeds?
3. If the system is fixed focus at infinity, what is the foot print size as a function of
altitude. Assume Equation 10-19 is valid.
4. Sketch the array footprint as a function of altitude. Show each detector foot
print.
5. At what altitude does the foot print precisely cover the ground (no overlap and
no underlap)?
6. How many detectors are required for complete ground coverage at an velocity
of 300, 350, 400, and 450 knots. Assume that the scanner rotational speed is fixed
at 6000 rpm.
7. Repeat Exercises 1 though 6 when the scan angle is 30°.
8. Repeat Exercises 1 though 6 when the scan angle is 60°.
11
VERTICAL MTF
The vertical MTF is similar to the horizontal MTF with the exception that
any /electronic circuitry that modifies the serial stream of data does not affect the
vertical MTF. For example, the vertical MTF does not contain the MTFs due to the
detector time constant, pre-amplifier, post-amplifier, sample and hold, or post-
reconstruction filter. For this chapter, all OTFs are considered positive and
therefore labeled as MTFs.
The functional form of these MTFs was given in Chapters 6 through 9.
The appropriate sampling rate must be used for the vertical MTFs. The subsystem
components do not "know" what created the signal. These MTFs apply to all
imaging systems independent of the system spectral response. Similarities and
differences between the horizontal and vertical MTFs are:
MTF
А Л Opt1Cg
For an aberration free optical system, MTFoptics is the same as the
horizontal direction. With aberrated systems, the sagittal MTF is
applied to the horizontal direction and the tangential MTF is used for
the vertical MTF. For rectangular apertures, the vertical aperture extent
is used. For systems employing anamorphic optics, the vertical and
horizontal focal lengths are different.
MTFmotion
Jitter is usually considered a polar movement and therefore ar is
considered equal in both the vertical and horizontal directions. For
linear or sinusoidal motion, MTFmotion is used when the motion is in the
vertical direction.
-M-'f'f'detector
For rectangular detectors, the vertical extent of the detector is used.
The diffusion MTF in SPRITE detectors only affects the scan direction
so that the vertical MTF is identical to that obtained with a rectangular
element.
MTFptee
Since detectors are in discrete locations, phase always affects the MTF
in the vertical direction. MTFphase is the same functional form as the
horizontal direction with the vertical sampling rate used.
mtfled
The vertical extent of the LED elements is used for the MTF.
MTF
x * voptics
The visual optics lens is assumed to be rotationally symmetrical and
therefore The MTF is identical in the vertical and horizontal directions.
MTFvldicon
Although not necessarily true, for mathematical convenience, the MTF
is considered the same in the horizontal and vertical directions.
MTFdfllter
MTFdfliter is included only if the digital filters operate in the vertical
direction. The vertical digital filters can be used to simulate the line-to-
line interpolation.
MTFinterp
This is the line-to-line interpolation MTF (discussed in Section 11.2). It
may be simulated by a digital filter.
MTF
j.7 x л. л monitor
Although not necessarily true, for mathematical convenience, the MTF
is considered the same in the horizontal and vertical directions.
MTFeye
MTFeye is considered to be identical for both the vertical and horizontal
directions.
MTF transfer
This is used only if the charge is transferred in the vertical direction.
Assuming that all the OTFs are positive, the system vertical MTFs are:
Common module systems
MTFy=MTFoptJtf^
EOMUX systems
MTFy = MTFopticsMTFmotionMTFdetectorMTFphaseMTFLEDMTFvoptics
x MTFvidlC0„MTFm0nit„MTFeye
EMUX systems
MTFy=MTFopticsMTFmolionMTFdaatoIMTFphilseMTFdflltelMTFintap
xMTF^^MTF^
Staring array systems
MTFy-MTFopticsMTFmotionMTFdaeaorMTFtransferMTFpl]aseMTFdfilta
xMTFintapMTF„„ltorMTFeye
Line-scanners
Line-scanners may be difficult to quantify for the vertical direction. As
the V/H ratio changes, the number of detectors in a line-scanner may
change and overlap may occur. Line-scanners can only be evaluated on a
case-by-case basis.
11.1. SAMPLING RATE
The vertical angular sampling distance is created by the detector-to-
detector angular spacing and the interlace ratio:
(11-1)
where Scc = djfl and R is the interlace ratio. Figure 11-1 illustrates a scanning
system. For staring arrays without microscan, R = 1. The angular sampling distance
is related to the overscan ratio by
f _ R _ 1 _ 1 ITos (j^scene ~ 0
s~ Scc~/3 NR-1],S ~ p Nscene-UoS
(11-2)
where NR is equal to Nscene. For most systems Nscene» 1 and Nscene» t]os. Then the
number of samples per DAS is approximately the overscan ratio and fs~T]oslp.
(b)
Figure 11-1. The vertical sampling rate is determined by the
detector center-to-center spacing and the interlace ratio, (a) R
= 3 and t]os = 1 and (b) R = 2 and tjos = 1.
Figure 11-2 illustrates the three different detector arrays in which the
center-to-center spacing is fixed and the detector size is changing. Figure 11-3
provides the MTFs and sampling frequencies.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 11-2. Three different detector arrays. The center-to-
center spacing is constant and the detector size changes, (a) Scc
>p and t]os < 1, (b) Scc=p and tjos = 1, and (c) <p and rjos > 1.
100% fill factor staring arrays are represented by (b). Finite
fill factor staring arrays are shown in (a). Only scanning arrays
can provide a scan pattern shown in (c).
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 11-3. MTF for the three different detector arrays shown
in Figure 11-2. (a) Grossly undersampled system (b) The best
MTF that can be achieved with a staring array, and (c) fn can
be greater than the detector cutoff if Scc<p!'2.
Figure 11-4 illustrates three different detector arrays that have the
different center-to-center spacing but the same detector size. Figure 11-4b also
represents a staring array with 100% fill factor and Figure 1 l-4c also represents an
array with a finite fill factor. Figure 11-5 illustrates the MTFs.
Figure 11-4. Three different detector arrays. The center-to-
center spacing is varied and the detector size is fixed, (a) Scc <
p and //,„ > 1, (b) = 0 and 17» = 1, and (c) >/? and //0! < 1.
(a)
(b)
Figure 11-5. MTF for the three different detector arrays shown
in Figure 11-4. (a) Aliasing will only be avoided when Scc <
pTZ, (b) The best MTF that can be achieved with , a staring
array. (Continued next page).
(c)
Figure 11-5 (continued), (c) An undersampled array.
The effective sampling frequency can be increased with a microscan or
dither technique (see Section 9.3. Microscan). Here, the line-of-sight is moved a
fraction offlldcc. At each location, the detector stares at the scene but for a reduced
integration time. Microscan can be either in one direction or in two direction. The
number of detector elements and monitor requirements determine whether
microscan in the vertical direction is appropriate.
The vertical direction on most systems is undersampled. As a result, there
is no unique MTF and an average phase MTF may be added. Actual performance
based upon vertical MTFs will vary depending upon the phase between the target
and the sampling lattice. For laboratory measurement, it is common practice to
"peak-up" the target (in-phase relationship) and then MTFphase= 1.
11.2. INTERPOLATION
After sampling, the data is simply an array of numbers residing in a
memory. The data array is manipulated into a format that is consistent to the
monitor requirements. For example, the common module system collects 360
independent infrared lines and most monitors require 480 lines. Expansion into
480 lines can be by achieved simply by replicating some lines or by a more
complex interpolation schemes1'5 such as bilinear interpolation.
For bilinear interpolation
MTFinterp{fy) = Sint2
(И-3)
The bilinear filter also introduces a sinc2(x) MTF in the horizontal direction. The
analyst can treat line-to-line interpolation as a separate MTF (MTFinterp) or use
MTFdfilter (Section 8.3.3., Image Reconstruction: Digital Filters).
Most line-to-line interpolation algorithms have been developed to
improve the image quality of a noiseless image. These algorithms may accentuate
noise and may not be appropriate for systems designed for the detection of targets
embedded in noise. Noise modification is discussed in Section 18.10.1., Line-to-
line Interpolation.
There are many image reconstruction algorithms. Only a few of these can
be described mathematically in closed-form and be included in an end-to-end
system performance model. The performance of the remaining algorithms can be
only inferred by viewing the system output for a few representative inputs. This
applies to those algorithms whose output depends upon signal amplitude or
diagonal gradients.
11.3. REFERENCES
1.1. Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in
Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2-
12(1985).
2. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete
Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Trans. Pattern Analysis and Machine
Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985).
3. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation,"
Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973).
4. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol.
33(3), pp. 725-729(1994).
5. A. Friedenberg, "Resolution Loss Caused by Display lines Replication and Interpolation," in
Thermosense XXI, D. Andresen and M. Strojnik, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2552, pp. 521-530
(1995).
EXERCISES
1. Averaging will improve the signal-to-noise ratio by the square root of the
number of pixels averaged. An engineer realizes that a line-to-line interpolation
scheme is required to create 480 monitor lines from an array that produces 360
lines. So he averages two lines and then duplicates them. He knows that averaging
will improve his signal-to-noise ratio. What effect will this have on the vertical
MTF?
2. To create 480 lines from an array that produces 360 lines, the electronic
engineer designs a circuit that duplicates every third line. That is, the input is A, B,
C, and the output is А, В, С, C. What effect does this interpolation scheme have on
the vertical MTF? Is this a linear circuit?
3. For the staggered array illustrated in Figure 1 l-2c, what should be the vertical
extent of each detector to achieve two samples per DAS?
4. What is the configuration of a staggered scanning array so that there are 3
samples per DAS?
5. For a staring array with 100% fill factor, plot the detector MTF and then add
bilinear interpolation. Is bilinear interpolation better than a simple averaging
circuit?
6. A staring array consists of 240x240 elements. Should the pixels be simply
replicated to meet RS 170 requirements or should bilinear interpolation be used?
How would you modify the design to improve performance?
12
RESOLUTION
There are four different aspects of resolution: (1) temporal resolution,
which is the ability to separate events in time, (2) gray scale resolution, which is
determined by the A/D converter design, noise floor, or the monitor capability, (3)
spectral resolution, and (4) spatial resolution. An imaging system operating at 30
Hz frame rate has a temporal resolution of 1/30 sec. Gray scale resolution is a
measure of the dynamic range. The spectral resolution is simply the spectral band
pass (e.g., visible, NIR, SWIR, MWIR, or LWIR) of the system. This chapter
covers spatial resolution.
Resolution provides valuable information regarding the finest detail that
can be discerned. Each discipline extracts its own type of information from data
and each discipline has its own requirements for resolution (Table 12-1).
Table 12-1
MEASURES OF RESOLUTION
DISCIPLINE RESOLUTION METRIC
Optical designers Rayleigh criterion Sparrow criterion Airy Disc diameter Blur diameter
Detector vendors Number of detector elements
System analyst (geometric approach) DAS
System analyst (MTF approach) Limiting resolution EIFOV
System calibration (SRF approach) Imaging resolution Measurement resolution
Monitor designers TV limiting resolution Number of addressable pixels
Photo reconnaissance and remote sensing Ground resolved distance
A large variety of resolution measures exist and the various definitions
may not be interchangeable. As imaging systems are incorporated into new
disciplines, it must be specified in terms used by those industries. For example,
photo interpreters use the ground resolved distance (GRD) when evaluating
reconnaissance imagery captured on film. But as infrared imaging systems replace
the wet film process, the GRD, by default, becomes an infrared imaging system
resolution measure.
Resolution does not uniquely define performance for it does not include
sensitivity. For example, large, low-contrast targets cannot be detected at the range
suggested by the system resolution if the signal is below the sensor's noise level.
Complete analysis includes both sensitivity and resolution. For detection by human
observers, the MRC or MRT provides the required combination. A large variety of
resolution measures exist and the various definitions may not be interchangeable.
As imaging systems are incorporated into new disciplines, it must be specified in
terms used by those industries. For example, photo interpreters use the ground
resolved distance (GRD) when evaluating reconnaissance imagery captured on
film. But as infrared imaging systems replace the wet film process, the GRD, by
default, becomes an infrared imaging system resolution measure.
Resolution does not uniquely define performance for it does not include
sensitivity. For example, large, low-contrast targets cannot be detected at the range
suggested by the system resolution if the signal is below the sensor's noise level.
Complete analysis includes both sensitivity and resolution. For detection by human
observers, the MRC or MRT provides the required combination.
System resolution depends on diffraction, optical aberrations, detector
angular subtense, digitization, electronic bandwidth, and resolution of the monitor.
The most common measure of resolution is the detector DAS because it is an
easily understood metric. The DAS is appropriate for those systems where the
system is detector limited. However, this may not always be the case. The optical
frequency cutoff or Nyquist frequency may limit system resolution. A design
based solely upon resolution requirements may not meet sensitivity requirements.
The attractiveness of resolution is that the maximum range at which a target can be
detected is easily estimated
„ target size
Range & —----------
resolution
(12-1)
This is the maximum range at which a periodic target can be faithfully
reproduced. Unfortunately common parlance calls it a detection range and the
range equation is inappropriately interpreted. If a target has sufficient intensity,
it can be detected at an "infinite1’ range. This is equivalent to our ability to see
stars in the sky.
Equation 12-1 should only be used to estimate the comparative range
performance for systems built to similar designs in which the resolution measures
are equatable (e.g., compare one EMUX to another EMUX). Equation 12-1 should
not be used to infer absolute range performance: the range at which an observer
detects a target.
Many resolution measures such as the DAS consider only a single
subsystem. When this subsystem value is used in Equation 12-1, an optimistic
range may be obtained. An end-to-end resolution measure is required. Shade's
equivalent resolution can include all the subsystems and, as such represents a
better representation of the resolution than a single value such as the DAS.
If resolution is defined by the DAS, then a vanishing small detector is
desired. Although any detector size, optical aperture, and focal length can be
chosen to select the resolution limit, the sensitivity is affected by the same
parameters. In general, as the resolution increases, the NEDT increases (Figure 12-
1). Thus, there is a tradeoff between sensitivity and resolution.
Figure 12-1. As resolution increases, the NEDT may also
increase. The system design is a tradeoff between resolution
and sensitivity.
Historically, resolution measures were derived from optical system
performance. As film was introduced, new measures were created. Sampled data
systems created a complexity in the traditional measures. Resolution may be
different in the vertical and horizontal directions due to different focal lengths
(anamorphic optics), non-square detectors, or unequal sampling. Following the
FLIR92 concept for two-dimensional MRT, the composite resolution is
/? _ / d d
^composite у у ’
(12-2)
where Rx and Rv are the resolution measures in the horizontal and vertical
directions. The composite, Rcon4,osite, is a mathematically convenient estimate of
system resolution. It cannot be directly measured.
12.1. ANALOG METRICS
Analog measures of resolution may be determined by the width of a point
source image, the minimum detectable separation of two point sources, where the
MTF drops to a certain level, or the minimum detail resolved by an observer
(Table 12-2). These measures assume that the system output is a replica of the
object (a linear-shift-invariant system). The TV measures are valid for the scan
direction only where the system is operating in the analog domain.
Resolution may be defined from optical considerations. Diffraction
produces the smallest possible spot size. Diffraction measures include the Rayleigh
criterion, Sparrow criterion, and the Airy disk diameter. The Airy disk is the bright
center of the diffraction pattern produced by an ideal optical system. The Rayleigh
and Sparrow criteria are a measure of the ability to distinguish two closely spaced
objects (CSO) where the objects are point sources. Optical aberrations and focus
limitations will increase the diffraction diameter to the blur diameter. Optical
designers using ray-tracing programs usually calculate the blur diameter. The blur
diameter size is dependent upon how it is specified (i.e., the amount of power
encircled).
The limiting resolution can be defined as that spatial frequency where the
MTF drops to 2% or 5% of its maximum value. TV limiting resolution is
determined from the finest detail that can be discerned by an observer when
viewing star, wedge, or resolution pattern. TV limiting resolution is a subjective
measure. The spatial frequency at which the pattern disappears is approximately
the same as the limiting resolution. Besides TV limiting resolution, a variety of
other measures of resolution exist for monitors1 and a variety of measurement
techniques is available.2
Table 12-2
RESOLUTION MEASURES for ANALOG SYSTEMS
RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION TEST (usual units)
Rayleigh Criterion Ability to distinguish 2 point sources 0 1.222/D (mrad) (Calculated)
Spanow Criterion Ability to distinguish 2 point sources 0 = X!D (mrad) (Calculated)
Airy Disk Diffraction limited diameter produced by a point source 0 = 2 44 XID (mrad) (Calculated)
Blur Diameter Actual minimum diameter produced by point source Calculated from ray tracing (mrad)
Limiting Resolution Spatial frequency at which MTF = 0.02 to 0.05 Measured or calculated (cycles/mrad)
TV limiting resolution Ability to resolve square waves Measured (TV lines per picture height)
Imaging resolution Angular subtense at which SRF = 0.5 Measured (mrad)
Measurement resolution Angular subtense at which SRF = 0.99 Measured (mrad)
Ground resolved distance The smallest test target (1 cycle) that a photo interpreter Measured or calculated (feet or meters)
Ground resolution An estimate of the limiting feature size seen by a photo interpreter Measured (feet or meters)
The slit response function (SRF) was developed many years ago when
all thermal imaging systems had scanners. The SRF incorporated the response of
the optics, detector, and subsequent electronics. The SRF provides both the
imaging resolution and measurement resolution. While commercial systems
were characterized by these metrics, military systems always used the DAS.
The imaging resolution is that target-angular-subtense that produces a
50% response in the slit response function (Figure 12-2). For an ideal system, the
DAS is twice the imaging resolution. The measurement resolution is
approximately the smallest sized target that will be faithfully reproduced in
intensity. Although no industry standard exists, it occurs when 0.90 < SRF < 0.99.
It is the absolute minimum size that can be used for accurate temperature
measurements.
Target Angular Subtense (mrad)
Figure 12-2. Slit response function. 0X is the imaging
resolution and 02 is the measurement resolution.
For aerial reconnaissance and associated image interpretation, resolution
is measured by the ground resolved distance.3,4 Ground resolution is a subjective
term that is a numerical estimate of the limiting features of objects to be examined.
The system must be capable of resolving these features. For example, a system
may require a ground resolution of 4 inches when examining the white centerline
of a highway. When examining granite boulders lying on sand beside the same
highway the system need only resolve, perhaps, two feet. GRD cannot be
measured in the laboratory since it depends upon the distance to the target but may
be calculated from an appropriate resolution measure.
When viewing aerial imagery that contains a test pattern (such as the U.S.
Air Force 1951 standard 3-bar target), an image analyst determines the smallest
discernible cycle on the ground. This cycle width (bar plus space) is the GRD. It
includes the system MTF and possible degradation by the atmosphere and is a
function of altitude. The GRD is related3,4 to the 10-point Imagery Interpretability
Rating Scale (IIRS). The National Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale (NURS)
has replaced the IIRS.510 Although the GRD-based Imagery Interpretability Rating
Scale was developed by the military, it can be modified for environmental remote
sensing.11
12.2. SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS
New measures of resolution have been introduced with the advent of
sampled data systems (Table 12-3). The detector angular subtense, DAS, is often
used to describe the resolution of systems when the detector is the limiting
subsystem. If the detector horizontal and vertical dimensions are different, then the
DAS in the two directions is different. The IFOV is the angular cone from which
the detector senses radiation. It is a summary measure that includes both the
optical and detector responses. If the optical blur diameter is small compared to the
DAS, then the IFOV is approximately equal to the DAS. The IFOV is typically a
measured quantity. Here, a small spot transverses the detector element and the
detector output is graphed as a function of angle. The IFOV is defined as the full
width one-half maximum amplitude (FWHM) of the resultant signal. If the system
output is measured, then the IFOV also depends upon the electronic MTFs. The
pixel angular subtense (PAS) is the spatial sampling rate for staring arrays. The
Nyquist frequency is one-half of the PAS.
Table 12-3
RESOLUTION MEASURES for a SAMPLED DATA SYSTEM
RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION TEST (usual units)
DAS Angle subtended by one detector element a = d!flsys (mrad) (calculated)
IFOV Angular cone over which the detector senses radiation Measured 50% points (mrad)
Nyquist frequency One-half of the sampling frequency Calculated (cycles/mrad)
PAS Angle subtended by detector center-to-center spacing PAS = dC(JflSYS (mrad) (calculated)
EIFOV One-half of the reciprocal of the spatial frequency at which MTF = 0.5 Measured or calculated (mrad)
Ensquared power Point visibility factor Single detector output produced by a point source Calculated or measured (%)
Pixels Number of detector elements or number of digital data points Numeric
Since the MTF is equal to zero when the spatial frequency is 1/DAS,
resolution can be defined as when the MTF = 0. However, for most systems, the
MTF does not abruptly reach zero but approaches zero asymptotically. The
apparent DAS, aapp can be estimated by fitting a sinc(7i«wfx) curve to the MTF
(Figure 12-3). This approach may be useful for systems employing SPRITE
detectors where diffusion broadening is minimal. Most resolution measures cannot
be used for systems employing SPRITE detectors (See Figure 8-6).
Figure 12-3. Fitting a detector MTF to the system MTF to
obtain an effective system cutoff.
Sampled data systems may be limited optically, by the detector or by the
Nyquist frequency. For undersampled systems, the system MTF is defined only up
to the Nyquist frequency (Figure 12-4). The effective-instantaneous-field-of-view,
EIFOV, offers an alternate measure of resolution. For many systems, the EIFOV
and IFOV are approximately equal.
If the blur diameter is larger than a single detector, the detector output
is less than if the blur diameter were smaller than a detector (See Section З.1.З.,
Point Source). The ratio of the center detector output to the sum of all the
detector outputs is the ensquared power.12 Ensquared power is an important
design criterion for systems that are used for point source detection such as
IRST systems. It can be measured or may be obtained from the aperiodic
transfer function. The ensquared power value also is called the point visibility
factor or blur efficiency. For any experimentally derived value, phasing effects
dramatically affect the results.
Figure 12-4. Definition of EIFOV for an undersampled
system.
Example 12-1
ENSQUARED POWER
A pinhole whose angular subtense is 1/10 of the DAS simulates a point
source. Each detector provides the value given in Figure 12-5b when covered with
a black opaque cloth. Centering the pinhole on a detector creates the output shown
in Figure 12-5 a. What is the ensquared power?
Subtracting the ambient values (Figure 12-5b) from the image (Figure
12-5a) provides the signal produced only by the source (Figure 12-5c). Then
— = 57.3% (12-:
384
Ensquared power
5 5 6 5 5
5 20 30 20 5
6 30 225 30 6
5 20 30 20 5
5 5 6 5 5
center pixel output
sunt of all pixels
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
0 0 1 0 0
0 15 25 15 0
1 25 220 25 1
0 15 25 15 0
0 0 1 0 0
(a) (b) (c) = (a) - (b)
Figure 12-5. Ensquared power, (a) Detector outputs when the
point source image is centered on a detector, (b) detector
outputs with no target, and (c) difference between (b) and (a).
The peak ensquared power is 57.3%. By moving the pinhole, phasing effects
would reduce the ensquared power. The smallest ensquared power will be
obtained when the pinhole is centered on a comer where four detectors are joined.
12.3. SYSTEM DESIGN BASED UPON RESOLUTION
The variety of resolution measures suggests that a variety of designs are
possible: each of which optimizes a particular resolution measure. Each design has
its own merits and there is nothing inherently right or wrong about any design.
A common starting point is to make the optical blur diameter equal to the
detector size. This is only an initial design starting point and the desired
relationship between the blur diameter and detector size can deviate depending
upon the application. For a diffraction-limited circular aperture, the Airy disk
diameter in the detector plane is
< 2 44 ; A
dairy =6 fl f ' д'" 1^- C12-4)
Figure 12-6 illustrates the Airy disk diameter as a function of clear
aperture diameter for the visible, MWIR, and LWIR. As the wavelength decreases,
the angular disk diameter decreases. If the detector is sufficiently small to fully
exploit the optical resolution, the MWIR provides more resolution than the LWIR
for a fixed diameter optical system.
Figure 12-6. Airy disk diameter as a function of wavelength
and aperture diameter. The average wavelengths in the visible,
MWIR, and LWIR are 0.55, 4, and 10 pm, respectively.
Similarly, for a fixed resolution requirement, the MWIR aperture only has to be
OMWIR/0LWIR times the diameter of the LWIR system. Figure 12-7 portrays the slant
range for a variety of resolutions based upon Equation 12-1. When the detector
DAS equals the Airy disk diameter, the detector cutoff, flco, is 1/2.44 of the optical
cutoff, foco. Figure 12-8 illustrates this relationship. Here, the detector cutoff limits
the system response. This limitation can be appreciated by viewing the intensity
profile of several point sources separated by 2.44 MD rad (Figure 12-9).
resolution
RANGE (km)
Figure 12-7. Detection range as a function of angular
resolution (mrad). These ranges are only achievable for very
high contrast targets. Otherwise, sensitivity considerations will
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 12-8. Optical and detector MTFs when the detector
size is equal to the Airy disk diameter. The detector cutoff
limits the system spatial frequency response.
Figure 12-9. Intensity profile of two point sources separated by
2.441/Z) rad. If the detector size is matched to this separation,
it would be impossible to distinguish the two sources.
Although the MTF is defined for sinusoidal inputs, optical resolution is
often linked to the Rayleigh or Sparrow criterion. These criteria were developed as
a measure of an optical system resolution. The blur diameter was viewed by the
eye or by film. In both these cases, the detector (the eye or the film) had much
higher resolution than the blur diameter. With the Rayleigh criterion, the first zero
of one point source is centered on the maximum of the next and the separation is
1.22 XLD rad. Figure 12-10 illustrates a series of point sources separated by the
Rayleigh criterion. If the DAS is 1.22 X/D this modulation would not be detected.
Figure 12-10. Series of point sources separated by the
Rayleigh criterion, 1.22 XID rad. If the detector DAS was
equal to this separation, it could only reproduce lower
frequencies.
If the detector cutoff equaled the optical cutoff, the full spatial frequency
response of the optics is exploited and the system resolution is limited by the
optics (Figure 12-11). Here the detector size is only 40.9% of the Airy disc
diameter. Even with this relationship, the detector MTF degrades the system MTF.
If the detector were even smaller, the system MTF would be nearly equal to the
optical MTF.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 12-11. Detector cutoff equal to the optical cutoff.
MTFdetector still degrades the signal passed by the optical
system. A vanishing small detector is required to fully exploit
the optical MTF.
12.4. SHADE’S EQUIVALENT RESOLUTION
Shade created a metric for system performance. As reported by
Lloyd, Sendall modified Shade’s equivalent resolution14 such that
Re“ 2-'4 'r
2j|MTFSIS(/)| df
0
(12-5)
where Ne is Shade's equivalent pass band (discussed in Section 13.2., Equivalent
Pass Band). Req cannot be measured. It is a mathematical construct used simply to
compare overall performance. It has units of 1 /frequency. As the MTF increases,
REQ decreases and the resolution “improves” (smaller is better). This provides a
better indication of system performance than just the DAS. Req provides a better
measure of resolution and probably should be used in Equation 12-1 to obtain a
more realistic measure of range performance.
Shade's approach is appropriate for well-behaved MTFs. It probably
should not be used (nor should any other image quality metric) when there is any
significant aliasing present, nonlinear image processing algorithms, or significant
boost. Req may be different for the vertical and horizontal directions and Equation
12-2 can be used for the composite resolution. Using Rcomposite in Equation 12-1
provides an estimate of the detection range. The metric was developed for human
observer response. The applicability to machine vision systems has not been
established at this time.
As an approximation, the system resolution, Req_sys, may be estimated
from the subsystem resolutions, Rt, by
Req-sys« + ^2 + • • • + •
(12-6)
Req cannot be evaluated in closed form for all subsystems such as boost, defocused
optics or Chebychev filters. For these subsystems, Equation 12-6 must be
evaluated numerically. If a subsystem MTF is essentially unity over the spatial
frequency region of interest, then that subsystem Req can be ignored (e.g., Req = 0).
Following is a list of equivalent resolutions for several subsystems.
Optics
MTF = —
1 * optics
R optics jy mrad. (12-7)
Note that Shade’s approach provides a value that is smaller than the
Airy disk diameter. Recall that REQ is only a mathematical construct
used to analyze system performance.
Detector
MTFdetector sine (ct f x )
R detector = a mrad‘
(12-8)
LEDs and linear motion have an MTF with the same functional
dependence as a detector and therefore will have the same equivalent
resolution (with appropriate units).
Sinusoidal motion
MTFsinusoidal ^o^^s^fx^
К sinusoidal l-37tZ mrad.
(12-9)
Single-order low-pass filter
MTFfllter =
1
5.
R filter
1
(12-10)
Random motion and display
MTF, . =
' Gaussian c
D
Gaussian
(12-11)
Eye
The units depend upon the frequency used.
yJeye
MTFeye M
Г
Reye ~~ deg.
л M
(12-12)
For many systems, the detector MTF and the optics MTF dominate the
system MTF. When Roptics dominates Re(] we say the system is optics-limited.
When Rdetector dominates Req , we say the system is detector-limited. Using
Equation 12-6 to estimate the composite resolution provides
eq-sys
d I f 1.8452. fV
— J ---------- +1 mrad.
J4 I d )
(12-13)
It is easier to gain insight into the relationship between the optical and detector
resolutions by evaluating it in image space
(1.845ЯгУ
< d ,
+1 mm.
(12-14)
As ).F/d decreases, Req.sys approaches d. For large values of XF/d, the system
becomes optics-limited and the equivalent resolution increases (Figure 12-12).
Figures 12-13 through 12-15 illustrate wavelength effects. Figure 12-15
suggests that most LWIR systems are not detector limited. Therefore using the
DAS in Equation 12-1 will provide an optimistic range (too big).
Figure 12-12. Equivalent resolution as a function of AF/d. The
vertical line <&).F/d 1/(2.44) = 0.41 separates optics-limited
from detector-limited operation. It occurs when the Airy disk
size is equal to the detector size.
Figure 12-13. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number
for a typical A-inch format CCD camera (d = 10 pm and 2 =
0.5 pm). The vertical line at F = 8.2 separates optics-limited
from detector-limited operation.
Figure 12-14. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number
for a typical MWIR sensor (d = 40 pm and 2 = 4 pm). The
vertical line at F = 4.1 separates optics-limited from detector-
limited operation.
<л
20 -|----------1------!----1----------1-----------1-----------1
0 1 2 3 4 5
Figure 12-15. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number
for a typical LWIR sensor (d = 40 pm and 2=10 pm). The
vertical line at F = 1.6 separates optics-limited from detector-
limited operation.
We live in a world where “smaller is better.” Detector sizes are
shrinking. This allows the system designer to create physically smaller cameras.
Using a one-half sized detector implies a 2x improvement in resolution.
However, this is only true if the system is operating in the detector-limited
region. As d decreases, the f-number must also decrease to stay within the
detector-limited region. Reducing the f-number can place a burden on the
optical designer. Note that, if the f-number is not reduced in the same proportion
(Equation 3-18), the output signal decreases. In principle, any loss in signal can
be overcome by increasing the system gain.
These results would be evident when performing range predictions or
evaluating MRC or MRT plots. Changing the focal length or detector size
changes the MRT (see Figure 12-1).
Example 12-2
RESOLUTION
A common module system operating in the LWIR spectral region has an
entrance diameter of 10 inches. The DAS is 0.1 mrad. The system contains a low
pass filter whose f3dB is 6 cycles/mrad when referred back to object space. What is
the resolution when the jitter, Gjitter is 0 (laboratory use), 20 grad and 50 prad? (see
Section 6.8., System Design Example, Random Motion Effects)
The optics provides
„ 1.845Л 1.845 1.845 л
RnntirK =---------=-------=-------= 0.0726 mrad . (12-15)
' D foco 25.4
The detector provides /?totof=0.l mrad. The electronics provides
R.„ =--------= — = 0.0531 mrad . (12-16)
Q xfe3dB
When the jitter is zero, Rjitter = 0. For jitter of 20 prad and 50 grad, Rjitter is 0.0709
mrad and 0.177 mrad, respectively. With no jitter, the resultant resolution is
Req_sys = V(0.0762)2 + (o.l)2 + (0.0531)2 = 0.136 mrad . (12-17)
With 20 prad jitter, the resultant resolution is
Req_sys = 7(0.13б)2 + (0.0709)2 =0.153 mrad.
(12-18)
With 50 grad jitter, the resultant resolution is
Req_sys = 7(0ЛЗб)2 + (0.177)2 = 0.224 mrad . (12-19)
Figure 12-16 illustrates the MTFs. The spatial frequency associated with the
equivalent resolution is 1/Req.sys. For this example, MTF ~ 0.14 at l/Req_sys.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 12-16. MTFs for three high frequency random
motions. The vertical lines indicate \/Req_sys.
12.5. REFERENCES
1. L. M. Biberman, Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, pp. 11-86, L. M.
Biberman, ed., Plenum Press, New York (1973).
2. P. A. Keller, "Resolution Measurement Techniques for Data Display Cathode Ray Tubes," Displays
Vol. 7(1), pp. 17-29(1986).
3. Air Standardization Agreement: "Minimum Ground Object Sizes for Imaging Interpretation," Air
Standardization Co-ordinating Committee report AIR STD 101/11 (31 December 1976).
4. Air Standardization Agreement: "Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale," Air Standardization Co-
ordinating Committee report AIR STD 101/11 (10 July 1978).
5. K. Riehl and L. Maver, "A Comparison of Two Common Aerial Reconnaissance Image Quality
Measures," in Airborne Reconnaissance XX, W. G. Fishell, A. A. Andraitis, A. C. Crane, Jr., and M. S.
Fagan, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2829, pp. 242-254 (1996).
6. J. M. Irvine, "National Imagery Interpretability Rating Scales (NIIRS): Overview and
Methodology," in Airborne Reconnaissance XXI, W. C. Fishell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3128, pp.
93-103 (1997).
7. G. C. Holst, Sampling, Aliasing, and Data Fidelity, pp. 311-319, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL
(1998).
8. J. C. Leachtenauer, W. Malila, J. Irvine, L. Colburn, and N. Salvaggio, General Image-Quality
Equation: GIQE," Applied Optics, Vol 36(32), pp. 8322-8328 (1997).
9. R. E. Hanna, "Using the GRD to set EO Sensor Design Budgets," in Airborne Reconnaissance XXI,
W. C. Fishell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3128 (1997).
10. R. G. Driggers, P. Cox, and M. Kelley, "National Imagery Interpretation Rating System and the
Probabilities of Detection, Recognition, and Identification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 36(7), pp. 1952-
1959(1997).
11. J. D. Greer and J. Caylor, "Development of an Environmental Image Interpretability' Rating Scale,"
in Airborne Reconnaissance XVI, T. W. Augustyn and P. A. Henkel, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol.
1763, pp. 151-157 (1992).
12. L. M. Beyer, S, H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Obscured Circular Pupils With
Off-Center Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991).
13, J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, page 109. Plenum Press, New York (1975)
14. О. FI. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture
Systems," published in four parts in J. SMPTE-. "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics,"
Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of
Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III: The
Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV Image Analysis in
Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1955).
EXERCISES
1. Referring to Figure 3-9, estimate the DAS and IFOV for each of the nine
diagrams.
2. Estimate the ensquared power if the blur diameter is centered on the corner of
four adjoining detectors (Figure 12-5).
3. How would you define a DAS and IFOV for a SPRITE detector?
4. How would you define a DAS and IFOV for the human eye?
5. Three different systems are considered for a specific application: visible,
MWIR, and LWIR. In all systems, the detector size is 30 pm square. The aperture
size is four inches and the system f-number is 2. What is the DAS and IFOV?
Estimate if necessary.
13
IMAGE QUALITY
Image quality is a subjective impression ranking the imagery from poor-
to-excellent. It is somewhat a learned ability. It is a perceptual one, accomplished
by the brain, affected by and incorporating other sensory systems, emotions,
learning, and memory. The relationships are many and not well understood.
Seeing varies between individuals and temporarily within an individual. There
exist large variations in an observer's judgment as to the correct rank ordering from
worst-to-best and therefore image quality cannot be placed on an absolute scale.
Visual psychophysical investigations have not measured all the properties relevant
to imaging systems.
Many formulas exist for predicting image quality. Each is appropriate
under a particular set of viewing conditions. These expressions are typically
obtained from empirical data in which multiple observers view many images with
a known amount of degradation. The observers rank-order the imagery from
worst-to-best and then an equation is derived which relates the ranking scale to the
amount of degradation.
If the only metric for image quality were resolution, then we would
attempt to maximize resolution in our system design. Many tests have provided
some insight into image metrics that are related to image quality. In general,
images with higher MTFs and less noise are judged as having better image quality.
There is no single ideal MTF shape that provides best image quality. For example,
Kusaka1 showed that the MTF that produced the most aesthetically pleasing
images depended upon the scene content.
The metrics suggested by Shade,2 Granger and Cupery,3 and Barten4'8
offer additional insight on how to optimize an imaging system. Granger and
Cupery developed the Subjective Quality Factor (SQF): an empirically derived
relationship using individuals' responses when viewing many photographs. Shade
used photographs and included high quality TV images. Barten's approach is more
comprehensive in that it includes the monitor contrast and luminance. Aliasing
was not overpowering in any of these studies.
In some respects, the starting point for system design should be the
monitor. No image will look sharp unless the overall system is MTFeye limited. But
the more this is true, the less information is conveyed. That is, the eye cannot
perceive all the detail provided by the system. On the other hand, scan lines or
pixels become obvious if the system is detector- or monitor-limited. Ideally, the
sensor resolution should be approximately to the eye’s resolution.
There are potentially three different system design requirements: (1)
Good image quality, (2) performing a specific task, and (3) specific application. In
some cases these are equivalent, in others they are not. While good image quality
is always desired, a military system designed to detect a specific target may not
provide the "best" image quality. Computer monitors are usually designed to make
alphanumeric characters readable (specific application).
13.1. MTF
Our perception of good image quality is based upon the real world of
seeing all colors, all intensities and textures. With an imaging system, we have a
limited field-of-view, limited temporal and spatial resolution, and a two-
dimensional view of a three-dimensional world. In the real world our eyes scan the
entire scene. This is not possible with imagery. Furthermore, the real world is
noiseless and the loss of image quality due to noise can only be estimated. There is
no model that accurately describes the interaction of noise and the desired image
structure. Most visual psychophysical experiments on image quality were derived
from photographs with minimal added noise.
The eye is most sensitive to spatial frequencies between three and six
cycles/deg and boost should be used to emphasize those spatial frequencies that are
important to visual image quality. The absolute rating is different depending upon
the scale used, but the relative rating form worst-to-best is similar. Within
measurement accuracy, it is probably difficult to select one over another.
Therefore the model that is easiest to implement may be used.
Figure 13-1 illustrates two different MTFs that may have significantly
different resolutions depending upon the definition selected. When systems have
different MTFs, specific scenes can be selected that makes one system appear
better than the other. This is particularly true if the MTFs are not similar in shape
or functional form.
Which system selected depends upon the specific application. While they
may appear equal in an image quality metric, range performance trades will select
that system that has the highest MTF at the spatial frequency of interest. For
example for high spatial frequencies, system A is better and for low spatial
frequencies, system В is better.
Figure 13-1. Two different systems that may have different
resolutions but may provide equivalent image quality when
reproducing specific scenes.
The results of Shade, Granger and Cupery, and Barten suggest something
about the MTF. But this is not necessarily related to the ability to detect certain
sized targets. Detection criteria are contained m the Johnson criteria (Chapter 20,
Target Discrimination) and the target transfer function. The amount of boost and
the boost frequency can be selected to optimize the detection range of a specific
sized target. FLIR92 outputs suggest that boost should be at that spatial frequency
that represents the target size. This is a result of the model formulation and may
not necessarily provide the best overall imagery.
With staring arrays, the concepts of resolution and MTF are ill defined.
Phasing effects can destroy imagery. Any image quality metric must be used with
caution for sampled data systems where significant aliasing may occur (see
Chapter 14, Sample-data Systems).
System optimization for automatic target recognizers and target cuers is
different from optimization for an observer. The eye with its adaptive tuned filter
is more tolerant of noise and aliasing than an ATR or cuer. These machine vision
systems probably want unity MTF at all spatial frequencies. Boost increases both
the signal and the noise equally so that the SNR remains constant at that
frequency. It is not obvious how boost enhances the detection of targets embedded
in noise for machine vision systems.
13.2. EQUIVALENT PASS BAND
Shade2 discovered that the apparent image sharpness of a TV picture can
be described by
00
0
(13-1)
where 7Ve is Shade's equivalent pass band. Shade's approach using the square of the
MTF emphasized those spatial frequencies at which the MTF is relatively high. It
appears to be a good measure for classical systems in which the MTF is
monotonically decreasing. The two MTFs shown in Figure 13-1 could have the
same equivalent pass bands. Thus, a single number such as 7Ve should not be used
to compare systems built to different designs. However, Ne is useful for comparing
a system built to similar designs. For example, it can be used to compare, on a
relative scale, all EMUX systems. It should not be used to compare a common
module system to an EMUX system that has boost. The equivalent pass band was
related to an equivalent resolution in Section 12.4., Shade's Equivalent Resolution
Re„= —— . (13-2)
q 2Ne
13.3. PERCEIVED SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO
The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is
MTF M 1
SNR=k----------22---------------------------------------, (13-3)
system noise {eye spatial filter){eye temporal filter)
where ЛТ is the intensity difference between the target and its immediate
background and Ar is a proportionality constant that depends upon the aperture
diameter, focal length, and quantum efficiency. When the perceived SNR is above
a threshold value, the target is just perceived (discussed in Section 19.2.2, SNRpi
and te).
*4
As illustrated in Figure 13-2, as the intensity increases, higher spatial
frequencies can be perceived. Here, the resolution appears to increase as scene
intensity increases.8 However, most system resolution metrics (see Chapter 12,
Resolution) are independent of light level. The image quality metrics introduced in
this chapter deal with high contrast targets with minimal noise. With threshold
detection, the targets are embedded in noise and just barely visible. Threshold
detection, when plotted as a function of target spatial frequency, is simply the
MRT or MRC (see Chapter 19, System Performance Models'). The MRT and MRC
are system performance metrics independent of image quality.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 13-2. Perceived SNR as a function of target spatial
frequency and target intensity. When SNRp is above a
threshold value, those spatial frequencies can be perceived.
The Korn fold-Law son eye model has been used. The eye
inhibitory response model would also show a change in low
frequency target detection.
13.4. SUBJECTIVE QUALITY FACTOR
According to Granger and Cupery,3 the spatial frequency important to
image quality is in the region from approximately one-third to three times the peak
sensitivity of the eye. This roughly covers the region between the 50% points on
the eye MTF curve (Figure 13-3). The eye models of Campbell and Robson, Nill,
Schultz, and deJong (Figure 6-25) support Granger and Cupery's approach. The
Komfeld-Lawson model (Figure 6-27) does not provide the same insight as the
subjective quality factor. Recall that the Komfeld-Lawson model was created only
to simulate the mid to high spatial frequency response. The SQF is defined in
logarithmic units. Assuming peak sensitivity at 4.5 cycles/deg the SQF is:
iog(/2)
SQF = J MTFsys (Д ) J(log(/X )) ,
Mfr)
(13-4)
where f - 1.5Msyv /17.45, f2 = 13.5/И^. /17.45, and Msys is the overall system
magnification as seen by the observer (Equation 6-58). Since the eye response
appears to be log-normally distributed, a quality factor based upon a logarithmic
scale appears reasonable. In the SQF approach, only those frequencies that are
very important to the eye are included. The spatial frequency presented to the eye
depends upon the image size on the display, the distance to the display, and
electronic zoom. Table 13-1 provides an interpretation9 of the SQF. These results
are based upon many observers viewing noiseless photographs with known MTF
degradation.
Figure 13-3. SQF region compared to the Komfeld-Lawson
eye model and Campbell-Robson eye model. The Komfeld-
Lawson eye model does not lend itself to the SQF approach.
However, the Komfeld-Lawson model is considered only
applicable to mid spatial frequencies.
Table 13-1
SUBJECTIVE QUALITY FACTOR
SQF SUBJECTIVE IMAGE QUALITY
0.92 Excellent
0.80 Good
0.75 Acceptable
0.50 Unsatisfactory
0.25 Unusable
If boost is employed, then it should be used to increase those spatial
frequencies that fall within the SQF band pass. Figure 13-4 illustrates an airborne
system that is eye-limited in that the pilot is too far away from a small display. The
boost is just outside the region of the SQF. Figure 13-5 illustrates the same system
when the imagery is viewed on a high quality laboratory monitor. The boost is
now within the SQF pass band.
MTF MTF
Figure 13-4. SQF region for an MTFeye limited airborne
system. The boost is outside the SQF region. foco = 25.4
cycles/mrad, a=0.1 mrad, o;=30 grad, two filters with f3dB = 6
cycles/mrad (when referred to object space), a digital filter
that provides boost (illustrated in Figure 8-12), MTFS&H, and
MTFphase have been included. The effective sampling
frequency is 40 cycles/mrad. The observer is 36 inches from a
6-inch monitor.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 13-5. SQF region for laboratory viewing on a high
quality monitor. vr = 0. The observer is 36 inches from a
14-inch monitor. The boost is within the SQF region.
According to this image quality model, the imagery will look good in the
laboratory but appears less than optimized in actual usage. That is, the system may
be considered good based upon laboratory imagery. If the task is to resolve high
frequency targets only, then the boost may be in the correct location.
By using a rectangle to illustrate the area of interest, it suggests where the
boost frequency should be located. Shade’s equivalent pass band (or equivalent
resolution) does not directly indicate how to optimize the boost frequency.
13.5. SQUARE-ROOT INTEGRAL
The eye-brain system appears to operate as a tuned spatial-temporal filter
and tuning varies according to the task on hand. Since the eye approximates an
optimum filter, no system performance improvement is expected by precisely
matching the image spectrum to the eye-brain-preferred spectrum. Rather, if the
displayed spectrum is within the limits of the eye spectrum, the eye will
automatically tune to the image. Clearly the overall system magnification should
be set such that the frequency of the maximum interest coincides with the peak
frequency of the eye's SWR. Although this implies a specific frequency, the range
of optimization is broad as illustrated by the SQF approach.
Barten introduced the square-root integral (SQRI) approach4 to image
quality. This model includes the effects of various monitor parameters such as
resolution, addressability, contrast, luminance, display size, and viewing distance.
He later5-7 expanded the model to include noise:
co
SQRI = J ,lMTFsys(fx) rf(log(/x)), (13-5)
0
where MTFsys includes the eye. Barten's approach is attractive since it includes the
eye's response to noise. The equivalent pass band, SQF, and the SQRI provide
similar results for systems with well-behaved MTFs. That is, higher values provide
better imagery.
13.6. REFERENCES
1. H. Kusaka, "Consideration of Vision and Picture Quality - Psychological Effects Induced by Picture
Sharpness," in Human Vision, Visual Processing and Digital Display, В. E. Rogowitz, ed., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1077, pp 50-55(1989).
2. О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture
Systems," published in four parts in J. SMPTE\ "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics,"
Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of
Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III: The
Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV: Image Analysis in
Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp 593-617 (1955).
3. E. M. Granger and K. N. Cupery, "An Optical Merit Function (SQF) Which Correlates With
Subjective Image Judgments," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 16, pp. 221-230 (1972).
4. P. G. Barten, "Evaluation of Subjective Image Quality with the Square-root Integral Method,"
Journal of the Optical Society of America. A, Vol. 17(10), pp. 2024-2031 (1990).
5. P. G. Barten, "Evaluation of the Effect of Noise on Subjective Image Quality," in Human Vision,
Visual Processing and Digital Display II, J. P. Allenbach, M. H. Brill, and В E. Rogowitz, eds., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1453, pp. 2-15 (1991).
6. P. G. Barten, "Physical Model for the Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye," in Human Vision,
Visual Processing and Digital Display III, В. E. Rogowitz, SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1666, pp 57-72
(1992).
7. P. G. Barten, Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye and its Effect on Image Quality," pp. 153-198,
SPIE Press, Bellingham WA (1999).
8. P. G. Barten, Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye and its Effect on Image Quality," pp. 178-179,
SPIE Press, Bellingham WA (1999).
9. F. J. Drago, E. M Granger, and R. C. Hicks, "Procedures for Making Color Fiche Transparencies of
Maps, Charts, and Documents," Journal of Imaging Science and Technology, Vol. 11(1) pp. 12-17
(1965).
14
SAMPLED-DATA SYSTEMS
Perception of Displayed Information contains many examples of aliasing
and a theoretical treatment of aliasing. Biberman1 asks, "What does sampling do to
picture quality?" and "What must the sampling frequency and format be to
minimize image deterioration?" He further states: In the case of image formation
by a matrix of detectors with electrical outputs, the problems associated with
fabrication, cost, interconnections of wiring, number of amplifiers, and so forth
serve to constrain the number of detectors used. Thus there tend to be many fewer
detector elements per picture.... and the limitations associated with sampling the
imagery must be considered..... Basically, there are three factors affecting this
problem of finite sampling and image quality: (1) The number of samples per
image, (2) The signal-to-noise ratio, and (3) The generation of spurious signals by
the sampling process. With the desire to design the least-complex system,
Biberman’s questions lead to: "How much aliasing can be tolerated?"
For periodic images whose spatial frequencies' approach fn , sum and
difference frequencies create beat patterns. Thus, undersampling can be very
evident when viewing periodic images. For aperiodic images, there is uncertainty
in an edge location. This uncertainty appears, at most, as one detector spacing or
one clock-time distance from the true location. Unless several edges are close
together (a periodic pattern), these effects tend to be overlooked. The naturally
occurring real world is typically aperiodic and the moire structure is rarely seen in
real imagery. Legault2 looked at 109 airborne images before finding an example of
aliasing. He selected a plowed field. Whether aliasing is bothersome (it is always
present) is scene dependent and the degree of undesirability cannot be predicted in
advance.
We have become accustomed to undersampling. Our commercial
televisions are undersampled in the vertical direction due to the raster pattern.
Digital displays are undersampled in both directions. The undersampling effect
produces moire patterns that become evident when the image contains periodic
objects - such as a person wearing a striped shirt. For all the remaining objects, the
edge uncertainty is ±!4 raster line. We have become accustomed to this "standard
TV quality” and an image must be significantly degraded before we object to the
image quality. However, this does not mean that aliasing should be neglected. It
introduces artifacts in all imagery. Park and Hazra3 recommend that these artifacts
be considered as signal-dependent added noise.
To avoid aliasing, the signal must be band-limited, sampled at an
adequate rate, and be appropriately reconstructed. These conditions are not fully
met with electro-optical imaging systems. As a result, signals are aliased. Sampling
frequency deals with sinusoidal patterns and targets in the real world are aperiodic.
While aliasing is generally considered undesirable, it does not totally interfere
with target detection, recognition, or identification. The ideal anti-alias filter
eliminates all frequencies above Nyquist. For target detection, it is better to have
aliased frequencies than no frequencies (e.g., potentially no target). The anti-alias
filter does more harm than good. This is a direct consequence of who (or what) is
interpreting the imagery. Sampling theory was developed for audio
communications and the ear is a frequency detector. The eye, on the other hand, is
primarily an intensity detector. The eye does not care if the frequency spectrum
has been altered somewhat. Aliased signals can be appropriately interpreted by the
eye.
The sampling rate can be defined in object space (samples/mrad) or in
time (samples/s). For scanning systems, the time for an edge to sweep across a
detector element is the dwell time. Therefore is common to use samples/dwell for
scanning systems (in the scan direction only). While scanning arrays can have any
number of samples per dwell in the scan direction, usually one to four is selected
to minimize hardware complexity and cost. Driven by Nyquist frequency
considerations, many systems have 2 samples/dwell. Implicit in using samples per
dwell is that the system is detector MTF limited. That is, the optical cutoff is much
greater than the detector cutoff (foco>fdc^.
Staring arrays are inherently undersampled. They only provide one
sample per pixel-angular-subtense (PAS). For the cross scan direction in scanning
systems and all staring systems, the pixel is defined by the effective center-to-
center spacing. Microscan changes the effective sampling rate and changes the
PAS but not the DAS. Detection, recognition, and identification are related to the
number of pixels on the target. Implicit in this approach is that the system is
detector MTF limited
Shade introduced the concept of spurious response to quantify the
amount of tolerated aliasing for general imagery. With his approach, the total
amount of aliased signal is compared to the unaliased portion. The aliased amount
depends upon the magnitude of the MTF for all spatial frequencies above the
Nyquist frequency.
NVESD empirically extended Shade's work. They recognized that
sampling may be considered as a blurring function since an image usually appears
one pixel wider than the target. They recommend contracting or "squeezing" the
system MTF to account for this apparent blurring effect.
14.1. SAMPLES PER DWELL
The effective number of samples per dwell is
SD =
DAS
HFOV
(Number of samples per HFOV}.
(14-1)
Sampling will always cause an edge (sharp transition) to appear to have a
finite width (Figure 14-1). Sampling creates a ghost ±!6 pixel wide in the
reconstructed image. The blurriness of an edge depends upon the scene sample
phase and the reconstruction process. Park and Schowengerdt4 defined the square
of the radiometric error as
E =---—— when 1 < SD < 2.
45 SD2
(14-2)
At one sample per dwell, the average error is four times higher than at two samples
per dwell. They limited their analysis to 1 < SD < 2 since most scanning systems
operate in this region. The image blur decreases when SD > 2 but not as fast as
implied by Equation 14-2. Park and Schowengerdt’s approach is strictly a
mathematical method that describes the effects of sampling. It does not consider
visual interpretation of image quality.
Figure 14-1. Ambiguity in edge sharpness due to sampling.
The shaded area represents the range of possible outputs
depending upon the scene sample phase, system MTF, and
reconstruction process. The range of values also depends upon
the sampling lattice (not shown).
Figure 14-2. Relative image quality as a function of samples
per dwell. The variations in the image quality metric are due
to phasing effects. The optimum number of samples per dwell
appears to be near two (From reference 5).
Chow5 reported an experiment where the number of samples per dwell
was varied. He compared its image fidelity to that of a continuous scan system
(Figure 14-2). He reported ' a great improvement in performance can be achieved
by going from 1 to 2 samples per dwell and that at 3 samples per dwell,
performance of the sampled data system is almost equal to that of a continuous
scan system." Since the work was performed with periodic images (sinusoids), the
extension to general imagery is not clear. These results may typify image quality
when viewing picket fences, railroad tracks, and plowed fields.
D'Agostino et. al. performed6 several perception tests in which trained
observers were required to identify the correct vehicle and aspect angle. These
vehicles were part of the NVESD computer data set7 of typical military vehicles
(tanks, trucks, and jeeps). There was no noise or clutter: The targets were simply
presented against a uniform background. The number of pixels across the target
ranged from about 5 to 10. The sampling lattice and effective detector size were
varied which changed the number of samples. Their "sample per detector
dimension" is equivalent to samples per dwell. The results,6 shown in Figure 14-3,
are summarized:
a. Above a relative sampling of two per detector dimension, there
was little additional improvement in performance observed.
b. One sample per detector dimension resulted in relatively good
performance considering the degree of aliasing assumed present in the
imagery.
c. Below one sample per detector dimension, performance severely
degraded.
staring
ш
о
a:
ш
ш
о
$
Ш
SAMPLES PER DETECTOR DIMENSION
Figure 14-3. Average probability of correctly identifying
military vehicles as a function of samples per pixel. A staring
array with 100% fill factor provides one sample per pixel.
Only scanning arrays can provide more than one sample per
dwell. Reducing the number of samples per pixel reduces
hardware complexity and cost. (From reference 6)
Higher sampling rates (more than four samples per pixel) reduce phasing
effects and provide a cosmetically pleasing image. However, these higher
sampling rates apparently are not necessary when the observer has to identify
military vehicles on a uniform background. The optimum sampling rate based
upon their results appear to be about 1.75 when the task is to identify military
vehicles. The extension of their results to any other vehicle, ship, or aircraft is
purely hypothetical.
One sample per dwell is adequate to detect and recognize military
vehicles. That is (to no one's surprise), staring arrays provide adequate imagery.
The results with scanning systems suggest that there is some improvement in
detection capability when the number of samples approaches 1.75 per dwell.
The observers were not asked to comment on the image quality; only if
they could correctly identify the target. For military application, their results
suggest that staring arrays (one sample per pixel) can be used successfully for
detecting ground vehicles.
14.2. PIXELS ON TARGET
Because of its apparent simplicity, some analysts suggested a system
design based upon the required number of pixels on target. This approach is valid
for systems that are detector MTF limited. Common parlance uses DASs on target
when the pixels on target is meant. These are equal for 100% fill factor arrays.
Pixels on target is appropriate for staring arrays.
The range at which a target can be perceived is estimated by
л target size , , 4
Range»-------------- , (14-3)
resolution
where the PAS is taken as the system angular resolution. Intuitively, there should
be a link between resolution, samples per dwell, and pixels on target. But this link
is only valid for square or nearly square targets and systems that have equal
resolution in the horizontal and vertical directions. FLIR92 partially overcomes
this difficulty by employing a two-dimensional MRT.
For nonsquare targets with structure, the precise target size becomes more
difficult to define. Figure 14-4a illustrates the silhouette of a Soviet Bear bomber.
In Figures 14-4b to 14-4e the number of pixels on the target increases. These
images contain only eight gray levels to emphasize sampling effects. The system
MTF is unity over the spatial frequencies of interest. This approach emphasizes
sampling effects. With a real system, the system MTFs will blur edges. Simple
pixel averaging, as shown in these figures, is extremely simple. More sophisticated
image reconstruction algorithms will provide more pleasing and less blocky
images. Nevertheless, this simplified approach illustrates sampling effects.
Although Figure 14-4c (eight pixels on target) does not look like a
bomber, that may be inferred from other information. For example, trucks and
ships do not fly. It is the auxiliary information that is often used to identify objects
- not just the object outline. Any mathematical approach considered cannot include
these complex learned parameters. Thus, pixels on target are a simplification of
our interpretation process.
All figures illustrate sample-scene phase effects. For example, in Figure
14-4e, the fuselage is not of uniform intensity. It appears darker on one side than
the other. The engines appear as either one pixel wide or two pixels wide. When
two pixels wide, they are of reduced intensity. Optical blur, electronic MTF, and
the reconstruction process will smooth out these images. The figures typify the
imagery that machine vision systems analyze. Phasing effects are particularly
bothersome to image processing algorithms and automatic target recognizers.
Although 16 pixels across the wing span (Figure 14-4d) are sufficient to identify
the object as an aircraft, 32 pixels are required to discern the engines (Figure 14-
4e).
(c)
(d)
Figure 14-4. Soviet Bear bomber, (a) Silhouette, (b) Image of
bomber with four contiguous pixels across the wing span, (c)
Eight contiguous pixels across the wing span, (continued next
page)
Figure 14-4 (continued). Soviet Bear bomber, (d) 16
contiguous pixels across the wing span, (e) 32 contiguous
pixels across the wing span, (f) 64 contiguous pixels across
the wing span. Eight levels of gray are used.
Figure 14-5a illustrates the silhouette of a Forest Sherman class destroyer.
Figures 14-5b through 14-5e provide the silhouette with 8, 16, 32, and 64 pixels
across the length respectively. Eight levels of gray are used. 32 pixels across the
length (Figure 14-5d) are probably sufficient to identify the ship as a destroyer.
Here it is the vertical number of pixels that supply the required detail, In the
vertical direction there are about 16 pixels. Thus it is the number of pixels in the
critical dimension that are linked to recognition or identification. When using the
critical dimension in Equation 14-3, the calculated range is the distance at which
the critical dimension can be discerned - not the range at which the target can first
be detected.
All figures illustrate phasing effects. For example, Figure 14-6 illustrates
phasing effects when there are 32 pixels across the length. As with the bomber, it
is the auxiliary information that aids in the identification. Sonar data would
provide the range. The ship size can be estimated from the relationship between
the image size and the system field-of-view. Knowing the ship size and shape,
identification is possible.
(e)
Figure 14-5. Sherman class destroyer, (a) Silhouette, (b) Eight
contiguous pixels across the length, (c) 16 contiguous pixels
across the length (d) 32 contiguous pixels across the length,
(e) 64 contiguous pixels across the length. Eight levels of gray
are used.
(a)
Figure 14-6. Phasing effects with 32 contiguous pixels across
the length. Each image is offset by '/2 pixel either horizontally
or vertically, (a) is identical to Figure 14-5d.
The samples per dwell for scanning systems and pixels on target for
staring arrays do not consider the system MTF. There may be adequate samples on
the target from a resolution point of view. But if the system is too noisy, the target
will not be detected
The number of pixels on target required to perform a certain task depends
upon the level of detail required to detect the system. Different phases will affect
the displayed shape. At long distances, pure detection will answer the question ’’Is
something there?" But it does not answer, "How many pixels are enough?"
14.3. ASYMMETRIC SAMPLING
Staring arrays provide one sample per PAS. The number of samples per
detector dwell for scanning systems depends upon the A/D clock frequency in the
scan direction and the location of the detectors in the vertical direction. Scanning
arrays tend to have nonsymmetric sampling. The common module design tends to
have two samples per dwell in the scan direction and one sample per DAS in the
vertical direction. Staring arrays may or may not have symmetrical sampling. It is
generally accepted that machine vision system algorithms are easier to implement
when MTFs and sampling lattices are equal in the horizontal and vertical
directions. The eye is more tolerant of the sampling lattice differences. As the
distortion increases, the detection process became more difficult.
Park et. al.8 analyzed the Landsat multispectral scanner system (MSS).
The MSS system is a line scanner that is undersampled both in the along track and
across track directions. There are 1.31 samples per pixel in the across track
direction (scan direction) and 0.93 samples per pixel in the along track direction.
From a mathematical point of view, this anisotropic undersampling should provide
obvious image asymmetry. This 1.42:1 mismatch in sampling is less obvious when
the optical blur is added to the imagery (Figure 14-7). The target is in the upper
left. The upper right image is blurred due to optical diffraction and the continuous
convolution of the square detector DAS. The objects in the lower left and right are
more blurred images of this target as they would be formed by convolving with a
1.42:1 rectangle whose size is matched to the MSS average system MTF.
Figure 14-7. Simulated Landsat multispectral imagery. The
asymmetric sampling of 1.42:1 is not considered visually
objectionable. The rectangles represent the sampling lattice
size (From reference 8).
Two orthogonal orientations are shown. The images are blurred and do
exhibit some asymmetry, but the eye is very tolerant of degraded imagery. Our
visual experience allows us to "fill in" the missing parts and still identify the object
as a pentagon. Additional subsystem MTFs will further degrade the system MTF
and the asymmetry will be even less noticeable. Sample scene effects make this
asymmetry difficult to measure.
Obert et. al. reported9 several computer simulation results in which the
DAS and sampling grid were varied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
When the number of samples per DAS was reduced to less than two, the
probability of correct response was reduced. However, the significant finding was
that as the vertical resolution was reduced, the probability of correct response was
reduced: "This specificity of dimension suggests that vertical resolution and
vertical sampling rate may be slightly more important.... than horizontal resolution
and horizontal sampling. The results must be interpreted cautiously, however,
because the task involved targets that are either square (front view) or elongated
in the horizontal direction (right front, side) which would require relatively greater
vertical than horizontal resolution." They went on to say, "If the aspect ratio is
considered in system design, increasing the vertical rather than the horizontal
resolution through detector aspect configuration [e.g., a rectangular detector]
may yield a slightly greater degree of performance improvement FOR THE
TARGET VEHICLES OF THE TYPE USED IN THIS STUDY." The capitalized
words (not in the original paper) are added to emphasize a potential limitation of
their results.
Vertical resolution may be a driving design consideration if the target
critical dimension is vertical, This was obvious in Figures 14-5b through 14-5e
when viewing a ship broadside. Whether asymmetric sampling is acceptable for
bottom viewing an aircraft (Figures 14-4b through 14-4f) can only be surmised at
this time.
The results suggest that it is the direction of the target's critical dimension
(e.g., the smallest dimension) where the highest resolution is required. Intuitively
this is reasonable. This suggests that the system application must be known before
the system resolution (detector size) and sampling lattice is selected.
14.4. SPURIOUS RESPONSE
Shade introduced the concept of spurious response that considers the
magnitude of the MTF for spatial frequencies above Nyquist frequency. These
higher spatial frequencies are aliased down or folded back to lower frequencies.
The two-sided spectrum exists from -oo to +co. For convenience only the positive
portion will be considered. Mathematically, the reconstructed image (one-
dimensional) can be written as
00
ЛЛ ) = MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre (nfs + fx ) O(nfs ± fx )
/1=0
when fx <fn ,
(14-4)
where Otff is the Fourier transform of the object and Iff is the Fourier transform
of the resultant displayed image. MTFpre contains all the MTFs up to the sampler
and MTFpost represents all the filters after the sampler. The definition of MTF re and
MTFpost here is consistent with FLIR92's prefilter and postfilter MTFs (Tables 14-
1 and 14-2).
Table 14-1
SCANNING SYSTEM (SCAN DIRECTION)
MTFpre MTFoptics, MTFmotion, MTFdaectoI, MTFmpffitr, MTFfllter
Sampler A/D converter
MTF^, MTFdfllw, MTFphase, MTFS&H, MTF^,.^, MTF^,, MTFmon-tor, MTF^
Table 14-2
STARING ARRAYS and
CROSS SCAN DIRECTION in SCANNING SYSTEMS
MTFpre MTF MTF MTF. ivx i ± optics ? 1V± 1 1 motion, 1 detector
Sampler Detector
MTF^, MTFampIifier, MTFdfllter, MTFphase, MTFS&H, MTFpost.recon, MTFmonitor, MTFeye
This equation can be rewritten as
I(fx ) = MTFpost (fx )MTFpre (fx ) O(fx )
(14-5)
+ MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre (nfs ± fx ) O(nfs ± fx ) .
/1=1
The first term is the spectrum of the image when no sampling is present and is the
direct response (also called the base band). The remaining terms represent aliasing
and are scene dependent. Depending upon the specific scene, aliasing may or may
not be bothersome. However, it is always present.
Shade10 defined spurious response for the first fold back frequency (n =1)
as
a\MTFp„st(DMTFprc(fs - f)O(fs - f)df
Spurious response = -----------------------------------(14-6)
JMTFpost {f)MTFpre (/) O(f) df
о
Figure 14-8 illustrates the spurious response for a system that has an ideal
post-reconstruction filter and Figure 14-9 illustrates the spurious response when a
practical post-reconstruction filter is used. The signal components above Nyquist
frequency that remain after reconstruction will cause the image to be blocky (e.g.,
have a stair-step appearance). An ideal post-reconstruction filter is approximated
by a high-order N-pole filter or a low ripple Chebychev filter (see Section 8.5.,
Post-reconstruction Filter). Bilinear interpolation (Equation 8-24) has a non-zero
response above Nyquist. Figure 14-9 could represent a system with bilinear
interpolation. The bomber and destroyer (Figures 14-4 through 14-6) are blocky
because no post-reconstruction filter was used.
Relative Spatial Frequency
Figure 14-8. Spurious response when an ideal post-
reconstruction filter is used. The ratio of the shaded areas is
the spurious response. The system MTF is the product of
MTFpre and the aliased portion of MTFp0St up to the Nyquist
frequency.
Figure 14-9. Spurious response when a practical post-
reconstruction filter is used. The ratio of the shaded areas is
the spurious response. If the post-reconstruction filter cutoff
frequency is excessively high, the image may appear blocky.
Shade wanted to determine what MTF was required to make the raster
lines less noticeable on a CRT. He assumed that the beam shape on the CRT was
Gaussian distributed. Furthermore, he used the eye as an additional post-
reconstruction filter. If the MTF is approximately 40% at fn , then a flat field
condition exists in which individual raster lines cannot be seen. This creates an
aesthetically pleasing image and this value is used for most commercial
televisions. Using 40% also makes best use of the electronic bandwidth. It requires
a smaller bandwidth and therefore cost and complexity are reduced. However, for
maximum resolving capability, the MTF should be less than 5% at fn . Here,
resolution will not be degraded by aliased signal. Shade suggests that a spurious
response of 15% may be considered an upper limit for good system design.
Kennedy11 recommends that Shade's approach be extended to thermal imaging
systems even though these systems do not have a Gaussian-shaped MTF. Any
electro-optical system that is detector MTF limited, in general, will not have a
Gaussian MTF.
To simplify Shade's approach, it is convenient to assume that the object
contains all spatial frequencies (white spectrum). Then spurious response for the
first fold-back (n = 1) can be defined as
^MTFpost(f)MTFpre(fs - f) df
Spurious response = SR = —-----------------------
^MTFpost(f)MTFpre(f) df
0
(14-7)
The denominator is the base band signal.
Meitzler et. al. calculated12 the detection probability as a function of
spurious response. They placed typical military vehicles on a cluttered
background. Their results suggest that for larger targets (trucks or tanks), aliasing
does not affect target detection. However, for smaller targets (jeeps) aliasing
reduces detection probability (Figure 14-10). Shade's recommendation is
consistent with their results. Detection is slightly degraded when the spurious
response is 15%.
SPURIOUS RESPONSE (percent)
Figure 14-10. Target detectability as a function of spurious
response. Aliasing does not appear to affect detection of large
targets. Image quality was not assessed during this study.
(From reference 12)
A common starting point for system design is to make the detector DAS
equal to the Airy disk diameter. Under these conditions, the detector does not
reproduce faithfully all the information that the optical system provides. Usually
the detector MTF is only illustrated up to the detector cutoff fdco . While this is a
convenient representation, the detector does respond to high spatial frequencies.
These higher spatial frequencies will be aliased down to lower frequencies. This
aliasing is rarely reported since the system cutoff is defined as the detector cutoff,
fdco and the MTF is only plotted up to fdco. This aliasing is created by the detector
and cannot be avoided when the optics cutoff is greater than the detector cutoff.
Figure 14-11 illustrates the system MTF that consists of MTFoptics and MTFdetector.
Adding an ideal lowpass filter provides the MTFs shown in Figure 14-12. The
detector acts as a sampling aperture and high spatial frequencies are folded back.
Adding an ideal filter to MTFpre and MTFp0St and using Equation 14-7, the spurious
response is 8.1% just due to the detector. As the detector is made smaller, the
spurious response is reduced.
Figure 14-11. MTFoptics and MTFdetector. The detector DAS is
matched to the Airy disc diameter, a = 0.1 mrad. Any input
spatial frequency above 10 cycles/mrad will be aliased down
to a lower spatial frequency. The detector acts a sampling
aperture whose sampling frequency is= 2/a.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad)
Figure 14-12. The detector acts as sampling aperture. All
frequencies above the detector cutoff are folded back. fn =fdco
= 10 cycles/mrad.
14.5. MTF SQUEEZE
Sampling introduces ambiguity in the location of a target edge. An image
will appear at least one sample width wider than the object. Thus sampling can
thought of as a blurring function. An increased width in one domain appears as a
decreased width in the other domain. A larger blur appears as if it the circuitry had
a narrower MTF. This relationship is described by the similarity theorem (also
called the scaling property) of Fourier Transforms. This apparent decrease (or
contraction) in the frequency domain is called131' a "squeeze."
An empirical fit to numerous psychophysical experiments at NVESD
provided squeeze factors for recognition and identification. The squeeze factor is
related to both the total spurious response and the out-of-band spurious response.
NVESD followed Shade's approach but defined the total spurious response for all
aliased signals (n = -co and +co). The two-sided OTF is
OTFsys (fx ) = MTFpost (fx }MTFpre (fx )
V-, (14-8)
+ MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre{nfs + fx ) .
The first term is the base band and the second term (sampling replicas) is the
spurious response function. In the region where the sampling replicas overlap, the
signals in the base band and sampling replicas are root-sum-squared. NVESD
defined the spurious response as
^Spurious response function) df
SR = ~
(14-9)
or
co
J MTFp0St(fx)£MTFpre(nfs ±fx)df
-OO
co
J MTFp<lsl(fx)MTFpre(fx)df
—CO
(14-10)
The in-band spurious response is limited to the Nyquist frequency (Figure 14-13)
Figure 14-13. Definition of in-band and out-of band spurious
response. The total spurious response (sum of in-band and
out-of-band) was indicated Figure 14-9.
^Spurious response functioned/
SR in—band
(14-11)
band)df
and the out-of-band spurious response is simply the remainder:
SRout-of -band SR SR in-band '
(14-12)
Because there are different MTFs in the horizontal and vertical directions, the
spurious responses will be different. If the reconstruction filter passes frequencies
above sampling frequency, it is possible to see the raster pattern (raster scan
monitors). For digital monitors, the individual pixels appear separated by black
areas,. That is, the pixels appear on the monitor as is there is a finite fill factor. This
is equivalent to moving very close to your television or computer monitor. You
can see the individual red, green, and blue phosphor spots. At this close distance, it
becomes more difficult to discern specific objects. In this situation the out-of-band
spurious response will be relatively high.
The recognition and identification experiments provided different
squeezes. For recognition, MTFrecognition is plotted as a function of
frecognition
= (1-0.32 ST?)/,
(14-13)
where f is the original spatial frequency used to calculate the system MTF (Figure
14-14). For identification, MTFidentiflcation is plotted as a function of
- (1 2 SR0Ut_of_hand)/ .
(14-14)
As the spurious response decreases MTFrecognition MTFsys and MTFidentiflcation ->
MTFsys. A squeeze factor for detection is formative at this time (Table 14-3).
Figure 14-14. MTF squeeze. For recognition,/^ = (1-0.32 SR)/}.
Table 14-3
PERFORMANCE DEPENDENCE ON SPURIOUS RESPONSE
(From reference 13)
TASK IN-BAND SR (Edge shifting, line width variations, and other local artifacts) OUT-OF-BAND SR (Raster and sharply demarcated pixels) MTF SQUEEZE
Hot spot detection Moderate to large dependence Small dependence Speculation
Recognition Moderate dependence Moderate dependence 1-0.32SR
Identification Small dependence Large dependence l-2SRout.of.band
14.6. ALIASED SIGNAL AS NOISE
A comprehensive end-to-end analysis should include both aliased signal
and aliased noise. Aliased signal3,16’18 can be considered as part of the noise
spectrum because it interferes with the ability to perceive targets. MTF boost is
used to enhance that spatial region where the MTF is low. This tends to be the
same region that contains aliased signal and aliased noise. These aliased
components limit17 the extent to which a sampled image can be sharpened.
Excessive peaking can cause ringing at sharp edges. Horizontal (vertical) filters are
one-dimensional and produce ringing in the horizontal (vertical) direction only.
14.7. REFERENCES
1. L. C. Biberman, "Editor's note," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp.
233-237, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
2. R. Legault, "The Aliasing Problems in Two-dimensional Sampled Imagery," in Perception of
Displayed Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp. 292-295, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
3. S. K. Park and R. Hazra, "Aliasing as Noise: A Quantitative and Qualitative Assessment," in
Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 54-65 (1993).
4. S. K. Park and R. A. Schowengerdt, "Image Sampling, Reconstruction and the Effect of Sample-
scene Phasing," Applied Optics, 21(17), pp. 3142-3151 (1982).
5. S. Chow and T. Jones, "ARMY'S FLIR/ATR Evolution Path," in Infrared Systems and Components
III, R. L. Caswell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1050, pp. 42-49 (1989).
6. J. D'Agostino, M. Friedman, R. LaFollette, and M. Crenshaw, "An Experimental Study of the
Effects of Sampling on FLIR Performance," in Proceedings of the IRIS Specialty Group on Passive
Sensors, Infrared Information Analysis Center, Ann Arbor Mich. (1990).
7. J. D. Horger, "Image Generation for Perception Testing Using Computer FLIR Simulation," in
Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings
Vol. 1309, pp. 181-189(1990).
8. S. K. Park, R. Schowengerdt, and M. A. Kaczynski, "Modulation-transfer-function Analysis for
Sampled Image Systems," Applied Optics, 23(15), pp. 2572-2582, (1984).
9. L. Obert, J. D'Agostino, B. O'Kane, and C. Nguyen, "An Experimental Study of the Effect of
Vertical Resolution on FLIR Performance," in Proceedings of the IRIS Specialty Group on Passive
Sensors, Vol. 1, pp. 235-251, Infrared Information Analysis Center, Ann Arbor Mich. (1990).
10. О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Reproduction by a Line Raster Process," in Perception of Displayed
Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp. 233-278, Plenum Press, New York (1973).
ll. H. V. Kennedy, "Modeling Second-generation Thermal Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering
Vol. 30(11), pp. 1771-1778 (1991).
12. T. Meitzler, G. Gerhardt, T. Cook, and R. Freeling, "Spatial Aliasing Effects in Ground Vehicle IR
Imagery," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed.,
SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 226-241 (1992).
13. R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and B. O'Kane, "Sampled Imaging Sensor Design using the
MTF Squeeze Model to Characterize Spurious Response," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 61-73 (1999).
14. R. G. Driggeis, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of
Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999).
15. R. Vollmerhausen, R. G. Driggers, and B. O'Kane, "Influence of Sampling on Target Recognition
and Identification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 38(5), pp. 763-772 (1999).
16. S. K. Park, "Image Gathering, Interpolation and Restoration A Fidelity Analysis," in Visual
Information Processing, F. O. Huck and R. D. Juday, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1705, pp. 134-144
(1992).
17. S K. Park and R. Hazra, "Image Restoration Versus Aliased Noise Enhancement," in Visual
Information Processing III, F. O. Huck and R. D Juday, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2239, pp. 52-62
(1994).
18. S. K. Park and Z. Rahman, "Fidelity Analysis of Sampled Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering,
Vol. 38(5), pp. 786-800 (1999).
EXERCISES
1. Optimum sampling has been defined as that sampling rate that provides
adequate imagery to perform the task on hand. Comment on this definition. Take
into account the Nyquist frequency.
2. Discuss the relationship between system sampling frequency and real-world
targets. Is sampling only noticeable in the laboratory when using periodic targets?
3. Describe some sampling effects seen on commercial TVs. Do commercial TVs
provide "optimum sampling?"
4. How would you change the effective sampling rate of a staring array?
5. In Figure 14-3, the probability of correctly identifying the targets is about 70%
when there is one sample/DAS. How would you change the experiment so that the
probability increased to 100%?
6. Assume the fuselage subtended 4 mrad and the DAS is 1 mrad in Figure 14-4.
Sketch the intensity profile as a function of phase. If the optical system produced
an Airy disk that is also 1 mrad, sketch the intensity profile as a function of phase.
7. How many pixels on target (Figure 14-5) are necessary to recognize the ship as
a destroyer. List several contextual cues that aid in recognition (e.g., only ships are
seen on the ocean). With these contextual cues, how many pixels are necessary for
recognition?
15
ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE
When electromagnetic radiation is propagated through the atmosphere
from a source to a receiver, three major phenomena are observed: (1) The intensity
of the radiation reaching the sensor is reduced, (2) non-scene path radiance
scattered into the field-of-view reduces target contrast, and (3) image fidelity is
reduced by turbulence and aerosol forward small angle scattering. In addition, for
background-limited systems, path radiance and radiation scattered into the field-
of-view affect the noise level. The nature and magnitude of these effects depend
upon the sensor type (eye, imaging system), sensor characteristics (spectral
response, sensitivity, spatial resolution), the atmospheric constituents, and
environmental conditions. Figure 15-1 illustrates these effects.
Scattering Out Scattering Into
of Field of View Field of View
Figure 15-1. Atmospheric effects. Absorption and scattering
of scene radiation out of the field-of-view reduce the target
signature. Turbulence and aerosol forward scattering distort
the image. Scattering into the field-of-view and path radiance
reduces the target contrast.
Extinction is the total reduction of radiation along the line of sight. This
includes both absorption and scattering. Scattering simply alters the radiation
propagation direction and any radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight
contributes to extinction. Using the Beer-Lambert law, the spectral transmittance
is:
^mW = ^(2)Jl , (15-1)
Atmospheric transmittance 249
where R is the path length and y(z) is the spectral extinction coefficient. Because
scattering and absorption are independent
/(Я) = сг(Л) + А(Я), (15-2)
where a is the scattering component and к is the absorptive component. For
infrared imaging systems, an unusual attenuation coefficient has been adopted:
= (15-3)
and
(15-4)
Unfortunately, the terminology used to describe the reduction of radiation is author
dependent. Both Tatm and у have units of 1/km. Generally, у will have low values
(between 0.001 and 0.4) and Tatm will have high values (between 0.65 and 0.95). In
a transparent media, у = 0 and Tatm= 1.
Extinction depends upon all the atmospheric constituents that include
aerosols, pollutants, fogs, rain, and snow. High humidity reduces transmittance by
causing aerosol particulate growth, particularly with salt spray in maritime
environments. Though the atmosphere may be quite clear visually, thermal
imaging system performance may be degraded considerably because of the
molecular absorption by the water vapor. Water vapor concentration may range
from near zero in the desert to 40 to 50 g/m3 in a tropical jungle or near the sea
surface.
Extinction is not linearly related to water vapor content. However, for an
environment in which only the absolute humidity changes (the aerosol type and
concentration remains fixed), the range performance is approximately related to
the absolute humidity. For example, if the absolute humidity increases by 25%,
then the detection range should decrease - but not necessarily by 25%.
Path radiance or atmospheric self-emission is independent of the source
and is seen even if the source is not present. The magnitude of this background
radiation can vary with direction of observation, altitude, location, time of day, and
meteorological conditions. Path radiance reduces the signal-to-noise ratio and, for
background-limited systems, introduces noise.
Refractive index fluctuations create turbulence. They are caused by
density gradients, temperature and humidity gradients, and pressure differences.
Aerosol small angle scattering, and particularly multiple scattering, diffuse scene
photons into a multitude of directions and thereby blurs detail. Turbulence also
affects image quality. Since image quality is treated mathematically through MTF
theory, an MTF is assigned to the atmosphere to account for turbulence and
aerosol scattering (discussed in Chapter 16, Atmospheric MTF).
A commonly used back-of-the-envelope calculation is
tr AI
SNR ~ atmave
system noise
(15-5)
where it is assumed that the atmospheric transmittance does not have any spectral
features. This equation is only valid for extended sources. That is, the target
angular subtense at range R must be greater than the system's angular resolution.
Because thermal imaging systems operate at wavelengths that are five to
20 times the visible wavelengths, thermal imagery is bothered less by scattering
produced by the small aerosol particles that we associate with haze. As a result, we
say that thermal imaging systems can detect targets with minimal loss in range
when light haze is present. For moderately sized particles, scattering affects the
MWIR region more so than the LWIR region. This leads to the statement that an
LWIR system can provide better range performance in moderate haze than an
MWIR system. As particles grow in size (corresponding to the change from haze
to heavy fog) the visible, MWIR, and LWIR regions are affected equally.
Atmospheric transmittance cannot be discussed as a separate topic
independent of the target and receiver characteristics. The measured differential
signal is:
NVsys =k (15-6)
A
The functions, y(f), or equivalently r(2), can be obtained from computer
codes' such as LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, or HITRAN. With the widespread
availability2 of these codes, this chapter forgoes extensive figures and tables of
infrared transmittance as seen in many texts.3 5 This chapter provides the analyst
with the tools to appropriately incorporate the atmospheric transmittance into a
system performance model.
Finally, the inability to accurately estimate the atmospheric transmittance
is a major reason for the differences between range predictions and actual field
results. The transmittance can vary wide hourly and locally. Parallel lines-of-sight
separated by 500 m can expect different micrometeorological conditions. The
Atmospheric transmittance 251
differences can be large especially for degraded environmental conditions and
extremely long path lengths.
The value of any model lies in its ability to permit comparative analyses.
For a fixed environment condition, an estimate of range performance is
determined. If a system design modification increases range performance, then it a
valuable modification.
15.1. ATMOSPHERIC CONSTITUENTS
The atmosphere is composed of numerous gases and aerosols. In order of
concentration (by percent of volume), the gases in a dry atmosphere are: nitrogen,
oxygen, argon, neon, helium, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, nitrous oxide, and other
trace gases. The gases present in variable amounts are ozone, water vapor, carbon
dioxide, and carbon monoxide plus other trace gases. Aerosols, which are
suspended particulates, include dust, dirt, carbon, minute organisms, sea salt, water
droplets (haze or fog), smokes, and artificial aerosols (pollutants). The relative
concentrations of the atmospheric constituents can be different at different locales.
For example, dense foliage and vehicular exhaust influence carbon monoxide and
carbon dioxide concentrations. Urban areas produce more carbon monoxide.
Pollutants vary according to population density and factory locations.
Figure 15-2 portrays a typical atmospheric transmittance curve that
accounts only for absorption. The dominant absorber in the MWIR region is CO2
and it absorbs at 4.3 pm. This absorption band is obvious after a few meters of
path length and therefore,”the transmittance can be considered zero for any
appreciable path length. Water vapor determines the upper and lower wavelength
limits for both MWIR and LWIR spectral regions. Water vapor is also the
dominant absorber in the LWIR region. As the water vapor increases, the LWIR
transmittance is reduced faster than the MWIR region. This implies that a MWIR
system may be better in a tropical or maritime environment. However, selection of
MWIR or LWIR also depends upon the sensor's spectral response and noise level.
carbon carbon dioxide
Figure 15-2. Typical atmospheric transmittance over a 1-km
path length.
15.1.1. WATER VAPOR
Although water vapor or absolute humidity is a major absorber in the
thermal bands, transmittance is not linearly related to absolute humidity. The
absolute humidity is not normally a measured quantity but is calculated from
standard meteorological observables. It is related6 to the relative humidity and
absolute temperature by
AH = 1322.8 — exp
25.22(7’- 273.16)
------------------5.31 In
273.16
(15-7)
where RH is the relative humidity (as a fraction), AH is the absolute humidity
(g/m3), and T is the temperature in Kelvin. Figure 15-3 illustrates the relationship
given by Equation 15-7.
TEMPERATURE (C)
Figure 15-3. Absolute humidity (gm/m3) as a function of
temperature and percent relative humidity. Tropical areas
(high relative humidity and high temperatures) will have high
absolute humidity. Arctic areas (cold with low relative
humidity) will not.
The extinction depends upon all the atmospheric constituents. Figure 15-
4 illustrates the calculated LWIR attenuation as a function of absolute humidity
and meteorological range. The finite extinction (less than unity) when there is no
water vapor present is due to aerosol scattering and molecular absorption.
Although absolute humidity does not uniquely specify extinction, it can be used as
a guide. As the absolute humidity increases, the LWIR transmittance will decrease
for a fixed meteorological range.
Absolute humidity changes both daily and seasonally (Figure 15-5).
Figure 15-6 illustrates the attenuation as a function of absolute humidity for a
European environment. During winter, the maximum temperature is about 10°C
and the maximum absolute humidity is about 6 g/m3 (See Figure 15-3). During the
summer, the temperatures approach 30°C and the absolute humidity reaches 15
g/m3.
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY ATTENUATION COEF
1.00
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY (g/m3)
Figure 15-4. Representative attenuation as a function of
absolute humidity and visibility. The attenuation coefficient
has been spectrally averaged over the LWIR range. The
aerosol concentration and particle size are embedded in the
meteorological range. Both aerosol scattering (as specified by
the meteorological range) and water vapor affect attenuation.
Calculated from LOWTRAN using a mid-latitude summer
aerosol model and a rural haze model.
Figure 15-5. Typical absolute humidity variation for central
Europe. Coastline areas may exhibit very large changes as the
wind direction shifts from land-to-sea to sea-to-land.
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY
Figure 15-6 Representative average attenuation coefficients
for a European environment as a function of absolute
humidity and season. The attenuation coefficient has been
spectrally averaged over the LWIR range. The finite
extinction when the absolute humidity is zero is due to aerosol
scattering and molecular absorption. Each season had different
aerosol distribution. The relative humidity values are 0, 10%,
20%, ..., 100%.
15.1.2. AEROSOLS
Mie theory mathematically describes the scattering and absorption of
radiation by spherical particles. Figure 15-7 illustrates representative scattering
coefficients as a function of particle size. Scattering and absorption by particles
depend upon the radius, shape, wavelength of the incident radiation, angle between
the radiation and the viewing direction, and the complex indices of refraction.
When particle diameters are small compared to the incident wavelength. Rayleigh
scattering occurs and the scattering is proportional to Z4. For most naturally
occurring low-density aerosols and artificial aerosols, the size distribution is such
that there is significant scattering in the visible region with minimal scattering in
the infrared (average diameter less than 1 pm). Thus it is often stated that thermal
imaging systems can detect targets when hazes, thin fogs, and smokes are present.
Figure 15-8 provides experimental verification of the theoretical values
given in Figure 15-7. Light hazes have small particles and therefore affect the
visible and near infrared. As the particles grow in size, the region of maximum
scattering moves out to the infrared. Aerosols, as they grow, always affect the
MWIR region before affecting the LWIR region. When the particle size becomes
very large, as with heavy fogs and raindrops, the visible, MWIR, and LWIR
regions are affected equally.
Figure 15-7. Relative scattering coefficients for different sized
spherical particles. As the particles grow in size, the scattering
increases and they begin to affect the infrared region. For
small particles compared to the wavelength, scattering is
proportional to 2'4 (Rayleigh scattering). For large particles
(diameter » 2), scattering is independent of wavelength. (From
reference 7)
EXTINCTION COEFFICIENT (1/km)
Figure 15-8. Measured extinction (scattering plus absorption)
coefficients for different aerosols. The departure from the
ideal Z4 dependence is due to absorption. (From reference 8).
In LOWTRAN, the scattering coefficient has been empirically related to
the rain rate Rrate (mm/hour):
arai„ «0.365 (7Jrate )0'63 .
(15-8)
Table 15-1 provides typical rain rates. The rain droplets act as scatterers and the
attenuation coefficient is assumed to be independent of wavelength:
7" — p
L atm-ave c
(15-9)
Table 15-1
REPRESENTATIVE RAIN RATES
RAIN INTENSITY RAIN RATE, Rrate (mm/hour)
Mist 0.025
Drizzle 0.25
Light 1.0
Moderate 4.0
Heavy 16
Thundershower 40
Cloud-burst 100
15.2. VISIBILITY
Visibility is a subjective measurement estimated by a trained observer
and as such can have large variability associated with the reported value.
Variations are created by observers that have different threshold contrasts when
looking at nonideal targets. For example, if an observer sees a building at 5 miles
but is unable to see a tower at 7 miles, he may estimate the visibility to be 6 miles.
Visibility depends on the aerosol distribution and it is very sensitive to the local
meteorological conditions. It is also dependent upon the view angle with respect to
the sun. As the sun angle approaches the view angle, forward scattering into the
line-of-sight increases and the visibility decreases. Reports from local weather
stations may or may not represent the actual conditions at which the experiment is
taking place.
Aerosol size distribution and concentration are estimated from visibility
measurements. As the concentration increases or the particle size increases, the
visibility decreases. Visibility is the greatest distance at which it is just possible to
see and identify a target with the unaided eye. In the daytime, the object is dark
against the horizon sky (e.g., a high contrast target). For nighttime, the target is a
moderately intense light source. Table 15-2 provides the international visibility
code. While the large range of values for each category is appropriate for general
imagery, it is too broad for scientific purposes.
Table 15-2
INTERNATIONAL VISIBILITY CODE
DESIGNATION VISIBILITY
Dense fog 0-50 meters
Thick fog 50-200 m
Moderate fog 200-500 m
Light fog 500-1 km
Thin fog 1-2 km
Haze 2-4 km
Light haze 4-10 km
Clear 10-20 km
Very clear 20-50 km
Exceptionally clear > 50 km
15.2.1. METEOROLOGICAL RANGE
Meteorological range is defined quantitatively, eliminating the subjective
nature of the observer and the distinction between day and night. The
Koschmieder formula defines the meteorological range9
Rvis = — In
a
(15-10)
where Cth is the threshold contrast at which 50% of the observers would see the
target. The use of the scattering cross section m this definition rather than the
extinction coefficient implies that absorption of particles at visual wavelengths is
small enough to ignore. This view is probably justified except in cases of polluted
air. Koschmieder set Cth to 0.02 and evaluated c at 2 = 0.555 pm. Then the
transmittance (averaged over the eye's spectral response) is
Г —<yR _
. p — p
ave u
^R
R
(15-11)
This applies to the visible region only and has become a "standard." It has
been given various names such as meteorological range and visual range to
distinguish it from the observer-visibility. Unfortunately, carelessness has resulted
in using the term -visibility when meteorological range is meant. To insure that
there is no confusion, o&server-visibility will be used to indicate that it is an
estimate. If only the observer-visibility, Rvis.ohs, is available, the meteorological
range can be estimated6 from
Rvis = (1.3 ± 03)Rvis_obs .
(15-12)
Most computer programs such as LOWTRAN use the meteorological range to
estimate particle concentrations. It would be better to have a direct estimate of the
concentration rather than that implied by the visibility. Recent efforts10 have
predicted the concentration at Beer-Sheva, Israel from simple observables (relative
humidity and wind speed). Extension to other geographical locations is
hypothetical at this time.
Many studies have attempted to infer the infrared transmittance from
visible measurements. Figure 15-9 illustrates an average curve through many data
points (not shown). This average response is useful for back-of-the-envelope
Meteorological Range (km)
Figure 15-9. Grafenwohr, FRG winter weather 1976. The
attenuation coefficient has been spectrally averaged over the
LWIR range. The average is zatm_ave = 0.85/km. Poor weather
is defined as when Tatm.ave = 0.70/km (From Reference 11).
15.2.2. CONTRAST TRANSMITTANCE
Since the eye is sensitive to contrast changes, contrast transmittance is
often used for systems operating in the visible or near infrared. The inherent
contrast is
(15-13)
where LT and LB are the target and background intensities respectively. When the
sky-background ratio (discussed in Section 17.4., Path Radiance) is one,
= T C
л ave o'»
(15-14)
where Tave = e'ffA The variable cr is conveniently expressed by the meteorological
range (Equation 15-10). Note that cr decreases with increasing wavelength (see, for
example, Figure 15-7). For wavelengths less than 3 pm, cr can be approximated by
1/3
3.912 Y 0.55Y'585(7?v“)
^vis /
(15-15)
where 2 is the average wavelength response of the system (in micrometers).
The contrast transmittance is dramatically altered by path radiance. Here,
scattering into the line-of-sight reduces the contrast transmittance (discussed in
Section 17.4., Path Radiance). Path radiance is in Chapter 17, Target Signatures,
because it changes the apparent target-background intensity difference.
Atmospheric attenuation only reduces the signature.
15.3. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN
In principle we could determine the exact composition of the atmosphere
over the path of interest. By employing the physics of molecular and aerosol
extinction, we could compute the extinction. Because of the wide variations in
weather conditions and sparsity of data on some atmospheric constituents, it is
desirable to have an engineering approach to atmospheric modeling. This model
should have several weather conditions and should be validated with available
laboratory and field data.
To deal with these complex phenomena, the Phillips Laboratory of the
Geophysics Directorate* at Hanscom Air Force Base, Massachusetts has developed
codes to predict transmittance/radiance effects for varying conditions. They have
created LOWTRAN (low spectral resolution transmission), FASCODE (fast
atmospheric signature code), MODTRAN (moderate spectral resolution
transmission) and HITRAN (high resolution transmission).
LOWTRAN's resolution is 20-cnT1 which is sufficient for most wide
band imaging systems. It provides spectral information from 0.25 to 28.5 pm. The
code was developed in 1971 and is continuously refined. As of this printing,
LOWTRAN7 has been released.6 The code provides 32 plane-parallel layers with
the boundaries extending from mean sea level to 100 km. 99.99997% of the
molecular and particulate atmospheric constituents are found below 100 km. The
atmosphere is considered stable with no inversions. Each layer is horizontally
homogeneous. Layer thicknesses are 1-km from ground level to 25 km, 5-km from
25 to 50 km (the top of the stratosphere), and the last two layers are 20 and 30 km
thick respectively.
Because of the limitations of the molecular-band model approximation
used in LOWTRAN, its accuracy degrades seriously for upper atmospheric
regions (above about 40 km). On the other hand, MODTRAN is valid up to 60
km. LOWTRAN is used primarily as an aid for tactical systems operating in the
lower atmosphere or on the earth's surface. The model is an excellent predictor at
short and medium ranges (up to 20 km) but may be in error at extremely long
ranges such as those encountered in IRST applications (~ 100 km). LOWTRAN
should not be used for very narrow spectral bandwidth systems such as laser
illuminated imaging systems where local line absorption is important. HITRAN is
appropriate for laser line calculations. The user of these models should read all the
cautions and limitations in the documentation before using them.
The code contains representative (geographical and seasonal)
atmospheric models and aerosol models (Table 15-3). The aerosol concentration is
specified by a meteorological range input. In addition, the user can input
radiosonde data as an environmental model or his own user-defined aerosol model.
For any given slant path geometry, it runs in two modes: (1) compute only
Over the years, government laboratories have changed names. The Phillips
Laboratory of the Geophysics Directorate was called the Air Force Cambridge
Laboratory and the Air Force Geophysical Laboratory. The name will probably
change again!
Atmospheric transmittance 263
transmittance and (2) compute both transmittance and radiance. The model can
provide radiance and transmittance with and without solar or lunar scattering.
Table 15-3
LOWTRAN CHOICES
ENVIRONMENT MODELS AEROSOL MODELS
Tropical Rural
Mid-latitude summer Maritime
Mid-latitude winter Urban
Sub-arctic summer Desert
Sub-arctic winter Troposphere
1962 Standard Navy Aerosol Model
The rural, urban, and maritime models are boundary layer models that
apply to the first two kilometers of atmosphere. The troposphere model applies in
the troposphere above the boundary layer but can also be used in the boundary
layer under extremely good visibility conditions. LOWTRAN predicts the
atmospheric transmittance homogeneous environments. It is difficult to predict
system performance where the atmosphere changes dramatically. For example, in
the first 3 meters above the sea surface,12 the water vapor content changes
significantly leading to a transmittance that is very height dependent.
Personal computer versions of MODTRAN, FASCODE, and HITRAN
are commercially available from the ONTAR Corporation.2 LOWTRAN is no
longer commercially available. It has been replaced by MODTRAN.
15.4. SPECTRALLY AVERAGED ATMOSPHERIC
TRANSMITTANCE
Most imaging systems measure the differential radiance produced by a
target and its immediately background. The system output depends upon the
spectral radiance of the target, the spectral radiance of the background, the spectral
transmittance of the atmosphere and the system spectral response.
Following the methodology in Section 3.4., Normalization, that the
spectrally averaged transmittance is
A
jMe (Л,АТ) (A)roptics (Л) Ш) ал
= A_____________________________________________
ave
j W (Л, AT) Toptics (Л) Rd (А) ал
2j
Then
(15-16)
л2
= Tave к 1ме(Л,АТ)гор,^(Л)Ла(Л)аЛ. (15-17)
2]
It has become common place to (erroneously) use
^ave ~ Tatm M) •
(15-18)
While mathematically convenient, Tave depends on path length and spectral
response. Figure 15-10 illustrates a typical spectral transmittance for al-, 5-, and
10-km path length. Figure 15-1 la illustrates the radiation detected by a typical
InSb detector and Figure 15-1 lb shows the radiation detected by a typical
Schottky barrier PtSi detector. Depending upon the system spectral responsivity,
the average transmittance can vary dramatically.
Figure 15-10. Typical atmospheric transmittance for
and 10-km path lengths. The average transmittance
simply .
1-, 5-,
is not
RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT
(a)
(b)
Figure 15-11. Two MWIR systems, (a) Radiation detected by
an InSb detector and (b) radiation detected by a PtSi detector.
Path length is 2 km, AT = 5 К and T= 300 K. The detector
responsivities have been normalized to illustrate spectral
effects. The system output is proportional to the area under the
signal curve. Although the InSb and PtSi systems are labeled
as MWIR, the differential output, &Vsys , can be dramatically
different depending upon the atmospheric conditions.
For back-of-the-envelope calculations, it is convenient to discuss average
transmittance (without regard to the system spectral response). For a sensitivity-
limited system, the signal-to-noise is
SNR^
т AT
atm-ave
NEDT
(15-19)
Equation 15-19 is only as good as the approximation given in Equation 15-18. It is
generally true when the range is less than 5 km. It can provide large errors if
Equation 15-18 is not valid. Validity is questioned if2; or 2 2 enters an atmospheric
absorption band. The MWIR region is more susceptible to errors than the LWIR
region due to the spectral absorption variations. The SNR is not strictly linear with
respect to AT since the SiTF is not linear with AT (See Section 3.2. AT Concept).
To illustrate some trends, let to = 0.85/km, Ro = 5 km, ATO = 10°C, and
NEDTO = 0.2° C. This provides SNR = 22. Suppose we can redesign the system
such that the NEDT is reduced to NEDT = 0.15. This allows one of three
performance improvement choices. Depending upon the system application, one
choice is selected. For a fixed SNR:
CHOICE 1: For a fixed AT and Tatm_ave, the range increases to
rpNEDT
NEDT0
log(ro)
- 6.77 km,
(15-20)
CHOICE 2: For a fixed range and тя/И1_яге, we can acquire cooler targets
AT =
NEDT
NEDT0
\T0 = 7.5°
(15-21)
CHOICE 3: For fixed range and AT, we can detect the same target in poorer
weather
7*
* atm-ave
1
' NEDT^*
^EDTB/
= 0.80/ km,
(15-22)
The spectrally averaged attenuation Tatm_ave should only be used for back-
of-the-envelope calculations and to infer trends. For range performance
predictions, the atmospheric transmittance should be calculated for each range of
interest.
15.5. WEATHER CONDITIONS
Atmospheric variability is perhaps the most difficult to quantify when
predicting system range performance. Actual performance can have wide
variations due to the uncertainty of the atmosphere and the inability to accurately
characterize it over the specific path length. While reasonable characterization is
possible for ground systems, it is difficult to accurately characterize the
atmosphere for systems on an airborne platform.
Atmospheric variations are a function of the season, location (continental,
maritime or arctic environment and latitude), time of the day, local meteorological
conditions, naturally occurring aerosols, artificial aerosols, and pollutants. Local
weather conditions measured at a nearby airport are not necessarily indicative of
conditions at the test site.
15.5.1. AVERAGE CONDITIONS
For back-of-the-envelope calculations, it is convenient to use a spectrally
averaged attenuation value. Table 15-4 provides some approximate values. These
are spectrally weighted values that can be used for both the MWIR and LWIR
regions.
The weather is typically either very good or very bad (Figure 15-12).
Rarely is there an "average" day as suggested by the values in Table 15-4. Every
day exhibits large variations. The "average" value is a mathematical construct to
make calculations easy and to allow system performance comparisons for different
weather conditions. Actual values may be significantly different at any particular
time. Casual observers tend to remember either very good or very bad weather and
therefore are not good estimators of average conditions. Averages are based upon
data collected over five to 10 years.13 Although the values in Table 15-4 are based
upon European weather (e.g. Figure 15-9), they are used as generic worldwide
weather conditions.
Table 15-4
AVERAGE ATTENUATION VALUES
These approximate values can be used for back-of-the-envelope calculations.
WEATHER QUALITY AVERAGE ATTENUATION APPROXIMATE PERCENTAGE OF TIME WITH BETTER WEATHER
Poor 0.70/km 80%
Fair 0.80/km 65%
Average 0.85/km 50%
Good 0.90/km 25%
Excellent 0.95/km 2%
co
z
s
о
DU
Ш
□:
Q.
CO
О
2
<
TIME
Figure 15-12. Typical atmospheric transmittance. Typically
the weather is either very good or very poor. Although it is
convenient to discuss average values, it is rare to have an
"average" day.
15.5.2. PROBABILITY of OCCURRENCE
With the large variation in weather conditions and therefore the large
variation in infrared transmittance, it is of interest to calculate the probability of
detection based upon yearly averages. The Weather Effects on Tactical Target
Acquisition (WETTA) model14 developed by the RAND Corporation provides
probability exceedance values for the European environment. Figure 15-13
illustrates a typical curve. The semi-empirical model typifies the cloud-free (but
not necessarily fog-free) atmosphere when the altitude is less than 100 m
Figure 15-13. WETTA calculations for a typical European
environment. The extinction coefficient has been spectrally
averaged over the LWIR region. Smaller values of extinction
are desired because they represent better atmospheric
conditions (higher transmittance). (From reference 14).
The WETTA model can be used in several ways. The first is to provide
an indication of the required system NEDT to detect a certain AT target. Assuming
a sensitivity-limited system, and that a signal-to-noise ratio of unity is sufficient to
detect the target, the required system NEDT is
NEDT = M e~r™R .
(15-23)
For each value of yave, the probability is obtained from Figure 15-13 and NEDT is
plotted as a function of the probability (Figure 15-14). Because there may be very
dense fogs, (e.g., the extinction coefficient is very large), a very small NEDT is
required to detect the target 100% of the time.
(b)
Figure 15-14. Probability of detection (SNR = 1) for a
sensitivity-limited system for different AT targets, (a) The
target is at 500 m and (b), the target is at 5000 m. Dense fogs
(y > 1) prevent target detection unless the NEDT is extremely
low. The values in Figure 15-13 were used.
The WETTA model provides the probability of occurrence for a
European environment. For other regions of the world, a back-of-the-envelope
approach can be used. Most naturally occurring processes follow a log-normal
distribution and many aerosol models assume that the distribution is log-normally
distributed. It is reasonable to suggest that the extinction coefficient also follow a
log-normal distribution
(15-24)
where log(<r) = 0.198. The curve in Figure 15-13 (or equivalently Figure 15-15)
appears to have two separate components: A clear-air/light-haze component and a
heavy fog component. Equation 15-24 can be applied to each component
separately. yave = 0.2 (equivalently Tatm_ave = 0.82) approximates the clear-air/light-
haze segment (Figure 15-15). This approach is strictly empirical. It offers a
method of plotting detection probability as a function of weather conditions when
only the average extinction value is available. Plotting methods can make data
appear different (compare Figure 15-13 with Figure 15-15).
ATTENUATION COEFFICIENT
I
Figure 15-15. Attenuation coefficient with тЯГт я =0.82.
' aUIl-avc
15.5.3. NAVY MODEL
The U.S. Navy15 used an empirical approach to estimate the average
atmospheric transmittance. Based upon a large number of sea-level observations,
they assumed that the average transmittance can be approximated by
Tave ®ехр(-айд),
(15-25)
where a and f are average coefficients obtained from the data base. The data (and
hence the coefficients) are divided into 3 geographical regions. The databases are
labeled by the number of observations (Table 15-5).
Table 15-5
U.S. Navy Databases
Data set Number of observations Locations
R384 384 Norwegian Sea, Mediterranean Sea, North Atlantic Ocean (near England), Mid-Arabian Sea, and Coral Sea (near Indonsia)
R400 400 Gulf of Finland, East China Sea, Yellow Sea, North Atlantic Ocean (near England), Gulf of Oman, and the Caribbean Sea
PG720 720 Gulf of Oman
Assuming that Equation 15-18 is valid, the coefficients are defined for
various percentiles (Tables 15-6 through 15-8). For example, the 70% percentile
means that a calculation using these values will yield an atmospheric transmittance
worse than or equal to 70% of the data in that data base. These predictions are
reasonable for ranges up to 20 km. Since this model was developed for naval
operations, it only applies to sea level observations. No values currently exist for
slant path, air-to-air, or for land-based observations. The R400 data is plotted in
Figure 15-16.
Table 15-6
R384 Coefficients
Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm
a p a p
10% 0.48351 0.58219 0.14316 0.85943
25% 0.56137 0.57989 0.21926 0.88006
50% 0.67340 0.57156 0.41487 0.88614
70% 0.72825 0.56431 0.52054 0.88492
80% 0.75743 0.57004 0.57288 0.88366
85% 0.77748 0.57151 0.59310 0.88554
90% 0.81578 0.58742 0.63084 0.88640
95% 0.98757 0.69721 0.72255 0.92409
Table 15-7
R400 Coefficients
Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm
a p a p
10% 0.46450 0.60692 0.13377 0.85766
25% 0.51896 0.60212 0.18370 0.87567
50% 0.64507 0.56790 0.33349 0.88109
70% 0.72821 0.54521 0.50976 0.88056
80% 0.75606 0.54707 0.55940 0.88230
85% 0.77212 0.56045 0.58038 0.88297
90% 0.80774 0.59999 0.60764 0.88794
95% 0.94043 0.68741 0.66784 0.88851
Table 15-8
PG720 Coefficients
Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm
a p a p
10% 0.61407 0.51678 0.25399 0.86634
25% 0.65818 0.51070 0.33741 0.87033
50% 0.71219 0.52933 0.46957 0.87486
70% 0.75095 0.53539 0.54834 0.88054
80% 0.77125 0.54087 0.59656 0.88092
85% 0.78381 0.54936 0.61977 0.88059
90% 0.80013 0.56472 0.66070 0.88422
95% 0.83305 0.58998 0.71566 0.89030
Figure 15-16. R400 LWIR (8 to 12 gm) transmittance for
various percentiles.
15.6. MWIR VERSUS LWIR
Since the advent of thermal imaging systems, many studies16'19 and
arguments have resulted over whether MWIR is a better imaging band than
LWIR. The factors involved in range performance analysis include the
atmospheric spectral transmittance, background temperature, system spectral
response, system NEDT, system MTF, the task on hand (detection, recognition or
identification), target size, and target AT.
Unfortunately, the merits of systems with different designs (e.g., scanning
common module versus staring arrays) are mingled with the relative merits of the
atmospheric transmittance values. To this end, a comparison is made between a
MWIR system and LWIR system with the only difference being the detector
spectral response and D*. This approach identifies atmospheric effects.
The first argument for MWIR is that the Rayleigh criterion suggests that
the MWIR region has a better resolution over an equivalent sized LWIR system
(Figure 12-6). The second is that there is more differential signal available in the
LWIR region when viewing terrestrial objects (Figure 3-13). Figure 15-17
illustrates the spectral transmittance, over a 2-km path length for a tropical
environment with a rural aerosol and a 12-km meteorological range. A 300-K
normalized blackbody curve and its effect on received radiation is
shown. Based upon these curves, it is apparent that more radiance is available in
the LWIR region than the MWIR region.
Figure 15-17. Atmospheric transmittance and 300-K
blackbody curve. The LWIR region appears to have more
signal than the MWIR region.
The approach shown in Figure 15-17 is appropriate for DC coupled
radiometers. Many systems are designed to display the difference between the
target and its background. The absolute value of the signal is not important: the
small differences are amplified and displayed. Figure 15-18 illustrates (a
logarithmic scale) the radiation difference between a 300-K background and a
305-K target or AT= 5 K. The LWIR region still appears to provide more signal.
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 15-18. Incremental signal available from a AT = 5 К
target on a 300-K background. The detector output is
proportional to the area under the differential radiance curve.
Next, the detector spectral response is added. Two systems are
considered: An LWIR common module system and an identical system in which
the common module detector (HgCdTe) has been replaced with a MWIR InSb
detector. Nothing else has been changed. Table 15-9 provides the spectral
response. The minimum wavelength of 3.8 pm was chosen for the MWIR system
to minimize sun glints (see Section 15.8., Sun glints'). Theoretically, the detector
peak response in the MWIR is about 3.88 times higher than the LWIR system.
Figure 15-19 portrays the resultant output for the two spectral bands with the
MWIR peak responsivity 3.88 times higher than the LWIR values. The area under
the heavy lines is proportional to the detector output AL and the outputs appear
similar with no clear winner. The progression from Figure 15-17 to Figure 15-19
illustrates that system spectral response and system application affect the spectrally
averaged transmittance. These results are unique to the values selected.
Table 15-9
SYSTEM WAVE LENGTH RESPONSES
SYSTEM Normalized peak Minimum wavelength detector peak wavelength, Xp detector cutoff wavelength, Lc
MWIR 1 3.8 pm 4.8 pm 5.4 pm
LWIR 1/3.88 7.75 pm 10.8 pm 11.5 pm
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
WAVELENGTH (pm)
Figure 15-19. Incremental detector output created by a AT =5
К target on a 300-K background for MWIR and LWIR
systems.
The spectrally averaged transmittance has been calculated for the two
sensors listed in Table 15-9. Three different environments were considered with
three different meteorological ranges (7 km, 12 km and 25 km) for each
environment. An air-to-ground scenario was assumed in that the thermal imaging
system is at a 500-foot altitude and the target is on the ground. The distance given
in Figures 15-20 to 15-22 is the slant path.
The atmospheric transmittance depends upon the amount of water vapor
present, the aerosols and the molecular species present. As the aerosol
concentration increases, the particle sizes grow and the MWIR region is affected
more than the LWIR region (Figure 15-7). Water vapor affects the LWIR region
more than the MWIR region. Whether the MWIR transmittance is higher than the
LWIR transmittance depends upon the relationship between the visibility and the
water vapor concentration. MWIR transmittance is higher only when the water
vapor concentration is high and the aerosol concentration is low (long
meteorological ranges). Even when this is true, the MWIR transmittance is better
for path lengths greater than 10 km for the particular sensors selected. The MWIR
system must be designed to exploit the increased transmittance. If the task was to
detect targets at 5 km, then the LWIR should be selected.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 15-20. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance
for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A tropical
environment and urban aerosol were assumed.
(b)
(c)
Figure 15-21. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance
for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A tropical
environment and maritime aerosol were used. Different
environmental conditions will produce different curves.
ATMOS TRANS ATMOS TRANS ATMOS TRANS
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 15-22. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance
for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A mid-latitude
winter environment and rural aerosol were assumed.
Any atmospheric study that does not include the system responsivity may
provide a different impression as to the effectiveness of the system. Systems that
have a response at absorption band edges are dramatically affected by the path
length compared to those systems that do not. It is not possible to simply state that
the LWIR band is better than the MWIR band. It is necessary to completely
specify the system spectral response before making any conclusions.
Range performance depends upon the system design (MTF and NEDT),
the target AT, target size, and task on hand (detection, recognition or
identification). Atmospheric transmittance is only a major driver for sensitivity-
limited systems. Note that MWIR and LWIR are used in a generic sense. To call a
system 3 to 5 pm or MWIR only denotes that its spectral response is within the
MWIR region. It says nothing about the precise response. For example both PtSi
and InSb are labeled as MWIR systems but the spectral responses are very
different and therefore their performances are very different. The atmospheric
transmittance is only one parameter in range performance equation and as such
should not be used exclusively to select MWIR pm or LWIR. Trade studies must
include the specific sensor designs to determine which will perform better in the
various scenarios and environments.
15.7. SIGNAL-TO-NOISE OPTIMIZATION
So far, the selection of the MWIR or LWIR band was based upon the
system spectral response and available signal. The system spectral response should
be matched to the anticipated signal so that noise is kept to a minimum. For a
background-limited system, the noise variance is equal to the average detected
signal level (Discussed in Chapter 18, Sensitivity and Noise)’.
^2
noise variance = к JMe (А, T) Rd (A) dA .
(15-26)
This assumes that any signal attenuated by the atmosphere is replaced by path
radiance. For background-limited systems, the noise must also be considered for
system optimization. Using Equation 15-6, the signal-to-noise ratio is
[Me(A,&T)r*m(A)rop/ics(A) Rd{A) dA
SNR = Jk^
Л2
$Me(A,TB) Rd(A) dA
(15-27)
Selection of MWIR or LWIR is now modified by noise considerations.
The SNR is maximized by carefully selecting the system spectral response. This is
dictated by the atmospheric conditions. A different optimization is required for
operation near the ground compared to high altitude operation. Optimization also
depends upon the anticipated path length. This approach assumes that the
atmosphere is homogeneous and does not change much over the limited use (i.e.,
air-to-ground with the airplane flying between 1 km and 2 km). This is not so near
the sea surface where the absolute humidity changes rapidly in the first few meters
of altitude. When evaluating the MWIR and LWIR bands, the performance
predictions are only as good as the models selected and the assumptions made.
System design issues (e.g., LWIR common module scanning system
versus MWIR staring systems) are mingled with atmospheric transmittance issues.
InSb and PtSi systems are both labeled as MWIR even though the spectral
responses are significantly different. Here, MWIR InSb may provide better range
performance than LWIR HgCdTe which, in turn, provides better range
performance than MWIR PtSi under certain conditions. There is no clear winner in
the MWIR versus LWIR controversy. Since the background temperature, AT,
system transmission, and system spectral response are embedded in Equation 15-
27, it is nearly impossible to provide general statements about the relative merits of
MWIR and LWIR. Sun glints (discussed in next section) can modify the results.
To illustrate the relationship between the signal and the noise, 2, is fixed
at 2.6 pm, and 22 is increased from 2.6 pm to 5.5 pm. As 22 increases, the total
signal increases only when the atmospheric transmittance is greater than zero. No
additional signal is gained at the CO2 absorption band at 4.3 pm. Path radiance
contributes to noise. Where ever the atmosphere absorbs source energy, it radiates
(path radiance) at the same wavelength. The detector senses all radiation within its
spectral responsivity band.
Figure 15-23 illustrates the relative output of an InSb detector that has a
peak responsivity at 4.8 pm and a cutoff wavelength of 5.4 pm. As z2 approaches
the CO2 absorption band, the signal no longer increases but the noise does so that
the signal-to-noise ratio starts to decrease. After the absorption band, the signal
increases again and then starts to decrease near the end of the MWIR band. The
relative maximum SNR is 2.71 which occurs when ^=4.16 pm. The SNR actually
decreased as the spectral bandwidth increased for this example!
RELATIVE OUTPUT
Figure 15-23. Signal-to-ratio for an InSb system with AT = 5 К
and a 2-km path length calculated from Equation 15-28. is
fixed at 2.6 pm and 22 varies from 2.6 to 5.5 pm. The SNR
decreases when no signal is available. The noise will always
increase with increasing wavelength.
To optimize the SNR, the optical transmittance, Toptics(f), should be unity
when the SNR is increasing and zero when the SNR is decreasing. The optical
filter should be a cold filter so that no appreciable radiation emanates from it.
Figure 15-24 illustrates the SNR with a cold filter that has unity transmittance from
3.16 to 4.16 pm and from 4.58 to 4.78 pm. Now the SNR has increased to a
relative maximum of 2.96. Kantrowitz and Watkins20 experimentally verified that
a notch filter similar to that shown in Figure 15-24 can improve imagery.
The cold filter does not provide any appreciable radiation below 3.16 im,
between 4.16 and 4.58 pm and above 4.78 pm (i.e., the definition of a cold filter).
The filter radiates at the wavelengths that it attenuates. If the filter temperature is
small compared to the scene temperature, then its radiative contribution to noise
can be neglected (discussed in Section 18.5., Real Systems).
The cold filter spectral transmittance must be matched to the anticipated
atmospheric spectral transmittance and detector spectral responsivity. Different
path lengths and different environments will modify the cold filter requirements.
Thus, the system design must be matched to the specific application. The choice of
MWIR or LWIR must be carefully analyzed for the specific application and
component availability. There is no quick answer to wave band selection.
RELATIVE OUTPUT
Figure 15-24. Optimized SNR using a spectrally selective cold
filter.
15.8. SUN GLINTS
The sun spectrum may be approximated by a blackbody whose color
temperature is 5900 K. The radiation reaching the earth is modified by the
atmospheric transmittance, which varies with sun angle. At 90° (sun directly over
head), the transmittance is a maximum. As the angle decreases, the transmittance
decreases (Figure 15-25). Due to water vapor, the solar intensity is more than an
order of magnitude smaller in LWIR region when compared to the MWIR region.
Simultaneously, the blackbody emission of a 300-K target is about 6 times higher.
Thus solar reflections are considered negligible in the LWIR region.
It would initially appear that solar reflections are a problem in the MWIR
region. As a result many systems are designed to minimize solar reflections (see
Section 15.6., MWIR versus LWIR). This may not be necessary. Whether sun glints
are a problem depends upon the system's application.
The magnitude of a sun glint depends upon the target's reflectivity (or
emissivity). If the target has unit emissivity, then sun glints are, by definition,
nonexistence. Figure 15-25 illustrates the full solar spectrum and would be the
magnitude of the reflected radiation when the reflectivity is unity As the
reflectivity decreases, the magnitude of a sun glint decreases. Table 15-10 provides
the emissivity of some common materials. The emissivity depends upon the
surface condition (polished, pitted, or oxidized) and surface contaminants (dew,
dust, mud, or paint). The emissivity of an ideal blackbody is one and that of an
ideal reflector is zero.
WAVELENGTH (цш)
Figure 15-25. The solar spectrum at the ground when the sun
is overhead (90°), at 30° and at 10°. Calculated from
LOWTRAN and using the 1962 standard environment and a
rural aerosol. For comparison, the spectral radiant exitance for
an ideal blackbody (e = 1) at 300 К is also shown.
Table 15-10
TYPICAL EMISSIVITIES
Material Reflectivity Emissivity
Skin 0.08 0.92
Paint 0.06 0.94
Plaster 0.09 0.91
Iron oxide 0.13 0.87
Common red brick 0.17 0.83
Oxidized copper 0.22 0.78
Lightly oxidized cast iron 0.36 0.64
Copper bus bar 0.60 0.40
Aluminum panel 0.84 0.16
Polished copper 0.97 0.03
For preventive maintenance, predictive maintenance, and nondestructive
testing, the target's temperature is inferred from the radiation emanating from the
target. The system's calibration allows for emissivities less than unity but this
requires knowledge of the reflected ambient radiation. Simple methods exist for
estimating the average ambient radiation. One application is to determine whether
electrical components are overheating. Many of these components are bare metal.
As indicated in Table 15-10, these components have a low emissivity and
therefore can reflect significant ambient radiation. The variability of a sun glint
with respect to sun angle, viewing angle, target angle, and target shape makes it
extremely difficult to account for solar radiation. As a result, most systems
designed for nondestructive testing operate in the LWIR region. Of course, a
MWIR system could be used indoors or at nighttime.
Most military targets are painted. The emissivity of these targets is very
high and therefore solar glints become quite small (Figure 15-26). A sun glint can
occur with a flat surface (e.g., glass in vehicles). This glint is actually an aid to
detection. The glint would probably similar to hot spot detection. If the
background provides solar glints, the glints act as clutter. This is a bothersome
effect when trying to detect ships on the ocean. It was shown in Section 15.6.,
MWIR versus LWIR, that MWIR systems may be useful in high humidity
environments. This, of course, includes ship detection. The advantage of using a
MWIR system may be lost when sun glints are considered.
Figure 15-26. Reflected solar radiation and thermal emission
for a painted 300-K target (typical emissivity of 0.94).
15.9. SOLAR SCATTERING
Aerosols scatter radiation. The amount of scattering and direction depend
upon the relationship among the particle composition, particle size, and
wavelength. As the angle between the target and sun decreases, the magnitude of
the scattered solar radiation increases. While not considered a problem for most
LWIR applications, solar scattering in the MWIR may be an issue. When viewing
objects within 20 degrees of the sun, scattered radiation may introduce significant
path radiance that is detected by MWIR systems. This increased path radiance
appears as noise within the system
15.10. BATTLEFIELD OBSCURANTS
The battlefield creates aerosols that are not normally found elsewhere.
The "dirty" battlefield contains dirt and vegetation kicked up by bomb blasts, soot
from burning materiel, camouflage smokes, and gaseous effluents from gun
muzzles. Many of these sources are very hot and can contribute to path radiance.
The soil type, soil moisture, and vegetation determine the amount of dust
produced by bomb blasts. The spread of the dust will depend upon the local
meteorological conditions. The persistence will be determined, in part, by the
particle size. Gravitational settling will limit the duration of dust clouds composed
of larger particles.
A "dirty" cloud created by a bomb blast develops in three stages: (1)
impact, (2) rise, and (3) drift and dissipation. In the impact stage, as the crater is
formed, large chunks of debris, moist soil, and water may be lofted. In the rise
stage, the particulates rise quickly because of thermal buoyancy. Finally, the dust
cloud drifts with the wind and eventually dissipates. These rapidly changing,
nonhomogeneous, aerosols are difficult to model.
The Electro-Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects Library (EOSAEL) is
a comprehensive library of computer codes that includes battlefield aerosols.21 The
aerosol extinction coefficient depends on the particle size distribution and
concentration. For naturally occurring aerosols (hazes, fogs, etc.), the
concentration can be inferred from the meteorological range. For battlefield
contaminants and notably screening smokes, the concentration can be controlled
by the generation method. Cloud homogeneity depends upon the environmental
conditions with wind being a dominant contributor. Since the battlefield obscurant
concentration can vary, it is convenient to rewrite the Beer-Lambert law as
robs=e~aCL-, (15-28)
where a is the mass extinction coefficient with units of m2/g and C is the
concentration with units of g/m3. The advantage of this approach is that a is an
inherent property of the particle composition, size, and shape. The concentration-
path-length product, CLohs, is simply the mass of particles in the line-of-sight.
Typical values of CLohs products can be found22 in Department of Defense
Handbook 178(ER). The obscurant path length, Lobs , usually is only a small
portion of the total path length R. The total transmittance is the product of the
obscurant transmittance and the remaining atmospheric transmittance (as
calculated by LOWTRAN).
15.11. REFERENCES
1. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN are discussed in many texts. See, for example, M. E.
Thomas and L. D. Duncan, "Atmospheric Transmission," in Atmospheric Propagation of Radiation, F.
G. Smith, ed. This is Volume 2 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and
D. L Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
2. The ONTAR Corporation, 129 University Road, Brookline, MA 02146-4532, offers a variety of
atmospheric transmittance codes.
3. B. Herman, A. J. LaRocca, and R. E. Turner, "Atmospheric Scattering," in The Infrared Handbook,
Revised Edition, W. L. Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., Chapter 4, Environmental Research Institute of
Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI (1985).
4 A. J. LaRocca, "Atmospheric Absorption," in The Infrared Handbook, Revised Edition, W. L.
Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., Chapter 5, Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
(1985).
5. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, pp. 30-67, Plenum Press, New York (1975).
6. F. X Kneizys, E. P. Shuttle, L. W. Abreau, J. H. Chetwynd, Jr., G P. Anderson, W. О Gallery, J. E.
A. Selby, and S. A. Clough, "Users Guide to LOWTRAN 7," Air Force Geophysical Laboratory
Report AFGL-TR-88-0177, Hanscom AFB, MA 01731 (1988).
7. N. S. Kopeika and J. Bordegna, "Background Noise in Optical Communication Systems,"
Proceedings IEEE, Vol. 58(10), pp. 1571-1577 (1970).
8. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing -Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (April 1975).
9. W. E. K. Middleton, Vision Through the Atmosphere, University of Toronto Press (1958).
10.1 . Dror and N. S. Kopeika, "Statistical Model for Aerosol Size Distribution Parameters According
to Weather Parameters," in Atmospheric Propagation and Remote Sensing III, W. A. Flood and W. B.
Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2222, pp. 375-383 (1994).
11. L. M. Biberman, R. E. Roberts, and L. N. Seekamp, "A Comparison of Electrooptical Technologies
for Target Acquisition and Guidance; Part 2: Analysis of the Grafenwohr Atmospheric Transmission
Data," Paper P-1218, Institute for Defense Analysis, Arlington Virginia (January 1977).
12. B. W. Rice and G. A. Findlay, "Infrared Propagation Within a Few meters of the Sea Surface,"
Applied Optics, 29(34), pp. 5046-5048 (1990).
13. See, for example. L. H. Janssen and J. van Schie, "Frequency of Occurrence of Transmittance in
Several Wavelength Regions During a 3-year Period," Applied Optics, 21(12), pp. 2215-2223 (1982).
or L. M. Biberman, R. E. Roberts, and L. N. Seekamp, "A Comparison of Electrooptical Technologies
for Target Acquisition and Guidance; Part 2: Analysis of the Grafenwohr Atmospheric Transmission
Data," Paper P-1218, Institute for Defense Analysis, Arlington Virginia (January 1977).
14 "Military Weather Calculations for the NATO Theater. Weather and Warplanes VIII," RAND
Corporation Report R-2401-AF (1980).
15. D. E. Austin, К. C. Hepfer, and W. R. Rudzinsky, "Use of NSWCDD Weather Databases for
Prediction of Atmospheric Transmission in Common Thermal Imaging Sensor Bands," Naval Surface
Warfare Center Report # NS WCDD/TR-94/89, Dahgren, VA (1995).
16. R. Longshore, P. Raimondi, and L. Lumpkin, "Selection of Detector Peak Wavelength for
Optimum Infrared System Performance," Infrared Physics, 16, pp. 639-647 (1976).
17. R. B. Johnson, "Relative Merits of the 3 - 5 and 8-12 pm Spectral Bands," in Recent Developments
and Applications of Infrared Analytical Instruments, W. A. Willis, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 971, pp.
102-111 (1988).
18. G. A. Findlay and D. R. Cutten, "Comparison of Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 - 12 im Infrared
Systems," Applied Optics Vol. 28(23), pp. 5029-5037 (1989).
19. T. Meitzler, G. Gerhart, E. Sohn, and P. Collins, "A Comparison of the Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 -
12 pm Infrared Cameras," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing V, G.
C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2224, pp. 22-29 (1994).
20. F. T. Kantrowitz and W. R. Watkins, "Bandpass Optimization for Low-altitude Long-path Infrared
Imaging," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(4), pp. 1114-1119 (1994).
21. R. C. Shirkey, "Determination of Atmospheric Effects Through EOSAEL," in Optical, Infrared,
Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. B. Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings
926, pp. 205-212(1988).
22. "Quantitative Description of Obscuration Factors for Electro-Optical and Millimeter Wave
Systems," Department of Defense handbook DoD-HDBK-178(ER), Washington, D.C. 20301 (25 July
1986).
EXERCISES
1. Using Figure 15-4, what is the average attenuation coefficient when the
meteorological range is 3 km and the absolute humidity is 10 g/m3? What is the
average attenuation coefficient when the meteorological range is 25 km and the
absolute humidity is 2 g/m3? Plot the transmittance as a function of range for both
values with R^ = 20 km.
2. What is the average attenuation coefficient for December and July (Figure 15-
5)? Assume that in December the air is clear (meteorological range is 25 km) and
hazy in July (meteorological range is 8 km). Plot the transmittance as a function of
range for both values with Rniax = 20 km.
3. What is the atmospheric transmittance over a 5-km path length for relative
humidities of 0, 10,..., 100%? Use the summer values shown in Figure 15-6.
4. Using Figure 15-7 as a guide, estimate the extinction coefficient for the visible
(X=0.5 pm), MWIR (X =4 pm), and LWIR (X= 10 pm) for each of the international
visibility code designations (Table 15-2).
5. Discuss the similarities and differences between the values determined in
Exercise 4 and Table 15-4.
6. Estimate the absolute humidity associated with the average weather conditions
shown in Figure 15-9.
7. Plot the atmospheric transmittance as a function of range (Rnwx = 20 km) for the
average attenuation coefficients given in Table 15-4 and Table 15-6. Comment
about the similarities and differences.
8. For the data shown in Figure 15-20c, calculate the average attenuation as a
function of range. Assume Tave = That is, for R = 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 km,
calculate t. Is t a constant? If so, why? If not, why not? Is an Taim_ave a good
approximation?
9. Discuss the relative merits of the filters (one versus two) shown in Figure 15-24.
16
ATMOSPHERIC MTF
It may be necessary to include atmospheric macroscale variations
(turbulence) when modeling a low-noise, high resolution system. The importance
of turbulence is evidenced by the fact that it is included in the US Army’s Electro-
Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects Library (EOSAEL).1 Turbulence, which is
well known in the visible, has been demonstrated in both the MWIR and LWIR
spectral regions2,3 (Figure 16-1). It has also been demonstrated4 that aerosol
scattering can blur LWIR imagery even when the weather is clear.
Turbulence results from random fluctuations in the atmospheric
refractive index that is caused by random changes in air pressure and temperature.
These changes, ever so slight, cause the light to arrive at different angles at the
receiver. This results in image motion, distortion, and blurring. Temporal
fluctuations are called scintillation. The turbulence is most dramatic within a few
meters of ground level. Turbulence is dramatic over dry soil (e.g., the desert)
during midday. For other locations or times, the turbulence may be minimal.
Image quality is degraded more when the turbulence is near the system
aperture. For example, image quality will appear poorer to a ground-based
observer viewing an aircraft compared to an airborne observer viewing the ground.
This is called the shower curtain effect.
Scene radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight contributes to extinction.
Non-scene radiation scattered into the line-to-sight contributes to path radiance. If
the radiation scattered into the line-of-sight originated from the target or its
immediate background, it will blur the image. This occurs because the scattered
angles of incidence relative to the line-of-sight are different from the unscattered
scene radiation. Mathematically, this blurring is considered as an MTF.
Adding an aerosol MTF and a turbulence MTF is at best a crude
approximation for two major reasons. First, turbulence is dynamic so that it will
affect a particular image feature differently at each instant of time. The MTF in
any one image may deviate significantly from the average. Second, the turbulence
effects are not spatially symmetrical and the image changes constantly. MTF
theory applies only to stationary processes. Therefore, the MTF assigned to
turbulence represents an average value. This chapter will discuss the atmospheric
MTF in its simplest form to illustrate the magnitude of the effect.
Figure 16-1. Set of 16 consecutive LWIR images of a target
board at 1.6 km. Turbulence distorts each image. The
distortion is not apparent to the observer because the eye
integrates over several frames. The observer will perceive
some MTF degradation. (From reference 2).
16.1. CN2
The atmospheric turbulence transfer function originated with Fried.5,6 The
literature7 contains many articles on turbulence theory and on the application of
Fried's theory. For many engineering applications, the refractive index structure
parameter, Cn2, is sufficient for predicting optical turbulence.
Turbulence exhibits a strong diurnal cycle and is even present on calm
days. A variety of factors affect C2. Temperature gradients are generally the
greatest at midday and midnight when the ground is warmer than the overlying air.
Daytime cloud cover limits surface heating and can reduce C2 by a factor of ten.
Nighttime cloud cover limits ground cooling and thereby increases the temperature
gradient and Cn2. Wind promotes air mixing and decreases temperature gradients.
Surface roughness inhibits air mixing, increases temperature gradients, and
increases C2. When the air and surface temperatures are equal, no heat exchange
takes place. These transitions cause minima that occur after sunrise and just before
sunset. The morning dip does not occur at sunrise because there is a thermal lag
while the surface temperature rises to meet the air temperature. The evening
minimum occurs before sunset when radiation cooling exceeds the insolation and
the surface temperature drops to that of the air. Table 16-1 summarizes these
effects and Table 16-2 provides some typical values. Figure 16-2 illustrates the
seasonal and diurnal nature8 of C2.
It would appear that sunrise and sunset are ideal times to perform
atmospheric imaging tests. However, experiments often last at least one-half hour.
During this period C2 is changing so rapidly that the results may not be
reproducible from test-to-test. Midday may be a better test time since C2 is nearly
constant even though turbulence is at its maximum value.
Table 16-1
FACTORS THAT AFFECT Cn2
Conditions that increase C„2 Conditions that decrease C2
Strong solar heating (few clouds) Very dry ground (desert) Clear nights with very light winds Low altitudes Surface roughness Heavy overcast Wet surface with high humidity High winds (greater than 8 m/s) High altitude
Table 16-2
C2 DESCRIPTORS
C„2 (m “) Turbulence strength
lx ICT15 or lower weak
5xl0’15to 1 ИО’14 moderate
5 * 10"14 or greater strong
с/г- i г
Summer
10‘12
10'13
10‘14
10'15
10 16
10'17
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time of Day
Spring
Figure 16-2. Diurnal and seasonal variations in Cf measured
at an altitude of 9 meters. Cf is proportional to /Г4/3. Therefore
at one meter, Cf is about 18.7 times greater. The data was
obtained at the Tularosa Basin at White Sands Missile Range,
NM - a desert, (a) Spring, (b) summer, (c) fall, and (d) winter.
The solid line is the mean and the dashed line represents ±u (±
one standard deviation). (From reference 8).
Time of Day
Winter
The dependence of Ся2 on height has been investigated in many
different locations. Vertical profiles have been observed to change over several
hours so that several models have been suggested,9'11 Tatarski's model seems
better for low altitudes12
4
с„2(й)=с>'Т (i6-i)
where Сло2 is the refractive index structure parameter at one-meter altitude. With
this model, Crt2 decreases to 1/10 of Cn2 at 5.6 m and 1/100 its value at 31.6 m
(Figure 16-3).
Figure 16-3. Tatarski's height model as a function of C2ICn2.
Turbulence is the greatest within 3 meters of the ground. Cn2
is the refractive index structure parameter at one-meter
altitude.
16.2. TURBULENCE MTF
The turbulence MTF can be described in closed-form for four limiting
conditions: near-field, far-field, long exposure, and short exposure:
MTFturb “ exP
(16-2)
where ffp is the spatial frequency in the focal plane of the lens and has units of
cycles/m. The parameter ro is Fried's coherence diameter (also called the transverse
coherence length) and a is a parameter that varies according to the limiting case.
Long- and short-exposure are also called the slow- and fast-modes respectively.
Table 16-3 provides the values of a recommended by Fried.5,6
Near-field occurs when D » (R and the far-field when D « (R Х)'л
(Figures 16-4 and 16-5). Most infrared systems have a clear aperture of five to 20
cm. Generally, the detection range increases with increasing aperture diameter.
Large aperture systems are used to detect targets at ranges more than 10 km.
Therefore, the far-field approximation appears appropriate.
Table 16-3
CORRECTION PARAMETER a
Exposure/mode Field a
Long/slow Near 0
Long/slow Far 0
Short/fast Near 1
Short/fast Far 0.5
Figure 16-4. Near- and far-field for the MWIR region (2-4
pm). The separation is7?=Z)2/ 2.
Figure 16-5. Near- and far-field for the LWIR region (2=10
pm). The separation is R=D2!
Determination of long- and short-exposure times in terms of
environmental observables is not well established. Since Fried's introduction of
fast and slow behavior, little definitive work has surfaced. However, short-
exposure is loosely defined as when /«10 ms. On a frame-by-frame basis, most
imaging systems operate in the short-exposure regime. However, because of eye
integration time, an observer’s eye will effectively integrate over 100 to 200 ms
and therefore the observer will experience the long-exposure, far-field conditions.
In the long-exposure limiting case, a=0 for both the near-field and the far-field.
It is the system focal length,//, which images the atmospheric turbulence
on the detector array. To convert to cycles/mrad, fx =ffp fl /1000. The far-field,
long-exposure MTF is
MTFturb ~ exP
1000ЯД
(16-3)
For spherical waves,
о
R
V/3 T3/5
(16-4)
where R is the slant path measured from the target (i.e., the target is at R = 0). The
variable ro depends upon the slant path, which has height dependence (Equation
16-1). Then
ro = 0.185 Я6/5
-3/5
(16-5)
сДй)</л
where 0 is the viewing angle relative to the vertical axis (zenith angle). Strong
turbulence (large Cf ) produces a small ro. The variable r(, will be most strongly
influenced by the turbulence near the receiver optics.13 Basically, large changes in
arrival angle are intercepted by the receiver when the receiver is near the
turbulence. When the turbulence is far from the receiver, the turbulence refracts
the radiation out of the line-of-sight. Since turbulence is the greatest near the
earth's surface, a ground-to-air scenario (tank observing a helicopter) will be more
strongly affected than if the situation were reversed (air-to-ground). This is
sometimes called the shower curtain effect.
For horizontal path lengths where Cf is considered be a constant (Figure
16-6)
/, 4-3/5 Г 2 Y/5
r =0.18526/5 -ЯС* =0.185 ------------------- . (16-6)
18 ) \3RC2n)
An imaging system that is diffraction-limited in the laboratory may have
its field performance limited by turbulence. Normalizing the spatial frequency (u -
fjfoco} provides МТРЛЙМТРШ1Ъ (Figures 16-7 and 16-8) as
MTFdiffMTFturb =
2,
л
—1 / 3
cos {u)-u\\-u
exp
3.44
5/3
(16-7)
When the aperture diameter is small compared to the coherence length,
turbulence will have minimal effect on the system MTF. The visible region (Figure
16-6a) is dramatically affected since the coherence diameter is relatively small
during periods of high turbulence. As a rule-of-the-thumb, if the D!ro is less than
0.2 then turbulence can be neglected.
1
0.01
•100
5.006-13
100
10
1
0.1
1.006-1
100
ui
о
z
Ul
Ul
x
о
£
a
m
о
z
Ul
X
ui
X
о
1.006-15
5.006-15
Atmospheric MTF 297
0.001
0.1
0.01
0.1
(c) PATHLENGTH (km)
Figure 16-6. Coherence diameter, ro , as a function of path
length, (a) Visible region (7=0.55 pm), (b) MWIR region (2 =
4 pm), and (c) LWIR region (7=10 pm). C„2 is considered a
constant. As the path length increases or as C„2 increases, r0
decreases. Simultaneously, MTFturb decreases.
0.1
Л4 ЛЛ
5.00£-l4
10
(a) pathlength^)
y**/
100E 5.006-15 ooE14 д
10
1
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.1
£
-ш-Х
6
Ul
о
z
X
ui
X
о
(W pathlength
^00ЕЛ55.00б-15 E.14
10
1
MTF MTF
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 16-7. Diffraction limited optical MTF and MTFturb as a
function oiD/r0. The spatial frequency is normalized tofx!foco.
Figure 16-8. MTFdiffMTFturb as a function of Do/ro. The spatial
frequency is normalized to fx!foco.
Using Shade's definition of resolution (Equation 12-6), Req_turb = \ .7WJro.
For the optics, Req_optics = 1.845 2 /Do (Equation 12-7). When Req_turb is considerably
less than Req.optics, turbulence does not degrade the system resolution. Equivalently,
when D/ro« 1, turbulence can be neglected. This is consistent with Figure 16-8.
Small aperture systems limit the amount of radiation collected and
systems with small apertures may be sensitivity limited. Large aperture systems
permit detection of large objects at long ranges. However, MTF^ will degrade
target detail for these systems.
Fried5 defined "resolution” as a volume integral. He normalized this
function to the maximum resolution that can be obtained as the aperture diameter
approaches infinity:
R
max
1
J MTFdiff («) MTFturb (u) u du ,
0
(16-8)
where the MTFs are given by Equation 16-7. The ratio R/Rtnax is illustrated in
Figure 16-9 as a function of D/ro. With this definition, the largest aperture selected
should be about equal to the coherence length. Other measures of resolution will
provide different limiting values for D !r0.
Figure 16-9. Fried's resolution5 as a function of D!ro. The
resolution increases until the aperture diameter approaches the
coherence length.
16.3. AEROSOL MTF
In Chapter 15, Atmospheric Transmittance, it was shown that scene
radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight was considered as part of extinction.
This rule-of-the-thumb statement refers to large angle scattering. Very small angle
scattering that reaches the detector may have sufficient intensity to be detected. If
the scattered target radiation is much lower than the background, its contribution to
blur is minor and may be considered negligible (assumed in Chapter 15).
When the scattered intensity is significant, the atmospheric transmittance
is replaced with the ’’classical” approximation14
MTFaerosol
Z X 2
-kR-oR
\ f aco J
whenfx<faco (16-9)
and
MTFaeroSol = exp [- Л Л - СТ Л ]
when f > f
J x J aco
(16-10)
The aerosol cutoff, faco, is
(16-11)
where a is the effective aerosol radius (m). The aerosol MTF decreases from unity
at zero spatial frequency to a value equal to the atmospheric transmittance at
spatial frequencies above cutoff. For most systems, faco is very small. Thus in only
a very small frequency range is the MTF of forward scattering dependent upon the
frequency. This small range can be neglected for most applications according to
the classical approximation.
However, the classical approximation does not consider the imaging
system's field-of-view.15 The classical approximation has been extended by Sadot
and Kopeika.16 They showed that both scattering and absorption can have angular
dependence. Experimental evidence4’17 suggests that the aerosol MTF is much
more complex and can exist up to ffp = 500 cycles/m. When converted to the object
spatial frequency, this becomes 0.5/7 cycles/mrad. Comparison of aerosol and
turbulence MTFs show that the aerosol MTF may be dominant in the LWIR.16
Sadot et. al. have included18 the aerosol MTF to the range performance
predictions. The range at which targets can be detected changes when the aerosol
MTF is included. Under weak turbulence conditions and moderate ranges, the
aerosol MTF increases the SNR compared to the 1975 NVL model prediction. For
long ranges, the aerosol MTF approaches a constant attenuation and both models
predict the same range. Reference 19 summarized the aerosol MTF theory.
16.4. REFERENCES
1. See W. B. Miller and J. C. Ricklin, "A Module for Imaging Through Optical Turbulence,"
Atmospheric Sciences Laboratory' Report ASL TR-0221-27, White Sands Missile Range, NM (1987)
and R. C. Shirkey, "Determination of Atmospheric Effects Through EOSAEL," in Optical, Infrared,
Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. B. Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings
926, pp. 205-212(1988).
2. W. R. Watkins, D R. Billingsley, F. R. Palacios, S. B. Crow, and J. B. Jordan, "Characterization of
the Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function Using the Target Contrast Characterizer," in
Characterization, Propagation, and Simulation of Sources and Backgrounds, D. Clement and W. R.
Watkins, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1486, pp. 17-24 (1991).
3. W. R. Watkins, "Environmental Bugs Invade EO Imaging Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems:
Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing IV, G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 42-53
(1993).
4. D. Sadot, G. Kitron, N. Kitron, and N. S. Kopeika, "Thermal Imaging Through the Atmosphere:
Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function Theory and Verification," Optical Engineering, Vol.
33(3), pp. 881-888(1994).
5. D. L. Fried, "Optical Resolution Though a Randomly Inhomogeneous Medium for Very Long and
Very Short Exposures," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 56(10), pp. 1372-1379 (1966).
6. D. L. Fried, "Limiting Resolution Looking Down Through the Atmosphere," Journal of the Optical
Society of America, Vol. 56(10), pp. 1380-1384 (1966).
7. See, for example, J. W. Goodman, Statistical Optics, pp. 402-433, Wiley-Interscience, New York
(1985) or R. R. Beland, "Propagation Through Atmospheric Optical Turbulence" in Atmospheric
Propagation of Radiation, F. G. Smith, ed. This is Volume 2 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical
Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research
Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). This 85-page chapter
contains 94 references.
8. D. L. Walters, К. E. Kunkel, and G. В Hoidale, "Diurnal and Seasonal Variations in the
Atmospheric Structure Parameter (Cn2) that Affect the Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function," in
Atmospheric Transmission, R. Fenn, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 277, pp. 6-9 (1981).
9. D. L. Fried, "Statistic of a Geometric Representation of Wavefront Distortion," Journal of the
Optical Society of America, Vol. 55(11), pp. 1427-1435 (1965).
10. E. Brookner, "Improved Model for the Structure Constant Variations with Altitude," Applied
Optics, Vol. 10(8), pp. 1960-1962 (1971).
11. R. E. Hufnagle, "Variations of Atmospheric Turbulence," in Digest of Technical Papers, Topical
Meeting on Optical Propagation Through Turbulence, Optical Society of America, Washington, D.C.,
pp. Wa-1 to Wa-4 (1974).
12. F. Lei and H. J. Tiziani, "Atmospheric Influence on Image Quality of Airborne Photographs,"
Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(9), pp. 2271-2280 (1993).
13. D. Sadot, D. Shemtov, and N. S. Kopeika, "Theoretical and Experimental Investigation of Image
Quality Through an Inhomogeneous Turbulent Medium," Waves in Random Media, Vol. 14(2), pp.
177-189 (1994).
14. N. S. Kopeika, "Spatial-frequency and Wavelength Dependence Effects of Aerosols on the
Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 72(8),
pp. 1092-1094(1982).
15. D. Sadot, A. Dvir, L. Bergel, and N. S. Kopeika, "Restoration of Thermal Images Distorted by the
Atmosphere, Based on Measured and Theoretical Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function,"
Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(1), pp. 44-53 (1994).
16. D. Sadot and N. S. Kopeika, "Effects of Aerosol Absorption on Image Quality Through a
Particulate Medium," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(3), pp. 7107-7111 (1994).
17. D. Sadot and N S. Kopeika, "Imaging Through the Atmosphere: Practical Instrumentation-based
Theory and Verification of Aerosol Modulation Transfer Function," Journal of the Optical Society of
America A, Vol. 10(1), pp. 172-179 (1993).
18. D. Sadot, N. S. Kopeika, and S. R. Rotman, "Incorporation of Atmospheric Blurring Effects in
Target Acquisition Modeling, in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing
V, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2224, pp. 95-107 (1994).
19. N. S. Kopeika, A System Engineering Approach to Imaging, pp. 487-513, SPIE Optical
Engineering Press, Bellingham, WA (1998).
EXERCISES
1. An MWIR system is operating in a far-field, long-exposure environment. Let
Cf be IxlO’1', IxlO '4 and IxlO’13. Assume the average wavelength is 4 pm. The
target is 10 km from the sensor (horizontal path length). What is rf Plot MTFnrb.
2. Repeat Exercise 1 for the visible region (X = 0.55 im).
3. Repeat Exercise 1 for an LWIR system (X = 10 im)..
4. Discuss the how the wavelength affects MTFturb. Use the results of Exercises 1,
2, and 3.
5. A sensor is at an altitude of 1 m and the target is directly above the sensor at 100
m. What is the integrated value of rf>
6. The target is at an altitude of 1 m and the sensor is directly above the target 100
m. What is the integrated value of rf
7. Does the near field or far field turbulence region apply to visible systems?
17
TARGET SIGNATURES
A target is an object that is to be detected, recognized, or identified. The
background is any distribution of radiation that offsets the target. Target signatures
are the spatial, spectral, and intensity features that distinguish the target from the
background. Most imaging systems exploit intensity differences.
The background can vary with application (Figure 17-1). The
background may be a mountain, ocean, forest, jungle, plain, desert, clouds, sky, or
snow. A vehicle viewed from air could have diverse backgrounds such as sand,
grass, water, concrete, asphalt, or dirt. Since vegetational growth varies with
season, there is also a seasonal variation in the target signature. Similarly a ship
may have the sea or the sky as a background. A helicopter may have cold sky,
clouds, mountains, or vegetation as a background depending upon the location of
the observer with respect to the helicopter. In each case the apparent target-
background signature is different even though the target has a fixed intensity.
Air-to-G round
(a)
(a)
Ground-to-G round
Figure 17-1. The background can vary according to the
application, (a) Air-to-ground, (b) ground-to-ground, (c)
ground-to-air, and (d) air-to-air.
Because of the wide variation in target signatures, Ratches et. al. stated1
One of the main problems in performance modeling is to obtain an exact target
signature. ... The problem is further complicated by the fact that one target can
have many different signatures under various operational and environmental
conditions..... We cannot easily describe all the complex target characteristics
corresponding to the real-world IR signature..... Therefore we utilize only the
overall general features of the target such as size and average temperature
difference from the background. The resulting predictions then correspond to the
results of a large ensemble of experiments. However, the results of any specific
experiment with its unique target signature will not necessarily come close to the
predictions for the general ensemble.
For thermal imaging system performance predictions, it is common
practice to represent the target signature with an equivalent area-weighted, target-
background differential temperature (AT). An inherent weakness of a single
parameter is that a target with a cold spot and hot spot could mathematically have
a zero area-weighted AT.
When the wavelength is less than about 3 pm, there is sufficient solar
radiation available to detect reflectivity differences. That is, target signatures at
these lower wavelengths typically are created by reflectivity differences. While
this chapter focuses on thermal signatures, the methods to analyze data are generic
to all spectral bands. With only minor modification, the equations can be used for
all spectral bands. Chapters 19 through 21 further apply target characteristics to
range performance metrics.
17.1. WHAT IS AT?
There are numerous underlying assumptions when AT is selected as a
target-background signature metric. These assumptions, listed in the previous
chapters, are summarized here. The differential voltage created by a detector is
A
\Vsys = к \RdO)[MeO,TT)~ MeO,TBS\TopUcsa)TatmWdX. (17-1)
A
This is equated to the AT concept:
Л2
A =k О)[ме (Л, TB + ДГ)- Me (Л, TB )Kp(to (Л)Та,т (Л)4Л. (17-2)
A
Target signatures 305
Because AT is buried in the equation, it is a function of the background
temperature, atmospheric transmittance, detector responsivity, and the lens
transmittance. These equations can only be solved by iteration: there is no closed
form solution.
)
The first assumption is that a small change in a variable can be expressed
as a Taylor series
dMe(^TB)
дТ
AT.
(17-3)
Then
^2
J«„ (Я)[ме (Я,Тг)-Ме (Я, TB )]г„рВа (Я)Та1„ (Я)М
ЛТ~-------------------------------------------
А
г дМАЯ,Тв)
I Rd W —~ - roplics {Я)та(т (яуля
J dT
(17-4)
The next assumption is that the atmospheric transmittance has no spectral features:
T„„,,(T) = T„„ = TR„tm.mc. This simplifies the equation to
л2
(Я)[ме (Я,тт)-ме(я, тв)] ?oplics (Я) ая
AT ±. (17-5)
Гр ГП8Д/е(АТД)г .....
I т! optics (^)
J дТ
А
If the optics and detector responsivity are independent of wavelength, then
я2
Цме(я,тг)-ме(я,тв)]м
A______________________
я2
{дМе(Я,Тв)
I _ аУи
J дТ
(17-6)
Finally if the functions are constant over the spectral band,
(^ave 9 TT ) M e (^avg ? ^B )
dM e (Лаге, TB )
(17-7)
dT
which is the simplified equation that defines ЛТ. Because of the spectral nature of
the optics, detector responsivity, and atmospheric transmittance, the apparent ЛТ is
a function of all these. Each assumption modifies2 the apparent temperature
differential. The error associated with each assumption increases as the spectral
quantity deviates from the assumption that it is constant. The biggest influence is
the atmospheric transmittance. Care must be exercised when the spectral response
of the system starts to enter the region where there is significant atmospheric
absorption. The error becomes a function of path length. Even with these inherent
difficulties, the infrared community has selected AT as the method of describing
target signatures.
17.2. AREA-WEIGHTED AT
It is common practice to assume that both the target and the background
can be modeled as blackbodies with an equivalent temperature. This convention
ignores surface effects (i.e., covered with dirt, mud, and scratched paint) and
makes the surface an ideal blackbody with unity emittance. The target’s true
temperature may or may not be equal to the equivalent temperature. The
conversion simply states that over the spectral region of interest, the target and
background appear to be blackbodies at an equivalent temperature. The AT
concept is a matter of convenience. For complete radiometric calculations, both TB
and AT are used.
Because of target-signature complexity, Ratches et. al. recommended3
using an area-weighted target temperature
N
- _ <=1
ave ~ n
(17-8)
where the target consists of TV subareas, A b each having a temperature of Tt (Figure
17-2). This value represents the average temperature for an ensemble of vehicles
and orientations. If the background has an average temperature of TB, the average
differential temperature is
bT = Tme-TB. (17-9)
Figure 17-2. Area-weighted target temperature.
There are virtually no standard targets except the NATO standard tank
that reportedly4 has a AT of 1.25° C. Friedman et. al. state4 about vehicles: The AT
associated with such a target must be obtained empirically or from an appropriate
data base. Values range from 0.2 to 12 degrees depending upon vehicle type,
condition, and aspect angle. The system analyst must use his judgment in selecting
a value for AT. This value is based either experimentally measured result, by
analogy to these results, or by prior experience. Sometimes, the customer defines
the AT.
Generally, the AT is considered the same in the MWIR and LWIR
regions. This assumption is only valid if the emissivities (both target and
background) are the same in the two spectral regions. If the emissivities are
different, then the apparent ATs are different. Note also that AT can be zero even
though the vehicle is discernible in the visible region (signature depends upon s-
spectral reflectivity differences).
Although the diurnal cycle and operating conditions affect the target
signature, an area-weighted AT is selected for convenience. Common usage has
shortened area-weighted AT to just AT. For different viewing angles the area-
weighted AT may be different. Consider the areal relationship between a hot truck
engine and its overall size. Although the engine compartment may be near 100° C,
the average AT may only be a few degrees above the background.
17.3. DIURNAL VARIATIONS
All materials with high absorption in the solar spectrum region will heat
up. The temperature will depend upon the absorption coefficients at the solar
wavelengths and the emissivity in the infrared where it re-radiates the energy. A
target's current temperature is a time history of radiation exchange between it and
the environment.
17.3.1. SOLAR HEATING
Natural backgrounds such as trees, grass, rocks, and earth are heated
passively through the absorption of solar energy. Daily heating begins at sunrise,
and after midday, solar loading declines and objects begin to cool. After sunset, the
background temperature approaches the air temperature. Low thermal inertia
objects such as grass, leaves, and the soil surface tend to track the solar radiation.
When a cloud passes, these objects cool rapidly. Large dense objects, such as rocks
and tree timber, heat and cool slowly.
Since all objects have different absorption coefficients5,6 at the solar
wavelengths, different emissivities, and different thermal inertias, they heat up and
cool at different rates. Therefore, target signatures are a function of all these
parameters. The amount of solar radiation absorbed depends upon the condition of
the target's surface (e.g., covered with water from recent rain, dew, dirt, or mud).
The temperature of large thermal mass objects such as armored vehicles tends to
lag terrain temperatures. Thus the terrain will heat or cool faster than a parked
armored vehicle and both positive and negative contrasts are possible.
As the sun rises, it heats that part of the target that faces east. During this
time, the west side may still be cooling. Simultaneously, the grass on the eastern
side will heat up. When viewing the western side in the morning, you see a cool
side against a background that has heated. During the afternoon, the situation is
reversed. The east side is in a shadow and may start to cool while the west side
starts to heat up. Figure 17-3 illustrates the diurnal cycle for different parts of a
tank.
Figure 17-4 illustrates a typical diurnal cycle predicted8 by the SPACE
(Sun, Precipitation, Atmosphere, Clouds, Earth) model. At thermal crossover (AT
= 0), the target cannot be detected. For a fixed SNR, the range can be estimated
from the back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation
tr AT
SNR * Та‘т-<™
NEDT
The range is zero at thermal crossover. Here, it is assumed that positive and
negative contrast targets can be detected with equal capability (Figure 17-5). The
amount of time the SNR is below a measurable value depends upon the NEDT, the
atmospheric transmittance, and the AT.
Figure 17-3. Representative ATs for a tank on a grassy
background for a northern latitude. As the sun's angle
changes, different sides are heated. (From reference 7).
Figure 17-4. A typical AT diurnal cycle. The AT will vary
according to season, location, and solar loading. This curve
represents the area-weighted average AT for the front view of
a tank during a typical European summer day. (From
Reference 8).
TIME (24 hour scale)
Figure 17-5. Representative performance ranges during the
diurnal cycle for Tatm_ave = 0.85/km. At thermal crossover, the
range approaches zero. As the NEDT or the required SNR
increases, the time that the target range is near zero increases.
No target is precisely at one temperature but will always exhibit some
temperature variations. Different parts cool and heat up at preferential rates
depending upon the sun location, heat capacity, and environmental effects.
Although thermal crossover is shown as a unique event, there is usually some part
of the target that exhibits a AT. Active targets generally do not exhibit thermal
crossover.
17.3.2. AT CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY
The effect of thermal crossover on range predictions can be understood
by replotting the data in Figure 17-4 into a probability exceedance graph (Figure
17-6). Usmg the back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation (Equation 17-10),
the probability of detection (assumed to occur when SNR = 1) is shown in Figure
17-7. For NEDT = 0.1° C and Tatm_ave = 0.85/km, the maximum range is 23.7 km.
For this diurnal cycle, the detection range exceeds 20 km 72% of the time and
exceeds 15 km 89% of the time. When plotted in this manner, thermal crossover is
an extremely brief period compared to a 24-hour period.
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE
Figure 17-6. Probability of exceedance for the data (absolute
values) illustrated in Figure 17-4.
Figure 17-7. Cumulative probability for detection. SNR = 1,
NEDT= 0.1° C, and ratm_ave = 0.85/km.
17.3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL MODIFIERS
Passing clouds modify the target signature. A heavy overcast lasting
several days will nearly obliterate any signature as the earth and any target reach
thermal equilibrium. When raining or snowing, solar loading is typically zero.
Simultaneously, the high thermal conductivity of water aids in heat dissipation so
that the scene is washed out.
For several hours after a heavy rainfall, target signatures are faint. Water
and mud reduce frictional cues through cooling and insolation, respectively. Wind
aids in heat transfer so that under moderate wind conditions, target temperatures
will be lower than under still air conditions.
17.4. PATH RADIANCE
Intuitively, it seems that any phenomena that prevent us from visually
perceiving an object will affect all imagery the same way. During a hazy day, light
scattered into the eye (path radiance) reduces the visual contrast. Here, objects that
are far away appear as a neutral white and we are unable to distinguish any
features. While the eye acts in this manner, imaging systems do not. Imaging
systems simply responds to radiance differences. For thermal imaging systems,
path radiance affects system noise and may modify the apparent target signature.
The radiant sterance appearing to emanate from the target is
LT = ^m-ave eTWLeO,O + т^,_те pr(A) Le{A,Tae) + Latm . (17-11)
The first term represents the self-emission by the target and the second is the
ambient radiation reflected by the target, zff) and pff) are the spectral emittance
and reflectance, respectively. Tae is the average environmental temperature of the
surrounding objects. It represents a mean temperature from averaging all
contributing background elements. Latm is the path radiance created by the
atmospheric self-emission and radiation scattered into the line-of-sight. Similarly,
the radiant sterance appearing to emanate from the background is
LB =r^lm_m.e (A)Le(A,TB) + pB(A)Le(A,Tae)\+ Ltttm .(17-12)
If the target and background are at different ranges, the radiant sterance
from each suffers different transmittance losses. Simultaneously, a different
amount of path radiance is added to each. If the target and background are nearly
at the same range, R^R2=R and the radiant sterance difference is
д/ ~ т
2 L atm-ave
к {A)Le{A,TT)-SB WLe(A,TB)\
^-[pTW-pBW]Le^Tae}.
(17-13)
As long as a system is operating in the linear region, path radiance will
not affect the detected AZ when Rj ~R2=R. However, real systems have automatic
gain circuitry that may be activated by the path radiance signal. If so, the effect is
to reduce system gain. Now AZ may be below a measurable signal. For staring
arrays, path radiance will partially fill the charge wells.
The difference in sterance, AZ, can be positive, zero, or negative. It can
be made vanishing small by modifying the target surface characteristics (i.e.,
adjust the emittance by selecting appropriate paint). This camouflage technique
makes the target invisible in the thermal imaging bands.9,10 When the range to the
target and background is different, the path radiance affects AZ.
As the sensor spectral response enters those regions where the
atmospheric transmittance is low, the path radiance becomes more noticeable. For
example, some systems have a cold filter which limits the spectral response to 8 to
12 pm whereas others do not and are sensitive from 2 to 12 pm. This latter system
will sense all the path radiance contributed in the water absorption band from 5 to
8 pm. Watkins11 provided some imagery that illustrates the effects of path radiance
on target detectability.
The eye has an internal automatic gain circuit and the eye's sensitivity
depends upon the contrast &L/L. Most targets in the visible are illuminated by an
ambient source12 (i.e., the target and background are not self-luminous and the sun,
moon, or starlight provides the illumination). Dropping the wavelength notation
for equation brevity
C _ _ e aR (Pt Pb ) Le
L e aR P В Le + ^atrn
(17-14)
where Le is the ambient illumination that irradiates the target and background and
о defined by the meteorological range (Equation 15-10). The inherent contrast is
_ <J>b ~ Pt}
о ~
Pb
(17-15)
Historically, the background was always considered brighter than the target (pB >
pT) and Co varied between 0 and 1. However, the target can be brighter than the
background and there does not appear to be any difference between the
detectability of objects which are of negative or positive contrast. The inherent
contrast is now defined as
о
\pb Pt\
Pb
(17-16)
Substituting into Equation 17-14 provides the received contrast as
1
Lqtm aR
Pb Le
(17-17)
The path radiance, L„tmi is due to light scattered into the line-of-sight and the total
amount received is integrated over the path length/3 With negligible absorption (a
reasonable approximation for the visible), -Tave)Lsky. The sky sterance, Lsky
, is a function of the viewing direction and the location of the sun. The quantity
pBLe is the background luminance. For convenience, the integrated path radiance is
called the sky-to-background ratio (SGR):
1 + SGR (eaR -1) *
(17-18)
The SGR is approximately Q2!pB for a clear day (Lsky/Le^ 0.2) and 1/ pB for an
overcast day (Lsky/£e« 1). When the SGR is one, the received contrast is simply the
inherent contrast reduced by the atmospheric transmittance (see Section 15.2.2.,
Contrast Transmittance)
Cr=Coe~aR. (17-19)
The apparent target luminance is
L'T ~ ^atm-ave Pt Le + (1 — ^atm-ave) Lsky •> (17-20)
or
LT =e~aR(pT Le - Lsky)+Lsky . (17-21)
As the range increases or as the scattering increases (equivalently, reducing the
meteorological range, the apparent target luminance approaches Lsky.
17.5. SKY BACKGROUND
Normally, the space is very cold with an effective temperature of about
20 К. If the atmospheric transmission is high, the sky will appear cold. As the
transmittance decreases, the path radiance increases and the sky appears warmer.
Thus, aircraft high in the sky may be against a 20 К background. The same
aircraft, when near the horizon, may be against an effective 293 К background.
Extensive graphs on sky radiance can be found12 in The Infrared and Electro-
Optical Systems Handbook.
17.6. ACTIVE TARGETS
Active targets produce heat by fuel combustion and friction. The target
signature of a vehicle depends upon its operational state: off, idle, or exercised. For
passive targets (off state), the temperature will depend upon the absorption at the
solar wavelengths and upon the emissivity in the infrared where it re-radiates the
energy.
17.6.1. FUEL COMBUSTION
Fuel related heat sources occur whenever the engine is operated and is
nearly independent of vehicle motion. If the engine is water cooled, the engine
compartment temperature is usually below 100° C. If heat is piped into the
passenger compartment for personnel heating, then that too will appear warm.
Because of heat transfer, the engine compartment does not appear as a
well-defined area but as a blob with a diffuse edge as the heat dissipates. Engine
mufflers and exhaust pipe temperatures run quite high. These heated areas can be
seen at very long distances. However, these areas are localized and therefore may
not be oriented toward the imaging system. Consider, for example, the thermal
image of a car. The engine compartment and grill will be clearly visible from the
front whereas the rear view may provide only a small heated exhaust pipe.
17.6.2. FRICTIONAL HEAT
Frictional heat is only generated when the vehicle is in motion. The heat
is less intense than that created by the engine. Wheeled vehicles generate heat in
the tires, shock absorbers, drive shafts, transmissions, axles, and differentials. For
armored vehicles, tracks, road wheels, drive sprockets, support rollers, and shock
absorbers are the frictionally heated features. Frictionally heated cues differentiate
wheeled vehicles from tracked vehicles.
If the vehicle is moving rapidly or if there is a large wind, both fuel
related and friction related temperature gradients may be reduced. If equipped with
weapons, the gun tube can be significantly hot after firing. For high-speed aircraft,
aerodynamic heating also provides a signature.
17.7. TARGET SIGNATURE MODELING
The infrared signature of a target is an integral part of its environment. For an
aircraft (Figure 17-8) it includes the exhaust plume, scattered and reflected
radiation (earthshine, sunshine, skyshine), internal heat sources, and aerodynamic
heating. Depending upon the viewing angle and background, the wings and
fuselage may appear either warmer or colder than the background. The engines, of
course, are always hotter than the background.
Sky
Emission From
Warm Spots
Reflected Sky/Cloud
> Radiation
Reflected Sunlight
-► Reflected Earthshine
Earthshine
Figure 17-8. The target signature cannot be separated from the
environment. Earthshine, skyshine, sunshine, and cloudshine
affect the apparent target temperature.
Various models exist to predict target signatures such as PRISM14
(Physically Reasonable infrared Signature Model) and SPIRITS15 (Spectral
Infrared Imaging of Targets and Scenes). PRISM is used for ground targets and
SPIRITS is a faceted model for aircraft. These models provide detailed spectral
maps of target radiance with and without atmospheric transmittance and path
radiance. They have been validated, qualitatively, with actual field tests. Conant
and LeCompte provide16 the overall methodology to model targets. Accetta17
describes target signatures, background and atmospheric phenomenology.
With the inability to characterize complicated heat generation effects,
widely varying environmental effects, and variations in target surface conditions,
the assumed AT may be off by a factor of ten from the actual value (0.1 versus 1,
0.5 versus 5). The results of any range performance calculation should not be
construed as absolute values. Rather, it provides range values that are appropriate
for comparative analyses.
17.8. THERMAL STRUCTURE METRICS
Active targets with a distribution of temperatures can be detected,
recognized, and identified even if the area-weighted AT is zero. New metrics
attempt to describe the eye's capability to exploit these spatial features.
Each metric uniquely combines the target/background mean temperature
and standard deviation and to produce a modified AT. Some metrics include the
number of pixels on the target and in the immediate background. As an example
^modified = A7”?- - )2 + (<7Г - )2 (17-22)
When the target and background standard deviations, <rr and trB ,are zero, the
metric reduces to the area-weighted AT. When the area-weighted AT is zero, a
modified AT is assigned to the thermal structure (which depends upon the standard
deviations).
Gerhart et. al. evaluated1* nine different modified AT formalisms. While
the new metrics appear better than the area-weighted AT, they do not consistently
calculate target detectibility. Gerhart et. al. stated: This analysis indicates that
target/background scene descriptions using simple average parameters such as the
mean and standard deviation are not sufficient for characterizing imaging sensor
performance against targets 'with internal texture and contrast gradients in
background clutter.
The ability to detect a target decreases as the background clutter
increases. The modified AT approach considers background variations only near
the target. Clutter metrics have been developed when global clutter is present.19,20
Schmieder and Weathersby21 suggested changing the target discrimination
criterion (discussed in Section 20.1.4. Clutter). It is up to the analyst whether to
incorporate clutter as part of the target signature or to increase the difficulty of
perceiving the target by increasing the observer's threshold. However, the area-
weighted AT has been used since 1975 and new metrics are accepted slowly. It
would appear that changing the discrimination level would be appropriate at this
juncture.
17.9. REFERENCES
1. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, pg. 2, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
2. J. G. Vinson, R. G. Driggers, and R. Deep, "Techniques and Errors for Apparent Temperature
Calculations," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IX, G. C. Holst,
ed., SPIE Proceeding Vol. 3377, pp. 2-10 (1998).
3. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P Obert, R J. Bergemann, T. W Cassidy, and J M. Swenson,
'Night Vision laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, pg. 3, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
4. M. Friedman, D. Tomkinson, L. Scott, B. O'Kane, and J. D'Agostino, "Standard Night Vision
Thermal Modeling Parameters," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing
III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 204-212 (1992).
5. A. J. LaRocca, "Artificial Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed. pp. 108-127. This is
Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker,
eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press,
Bellingham, WA (1993).
6. D. Kryskowski and G. H. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed. pp. 151-
157 and 230-285. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S.
Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
7. F. A. Resell, "Characterization of the Thermal Scene," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F. A. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., pg. 16, NRL Report #8311, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
8. J. A. D'Agostino, "The SPACE Signature Model: Principles and Applications," in Infrared Image
Processing and Enhancement, M. Weathersby, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 781, pp. 2-9 (1987).
9. R. H. Munis and S. J. Marshall, "Emittance: A Little Understood Image Deception in Thermal
Imaging Applications," m Image Quality: an Overview, E. Granger, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 549,
pp. 72-78 (1985).
10. B. McClean and N. Fontana, "The Effect of Coating Properties on Contrast Radiance of
Camouflage and Uncamouflaged Tactical Equipment in the 8 - 12 Micron Region," in Optical,
Infrared, and Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. В Miller, eds. SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 926, pp. 122-129 (1988).
11. W. Watkins, "Environmental Bugs Invade EO Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and TestingIV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceeding Vol. 1969, pp. 42-53 (1993).
12. D. Kryskowski and G. FI. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed., pp.
139-316. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and
D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
13. L. Levi, Applied Optics, pp. 118-124, Wiley and Sons (1980).
14. W. R. Reynolds, "Physically Reasonable infrared Signature Model," Keweenaw Research Center,
Michigan Technological University, Houghton, MI 49931.
15. W. T. Kreiss, A. Tchoubineh, and W. A. Lanich, "Model for Infrared Sensor Performance
Evaluation: Applications and Results," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11) pp. 1797-1803 (1991).
16. J. A. Conant and M. A. LeCompte, "Signature Prediction and Modeling," in Electro-Optical
Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, pp. 301-342. This is Volume 4 of The Infrared
and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993).
17. J. S. Accetta, "Infrared Search and Track Systems," in Passive Electro-Optical Systems, S B.
Campana, ed., pp. 219-290. This is Volume 5 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook,
J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
18 G. R. Gerhart, T. Meitzler, E. J. Sohn, and H. Choe, "The Evaluation of AT Using Statistical
Characteristics of the Target and Background," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis,
Modeling, and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 11-20 (1993).
19. J. D'Agostino, W. Lawson, and D. Wilson, "Concepts for Search and Detection Model
Improvements," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis. Modeling, and Testing VIII, G. C.
Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3063, pp. 14-22 (1997).
20. S. R. Rotmanm. G. Tidhar, and M. L. Kowalczyk, "Clutter Metrics for Target Detection Systems,"
IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-30(l), pp. 81-91 (1994).
21. D. E. Schmieder and M. R. Weathersby, "Detection Performance in Clutter with Variable
Resolution," IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-19(4), pp. 622-630
(1983).
EXERCISES
1. For the two curves shown in Figure 17-5, what is the percentage of time that the
detection range is greater than 5 km? What is the percentage of time that the
detection range is greater than 10 km?
2. Estimate the average AT (absolute value) for the diurnal cycle shown in Figure
17-4? Why should you use the absolute value?
3. For a sensitivity limited system, plot detection range (SNR = 1) as a function of
AT. Let Tatm.ave - 0.80/km, NEDT = 0.25° C. Assume STm(lx = 10° C. If the DAS is
0.1 mrad and the target size is 1 meter, what is the range according to the
resolution back-of-the-envelope approximation? Estimate the actual system
response.
4. Table 15-2 states that for a clear day, the meteorological range varies from 10
km to 20 km. Plot C,JCO (Equation 17-19) as a function of range for the two
meteorological ranges. Assume the background reflectance is 50%. Does the
International Visibility Code provide adequate detail to accurately calculate the
received contrast?
5. Plot £?/£<, (Equation 17-15) as a function of range for a clear day for Rvis = 10
km and Rvis = 20 km. Let the target reflectance be 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4. Estimate
the ranges at which the target can be detected.
6. Discuss the merits of the modified thermal structure metric (Equation 17-22).
18
SENSITIVITY and NOISE
Sensitivity suggests something about the lowest signal that can be
detected. It is the input signal that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity. It is
only one of many performance parameters used to describe system performance.
Sensitivity is not related to resolution. Depending upon the application, a system
may be sensitivity-limited, resolution-limited, or some intermediate combination.
NEDT is the smallest measurable signal produced by a large target
(extended source). NEDT is also called noise equivalent temperature (NET) and
noise equivalent temperature differential (NETD). For point source detection, the
lowest measurable signal is the noise equivalent irradiance (NEI) or, equivalently,
the noise equivalent flux density (NEFD). These laboratory metrics are measured
in rms units but the units are seldom used. Similarly, the terms difference or
differential are often omitted since it is understood that the system noise is referred
to a differential temperature. The NEDT and NEFD are excellent diagnostic tools
for production testing to verify performance. They are poor system-to-system
comparison parameters and should be used cautiously when comparing systems
built to different designs. This is so because they are a function of spectral
responsivity and the noise equivalent bandwidth.
Historically, only photon detectors had sufficient response to be used in
high-resolution, low-noise infrared imaging systems. As a result, these detectors
have been analyzed in detail and most performance equations used today are based
upon photon detector characteristics.
Fixed pattern noise (nonuniformity) has received significant attention in
recent years. Its effect on an observer's ability to perceive targets is not well
understood. However, its existence cannot be ignored since it may be a dominant
noise source in multi-element arrays. FPN is not caused by a single detector. It
occurs when different detectors in an array have different responsivities or if the
amplifiers have different gains and offsets.
The magnitude of each noise must be quantified and its effect on system
performance must be understood. Noise sources may be a function of the detector
temperature and bias voltage. Predicted system performance may deviate
significantly from actual performance if (a) a non-optimum detector temperature is
used, (b) non-optimum bias, or (c) significant 1/f noise or other noise is present.
There is a myriad of factors involved in system optimization. It is essential to
Sensitivity and noise 321
understand what limits the system performance so that intelligent improvements
are made.
Many books1'5 have been written on detector characterization and noise
sources. Noise modeling6'10 for staring arrays depends upon the particular readout
circuitry employed: source follower, direct injection, buffered direct injection, or
capacitance transimpedance amplifier. These noise sources are of interest to the
multiplexer designer and may be added to a system model as appropriate. For
system analysis, it may be sufficient to treat the readout noise as a single quantity.
The detector/mux manufacturer usually provides this value. The noise sources
associated with detectors operating in the visible region can be found in references
6 through 8. Noise sources may be separated into three categories for modeling
purposes:
"Standard” noise sources
These are sources that can be described mathematically in closed-
form and are found in most textbooks. These include photon and
Johnson noise.
Quantifiable noise sources
These are sources whose precise values are unknown. They include
1/f and fixed pattern noise, amplifier noise, and mux noise. The exact
parameters may be obtained from the manufacturer or may be
obtained experimentally.
Unique noise sources
These are sources that cannot be described by simple statistical
equations. They include microphonics and transitory effects.
Although not a noise source, it may include nonlinear digital image
processing, nonlinear phase shift effects, and aliased signal.
In principle, all noise sources, except random noise, can be eliminated or
at least be reduced below a measurable value. When random noise is due solely to
the random events associated with photon detection, the system is said to have
background limited performance (BLIP). Thermal imaging systems can operate in
the BLIP mode. Since essentially no background photons exist in the visible
region. Visible sensors are amplifier noise or mux noise limited.
This chapter discusses photon noise, Johnson noise, dark current noise,
fixed pattern noise, and mux noise in infrared detectors. Other noise sources are
included in the three-dimensional noise model (discussed in Section 19.1., Three-
dimensional Noise Model). Quantifying these sources represents a challenge to the
system analyst.
322 Electro-optical imaging system performance
18.1. SCANNING ARRAYS (ANALOG SYSTEM)
The rms detector noise current per unit bandwidth is
(18-1)
For background limited (BLIP) operation, (iphotof) is the dominant noise source. For
low background applications (e.g., space-based systems), Johnson noise may
become the dominant noise source. The noise associated with the electronics,
{iantf), depends upon its design. Although 1/f noise is present in scanning systems,
it can be minimized with AC coupling. If appropriate, 1/f noise1,2,3 can be added.
The total noise current is
% = ГПК ~ amPS ’
(18-2)
where Sfe is the noise equivalent bandwidth (NEBW). Since noise occurs in the
electrical portion of an imaging system, the NEBW is an electrical bandwidth with
units of Hertz.
Although FPN is associated with staring arrays, it also occurs in scanning
arrays that consists of more than one detector element in the cross scan direction.
1/f noise may appear as streaks in scanning systems.8,11
18.1.1. NOISE EQUIVALENT BANDWIDTH
When modified by electronic subsystems, the total system noise power is
co
р(Л)|^(Л)Г#е,
0
(18-3)
where Stff) is the noise power spectral density (NPSD) from all sources and H(/c)
is the frequency response of the system electronics. Electronic circuitry designers
use It is identical to the MTF.
The noise equivalent bandwidth is that bandwidth with unity value that
provides the same total noise power. Assuming the noise is white over the spectral
region of interest [£(4)=^], the NEBW (FLIR92 ARG-33) is
р(Л)|я(Л)|2#е,
NEBW = \fe = -5--------------. (18-4)
Figure 18-1 illustrates the relationship between the actual system response and the
NEBW. The area under both curves is equal. The NEBW applies only to those
noise sources that are white and cannot be applied to 1/f noise. Although common
usage has resulted in noise bandwidth, it is understood that it is a power
equivalency. A word of caution: the frequencies present may be much higher than
those suggested by the noise equivalent bandwidth (see Figure 18-1). The highest
frequency present must be considered when analyzing a system.
NORMALIZED ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY
Figure 18-1. Noise equivalent bandwidth (NEBW). The
system contains a single-pole circuit whose 3 dB frequency
has been normalized to unity (f3dB= 1).
The NEDT was originally a measure of detector sensitivity. To match the
remaining circuitry, a single-pole circuit was added
(18-5)
Using Equation 18-4, the NEBW is
For common module systems, f3(Ui was matched to the detector dwell time and it
was called the reference frequency, characteristic frequency, or fo (pronounced/^
naught)
(18-7)
As a result, the reference equivalent bandwidth was reported12,13 as
ДАref
71 1
2 2^
(18-8)
For sampled data systems, the noise bandwidth is the smaller of (a) the
noise equivalent bandwidth of the analog signal before sampling or (b) Nyquist
frequency. For staring arrays, the NEBW is
ДАе =
1
^^int
(18-9)
where tint is the integration time or stare time.
18.1.2. PHOTON NOISE
The photocurrent is
A
* photon ~ А/ .
A
(18-10)
The noise in photoconductors is caused by fluctuations in generation rate and
recombination rates The rms noise current per unit bandwidth is
l PC-photon
2GJ qiphoton
(18-11)
where G is the photoconductive gain. If a photovoltaic device is used, the noise
current per unit bandwidth is
l PV-photon
#9 I photon
(18-12)
18.1.3. JOHNSON NOISE
Johnson noise is caused by the random motion of charged carriers in a
resistive element. As the temperature increases, the mean kinetic energy of the
carriers increases yielding an increased noise current. The noise current per unit
bandwidth is
I Johnson
(18-13)
where Reff is the resistance seen be the detector and Teff is the temperature of Reff.
For two resistors in parallel at temperature 7\ and T2
lJohnson
< ^2 >
(18-14)
18.1.4. AMPLIFIER NOISE
The value of the amplifier noise current is usually provided by the
manufacturer. Since the manufacturer has no knowledge of how the device will be
used, the noise current per unit bandwidth, <iam>, is provided. The total noise
current is
(18-15)
18.2. STARING ARRAYS
For staring array analysis, it is customary to specify all noise sources as
equivalent electrons at the output of the detector. Staring arrays tend to use
photodiodes or photovoltaic elements. These systems typically have fixed pattern
noise (FPN) and multiplexer (mux) or readout noise.
For photovoltaic devices
Both photoelectrons and dark current contribute to shot noise. Due to the discrete
nature of electrons, the electron noise appears to follow Poisson statistics. With
Poisson statistics, the variance is equal to the mean
shot / № photon j №dark ) photon + ^dark '
(18-17)
1/f and kTC noise in staring arrays can be minimized with double correlated
sampling. As necessary, 1/f noise and Johnson noise can be added to Equation 18-
16.
18.2.1. PHOTON NOISE
The calculation of the number of photons from the optics, cold shield,
housing, and scene use the same equations as before. Recall that
Rq (Я) Eq (Л, T)tint = Re (Я) Ee (Л, T). (18-18)
With this substitution, Equation 18-10 provides the number of photoelectrons.
18.2.2. DARK CURRENT
For photovoltaic devices, the dark current is composed of two opposing
currents
Q ^bias
idark=Ioe kT -Io, (18-19)
where Io is the reverse bias saturation current. Differentiating, setting the bias
voltage to zero and defining (di/dV)'x as the dynamic impedance, Ro (pronounced
R-naughf), provides
Ro
ьт_
qi0
(18-20)
Although the dark current is composed of two opposing currents, the noise powers
are additive. When referring the shot noise caused by dark current to electrons, the
noise variance is
.2 ; tint -
ndark / ndark ‘dark
' q
(7 ^bius
e kT +1
о ~ л о
tint
q
If the voltage bias is zero,
^dark
~ ndark
2kT
R0<i2
hnt •
(18-22)
This expression resembles a Johnson noise term. However, it is the shot noise
caused by two independent current sources. The integration can be any value with
a maximum value of the frame time. However, to avoid saturating the charge
wells, the actual integration time may be as short as 1 ms.
For Schottky barrier diodes at temperature Td, the theoretical reverse
dark current (saturation current) in amperes is
д&в
hark = AT, Ade kr- , (18-23)
where A* is the effective Richardson emission constant for holes in p-type silicon
(approximately 32 A cm’2 K2) and Фв is the barrier height. Since actual
performance deviates from theoretical predictions, Pellegrini suggested14 a slightly
different relationship for the reverse saturation current. Under reverse bias
conditions, the barrier is lowered by АФВ
^(фд-ДФд)
• _ л * ПГ 2 j к T.i
I dark ~ A ^d ^d^
The electron noise variance is calculated the dark current:
q(Fb лфв)
n2 \ = n = AT2 A p kTlt *int
^dark / 'adark d "Fl"
’ q
(18-24)
(18-25)
18.2.3. FIXED PATTERN NOISE
Fixed pattern noise refers to any pattern that does not change signifi-
cantly from frame-to-frame. There are four known sources of spatial noise:
detector responsivity nonlinearities, variations in detector spectral response,
detector 1/f noise, and array 1/f noise.1516 Detector responsivity and spectral
response usually do not change with time and the manifestation of the variation
will be a pattern that rarely changes. However, if the detector temperature changes,
the responsivity also changes. 1/f noise is a low frequency phenomenon that
changes slowly with time. Since each detector has different 1/f-noise characteris-
tics, these low frequency components appear as different DC offsets. The different
offsets appear as fixed pattern noise. Since each detector is independent, the 1/f
drift will be different and the "fixed" pattern will change with time. A completely
random nonuniform spatial pattern changes slowly with time and this spatial noise
increases monotonically as a function of time after normalization. Although 1/f
noise is low frequency temporal noise, its appearance depends upon the system
design and operation. FPN tends to be small for sensors operating in the visible.
This is a direct result of a mature manufacturing technology.
Variations in spectral response are very difficult to describe
mathematically and any correction to this is less effective. Spectral response
mismatch occurs when the cutoff wavelengths of the detectors are different. This
case is not considered here.
Fixed pattern noise may be additive or multiplicative. These are also
called signal-independent and signal-dependent respectively. For arrays with
different dark currents, the noise powers are additive. Arrays with different
responsivities produce multiplicative noise.
For mathematical convenience, fixed pattern noise is expressed as a
fraction of the total number of charge carriers. If U is the fixed pattern ratio or
nonuniformity, then
{nFPNphoton . (18-26)
18.2.4. MULTIPLEXER NOISE
Staring array multiplexers are complicated. The noise components may
include quantization noise, kTC noise, amplifier noise, injection efficiency, and
charge transfer inefficiency. Correlated double sampling techniques can minimize
some noise sources. The functional form of these noise sources can be found in the
literature.2'10 For system modeling purposes, the mux noise power is considered as
a fixed value, {ппш}\ which is supplied by the manufacturer. {nmux) is sometimes
called the noise floor.
18.3. DETECTOR RESPONSIVITY
Responsivity modeling is generic to each specific type of detector. Most
figures of merit (specific detectivity and NEDT) are based upon the spectral
response and operation of the classical semiconductors. The novel semiconductors
include the Schottky barrier diode and quantum well detector. The number of
articles17'20 describing quantum well physics and noise modeling is increasing
daily. These technologies are evolving and the dominant noise sources may
change as the technology matures.
Sensitivity and noise 329
Advances in uncooled technology have created a large number of thermal
detector systems. Pyroelectric and microbolometer detectors fall into this category.
Their fundamental noise sources can be found in the literature.1*5 Rogalski21,22
presented a snapshot of infrared detector technology as of early 1994.
The classical semiconductor’s responsivity, l?e(2), has units of amp/watt.
In Chapter 3, Radiometry, the detector responsivity, 7?/2), was given in volts/watt.
The responsivities are related by the load resistor: Л/2) = Re(X)RIoad. Since staring
arrays collect electrons, it more convenient to discuss the quantum efficiency.
Re(X) can be converted into electrons/photon by
Rqw = nW ~ReW ,
e Z
(18-27)
where Rq(X) is simply the spectral quantum efficiency and is symbolically
represented as 7/(2) in many texts. When the wavelength is measured in
micrometers,
z
(18-28)
18.3.1. CLASSICAL SEMICONDUCTORS
For ideal photon detectors the spectral responsivity (in amps/watt) is
Re (л) = — Rp when 2 < 2p
(л) = 0 elsewhere ,
(18-29)
where Rp is the peak responsivity and Ap is the wavelength at which Rp occurs.
However, real photon detectors do not have an abrupt transition and tend to follow
Re U) = — Rn when 2 < 2„
C \ z И fs
лр
зГ '
4 ~Лр
(18-30)
when Лp < Л< Лр +1.1547 (Лс - Лр)
Re (Л) = 0 when Л>Лр +1.1547 (2С - Лр )
where Xc is the wavelength at which the responsivity drops to 50% of its maximum
value and is sometimes called the cutoff wavelength.
18.3.2. NOVEL SEMICONDUCTORS
While the responsivity of classical semiconductors increases with
wavelength, it decreases with Schottky barrier diodes (SBDs). The responsivity in
amps/watt is
яг(я)=сД1-2_
4 7
(18-31)
where Cs is the Schottky emission constant in eV1, Лс = 1.24/Фв and Фв is the
barrier height. For typical PtSi SBDs, Фв ~ 0.22 eV and Cs « 0.20 eV1. As a
decreasing function, the quantupi efficiency is approximately 1% at 4 pm and zero
at the cutoff (2C~ 5.6 pm).
The responsivity of quantum well detectors can be approximated by a
Gaussian distribution
Re(^)=Rp exP
-41n2
(18-32)
where is the full width of the responsivity curve at half-maximum (FWHM).
The peak wavelength ranges from 8 to 10 pm for LWIR devices. The width, , is
typically 1 to 1.5 pm. The peak responsivity depends upon the device but can vary
from 0.5 to 2 amps/watt. Typically, cold filters limit the spectral response from ±Л|Р
to ±3 .
18.3.3. THERMAL DETECTORS
Thermal detectors are broad band detectors with no spectral features.
They are coated to increases the absorptance. Cold filters limit the spectral
response.
18.4. SPECIFIC DETECTIVITY
The specific detectivity, D* (pronounced dee-star\ is a figure-of-merit
that combines responsivity with detector noise. D* applies only to detectors used
for infrared imaging systems. It is normalized to unit bandwidth
Dbb ~
A We
NEP
(18-34)
where <isy> is the noise current per unit bandwidth. The units of D* are also called
Jones to indicate that the meaning of D* is the same as that defined by Jones in
1953. The subscript BB indicates that it is referenced to an ideal blackbody. The
noise equivalent power (NEP) depends upon the detector temperature and bias.
When experimentally obtaining the responsivity, RBB , the current
difference, A/syv , produced by the blackbody source and the background is
measured. This results in a measured specific detectivity that should be called the
incremental specific detectivity. While the specific detectivity is calculated from
measured data, the following provides the theoretical equations.
18.4.1. BLIP
When only {iphoto^) is used, D*BB has reached the theoretical maximum and
the detector is operating in background-limited (BLIP) mode.
Classical photodiodes (photovoltaic devices)
The photovoltaic D* is
Dpv-BLip
2 I г/
/tc^2Eq ’
(18-35)
where Eq is the total integrated photon flux density incidant onto the detector.
Eq = jEq(2,Te)M.
A
(18-36)
The limits of integration depend upon the spectral response. For the detector only,
= 0 and = Л •
Classical photoconductors
Photoconductors have generation-recombination noise so that the D* is lower
Dpc-BLIP
(18-37)
SPRITE
A SPRITE detector is a long filament of photoconductive HgCdTe with typical
dimensions of dx = 750 pm by dy = 60 pm. SPRITES inherently offer signal
integration and can be equated to an equivalent number of TDI elements N(l
Nd = 2sr ,
(18-38)
where т is the holes lifetime (typically 2 ps) and 5 is the "pixel" scan velocity
(number of pixels of dimension dy*dy scanned per second). typically ranges
from 8 to 15. The "enhanced" D* is23,24
Dsprite-blip - \ Nd DPC - V2s т DPC ,
(18-39)
Schottky barrier diodes
SBD spectral response is quite different from the other detectors. As a result, it is
not characterized by an equivalent D*.
Quantum wells
For quantum wells25
Dqwbup
= 1.1x106
exp
he
(18-40)
2 I rj
МсуЁ^’
This suggests that the detector temperature should be very low to maximize D*. In
fact, until recently quantum wells were operated at 55K
Thermal detectors
D* was originally derived for a background limited case where the noise is
proportional to the detector area. While these conditions do not exist in a thermal
detector, it does provide a comparison with the other devices26
^THERMAL
= 2.8xX016
(18-41)
where a is the absorption coefficient. With a maximum value of a = 1, and T =
300K, D* = 1.8xlO10 Jones.
18.4.2. JOHNSON NOISE LIMITED
D*blip increases as the background radiance approaches zero (low
temperature background). In space or astronomical applications where the
background is low, Johnson noise becomes the limit (Johnson-noise-limited
operation or JOLI).
Dpvjou
(18-42)
2hc \ kT ’
where Ro is the diode resistance. For photoconductive devices
BpC-JOLI
qA/r]G
2hc
ReffAd
kTeff
(18-43)
Here, the load resistance determines the theoretical limit.
18.4.3. D*BB to D\ CONVERSION
Although detectors are specified byD*BB, the spectral specific detectivity
[Zf (/)] is required for the NEDT calculation. Therefore, it is worthwhile to review
the measurement so that D*BB can be converted to D*(A).
A chopper is placed in front of a detector that is viewing a hot blackbody.
It is typically set at 500 К to insure that sufficient flux is available. The
background is the temperature of the chopper (usually assumed to be 300 K). The
current difference produced the blackbody and the background is measured. Using
the Stefan-Boltzmann relationship, a flux difference is calculated even though the
detector is band-limited. The flux difference incident onto the detector is
&Ф = кСГ? -Тв) = к (5004 -3004) ,
(18-44)
where Ar is a proportionality constant that depends upon the experimental
configuration and includes the Stefan-Boltzmann constant. RBB = А//АФ where Az
is the current produced by the difference between the source and the background
radiation. Experimentally, Gn , M , Ad , and A£ are measured and then D*BB is
calculated..
The spectral responsivity and spectral specific detectivity have the same
functional form which are represented as
ReW = Rp Fdet(A) and = Dp Fdet(A) , (18-45)
where D* is the peak value of Z>* which occurs at Xp. The function Fdet(X) is
given by Equation 18-29 or Equation 18-30. The differential current is
M = к р?е(Л)[ме(Л,Тт)- Mе(Л,Тв)]аЯ = kRBB АФ . (18-46)
А
Then
^>500=-----/-----Г Гл((>1)[^а,500)-Ме(Л,300)рЛ (18-47)
ст(500 -3004)/
Zj
or у
&вв ~^5оо • (18-48)
The proportionality constant, к500, is unique to the detector spectral response.
18.4.4. D*300
Occasionally, back-of-the-envelope calculations use D*M. It is
impossible to use 300K as a target because there would be no temperature
difference between the target and the background. So a temperature slightly higher
is selected (301 K). Since D*p does not change,
D* Dp
301 <т(3014 -3004)
z2
jFrfrf(2)[Me(Z,301)-Me(2,300)]z/2. (18-49)
A
Then
^301 ~^500
A
Ггг,еДЛ)[Ме(Л,301)-Ме(Л,300)]<М.
5004-3004 л,________________________________
3014-3004 \
I Fda W\Me U,500)- Me (Л ,300)]</A
A
(18-50)
For small mcrements, the first term of the series expansion can be used
(ГВ+ДГ)4-ТВ4«4ГВ3ДТ,
(18-51)
and
Ме(Л,Тв + ЬТ)-Ме(Л,Тв)
аме(л,тв)
дТ
(18-52)
дг.
Assuming
. . 5004-3004
” ” 4<3«0>)
y.,tA'ww>^
J оТ
А
fFdet (Л)[^е (Л,500)-Ме (Л,300)]М
(18-53)
18.5. REAL SYSTEMS
Photons may originate27 from a variety of sources: background, path
radiance, optics, warm filters, cold filter, and the housing (Figure 18-2). For
differential signal considerations, only the background is considered. The
remainder adds a veiling glare to the scene and contributes to noise.
Assuming circular apertures, Let 0sys be the full planar angle subtended by
the optical system and 0CS be the full planar angle subtended by the cold shield (see
Appendix, f-number). The photocurrent from the background, optics, housing, and
cold shield are
4-7
Figure 18-2. Representative optical layout with a cold shield
that is a non-vignetting field stop. The cold shield efficiency
may be less than 100%. If the cold shield is isolated from the
cooler, it may be at an elevated temperature. A warm filter
(not shown) can also contribute to photon noise.
2r Me(A,Toptics) Ad
ionics = fow rp , (18-55)
I housing
sin2
cs
2
-sin2
sys
2
hou sin g ) Ad dh
if ®cs > 6Sys
(18-56)
I housing 0 if @cs — @sys >
and
^cs
1- sin2
A
jj(e(A)Me(A
Tcs)AddX.
(18-57)
МХЛТ’в) is the total exitance that appears to emanate from the background. It
includes the background self-emission, reflections, and path radiance. The optics,
housing, and cold shield are at temperatures Toptics, Thousins, and Tcs, respectively.
The housing and cold shield are opaque objects with unity emittance. For the
optics, £optics =1-Toptics. The total photocurrent is
l photon background + optics housing Es ‘
(18-58)
For 100% cold shield efficiency (0sys = 0СХ), the detector cannot sense radiation
from the housing. For most systems, Tcs is small and then /„can be neglected. In an
isothermal environment, Toptics ~ TB and then
photon
I scene
+‘optics =
* 4F
/Ц
(18-59)
For a detector assembly, the detector will have a cold filter that restricts
the response to [Zj, z2], Clearly, as the spectral bandwidth decreases, D* increases.
With all detectors D* can be further increased by reducing the solid angle
subtended by the detector. The cold shield design and location define this angle. If
the full planar angle is 0, then
^(0) =
(18-60)
D* increases with decreasing cold shield angle (usually specified as an equivalent
f-number). The maximum value of the angle is л rad and the equation reduces to
Equation 18-34.
18.6. SYSTEM SNR
The SNR is traditionally given as
SNR = =
j (noise sources)
(18-61)
л
18.6.1 SCANNING SYSTEMS
For scanning systems, the background provides a large uninformative
signal. Instead the infrared community uses a differential SNR (which is
erroneously called the SNR)
ASNR =
target - background
(noise sources )
,2
Keeping with the common parlance, the differential SNR will hereafter be simply
called the SNR. To maintain dimensionality, the differential signal (see Appendix,
f-number) is also measured in amperes
A
^sys = \ReWWe(^n)-Me(A,TB)]Toptics(A)dA , (18-63)
4F л
and the SNR is
A \
JRe (Л)[Ме (A, TT)-Me(A, TB )]roptics (A) dA
SNR =-----. (18-64)
loo
p(/e)|H(/e)|2#e>
I о
All the noise currents have been consolidated into an effective NPSD
;2
’'photon
+ v Johnson
(18-65)
18.6.2 . STARING SYSTEMS
The target signal is
A У
n signal = j J R<1 6^-) Mq П Г optics (^) hnt • (18-66)
4F i
The SNR is
SNR =
П signal
(18-67)
Many authors describe a single pixel signal-to-noise ratio (in the absence of dark
current) as
SNRpixei =
П photon
With multiplicative FPN, the FPN will be different for the (extended) target and
the background. nave is the average of the target and background number of
electrons. For small ATs, na„« ntadlgralml and им„,„„» nbacksmnd.
Note that the denominator is a "mixed" noise term. Each detector
produces a single datum for each frame. The shot noise is created within a single
pixel but the FPN is result of an ensemble of detectors. Many frames of data
provide shot noise. For low photon flux, the photon noise will dominate causing
the SNR to be approximately the square root of electron number. For high photon
fluxes, SNRpixel rolls off with uniformity and asymptotes to MU.
Figure 18-3 illustrates the (differential) SNR as a function of
nonuniformity. This figure provides guidance for what the desired nonuniformity
should be. With low nonuniformity, the back-of-the-envelope approximation
suggests that SNR « AT/NEDT. The deviation from the true value (SNR= 25.3)
and the approximation (SNR = 18,6) is caused by the nonlinear relationship
between the number of photons and AT (See Section 3.2., AT Concept).
Figure 18-3. Representative (differential) SNR as a function of
(uncorrected) nonuniformity for a typical PtSi sensor. TB=273
K, XT= 1 К and NEDT= 0.054 K.
Although the fixed noise pattern is labeled as fixed, it typically changes at
a very slow rate. 1/f noise produces a slowly varying output signal that, if
uncorrected, appears as additive fixed pattern noise. The amount of noise depends
on the 1/f characteristics and the time the data are collected after the last correction
has been made.28,29 If a system is corrected only once when it is turned on, the
noise may slowly increase with time. Here, the measured noise will be a function
of test time. 1/f noise may not be dominant in some arrays.
When the responsivities are nonlinear, the situation is more complicated.
The amount of fixed pattern noise depends upon the amount of nonlinearity that
exists between the detector responsivities. It is a mmimum at the calibration points
but can increase elsewhere.30,3’ Figure 18-3 illustrates BLIP limited NEDT and the
residual FPN after two-point correction. If correction were perfect for all inputs,
there would be no residual FPN. This nonlinear effect is very difficult to model.
Many authors present graphs stating that it represents the NEDT after
nonuniformity correction. Figure 18-4 illustrates that the detector nonlinearities
produce residual FPN. In addition, hardware correction circuitry limitations also
contribute to residual FPN. Therefore, any calculation that assumes a
nonuniformity correction should include a factor, say 1.5, above the design
correction. This new number is more representative of the actual situation and, in
part, includes the nonlinearity exhibited in Figure 18-4.
BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE (C)
Figure 18-4. Representative BLIP limited (classical) NEDT
and residual FPN with U = 0.25% and two-point correction.
The amount of residual FPN depends upon the nonlinearity in
detector responsivities, type of correction (i.e., one-point, two-
point, etc.), and desired nonuniformity. (After reference 28).
18.7. NEDT
In the SNR equation, photon noise is integrated over the detector solid
angle (usually 2л) whereas the signal is limited by the optical transmittance and
6sys. Noise appears in the electronics and is integrated over the electrical
frequencies of interest. The NEDT is the incremental temperature above the
background that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity. The signal is limited
optically from f to 22. For extended sources, the signal is not modified by the
system MTF.
18.7.1. SCANNING SYSTEMS
Solving the SNR for AT and calling is the NEDT provides
loo
4F2 Jp(/e)|tf(A)|2C,
ДТ = NEDTsys = —-----h----------------------. (] 8-69)
A t/г ,^Me(A,TB)
Ad I Toptics (”)
j oT
2i
The NEDT can be made arbitrarily small by reducing the NEBW. This
led to the concept of using a "standard” bandwidth. A single-pole low pass filter
was attached to the detector. The 3dB value was matched to the detector dwell
time. For scanning common module systems, the reference equivalent bandwidth
(Equation 18-8) is А/.с/=л/(4тг/). Rearranging terms, using the definition of D* and
NEBW, and assuming white noise, S(fc) = So , provides the classical NEDT
equation
HEDTdasslail =-----------------------S----. (18-70)
у A([ JD (>f) optics
Л.
and
NEDTsys
NEDTclassical .
(18-71)
Hait and Nemirovsky27 and Lloyd31 provide a variety of forms of the
classical NEDT to illustrate the dependency upon the detector-angular-subtense,
detector dwell time, etc.
18.7.2. STARING SYSTEMS
For staring arrays, the noise is considered white over the region of
interest. If the signal and noise are specified in electrons, then
л \ *svs /
NEDTstarins = j
Aatint K(A)--------
(18-72)
Long integration times improve the SNR or, equivalently, reduce the NEDT. For
staring arrays, system noise is also a function of nonuniformity (Figure 18-5). As
the background flux increases, multiplicative FPN also increases. Figure 18-6
illustrates the system noise for a representative PtSi sensor. Initially, the NEDT
decreases as TB increases. At higher temperatures, the FPN starts to dominate and
the overall noise increases. The integration can be any value with a maximum
value of the frame time. However, to avoid saturating the charge wells, the actual
integration time may be as short as 1 ms. Thus, the advantage of staring systems
(assumed long integration time) over scanning systems (small dwell time) may not
be as great as originally anticipated.
Figure 18-5. System noise as a function of nonuniformity for a
representative PtSi sensor. The background temperature is 273
K. The shape of the curve depends upon the background
temperature.
Figure 18-6. Representative system noise as a function of
background temperature. The PtSi nonuniformity is 0.0025
(0.25%). The shape of the curve depends upon the
nonuniformity selected.
18.7.3. BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE
Since the thermal derivative, ёМ/'дТ, depends on the background
temperature, the NEDT is also a function of background temperature (Figure 18-
7). Because the value of the thermal derivative decrease with temperature, the
NEDT increases with decreasing temperature. For MWIR systems, the NEDT
approximately doubles when the temperature reaches freezing. This increased
NEDT has a significant impact of range performance
For serial scan systems, TDI will reduce the noise by the square root of
the number of detector elements contributing to TDI
NEDTsys
NEDT
TDI
(18-73)
Here, it is assumed that the detector elements have identical noise characteristics
and responsivities.
BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE(K)
Figure 18-7. NEDT as a function of background temperature
for representative MWIR (InSb and PtSi) and LWIR
(HgCdTe) sensors. The functional form of NEDT versus TB
depends upon the magnitude of each noise source and the
spectral responsivity. For this figure, FPN is zero.
18.7.4. BOOST
Boost increases the noise equivalent bandwidth and, therefore,
increases the NEDT. Since the noise has increased, the SNR for large targets is
reduced. However, for a specific spatial frequency the SNR is
SNRIJ)^
NT MTF (J)
NEDT
(18-74)
If the boost circuit amplifies those spatial frequencies about /, then there appears
to be an improvement in the SNR. While the performance models (discussed in
Chapter 19) predict an increased range for specific targets, no data exits to
substantiate this improvement. Boost will cosmetically improve high contrast
imagery.
18.7.5. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE
The NEDT is a laboratory measure system sensitivity. The derivation
assumes that the signal is available over the entire spectral bandwidth. But this is
not true. The atmospheric transmittance modifies the signal. For sensitivity-
limited systems
Mtr
SNR ~ * atm-ave
NEDT
(18-75)
Generally, the NEDT is calculated over the full spectral response, but the
temperature differential at the entrance aperture is reduced by the spectral
atmospheric transmittance.
Some researchers32 created a modified NEDT that includes the
atmospheric transmittance. Elowever, this approach is inconvenient in that the
NEDT is a laboratory measure and should not be a variable depending upon
atmospheric conditions.
18.8. MWIR VERSUS LWIR
Based upon atmospheric transmittance, it was shown in Section 15.6.,
{MWIR versus LWIR) that for most environments the LWIR spectral region was
preferred. The MWIR region was preferred when the absolute humidity was very
high (e.g., a maritime environment). It was also stated that the system sensitivity
had to be sufficiently high (low NEDT) to exploit the specific spectral band.
However, the relative merits are functions of background temperature. The MWIR
NEDT is very sensitive to the background temperature.
Another reason for choosing the LWIR spectral region is that there is a
larger number of photons available. This is a mixed blessing for focal plane arrays
where fixed pattern noise is proportional to the number of photoelectrons. Since
nonuniformity is a multiplicative factor, FPN will be greater in the LWIR band
compared to the MWIR band. Figure 18-8 compares the theoretical NEDT for a
MWIR PtSi sensor to an LWIR HgCdTe sensor. LWIR systems require better
uniformity correction15 than equivalent PtSi systems.
For a 300-K background, there are approximately 1500 times more
photoelectrons generated by an LWIR HgCdTe detector compared to an MWIR
PtSi sensor with identical optical systems. This is due to the difference in the
photon flux and quantum efficiency. Thus, the LWIR systems need larger charge
wells or the integration time must be proportionally reduced.
Although staring arrays have the potential of using a full frame time, they
may, in practice, use a much shorter integration time. The stare time (integration
time) depends upon the charge well capacity and the detector quantum efficiency.
For low quantum efficiency detectors such as the Schottky barrier devices, the
stare time may be equal to a frame time. For high quantum efficiency detectors
such as InSb or HgCdTe, the stare time may only be a fraction of a frame time to
insure that the charge well does not saturate. Stare time may also be reduced to
minimize smearing caused by relative motion between the sensor and target.
Microscan also requires a reduced stare time.
The selection of MWIR or LWIR depends upon many factors. These
include background temperature, atmospheric transmittance, system spectral
responsivity, and noise sources within the system. The magnitude of the noise
depends upon the integration time, amount of nonuniformity, optical
transmittance, and cold shield efficiency. Which band is better? As both Johnson,32
and Findlay and Cutten33 said, It depends....
Figure 18-8. Comparison of PtSi (3 to 5.5 pm) and HgCdTe (8
to 12 pm) sensors as a function of nonuniformity. Hardware
constraints tend to limit correction to U = 0.0002. The shape
of the curves depends upon the background temperature,
spectral responsivities, and integration time.
18.9. NEI
As the source area approaches zero, the source becomes an ideal point
source. Geometric optics predicts that the image size also will approach zero.
However, diffraction and aberrations will limit the minimum image size. The
differential system output, А/лтл, depends on the relative size of the optical blur
diameter to the detector size. The ratio of detector area to the blur area is called the
point visibility factor (PVF), blur efficiency, or ensquared power (see Section
3.1.3., Point Source).
A common starting point in system design is to match the detector size to
the optical blur diameter. For a diffraction-limited optical system, the Airy disk
contains only 83.9% of the total energy. Therefore, a circular detector centered on
the Airy disk has a PVF of 0.839. The PVF approaches unity as the detector size
increases. However, system resolution is lost and the ability to precisely locate the
point source decreases. Figure 18-9 illustrates the PVF for a square detector
centered on the blur diameter.
Figure 18-9. Point visibility function as a function of detector
size (in units of 2f!D). A slight plateau exists when the
detector size is equal to the Airy disk size (2.442//D).
Aberrations may reduce the MTF. (From reference 34).
The PVF is subject to phasing effects.34 It is a maximum when the image
is centered on the detector and a minimum when the blur circle center is between
detectors. The minimum PVF depends upon the detector center-to-center spacing
and the fill factor. For nearly all systems the PVF must be included in all
calculations when the target is a point source. The PVF is a two-dimensional value
given by
fl1
PVF =—
max .
Ad
^TFoptics(fx9fy)MTFdetector(fx9fy)dfx dfy (18-76)
As As approaches zero, it is appropriate to represent Le(l,4T)As by the source
radiant intensity 7е(2/1Т)=Ze(2,Tr) -Ze(2,T/?) with units of watts-sr'-pm1. For point
sources at a distance Rx from the system
beWA° Ie(^’AT) PVFropltcs(A)^tm(A)dX . (18-77)
? Ri
The NEI is the irradiance (flux density) at the system aperture that
produces a signal-to-noise ratio of one
р(Л)|н(Л)|2</Л,
NEI = —V-------------------
Ao $Re(A)PVFropacs(A)dA
A
(18-78)
As a simplification, assume that the atmospheric transmittance has no spectral
features such that it can be represented as and that AJm,e is the spectrally
weighted average irradiance. Then
SNR-
R
ave atm-ave
NEI R2
(18-79)
No back-of-the-envelope approximation exits for estimating the detection range to
a point source. When the SNR is one, the simplest form of the range equation is
NEI =
у
ave atm-ave
R2
(18-80)
and this can only be solved iteratively.
18.10. IMAGE RECONSTRUCTION
In scanning systems, the system MTFs operate on a serial data stream.
For these systems, the NEDT is calculated from the horizontal MTFs. But image
reconstruction can modify both the signal and noise characteristics. The most
prevalent image reconstruction algorithm is line-to-line interpolation. Noise
reduction algorithms include recursive filters and median filters.
If N frames (or pixels) are averaged
NEDT^ =
NEDTsys
(18-81)
18.10.1. LINE-TO-LINE INTERPOLATION
Line-to-line interpolation is used to scale the number of infrared lines to
the monitor requirements. For example, EMUX systems employing 180 detectors
with 2:1 interlace, require the conversion of 360 infrared lines to 480 monitor
lines. The interpolation algorithm usually is designed with signal fidelity in mind.
However, interpolation also affects the noise.
Figure 18-10 illustrates a geometric scheme that expands three lines to
four (equivalently 360 to 480 lines). This method does not significantly degrade
image quality. However, the noise powers are modified. Let <r2, tr3, crA, (JB, <jc,
and (jv be the rms noise values for the three input lines and the four output lines,
respectively. The output noise variances are given in Table 18-1.
With this scheme, each line will have a different noise level and modeling
is difficult when the noise values vary. If the interpolation scheme averages N lines
and then replicates the lines, the NEDT is l/VTV smaller. While averaging reduces
noise, it also reduces the MTF and image quality suffers. The appropriate line-to-
line interpolation scheme is a balance between maintaining image quality and not
adversely affecting the noise characteristics.
Input
(360 Lines)
Output
(480 Lines)
Line 1
Line A = Line 1
Line 2
Line В =
1/4 (Line 1)+ 3/4 (Line 2)
Line C =
1/2 (Line 2)+ 1/2 (Line 3)
Line 3
Line D =
3/4 (Line 3)+ 1/4 (Line 4)
Line 4
Line E = Line 4
Figure 18-10. Line-to-line interpolation. Four lines are created
from three using a geometric approach.
Table 18-1
OUTPUT NOISE VARIANCES
OUTPUT LINE NUMBER OUTPUT NOISE VARIANCE
A 2 2
В 2 12^2 (5 » — (У i 4 (У 16 16
C 2 1 2 1 2 c = 4<T2+4<73
D 2 _ 9 2,1 2 <T £) —- СТ з H <T i 16 3 16 1
18.10.2. RECURSIVE and MEDIAN FILTERS
Figure 18-11 illustrates a recursive filter that can be used for noise
reduction. Here, the last frame of data is added to the current frame. For one pixel,
the output is
y„ = (1-К)х„_,+Ку„_1 , (18-82)
Figure 18-11. Recursive filter. As the feed back multiplier К
increases, more frames are integrated and the noise is reduced.
Increasing К adversely affects image fidelity when image
motion is present.
In the steady state,yn approachesyn^. Thenyn^xnA and the filter appears to have
little affect on the image intensity. However, the noise sources add in quadrature.
When steady state is reached
<t2 =(1-X)2O-2+jK2<t2
(18-83)
or
.2
У
1-Кл
1 + К y
(18-84)
The recursive filter simulates a filter that averages N frames where
1 + K
1-K
(18-85)
As К increases, the averaging effect increases. However, as К increases, the
previous frame is more heavily weighted and the ability to see image motion
decreases.
Median filters are useful for reduction of noise spikes (also called salt and
pepper noise). A median filter rank-orders the data and its output is the median
value of the data set. Median filters always use an odd number of inputs. The filter
preserves edges if the target is more than one-half the filter width. For example, if
a median filter operates on Nmeil pixels, the target must be at least (7V„Krf+l)/2 pixels
wide to preserve the image. Any target less than (Nmed+1 )/2 pixels wide will be
removed by the filter. Median filters are inappropriate for point source detection or
where preserving detail is important. For one-dimensional filters, the output noise
power is approximated36 by
2 _ 2 _ 67
& median \ '
Wmed+2) VJy
(18-86)
18.11. SAMPLING AND ALIASING
After a sampling process, the noise power spectral density is modified by
aliasing. The NPSD is defined only up to the Nyquist frequency. For/e < fne,
$ sampled (fe )
2 °°
\Hpost{fe )| ±f<+ °8'87)
n=0
where Hpre(f^ is all the electronic MTFs up to the sampler and Hpost(Q represents
the electronic MTFs after the sampler. Noise above the Nyquist frequency will be
aliased down to the baseband (where/e<fne).
The total noise is not affected by aliasing
sys
(18-88)
where Hsys(ff) = Hpre(ff)Hpost(ff). However, the NPSD has changed. Some of the
noise has been aliased to the base band.
18.12. REFERENCES
1. D. G. Crowe, P. R. Norton, T. Limperis, and J. Mudar, "Detectors," in Electro-Optical Components,
W. D. Rogatto, pp. 175-283. This is Volume 3 oiThe Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook,
J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
2. J. D. Vincent, Fundamentals of Infrared Detector Operation and Testing, John Wiley, New York
(1990).
3. E. L. Dereniak and D. G. Crowe, Optical Radiation Detectors, John Wiley, New York (1984).
4. A. Rogalski, Infrared Photon Detectors, SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1995).
5. E. L. Dereniak and G. D. Boreman, Infrared Detectors and Systems, John Wiley, New York (1996).
6. J. R. Janesick, T. Elliott, S. Collins, M. M. Blouke, and J. Freeman, "Scientific Charge-coupled
Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(8), pp. 692-714 (1987).
7. T. W. McCumin, L. C. Schooley, and G. R. Sims, "Charge-coupled Device Signal Processing
Models and Comparisons," Journal of Electronic Imaging, Vol. 2(2), pp. 100-107 (1994).
8. M. D. Nelson, J. F. Johnson, and T. S. Lomheim, "General Noise Process in Hybrid Infrared Focal
Plane Arrays," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1682-1700 (1991).
9. J. L. Vampola, "Readout Electronics for Infrared Sensors," in Electro-Optical Components, W. D.
Rogatto, pp. 285-342. This is Volume 3 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S.
Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
10. N. Bluzer and A. S. Jensen, "Current Readout on Infrared Detectors," Optical Engineering, Vol.
26(3), pp. 241-248(1987).
11. H. V. Kennedy, "Modeling Noise in Thermal Imaging Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems:
Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 66-77
(1993).
12. J. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night
Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," US Army Electronics
Command Report ECOM Report 7043, pg. 11, Ft. Monmouth NJ (1975).
13. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pg. 181, Plenum Press, New York (1975).
14. P. W. Pellegrini, "Range Calculations for Staring Schottky Barrier Sensors," Optical Engineering,
Vol. 28(12), pp. 1288-1293 (1989).
15. J. M. Mooney, F. D. Shepherd, W. S. Ewing, J. E. Murguia, and J. Silverman, "Responsivity
Nonuniformity Limited Performance of Infrared Staring Cameras," Optical Engineering, Vol. 28(11),
pp. 1151-1161 (1989).
16. J. M. Mooney, "Effect of Spatial Noise on the Minimum Resolvable Temperature of a Staring
Array," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(23), pp. 3324-3332, (1991).
17. L. J. Kozlowski, G. M. Williams, G. J. Sullivan, C. W. Farley, R. J. Anderson, J. Chen, D. T.
Cheung, W. E. Tennant, and R. E. DeWames, "LWIR 128 x 128 GaAs/AlGaAs Multiple Quantum
Well Hybrid Focal Plane Array," IEEE Transactions on Electron Devices, Vol. ED-38(5), pp. 1124-
1130(1991).
18. A. Zussman, B. F. Levine, and J. deJong, "Extended Wavelength X = 11-15 pm GaAs/AftGa^As
Quantum-well Infrared Photodetectors," Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 70(9), pp. 5101-5107 (1991).
19. B. F. Levine, A. Zussman, S. D. Gunapala, M. T. Asom. and W. S. Hobson, "Photoexcited Escape
Probability, Optical Gain, and Noise in Quantum Well Infrared Photodetectors," Journal of Applied
Physics, Vol. 72(9), pp 4429-4443 (1992).
20. A. Rogalski and K. Jozwikowski, "GaAs/AlGaAs Quantum Well Infrared Photoconductors versus
HgCdTe Photodiodes for Long-wavelength Infrared Applications," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(5),
pp. 1477-1484 (1994).
21. A. Rogalski, "New Trends in Infrared Detector Technology," Infrared Physics and Technology,
Vol. 35(1), pp 1-21 (1994).
22. A. Rogalski, "New Trends in Semiconductor Infrared Detectors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(5),
pp. 1395-1412(1994).
23. A. Campbell, С. T. Elliot, and A. M. White, "Optimization of SPRITE Detectors in Anamorphic
Imaging Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 27(2), pp. 125-133 (1987).
24. С. T. Elliot, D. Day, and D. J. Wilson, "An Integrating Detector for Serial Scan Thermal Imaging
Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 22(11), pp. 31-42 (1982).
25. A. Rogalski, Infrared Photon Detectors, page 589, SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1995).
26. E. L. Dereniak and G. D. Boreman, Infrared Detectors and Systems, page 401, John Wiley, New
York (1996).
27. Y. Hait and Y. Nemirovsky, "Comparison of NEDT Performance of Staring and Partial-scanning
Infrared Focal Plane Arrays," Infrared Physics, Vol. 29(6). pp. 971-984 (1989).
28. D. A. Scribner, M. R. Kruer, K. Sarkady, and J. C. Gridley, "Spatial Noise in Staring IR Focal
Plane Arrays," in Infrared Detector and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp.
56-63 (1988).
29. D. A. Scribner, K. Sarkady, M. R Kruer, and J. C. Gridley, "Test and Evaluation of Stability in IR
Staring Focal Plane Arrays After Nonuniformity Correction," in Test and Evaluation of Infrared
Detectors and Arrays, F. M. Hoke, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1108, pp. 255-264 (1984).
30. D L. Perry and E. L. Dereniak, "Linear Theory of Nonuniformity Correction in Infrared Staring
Sensors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(8), pp. 1854-1859 (1993).
31. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 168-182, Plenum Press, New York (1975).
32. R. B. Johnson, "Relative Merits of the 3 - 5 and 8 -12 pm Spectral Bands," in Recent Developments
and Applications of Infrared Analytical Instrumentation, H. A. Wills, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 917,
pp. 102-111 (1988).
33. G. A. Findlay and D. R. Cutten, "Comparison of Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 - 12 pm Infrared
Systems," Applied Optics, Vol. 28(23), pp. 5029-5037 (1989).
34. L. M. Beyer, S. H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Obscured Circular Pupils With
Off-Center Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991).
35. P. M. Narendra, "A Separable Median Filter for Image Noise Smoothing," IEEE Transactions on
Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMI-3(1), pp 20-29 (1981).
EXERCISES
1. Calculate the NEBW for a second order low-pass filter (Equation 6-52). Is there
a simple relationship for an nth-order low pass filter?
2. Plot Equation 18-29 and Equation 18-30 on the same graph for an LWIR
system. Let2/; = 11.5 pm and2c= 12.0 pm.
3. Compare the spectral responsivities (i.e., plot on the same graph) of an InSb
detector (Equation 18-29) and PtSi detector (Equation 18-31). Both detectors are
sensitive from 3 to 5.5 pm. Let /?/; = 0.8 for the InSb detector.
4. For an LWIR detector sensitive from 8 pm and 12 pm, calculate A500 (Equation
18-48).
5. For an LWIR detector sensitive from 8 pm and 10 pm, calculate A500 (Equation
18-48). Compare this answer with that obtained in Exercise 5. What can be said
about the sensitivity of A500 with respect to spectral responsivity.
6. Referring to Figure 18-7, if you were a seller, what temperature would you
select for NEDT measurements. If you were the buyer, what temperature would
select. Are these really different numbers?
7. In Figure 18-8, the integration time for both detectors is the same. However,
manufacturing difficulties limit the LWIR charge well capacity to 1/10 of the
MWIR system. These means that the LWIR integration time is 1/10 the MWIR
integration time. How does this affect the NEDT?
8. Rewrite the NEI equation (Equation 18-78) for a detector whose performance is
specified by D* (Equation 18-34).
9. An analyst recommends using a larger detector to increase the PVF (Figure 18-
9). Originally, the detector was equal to the blur diameter and now it is twice the
blur diameter. What effect does this have on the NEI? Use the equation derived in
Exercise 9.
10. Plot yn as a function of n (Equation 18-82) for К = 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, and 0.8.
Initially the input signal is zero and then abruptly jumps to one. Is there an
optimum value for KI
11. A median filter is used to reduce noise in a staring array that contains 1000x
1000 elements. The DAS is 0.1 mrad. If a target is 3 meters wide and the filter
operates on 5 pixels, what is the maximum range that the target can be perceived?
Do phasing effects change the answer?
19
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MODELS
CTF
SNRp=k---
In the 1950s, Shade predicted the resolution of photographic film and
television sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of
all models used today. In the 1970s, Resell and Willson applied2 Shade’s results
to thermal imaging systems and low light level televisions. Since then, most
modeling efforts have concentrated on infrared imaging systems. Ratches
provided a historical overview of the modeling activities at NVL. The same
modeling equations apply to all imaging systems. Different forms exist to
accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies (scanning
versus staring and visible versus thermal imaging systems).
For nearly all imaging systems, square waves (bar targets) are used for
system characterization. The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is
AI 1
------------------------------------------. (19-1)
{eye spatial filter} {eye temporal filter)
The system square wave response, the contrast transfer function, CTFsys ,
modifies the differential signal, AI. The input variable AZ is the intensity
difference between a target and its background and Av is a system specific
constant that depends upon the optical diameter, f-number, and quantum
efficiency.
Selecting a threshold value that is required to just perceive a target and
inverting Equation 19-1 provides a minimum detectable AI
(»•„)
M = к SNRth—-—-—{eye spatial filter) {eye temporal filter). (19-2)
CTFsys
For systems operating in the visible or near infrared, the minimum level is called
the minimum resolvable contrast (MRC). For systems operating in the MWIR
and LWIR, the minimum value is the minimum resolvable temperature (MRT).
The Air Force tri-bar target or a four-bar target is approximated by a
square wave of infinite extent. If the system is band-limited, then only the
fundamental of the square wave has sufficient amplitude to contribute to the
response (valid for high frequencies). The amplitude of the fundamental
355
frequency is 4/л times the square wave amplitude. The eye is sensitive to the
average value of the first harmonic and the average value of a half-cycle sine
wave is 2/л. Therefore, the conversion from a square wave (CTFsys) to a sinusoid
(MTFsys) requires a factor of 8/л2
д-2
AI = SNRth---------—— (eye spatial filter)(eye temporal filter). (19-3)
8 MTF
For thermal imaging systems k{if) becomes the NEDT. The eye
“filters” are also called the summary noise factors
MRT = SNRth
7? NEDT
8' MTFsys
(summary noise factors).
(19-4)
Since the MRT and MDT are proportional to the NEDT, they are
affected by the same parameters that modify the NEDT. Figure 19-1 illustrates
the MRT as a function of background temperature. The summary noise factors
employ the noise variances described by the three-dimensional noise model. The
NEDT is the random noise and it may vary spectrally. Implicit in the remaining
noise components is that the noise is white with no spectral features. Non-white
noise will affect the MRT and MDT in an unknown manner. Each noise element
has its own noise power spectral density.
BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE (K)
Figure 19-1. MRT as a function of background temperature.
Parameters that affect the NEDT will also affect the MRT in
the same manner.
The system noise may consist of many components and the eye may
integrate each component differently
MRT = SNRth
zr2 NEDT
~8~ MTFsys
(19-5)
The three-dimensional noise model quantifies each {if)Pi . The
component MTFs were described in Chapters 6 though 11. The NEDT was
given in Chapter 18, Sensitivity and Noise. The eye integration factors, Д, and
the remaining noise components are presented in this chapter.
Throughout the previous chapters, back-of-the-envelope
approximations were made about sensitivity and resolution. Resolution
considerations provide the target range as
„ target size
Range = —2---------
resolution
(19-6)
Using sensitivity limitations, the received signal-to-noise ratio is
SNR =
tr M
system noise
(19-7)
The MRC and MRT equations combine sensitivity and resolution with the eye's
response. Equation 19-6 is the resolution limit of the MRC or MRT equation.
Equation 19-7 does not include the eye's filtering capability. It is not a limit of
the MRT or MRC equations.
Both the MRC and MRT models are so-called static models in that the
target is stationary. The target is assumed to be in the center of the field-of-view
and no search is required (or at least the observer knows where to look). The
observer has an unlimited amount for target discrimination. As with most
models, the system is assumed to be linear-shift-invariant with no image
enhancement algorithms present.
19.1. THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE MODEL
The three-dimensional noise model4 provides the basic framework for
analyzing the various noise sources. The noise is divided into a set of eight
components that relate temporal and spatial noise to a three-dimensional
coordinate system (Figure 19-2). This approach allows full characterization of
all noise sources including random noise, fixed pattern noise, streaks, rain, 1/f
noise, and any other artifact that may have been introduced. Analyzing the noise
in this manner has the advantage of simplifying the understanding of a complex
phenomenon by breaking it down into a manageable set of components. The
method simplifies the incorporation of complex noise factors into model
formulations. The three-dimensional noise model was developed to describe the
noise in thermal imaging systems. The methodology can be applied to all
imaging systems.
Figure 19-2. Three-dimensional noise model coordinate
system illustrating data set NTVH.
The T-dimension is the temporal dimension representing the framing
sequence. The other two dimensions provide spatial information. However,
depending upon the imaging system design, the horizontal dimension may
represent time for a scanning system or may represent space for a staring
system. For a staring array, nt and n indicate detector locations. For parallel
scanning systems, tn indicates detector locations and n is the digitized analog
signal, tn is the number of raster lines and n is the digitized analog signal for
serial scanning systems.
Table 19-1 groups the noise components into temporal and spatial
components. The subscripts describe the noise "direction." oTVH represents noise
calculated from the three-dimensional data set gvh is the rms noise
value after averaging in the T-direction. Its data set contains tn*n elements. And
so on.
Table 19-1
THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE DESCRIPTORS
Noise Pixel Row Column Frame
Component Variations Variations Variations Variations
TEMPORAL &TVH GTV GTH ffJ1
SPATIAL &VH Gy S
Table 19-2 lists seven noise components and some possible
contributors to the components for serial scanning, parallel scanning, and staring
array imaging systems. For mathematical completeness, the noise model has
eight components with the eighth being the global average value, 5. Depending
upon the system design and operation, any one of these noise components could
dominate. The origin of these components is significantly different and the
existence and manifestation depend upon the specific design of the imaging
system. Not all of the components may be present in every imaging system.
Systems sensitive to visible radiation may have different components than those
sensitive to infrared energy. Certain noise sources such as microphonics are
more difficult to describe since they may appear in variety of forms. "Readout
noise" is a catchall phrase for possible staring array artifacts. Depending upon
the system design and operation, the same noise source may appear in different
noise components.
Assuming the noises are independent, the total system noise is
& sys
V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
& TVH + & TH + & TV + & VH + & H + c
(19-8)
With only random noise, = (rTf/7J where cr7(7/ is the NEDT (See Equation 18-
69 or Equation 18-72). Spatial noise is incorporated though , oy, and oH.
Currently, only oTVH is predicted (the NEDT) and the remaining noise
components must be determined from measurements or estimates. The global
average, S, is the average intensity level. crr is considered negligible compared
to oTVH and therefore is also omitted from the MRT and MDT predictions.
Figures 19-3 through 19-5, generated by the System Image Analyzer (SIA)
software,5 illustrate some of these noise sources. Figure 19-5 illustrates how uTV
or affects the visibility of horizontal bars (as measured by the vertical MRT).
360 Electro-optical imaging system performance
Table 19-2
SEVEN NOISE COMPONENTS OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE MODEL
3-D NOISE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION SERIAL SCAN PARALLEL SCAN STARING ARRAY
°TVH Random 3-D noise Random and 1/f noise Random and 1/f noise Random
°VH Spatial noise that does not change from frame-to-frame - - FPN
°TH Variations in column averages that change from frame-to- frame (rain) Microphonics Microphonics Readout noise
°'TV Variations in row averages that change from frame-to-frame (streaking) 1/f noise Transients, flashing detectors, 1/f noise Readout noise
Variations in row averages that are fixed in time (horizontal lines or bands) Line-to-line interpolation Detector gain/level variations, line-to- line interpolation Readout noise, line-to-line interpolation
Variations in column averages that are fixed in time (vertical lines) Shading Shading Readout noise
O' j- Frame-to-frame intensity variations (flicker) Frame processing Frame processing Frame processing
Figure 19-3. Ideal image with ctsys = 0. Created by the SIA.5
Figure 19-4. Image with noise. Both fixed pattern noise and
random noise appear similar in a single frame. Random noise
changes from frame-to-frame whereas fixed pattern noise does
not. Both scanning systems and staring systems have random
noise. Only staring systems have two-dimensional FPN.
Figure 19-5. Image with dominant horizontal banding (high
vTV or high of). Scanning systems often exhibit this type of
noise.
19.2. FLIR92
The 1975 NVL model was developed for predicting6 the performance
of U.S. Army thermal imaging systems. It satisfied the Army's need and it
adequately predicts the MRT at mid-range spatial frequencies. This corresponds
to detecting modest sized targets at modest ranges. The model was essentially
one-dimensional and did not incorporate sampling effects and noise sources
other than random noise. To overcome these deficiencies, NVESD created
FLIR90 that was subsequently updated7 to FLIR92.
The 1975 NVL model did not adequately predict the laboratory
measured MRT values at low or high spatial frequencies. The differences
between the measured and the predicted values were attributed to tremendous
variability in observers, ill-defined data analysis methodology, and
inappropriate modeling of the eye. Test methodology has since been
standardized and understanding observer variability is a key component of the
data analysis technique.8
Part of the eye modeling difficulty has been overcome by incorporating
a MTFeye of unity (Equation 6-75) in FLIR92. This eye model does not include
the eye inhibitory process but partially accounts for head movement when
making measurements. Although models with alternate eye MTFs predict the
laboratory MRT better than the 1975 NVL model, there are still some
differences.
In spite of these discrepancies, the 1975 NVL and FLIR92 models are
the main analytic tools for deriving system requirements and predicting
performance. They are used for comparative analysis and are reportedly9
accurate to ± 20% in range predictions for recognition under favorable target
and atmospheric conditions. This is rather remarkable when considering the
difficulty in estimating the target area-weighted AT and the atmospheric
transmittance.
The 1975 NVL model was developed for serial and parallel-scan
thermal imaging systems that existed in the 1970s. These systems typically had
a fixed relationship between the horizontal and vertical resolution of about 2:1.
As such it was adequate to specify a horizontal MRT since its relationship with
the vertical MRT rarely changed.
Since the 1975 NVL model did not include sampling effects, some
users modified the computer code by incorporating a sample-scene phase MTF,
digital filter MTFs and post-reconstruction filters. With the advent of staring
arrays, the vertical to horizontal resolution changed and the model had to be
updated.
In FLIR92, treatment of sampling effects is limited to restricting MRT
predictions to sub-Nyquist frequencies. The ability for observers to interpret
information above Nyquist frequency had not been completely quantified in
1992. Since then, two new models have emerged: NVTherm and TRM3
(discussed in Sections 19.3. and 19.4., respectively).
The eye/brain system is probably the most difficult system to model.
Two different models exist: the matched filter and the synchronous integrator
model. The 1975 NVL model uses the matched filter model where it is assumed
that the eye maximizes the SNR. Here, the eye spatial frequency response has
the same spatial frequency dependence as the target. This is not a filter in the
usual sense since the signal and noise are not ’’filtered” by them. Rather, visual
psychophysical data suggest that the eye acts as if it were a filter that can be
described mathematically by a filter function. With the synchronous integrator
model, the eye integrates over an angular region defined by the target edges and
it is used in FLIR92.
This change in eye models is not unreasonable. Scott and D'Agostino
state10 The most frequently encountered methods... describe the eye/brain spatial
integration using either a matched filter or a synchronous integrator model...
they yield virtually identical MRTD predictions ... any potential difference ...
will be lost in the inherent error of the MRTD measurements. For these reasons,
and because ... a synchronous integrator is somewhat simpler ..., FLIR92 has
been written as a synchronous integrator model.
The 1975 NVL model used the reference bandwidth, for both the
NEDT and MRT calculations. Many users modified this calculation to include
the entire noise spectrum. FLIR92 no longer relies on a reference bandwidth and
calculates the full temporal noise. Both the 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 model
assume that only temporal noise contributes to the NEDT. Spatial noise is
incorporated into the MRT prediction via the summary noise factors.
Although FLIR92 is called two-dimensional, it is a two-directional
model. That is, the threshold is predicted along two orthogonal axes, taken as
the vertical and horizontal directions. Resolution in any other direction (e.g.,
45°) is not used. When used with the Johnson criteria, FLIR92 is probably better
at predicting the range for rectangular objects whose edges are aligned with the
thermal imaging system axes. The model is probably less accurate for non-
rectangular objects or high aspect ratio targets (e.g., airplanes, bridges, and ships
with significant superstructure).
The MRT and MDT derivations can be found in the literature.9'14 MRT
and MDT are not absolute values but are perceivable temperature differentials
relative to a given background. Sometimes they are called the minimum
resolvable temperature difference (MRTD) and minimum detectable
temperature difference (MDTD). The term difference or differential are often
omitted since it is understood that it is a differential measurement.
19.2.1. FLIR92 MODEL
FLIR92 is built upon the framework of the 1975 NVL model. Both the
three-dimensional noise model and the FLIR92 are in symmetrical formats. This
provides a mathematical format that is easier to understand than the 1975 NVL
model. The horizontal and vertical MRTs are
CT
MRTH(fx) = SNRth--------------------KH(JX) (19-9)
8 MTF„(fx) H x
and
CT MRTV (fv) = SNRtl 2^ Ky (fv). y 8 MTFy(fy) v Jy (19-10)
These equations are similar in form to FLIR92 ARG-44. The summary noise
factors, and Kf/fy combine the three-dimensional noise model
components with the eye's spatial and temporal integration capabilities,
is the product of all the horizontal MTFs (previously called MTF s).
Similarly MTFfff) is the product of all the vertical MTFs (previously celled
MTFy). The subscripts are consistent with FLIR92 nomenclature. The temporal
random noise (FLIR92 ARG-31) as
aTVH = NEDTsys = NEDTclassica, -^=. ^fref (19-11)
The MDT is related to the target area, AT, with MTFV(/J,) and MTFH(£)
embedded in Qv and QH, respectively
MDT(AT) = SNRa KmT AT QH Q, (19-12)
This equation is similar to FLIR92 ARG-55. The variables Qv and QH are
00 Qh = J [mtfh (J)Hh (/)]2 df (19-13)
—<x>
and
co Qv= J [MTFy(f)Hy)ftf df, — CO (19-14)
where Ни and Hv are the Fourier transforms of the target size. If the target is a
square with a side equal to w,.
Hv = Hv = sinc(w /) . (19-15)
The square of the summary noise factors are
Кгн = ET Ev EH + ^-Ev E„ +^P~ET EH +-^-EH (19-16)
^ТУН аТУН аТУН
and
_2 2 2
= ET Ev EH +-^-Ev EH + ~p^ET Ev + Ev. (19-17)
аТУН аТУН аТУН
Since the MDT is independent of target orientation, the square of its summary
noise factor is
2 2
E'mdt - Et Ev EH + —EE— Ev EH + —~— et Eh
(19-18)
2 2 2 v 7
, v t ° ТУ r F °y ,
4---- ——EH 4----- ET Ly 4 - tv .
СГтУН аТУН аТУН
The above equations are similar to FLIR92 ARG-41, ARG-42, and ARG-43.
The variables ЕТ,ЕИ, and Evrepresent the temporal, horizontal spatial
and vertical spatial integration afforded by the eye/brain, respectively, when
viewing standard targets. As indicated by FLIR92 ARG-36, ARG-37, and ARG-
38, they are
ET -
aT
R^y Lf
(19-19)
£ (y)=^H--
(19-20)
and
^(/) =
av
Ry Lv(f)'
(19-21)
where aT, aH, and av are sample correlation factors that relate the dependency
of one sample on the next. Time samples are independent so aT = 1. The
variables RT, RH, and Ry are the time, horizontal and vertical sampling rates
respectively. The frame rate is Fr = RT (units of 1/s). The variables RH and Ry
have units of samples/mrad and LT (which is the eye integration time) has units
of seconds. The remaining variables, Lj/f) and Ly\f), have units of cycles/mrad.
The model assumes that the eye temporally integrates perfectly and
continuously over the eye integration time. The noise is considered uncorrelated
from frame-to-frame so that it adds in quadrature. When the information update
rate Fr is high enough, and if there is signal correlation between adjacent
frames,
ET=f-T- (19-22)
* r le
For staring arrays, the RH and Rv are equal to the inverse of the detector
center-to-center spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions: RH= 1/Cssh and
Ry = 1/CSSV. For staring arrays, ay = 1 and aH = 1.
For scanning arrays, the effective sampling rate depends upon the
effective detector center-to-center spacing after interlace and ay = 1. In the scan
direction the effective sample rate is Teff. The variable aH is arbitrarily selected
to be 2 so that Equation 19-19 can be used
6Z rjr
^=2r<-
KH
(19-23)
For a system with an ideal bandwidth, the NEBW (Equation 18-3) is defined as
Sfe = 1/2 Teff. The scan velocity converts electrical frequency to spatial frequency
so that
ff H _ _L_
h &fe '
(19-24)
A 7:1 aspect ratio bar (Taspect = 7) is used to measure the MRT. The bar
is oriented vertically for horizontal measurements and horizontally for vertical
measurements. Thus, the aspect ratio appears in different equations.
For scanning systems, the noise is assumed to be generated within the
detector and it may have some spectral features with an NPSD of S(f). The noise
appears in the horizontal direction only. For staring arrays, the noise is assumed
to be white [Л'(/)= 1]. The noise filters modify the noise spectrum. These are the
filters occur after the insertion of noise. Since noise is assumed to originate in
the detector, MTFoptics, MTFmotion, and MTFdetector are not part of noise filters.
Chapters 6 through 11 provide the remaining MTFs for the components of the
noise filters. and are the horizontal and vertical noise filters
respectively.
For horizontal MRT, the bar is oriented vertically and the aspect ratio
appears in the vertical summary noise factors. The summary noise factors for
frequency /are
co
(19-25)
and
1 Sinc1{Taspec‘ f}df. (19-26)
< fs >
If HFI_V is near unity over the spatial frequencies of interest [i.e., HNr_v.(f)« 1
when/ <2f!TaspeJ, then
(19-27)
* aspect
For the vertical MRT, the aspect ratio is in the horizontal summary noise factors
00 (T
= sine2 aspec‘J df (19-28)
"я о V 2
and
«_ ( f \
£'r-H/) = v1| \HNF-Hm\2 Sine2 f— df.
Kv о V^JsJ
(19-29)
If is near unity over the spatial frequencies of interest [i.e., HFF_ff)« 1
when /<2/J, then
(19-30)
19.2.2. SNRth and tE
In the 1975 NVL model documentation it states15, .... unfortunately,
universal values for these constants do not exist. The values recommended at
this time are SNRth = 2.25 and te = .2. These values were "hardwired" into the
computer code. These values are treated as proportionality constants that were
adjusted so that laboratory data matches predicted values.
In the FLIR92 documentation, it states16 SNRth and the eye integration
time, te, are most often the model parameters used to "tune” an MRTD
prediction to a set of measurements. FLIR92 documentation continues The
luminances associated with about a 0.1 second eye integration time agree well
with the display experiments conducted in 1988 ... (darkened room and optimal
viewing) .... In higher ambient light levels conditions, such as may be
encountered with fielded systems, greater display luminances can be expected
and thus a faster eye integration time may be appropriate ... NVESD
recommends setting SNRth equal to 2.5 ... Though psychophysical data shows
that SNR th is a function of target frequency, a value of 2.5 represents a
reasonable average. With FLIR92, these are default values that can be changed
by the user.
The eye integration time is somewhat nebulous and its value depends
upon the specific task on hand and depends upon the light level. FLIR92
recommends changing te according to the light level available (Figure 19-6).
DISPLAY LUMINANCE (mL)
Figure 19-6. Eye integration values as a function of light level.
FLIR92 documentation recommends using te = 0.1 sec for
laboratory MRT predictions.
While many arguments exist on selecting the "correct” values, they are
simply proportionality constants. Both SNRth and te have a range of acceptable
values. Since the eye model changed from the 1975 NVL model to FLIR92, it is
expected that these "constants" would also change. No matter the value selected
for te , consistency throughout the model must be maintained. The eye
integration time is also used in motional MTFs.
A word of clarification. SNRth is approximately the value that the
eye/brain interprets the image to be at threshold detection. It includes, in part,
both temporal and spatial integration effects. It is neither the signal-to-noise
ratio of the video signal nor the SNR of the luminance on the display.
Depending upon the noise characteristics and the target characteristics, the eye
can detect17 signals whose video SNR is as low as 0.05. The eye/brain perceives
this SNR to be about 2.25.
19.2.3. HEAD MOVEMENT
By allowing the observer to adjust his viewing distance to the display,
he apparently optimizes several interrelated detection criteria. These include
striving for equal clarity of all four bars and maximizing the perceived signal-to-
noise ratio. This results apparently in an equal detection capability for all target
spatial frequencies such that MTFeye approaches18 a constant (taken as unity).
FLIR92 has two eye models: the non-limiting case where MTFeye = 1 (Equation
6-75) and the traditional Komfeld-Lawson eye model (Equation 6-64).
Thus, two different MRTs are possible: one with head movement and
one without. The head movement case is appropriate for predicting the
laboratory MRT since the observer is not usually constrained in any way. For
range predictions, however, the system analyst must understand the application.
For those systems mounted on aircraft, the observer (the pilot) is typically
strapped in a seat with restricted head movement. The Komfeld-Lawson eye
model is appropriate for many field applications.
The ability to discern targets embedded in noise depends upon the
visual angle subtended by the noise and target. As the noise spatial components
increase in frequency, it becomes more difficult to perceive the noise since the
eye MTF is decreasing. This means that as the distance to the display increases,
it becomes more difficult to perceive the noise and the image will eventually
appear noise-free. While small targets are not visible at these long distances, a
noise-free display will appear cosmetically pleasing. The identical effect occurs
as the display size decreases. Small displays create small visual angles (high
spatial frequencies). The small displays on consumer camcorders present a good
image even though the display resolution is poor. Here, the visual angle
associated with the display resolution is below the eye’s resolution. Simply
stated, small displays always appear to present excellent imagery.
The MRT model was developed for a system that is noise limited and
that the observer can fully discern the noise. This is only true over a limited
viewing distance. At long distances, the pixel angular subtense will be less that
what the eye can resolve. Therefore, at long distances, high frequency noise will
not be perceived. Since the MRT is proportional to the perceived noise, the
MRT approaches zero as the distance increases.19 At long distances, the image is
contrary to that required by the MRT test: detection of targets embedded in
noise.
19.2.4.1975 NVL MODEL
Systems with different noise sources will have different noise factors
and different MRTs and different MDTs. When there is only random noise, the
MRTs reduce to a form similar to the 1975 NVL model
Cf l-----------------
MRTH (fx ) = SNRU, — М-А-Я (19-31)
H \J x *
and
2
MRTV (f ) = SNRth ---- . (19-32)
y 8 MTFv{fyy
For MRTH, the summary noise factors are described by Equations 19-18, 19-24
and 19-26 (or 19-27). For MTFV, the summary noise factors are described by
Equations 19-19, 19-28, and 19-29 (or 19-30). When using the 1975 NVL
model for range predictions, only the horizontal MRT is used.
19.2.5 . SCANNING SYSTEMS (DEFAULT VALUES)
For scanning systems, the most prevalent noise sources are temporal
noise (vTVH\ temporal row noise (<>7r), and fixed row noise (<rK). Table 19-3 lists
the FLIR92 recommended values. Common module systems are considered
’’low” noise systems in the sense that <yTV is small compared to gtvh. Scanning
arrays, that use internal temperature references for gain and level balancing, are
considered ’’moderate" noise systems. Although scanning arrays with TDI
detectors have a lower oTVH than common module systems, the relative amount
of row noise is higher. The FLIR92 documentation recommends using the
"moderate" level noise case for second generation scanning systems. These are
systems with TDI detectors. As of this writing, the most popular detector array
consists of 480*4-TDI elements. Future systems probably will be considered
"low" noise systems.
Table 19-3
FLIR92 DEFAULT VALUES FOR SCANNING SYSTEMS
RELATIVE NOISE LOW NOISE MODERATE NOISE HIGH NOISE
GVH^GTVH 0 0 0
GTV! 6 TVH 0.25 0.75 1.0
of oTVH 0.25 0.75 1.0
о TV! a TVH 0 0 0
Gh/OTvh 0 0 0
For "low” noise scanning systems the default MRTs are
jr- 2 0- ------------
MRTH(fx) = SNRth ——П™- -^ЁтЕЕнЁн^н (19’33)
8 MTFH(fx)
and
MRTV = SNR,h
2
&TVH
8 MTFv(fy)
(19-34)
Because of the added noise, the vertical MRT will be poorer (have higher
values) than the horizontal MRT (see Figure 19-5).
19.2.6 . STARING SYSTEMS (DEFAULT VALUES)
For staring arrays, the next most important noise source is Оун. Table
19-4 lists the FLIR92 default value for staring arrays. The default MRTs
become
MRT„(fx)=SNRth
71 °~TVH
8 MTFH(fx)
(19-35)
and
MRTv{fy)=SNRth
2
r &TVH
8 MTFyfJy)
Table 19-4
FLIR92 DEFAULT VALUES for
STARING SYSTEMS
RELATIVE NOISE DEFAULT VALUE
(ГуН^ТУН 0.40
GTl ’/oTyH 0
О J GТУН 0
GT^GTVH 0
GWGTVH 0
19.2.7 . NONUNIFORMITY VERSUS gvh/<ttvh
In Section 18.2.3., Fixed Pattern Noise, a staring array NEDT was
specified as a function of the fixed pattern ratio or nonuniformity, U. To
minimize hardware complexity, the highest nonuniformity should be selected
that does not adversely affect the NEDT. This occurs by selecting a
nonuniformity value just before the knee in the NEDT curve (Figure 18-7).
Since the MRT depends upon вун/ятун, it is desirable to relate U to
<WaTVH • In lhe absence of dark current and mux noise, a staring array system
noise is
sys ~ k(nsys ) ~ кphoton ‘n photon )
'_____________ ___________ (19-37)
— p/toton у 1 + nphoton^
When only random and fixed pattern noise is present, the system noise is also
& sys A Since cTVH = ktnplM„, noise component by 1 1 o'2 1сгтун+аун ~ атун J1+ 2 * (19-38) \ ^TVII the nonuniformity is related to the three-dimensional 2 ™ =nplMonU2. (19-39) &TVH
Figure 19-7 is identical with Figure 18-8 with the FLIR92 default values added
(<гга/<ггия=0.4). The default value occurs at the typical design point of selecting
the largest nonuniformity without adversely affecting the NEDT.
Figure 19-7. Representative NEDTs as a function of
nonuniformity for two different detectors. The FLIR92 default
value has been added (squares). For the PtSi sensor, the
default value occurs when U = 0.0003. For the HgCdTe
sensor, the default value occurs when U = 7.6* 1 O'6. See Figure
18-7 for details.
With a linear system model, there is no limit on the number of
photoelectrons that can be collected. Real hardware performance is limited by
the charge well capacity. For a worst case situation, the charge well capacity
should be used for nphoton . This defines U or <7ГЯ/<77ГЯ in Equation 19-39. The
FLIR92 default value Ovh^tvh = 0.4 represents an optimally designed staring
array system where the FPN is sufficiently low that it does not affect the NEDT
measurement. Although mathematically the NEDT has not changed, FPN can be
perceived due to the eye/brain temporal integration of random noise.
19.2.8 . TWO-DIMENSIONAL MRT
Taking the geometric average of the horizontal and vertical MRTs
creates the two-dimensional MRT (Figure 19-8)
Each component MRT is weighted with respect to the frequency axis. In this
manner, the two-dimensional MRT is forced to asymptote to the mean values of
the vertical and horizontal cutoff frequencies. The two-dimensional MRT is a
mathematical construct that is used for range performance predictions. It cannot
be measured since f2D does not exist.
Figure 19-8. The two-dimensional MRT is mathematically
created from the horizontal and vertical MRTs. It is really a
two-directional MRT.
19.3. NVTHERM
FLIR92 only calculates the MTF and hence the MRT up to the Nyquist
frequency (Figure 19-9). This limit originally appeared reasonable. Any spatial
frequency above Nyquist frequency is aliased to a lower frequency. Detail (high
spatial frequencies) will be distorted suggesting that precise features are no
longer discernible. The Nyquist frequency limit artificially limited range
performance: All systems with the same pixel-angular-subtense provided the
same range performance.
Sampling theory was developed for auditory communications where
frequency preservation is critical. While the ear is a frequency detector, the eye
relies heavily on intensity variations. High frequency signals do not disappear as
suggested by Figure 19-9. They are aliased. With real targets, aliased
frequencies are manifested as shifting of edges and line width variations. These
shifts or variations are only one pixel wide (actually one sample wide). Recent
experiments (see Section 14.5., MTF Squeeze) demonstrated that aliased signals
provide useful information.
Figure 19-9. FLIR92 limits the MRT to the Nyquist
frequency. Two significantly different systems can have the
same resolution and range performance. This limitation is
further discussed in Section 21.1.5., Sampling Effects.
In 1999, NVTherm was introduced.20 This model follows the
methodology used in FLIR92 with two exceptions. It includes the MTF squeeze
and has a new eye model. NVTherm does not limit the MRT to the Nyquist
frequency: the squeeze degrades the MTF to account for sampling artifacts. The
squeeze is dependent upon the level of discrimination applied to target
acquisition.
The squeeze factor may be different in the horizontal and vertical
directions. The one-dimensional squeeze was illustrated in Figure 14-1. For
recognition, the two-dimensional squeeze is
flD—recognition /(jC 0.32 SR~X )(1 - 0.32 )Р7у , (19-41)
and for identification,
fiD-lD=pi-2SXoM
-of-band-x)(1-25Л„„,
-of -band —y )fxfy (19-42)
If the aliased signals are the same in both directions, then
and
flD-ID 1 SR out-of-band ~f2D *
(19-44)
The Kornfeld-Lawson eye model is adequate over a limited range (used
in FLIR92). NVTherm uses an eye model that accounts for scene brightness,
pupil size, and eye tremor. (Equations 6-67 through 6-74). With the new eye
model, NVTherm (without the squeeze) provides more pessimistic (higher)
MRT values than FLIR92. This translates into shorter recognition and
identification ranges.
In FLIR92, the eye was allowed to integrate over the entire spatial
extent of the target without limit. NVTherm limits the eye’s spatial resolution to
4 mrad. This follows the eye's detection mechanism where large targets are
discerned by edge detection. This limitation permits better agreement between
the predicted and measured MRTs at low spatial frequencies.
19.4. TRM3
The Thermal Range Model 321 (TRM3) is similar to NVTherm in that
it predicts the MRT past the Nyquist frequency. It uses the Average Modulation
Optimum Phase (AMOP) function that describes the modulation of a bar target
when its phase has been optimized. The AMOP replaces the MRT in the MRT
equations. With this replacement, the resultant is called22 the minimum
temperature difference perceived (MTDP). It is conceptually the same as the
squeezed MTF in NVTherm. TRM3 uses 4-bar targets to determine the AMOP
and NVTherm used actual military targets to determine the squeeze factor.
There is no analytical function for the AMOP. It is a function of the
thermal imaging system's spatial response and is unique to each system. The
AMOP is determined by TRM3 and is higher than the system MTF without
sampling. This would suggest that the MTDP is significantly higher than the
MRT in FLIR92 and NVTherm. This is not so. The conversion from the CTF to
the MTF introduced а л/4 factor. This factor is already included within the
AMOP. Therefore
______ 71____ _ NEDT ________
MTDP = — SNRth----------IEDT . (19-45)
2 AMOP
The MTDP is slightly lower than the MRT and therefore provides slightly better
range performance. The inhomogeneity equivalent temperature difference (IEDT)
is the eye filter function. For staring arrays it is identical to FLIR92. For scanning
arrays, the eye filters are somewhat different.
19.5. STADIUM FLIR
FLIR92, NVTherm, and TRM3 only provide a single MTF and MRT
curve for each input and one NEDT. These models do not provide any inference
as to the statistical reliability of the results. It is clear that the nominal values
initially selected are usually the expected average values. This means that 50%
of the manufactured systems will have MTFs, NEDTs, and MRTs with lower
values and 50% will have values higher. While lower values are desirable, the
higher values could represent failed specifications if the nominal values were
used as a specification. As a result, most specifications are some arbitrary
multiple of the calculated nominal value.
By tolerancing each input separately, the analyst determines which
subsystem has the greatest influence on the MTF, NEDT, and MRT. The
specifications of that subsystem are reviewed. If cost effective, then the
specifications are tightened. Similarly, if the tolerancing on a subsystem shows
little effect on the MRT, then its specifications can be loosened and this implies
reduced cost.
In 1995, Kennedy23 described a Monte Carlo method that allowed
tolerancing of components. The method created a shell around FLIR92. Each
input is described by its mean and standard deviation. The program then
performed a Monte Carlo simulation by selecting random values of the data set.
The program output is list of cumulative probabilities ranging from the 50%
Figure 19-10. Various MRT percentiles. Thus manufacturing
variations (tolerancing) lead to realistic specifications, the
specification probably be greater than the +3o level.
If the standard deviation is large, the range of values may include
negative quantities: a physically unrealizable situation. Kennedy simply limited
these values to zero. Changes in one variable can affect others. For example, a
change in the focal length affects the detector-angular-subtense. For scanning
systems, a variation in the scan velocity results in a variation in the scaling of
electrical frequency into object space frequency. Since the peak D* is a function
of the detector size, it changes as the detector sizes changes.
The difficulty with this approach is that standard deviation may not be
available. For example, most detector specifications simply state that the peak
D* should be greater than a particular value. The manufacturer measures the
detectors and sends only selected detectors. While the lot D* may be normally
distributed, the delivered detectors will have a truncated distribution that is
clipped at the specification. Selecting a mean and standard deviation for D*
represents a challenge to the analyst.
The methods proposed by Kennedy were commercialized into
STADIUM FLIR.24 As a Windows™-based program, STADIUM FLIR offers
user-friendly pull-down windows to enter all the parameters required by
FLIR92. It plots numerous FLIR92 outputs such as the noise summary factors,
ET, Eh, and Ev (see Equations 19-19 through 19-21), and MTFPRE and MTFP0ST
(see Tables 14-1 and 14-2). STADIUM FLIR is an excellent tool for system
trade-off analyses. It aids in the determination of a nominal value for each
FLIR92 input. For example, it can provide the MTF (at a selected spatial
frequency) as a function of spectral cut-on (Figure 19-11). Recall that MTF0PTICS
is a function of the average wavelength (see Equation 6-5 through 6-8). Here,
the minimum and maximum values of a parameter are selected along with a step
size. Selecting appropriate nominal values (Further discussed in Chapter 21.,
Range Predictions), maximizes detection, recognition, and identification ranges.
Figure 19-11. MTF as a function of cut-on wavelength
19.6. MINIMUM RESOLVABLE CONTRAST
The basic equation (Equation 19-1) can be used to calculate the
minimum resolvable contrast. The image contrast, as defined in visual
psychophysical literature, is
IВ
(19-46)
Inserting the contrast into Equation 19-1 provides
CTF IBC 1
SNR=k'-----------------------------------------------. (19-47)
(in) (eye spatial filter) (eye temporal filter)
Assuming a required threshold and solving for C provides the MRC
MRC = SNRth
л2
T MTFsys IB
/. 2\
\ л /
A + '" + T~l\^n
V1 /
(19-48)
The average shot noise variance in a photoconductive detector per unit
bandwidth is
7 2
1 PC-shot
IDC •
(19-49)
For photoconductive devices, it is convenient to represent the DC current as an
average of the currents produced by the target and the background
(^PC-shot ) - q Iave &f - 4 q T —
(19-50)
Using the definition of contrast,
7 2
1 PC-shot
\] = 2q{2 +C)lB .
(19-51)
Inserting the shot noise term in Equation 19-48 provides
MRC = SNRth
r2 -^2(2 +MRC)
8 MTF^ IB
The three-dimensional noise model can be applied to all imaging systems.
However, the MRC was developed for systems that had only random noise
components. Following the 1975 NVL model format (Equations 19-31 and 19-
32),
MRCH(fx)=SNRth
rr2 72(2 + MRC) ^ET EV H EH H
8 IB
MTFH(fx)
(19-53)
and
MRCv(Jy)=SNRth
71^ y^2 (2 + MRC) et ev-v e h-v
8 IB
MTFv(fy)
(19-54)
The MRC is on both sides of the equation and it can only be solved iteratively.
A starting point would be to select a low value such as MRC = 0.02. The MRC is
a family of curves that depend upon the background intensity level (Figure 19-
12).
RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 19-12. MRC is a function of ambient lighting level.
19.7. GENERAL COMMENTS
Mathematics and computer models have no bounds. Computers can
produce an output for nearly any input. The codes do not flash a message that
says "ERRORS MAY EXIST - READ DOCUMENTATION." The analyst must
read all the documentation to understand the limitations of the models so that he
does not extend the model past its region of validity.
The inability to accurately quantify the eye-brain detection process has
been perhaps the major obstacle to predicting measured MRT values. The eye
exhibits both excitatory and inhibitory behavior and neither the 1975 NVL
model nor FLIR92 includes the inhibitory portion of the eye. This lack of
complete eye modeling accounts in part for the discrepancy between the
measured MRT values and the predicted values at low spatial frequencies.
Many attempts have been made to include the inhibitory response of
the eye 25'27 These models were developed from first principles and the predicted
MRT values were closer to the measured MRT values compared to the 1975
NVL model. But they still did not precisely predict the measured values.
While alternate eye models were developed before FLIR92, NVESD
continued using the Kornfeld-Lawson model. High spatial frequency laboratory
MRT predictions were improved by incorporating the non-limiting eye model
(MTFeye= 1). The new eye model in NVTherm accommodates changes in the
MTF as a function of monitor brightness. It does not include the inhibitory
response. Low frequency predictions are the same for all models.
Nevertheless, this still represents a modeling dilemma. Although
FLIR92 does not predict low spatial frequency response correctly, this region is
of questionable value during actual system usage. Systems are typically
designed to reproduce moderate detail (mid to high spatial frequencies).
Furthermore, the lowest frequency that can be reasonably measured is about
0.2fo. If the spatial frequency is too low, not all four bars will be seen on the
monitor. For very low frequencies, only part of a bar will be imaged. Therefore,
there is no way of validating the very low frequency response. Results are only
conjecture.
Many authors have been too quick to attack the theory and immediately
offer other eye models. While the eye model may not be perfect, other factors
affect the measured values. For example, low AT MRT targets are very difficult
to accurately calibrate (test equipment issues). High spatial frequency targets are
more difficult to see due to monitor raster structure and phasing effects.
NO generalized model exists for machine vision (automatic target
recognizers, target cuers, etc.) systems. This is due, in part, to the fact many
systems employ nonlinear image processing. Modeling nonlinear systems can
only be done on a case-by-case basis. Furthermore, the threshold signal-to-noise
required by machine vision is also system specific. The SNRth used in the MRT
equation is only appropriate for describing human observer thresholds. SNRth is
not the video signal SNR but what the observer perceives after eye/brain
temporal and spatial integrations.
19.8. REFERENCES
1. 0. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion
Picture Systems," published in four parts in J. SMP'IE: "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer
Characteristics," Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures -
An Analysis of Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp 181-222
(1952); "Part III: The Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part
IV: Image Analysis in Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1952)
2. F. A Resell and R. H. Willson, "Performance Sy nthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," Air Force
Avionics Laboratory Report AFAL-TR-72-229, Wright Patterson AFB, OH (1972).
3. J. A. Ratches, "Night Vision Modeling: Historical Perspective," in Infrared Imaging Systems:
Design, Analysis, Modeling and TestingX, G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 2-12
(1999).
4. J. D'Agostino and C. Webb, "3-D Analysis Framework and Measurement Methodology for
Imaging System Noise," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing II,
G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 110-121 (1991).
5. System Image Analyzer (SIA) is available from JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL 32789,
Telephone 407-629-5370
6. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM
Report ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
7. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, User's Guide, NVESD document
UG5008993, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993).
8 G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, JCD
Publishing, pp. 331-370, Winter Park, FL (1993).
9. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM
Report ECOM-7043, pg. 34, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
10. L. Scott and J. D'Agostino, "NVEOD FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model,"
in Infrared Imaging Systems' Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C Holst, ed., SPIE
Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 194-203 (1992).
11. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 182-194, Plenum Press, NY (1975).
12. F. A. Resell, "Laboratory Performance Model," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, R. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report 8311, pp. 85-95, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
13. W. R. Lawson and J. A Ratches, "The Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model
Based on the Matched Filter Concept," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R.
Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report 8311, pp. 159-179, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
14. R. L. Sendall and F. A. Resell, "Static Performance Model Based on the Perfect Synchronous
Integrator Model," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R. Rosell and G. Harvey,
eds., NRL Report 8311, pp 181-230, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979).
15. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM
Report ECOM-7043, pg. 56, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
16. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, Analyst's Reference Guide, NVESD
document RG5008993, pp. ARG 12 - 13, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993).
17. F. A. Rosell, "Psychophysical Experimentation," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, R. Rosel! and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report # 8311, pg. 225, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
18. G. C. Holst and A. R. Taylor, "What Eye Model Should We Use for MRT Testing?" in Infrared
Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol.
1309, pp. 67-75 (1990).
19. J. M. Mooney, "Effect of Spatial Noise on the Minimum Resolvable Temperature of a Staring
Array," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(23), pp. 3324-3332 (1991).
20. R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of
Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and TestingX, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999).
21. W. Wittenstein, "Thermal Range Model TRM3," in Infrared Technology and Applications
XXIV, B. F. Andresen and M. Strojnik, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3436, pp. 413-424 (1998).
22. W. Wittenstein, "Minimum Temperature Difference Perceived - A New Approach to Assess
Undersampled thermal Imagers," Optical Engineering, Vol. 38(5), pp. 773-781 (1999).
23. H. V. Kennedy, "Monte Carlo Shell for FLIR92," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design,
Analysis, Modeling and Testing VI, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2470, pp. 69-74
(1995).
24. STADIUM FLIR is manufactured by AET, 1900 S. Harbor City Boulevard, Suite 115,
Melbourne, FL 329012. It is available from JCD Publishing, 2932 Cove Trail, Winter Park, FL
32789, Tel: 407-629-5370.
25. J. G. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Improved Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference
Model for Infrared Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 492-498 (1987).
26.1. Overington, "Image Quality and Observer Performance," in Image Quality, SPIE Proceedings
Vol. 310, pp. 2-5, (1981).
27. M. A. Karim, M. L. Gao, and S. H. Zheng, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference
Model: A Critical Review," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1788-1796 (1991).
EXERCISES
1. Referring to Table 19-2 what noise components are appropriate for systems
operating in the visible spectrum?
2. In Equation 19-8, all the noise components are added in quadrature. However,
the summary noise factors (Equations 19-10 and 19-17) modify the noise
components before addition. Why?
3. Sketch eight images, each of which has a different noise component. Assume
that each noise component is dominant (i.e., exaggerate the noise).
4. When inserted into the MRT equation, Equation 19-22 suggests that the eye
reduces the temporal noise by the square root of the frame rate. Are there
practical limits on this approach? What happens if the frame rate approaches
infinity or zero?
5. Sketch two MRT curves: one with head movement and one without.
20
TARGET DISCRIMINATION
Range performance predictions require a mathematical expression that
describes the eye/brain image interpretation process. Unlike the response of an
electronic circuit, the response of a human observer cannot be directly measured
but only can be inferred by many visual psychological experiments. The lowest
level of discrimination is a distinction between something and nothing. The final
level is the precise identification and description of a particular object. Between
these two extremes lay a continuum of discrimination levels.
Sometimes, a level of visual discrimination can be easily defined. An
aircraft may be easily detected against a cloudless sky and the meaning of
detection is clear. The detection of a vehicle against a complex background such as
a forest is more difficult. Here, it may be necessary to recognize the vehicle before
it can be said that it is detected.
Contextual clues provide additional information. A blob on a road has a
reasonable probability of being a vehicle. The same blob in a field could be
anything - unless it is moving. A vehicle may be recognized or even identified
because of its characteristics, location, and speed even though the sensor resolution
is insufficient to perform classical shape recognition. For example, a moving
object on a large deep lake is probably a boat and not an aircraft or truck.
Target identification is a high-order target discrimination level that is at
the end of a complex process. The first task is searching the field-of-view to find
the target. Search (discussed in Section 21.10., Search) may be random or
systematic and it varies with observer training and background. Search was also
called finding the target. DAgostino and Moulton1 introduced the minimum
findable temperature difference (MFTD). This approach includes both scene
clutter and search. The target may be anywhere in the field-of-view. With finding,
attention is focussed on a particular area of the scene. This is more complex than
the minimum detectable temperature. MDT is the ability to detect a blob
embedded in noise when the target is in the center of the field-of-view (or at least,
the observer knows where to look). Both MDT and MFTD are a function of the
target angular subtense.
After finding the target, the Johnson criterion is used. Here, target size
and shape provide the cues for detection, recognition, and identification.
Sensitivity, resolution, or a combination may affect the range for these levels of
target discrimination. The Johnson criterion assumes that the target is in the center
of the field-of-view and search is not required to find the target. It provides the link
between the MRT and field performance.
The Johnson discrimination methodology is the basis for today’s
standards. Johnson’s criteria assigned cycles to the minimum dimension of the
target. This represents a one-dimensional view of a two-dimensional image. The
historical development of the discrimination methodology can be found in the
literature.2'8
Discrimination is a process in which an object is assigned to a subset of a
larger set of objects based upon the amount of detail perceived by the observer.
Detection, recognition, and identification are just three discrimination levels of a
continuum. The definition of each level has become author dependent: each
author has tried to describe his impression of discrimination. Range predictions are
reasonable if the analyst exercises good judgment in selecting the discrimination
criterion.
In two-dimensional discrimination, the number of cycles across the
critical dimension is used. The critical dimension is equal to the square root of the
target area. Only if the target is square is the one-dimensional minimum dimension
equal to the two-dimensional critical dimension.
Target discrimination values are not specific to any particular system.
Although the majority of research has been in support of thermal imaging system
performance, the results apply to systems operating in the visible region of the
spectrum. Indeed, the Johnson criterion was developed for image intensifiers.
Much work was required to prove that Johnson's findings applied to thermal
imaging systems.
20.1. ONE-DIMENSIONAL DETECTION
The Johnson methodology for detection, recognition, and identification
has become the basis for target discrimination. His methodology may be extended
to include target classification and clutter effects.
20.1.1. JOHNSON CRITERION
Johnson2 arbitrarily divided visual discrimination into four categories:
detection, orientation, recognition, and identification. His approach has become
known as the equivalent bar pattern approach. Johnson developed his
methodology in the laboratory using scale models of eight military vehicles and
one soldier against a bland background. Observers viewed the targets through
image intensifiers and were asked to detect, decide the orientation, recognize and
identify the targets. Air Force tri-bar charts whose bars had the same contrast as
the scaled models were also viewed and the maximum resolvable bar pattern
frequency was determined. The number of bars per minimum object dimension
was increased until the bars could just be individually resolved. In this way,
detectability was correlated with the sensor's threshold bar pattern resolution
(Table 20-1). These results became the foundation for the discrimination
methodology used today.
Table 20-1
JOHNSON'S RESULTS
(From reference 2)
DISCRIMINATION LEVEL MEANING CYCLES ACROSS MINIMUM DIMENSION
Detection An object is present (object versus noise). 1.0± 0.025
Orientation The object is approximately symmetrical or unsymmetrical and its orientation may be discerned (side view versus front view). 1.4±0.35
Recognition The class to which the object belongs (e.g., tank, truck, man). 4.0±0.80
Identification The object is discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type (e.g., T-52 tank or friendly jeep). 6.4±1.50
Figure 20-1 was reproduced from Johnson's report. The number of cycles
is applied across the target's minimum dimension without regard to the orientation
of the minimum dimension (i.e., horizontally, vertically or at an angle). His
rasterless image intensifier imagery was radially symmetrical and therefore it was
reasonable for him to ignore the bar orientation. His methodology is commonly
accepted as valid for raster-based television and thermal imaging systems.
Figure 20-1. The targets used by Johnson. The minimum
dimension is the smallest target dimension and is independent
its orientation. (From reference 2).
Depending upon whether the target was viewed from the front or the
side, the number of cycles per minimum dimension changes for recognition
(Figure 20-2). This occurs because the detail that must be perceived for
recognition changes. For example, the tank gun can be seen from the side but is
difficult to discern from the front. This led to the idea that four cycles were
pessimistic, three cycles optimistic and the average is 3.5 cycles. However, the
industry adopted four cycles for recognition at the 50% probability level.
90°
Figure 20-2. Number of cycles required as a function of
viewing angle. (From reference 9).
Although Johnson used 6.4 cycles for identification, studies with thermal
imaging systems at the Night Vision Laboratory suggested that 8 cycles are more
appropriate for identification. Table 20-2 provides the current industry standard for
one-dimensional target discrimination. Because today's standards are based upon
Johnson's work, they are labeled as the Johnson criteria though they are not the
precise values found by him.
Table 20-2
CURRENT INDUSTRY CRITERIA (ONE-DIMENSIONAL)
(Called the Johnson criterion)
TASK DESCRIPTION CYCLES ACROSS MINIMUM DIMENSION
Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 1.0
Aim Aiming cross hairs on a target with sufficient accuracy to fire a missile. 2.5
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 4.0
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 8.0
20.1.2. EXTENDED DISCRIMINATION
Obviously more levels of visual discrimination are desirable. In
particular, the gap between recognition and identification is too large and detection
appeared more complex. Howe stated:10 Discrimination is the ability to discern an
object embedded in a cluttered background. Simply seeing a blob in a cluttered
environment does not usually indicate the presence of a target with a high degree
of confidence. For detection, the blob in question must be compared with other
blobs, and features of the blob must set it apart from the others. Thus, there is a
needfor resolving capability for this type of detection.
Another type of detection commonly discussed in the literature is military
detection. It is the determination that an object in an image is of military interest.
If the simple determination that an object is present is enough to indicate the
object is of military interest, for example, seeing a point object in the sky, then
pure detection is equivalent to military detection. If on the other hand, the
observer has to discriminate between a particular object and other objects in the
FOV to determine which is of military interest, then discrimination detection is
equivalent to military detection.
Resell11 proposed a detailed discrimination level breakdown that fits a
wider set of field conditions (Table 20-3). Commensurate with these additional
levels is a range of cycles per minimum dimension. The range of values is due to
observer threshold variations, observer knowledge and recognition ability, viewing
angle (front, side, oblique), and target aspect ratio.
Table 20-3
AN EXPANDED SET OF DISCRIMINATION LEVELS
(Estimated number of cycles per minimum dimension)
(From reference 11)
TASK DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE #CYCLES
Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. A bright spot on the display - may be a tree, tank, or rock. 0.5 to 1.5
The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. A stationary blob on a road has a reasonable chance of being a vehicle but also could be a puddle or a tree shadow. 1.0 to 2.0
The blob has a high probability of being the object sought because of such clues as motion, location, etc. A moving blob on a road is probably a vehicle. 1.0 to 2.5
Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. Differentiate between a tracked and wheeled vehicle. 2.0 to 5.0
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. Passenger car, van, pickup, tank, armored personnel carrier. 2.0 to 10
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. M60, T-52, particular person, etc. 4.5 to 15
Table 20-4 provides an even larger set of discrimination levels that now
incorporates decisions about the target. Figure 20-3 pictorially represents these
levels in a decision tree. The decision tree approach can be applied to automatic
target recognizers and machine vision systems.12 ATRs probably require higher
resolution than the Johnson criteria because artificial processors are less
sophisticated than the human brain.
Table 20-4
AN EXTENDED DISCRIMINATION LEVEL TABLE
(Estimated number of cycles per minimum dimension)
(Continued next page)
TASK DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE # OF CYCLES
Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. A bright spot on the display - may be a tree, tank, or rock. 0.5
The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. A blob on a road has a reasonable chance of being a vehicle but could be a puddle or a tree shadow. 1.0
The blob has a high probability of being the object sought because of motion and location. A moving blob on a road is probably a vehicle. 1.5
Orientation An object's rough orientation may be discerned. Horizontal rectangle. 1.75
Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. Target. 1.80
Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. Tracked or wheeled Vehicle. 2.0
Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class is differentiated. Differentiate between a tracked and wheeled vehicle. 3.0
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class is differentiated. Passenger car, van, pickup, tank, or armored personnel carrier. 4.0
Table 20-4 (Continued)
Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. Warsaw pact tank. 6.0
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. M60, T-72 8.0
Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. Real T-72. 10.0
Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. Iraqi T-72 (hostile). 12.0
Classical
Detection Orientation
Target
[No Target
Horizont
Vertical
Recognition
Type
Recognition
Classification Tank
Clutter Rejection Vehicle Tracked APC
SP Gun
Target Building Wheeled
Clutter
Operational Success
Discrimination
Friendly
or Foe
Foe
Friendly
Identification
Hostile
T62
T72
Real
Decoy
Non-Hostile
Figure 20-3. A decision tree for target acquisition.
Progressively more information is required as the
discrimination level increases (moving left to right). Both
target and background information is used at lower levels.
Target detail is the discriminator at higher levels.
The minimum dimension used is the dimension of that object that
distinguishes it from all the other objects within the class. For example, if the
radar dish on a ship's antenna is the only feature that distinguishes two ships,
then the dish size becomes the minimum dimension. Here, the detection of the
dish becomes the criterion for ship identification. No criteria have been found to
hold for a wide spectrum of targets or conditions.
20.1.3. TARGET TRANSFER PROBABILITY FUNCTION
The process of seeing is somewhat a learned ability. It is a perceptual
one, accomplished by the brain, affected by and incorporating other sensory
systems such as emotions, learning, and memory. The relationships are many and
not well understood. Seeing varies among individuals and temporally within an
individual. The use of any metric (such as detection, recognition, or identification)
must be treated statistically rather than as an absolute value
The MRT (developed in Chapter 19., System Performance Models') is
the average threshold of an ensemble of observers. Threshold detection, by
definition, is the 50% probability of detection. That is, 50% of the observers will
see the target and 50% will not. As illustrated in Figure 20-4, the cumulative
probability runs from zero (no one can see the target) to 100% (everyone can see
the target). The usual MRT experiment is to select a specific spatial frequency
target and vary its AT. Range performance is different. The range to the target
varies. As will be shown in Section 21.1., Range Prediction Methodology,
variation in range equates to a variation in spatial frequency. Thus to incorporate a
probability of detection as a function of range, it is necessary to develop a
probability as a function of spatial frequency that follows the MRT curve. As
shown in Figure 20-5, the threshold values in MRT and range are assumed to be
the same.
Figure 20-4. Cumulative probability of detection for an
ensemble of observers.
Figure 20-5. Variation in observer threshold as a function of
ЛТ and spatial frequency (range).
The results of threshold experiments, such as Johnson’s, provide an
approximate measure of the 50% probability of discrimination level. Results of
several field tests13 provided the cumulative probability of discrimination or target
transfer probability function (TTPF) (Table 20-5). The number of cycle for
discrimination and the TTPF are a result of a large number of experiments. They
represent the average of an ensemble of similar sized vehicles operating under a
variety of conditions. For example 80% probability of recognition simply means
that approximately 80% of the population (ensemble of observers) should
recognize the target. It does not mean that a specific individual will recognize a
specific vehicle 80% of the time.
Table 20-5
DISCRIMINATION CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY
PROBABILITY of DISCRIMINATION MULTIPLIER
1.00 3.0
0.95 2.0
0.80 1.5
0.50 1.0
0.30 0.75
0.10 0.50
0.02 0.25
0 0
The TTPF can be used for all discrimination tasks by simply multiplying
the 50% probability of performing the task by the TTPF multiplier. By convention,
each 50% probability is labeled as 7V5O (e.g., TV50 is 1, 4, or 8 cycles for detection,
recognition, or identification, respectively). For example, from Table 20-5, the
probability of 95% recognition is 2 TV50 = 2(4) = 8 cycles across the target's
minimum dimension.
An empirical fit14 to the data provides
(20-1)
where
(20-2)
Visual psychophysical experiments suggest that the eye response follow a log-
normal distribution. The probability density function appears15 to follow
p№ =
1 Г log (TV) - log (TV50 )
2 [ log (<t)
(20-3)
and the cumulative probability is
Iog(7V)
P(JV) = jp(JV)dlog(7V),
0
(20-4)
where log(rr) = 0.198. While the log-normal approach is based upon a physically
plausible foundation, Equations 20-1 and 20-4 provide similar numerical results.
Equation 20-1 is shown in Figure 20-6 with the data points given in Table
20-5 for TV50 = 1. Figure 20-7 illustrates the full TTPF for the three levels of
discrimination as identified by Johnson. Because of the variability in the
population, while some people can only detect the target, others will recognize it,
and a small portion will identify the target. It is this variation that leads to the wide
variations seen at field tests. Table 20-6 highlights the variations. For example,
with four cycles across the minimum dimension, everyone will detect the target,
50% will recognize it, and 11% will identify the target. The detection curve is very
steep so that there is minimal population variation in the ability to detect targets.
However, there is a gradual change in the identification curve and this suggests a
wide variation in the population when identifying targets.
NUMBER OF CYCLES
Figure 20-6. Target transfer probability function (TTPF). Both
the data and the empirical fit are shown with TV50 = 1.
NUMBER OF CYCLES
Figure 20-7. Target transfer probability function for detection,
recognition, and identification.
Table 20-6
POPULATION PERCENTAGES
(Cycles across the minimum dimension)
DISCRIMINATION LEVEL 1 CYCLE 4 CYCLES 8 CYCLES
Detection 50% 100% 100%
Recognition 1.8% 50% 94%
Identification 0.3% 11% 50%
When an analyst wishes to predict the performance of a specific task, he
should make a judgment about the difficulty of the task and vary TV50 accordingly.
Range predictions will hold if the analyst exercises good judgment in selecting the
discrimination criterion. This value is based upon either experimentally measured
results, by analogy to these results, or by prior experience. When a particular TV50 is
selected, it provides a basis for system-to-system comparison. The predicted range
performance based upon a particular TV50 should be considered as representative
and not as an absolute value.
Owen and Dawson stated16 A significant shortcoming in updating FLIR
modeling is in the area of the resolution criteria, expressed as N50. . . Apparently,
most have implicitly assumed that the values established in the early 1970s will
suffice for present modeling requirements and that system-to-system variations in
these quantities can be dismissed.
20.1.4. CLUTTER
As clutter increases, the ability to discern a target decreases. To offset this
reduced capability, either N50 must increase or the target signature must be
redefined (see Section 17.8., Thermal Structure Metrics). Schmieder and
Weathersby17 broadly categorized clutter into high, moderate and low regions.
They stated, Designers would only have to estimate their background clutter
conditions well enough to place their operating point in one of the three regions.
Their experiments simulated a rural North American or rural European landscape.
They defined the signal-to-clutter ratio as
and
max target value - average background
SCR —---------------------------------
(20-5)
& clutter
(20-6)
where cfx- is the rms value of the pixel values in a square cell that has side
dimensions of approximately twice the target minimum dimension. The scene is
composed of N adjoining cells. The use of adjoining cells introduces a spatial
weighting factor that is similar to the spatial integration offered by the eye/brain
process. Clutter sizes that are equal to the object size weigh more heavily in this
calculation.
The results are given in Table 20-7. Field experience demonstrates that
the Johnson detection criterion applies to a "general medium to low clutter"
environment.18 Therefore, Schmieder and Weathersby normalized their 50%
probability of detection in moderate clutter to one cycle. These experimental
findings roughly follow the empirical TTPF (Equation 20-1). It is convenient to
use 0.5, 1.0, and 2.5 as a multiplier to W50 for low, moderate, and high clutter
environments, respectively. Clutter only affects detection (further discussed in
Section 21.10., Search). N5Q for classification, recognition, and identification do
not change.
Table 20-7
TARGET TRANSFER PROBABILITY FUNCTION
WHEN CLUTTER IS PRESENT
(From reference 17)
PROBABILITY OF DETECTION LOW CLUTTER SCR >10 MODERATE CLUTTER 1 < SCR < 10 HIGH CLUTTER SCR<1
1.0 1.7 2.8 ♦ ♦
0.95 1.0 1.9 **
0.90 0.9 1.7 7.0*
0.80 0.75 1.3 5.0
0.50 0.5 1.0 2.5
0.30 0.3 0.75 2.0
0.10 0.15 0.35 1.4
0.02 0.05 0.1 1.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
* no data available
estimated
20.1.5. MODERATE ASPECT RATIO TARGETS
Both laboratory and field range performance data provided a large spread
in values that was, in part, attributed to target aspect ratio (e.g., Table 20-3). This
spread in values can be reduced by taking the target aspect ratio into account. This
correction factor was not applied to the discrimination levels (TV50 values), but was
applied to the MRT equation.19 The eye spatially integrates over the target area.
For MRT testing, the standard test pattern has a 7:1 aspect ratio. For most MRC
testing, the tri-bar target is used (aspect ratio is 5:1).
For horizontal MRTs or MRCs where the vertical noise filters can be
neglected (Equation 19-26 and Equation 19-51),
Еу-н(Л
Ту
(20-7)
aspect
The MRT or MRC correction assumes that the discrimination level cycles should
subtend the same solid angle as the target (Figure 20-8). Bar lengths are made
equal to the target maximum dimension. The effective bar width is the target
minimum dimension divided by the number of cycles required for discrimination
MRTtarget — к
If
11 target
IN
W
rr target
(20-8)
or
MRTtarget = MRT del .
s V IN a
(20-9)
Detection
Recognition
Identification
Figure 20-8 Modification of bar aspect ratio to match the
target solid angle. This approach is valid only for targets with
moderate aspect ratios.
The target aspect ratio, a, is equal to the maximum dimension (assumed to be
^target) divided by the minimum dimension (assumed to be Ht(lrgef For MRT
predictions, Taspect is 7. For MRC predictions, Taspect is 5. For example, for simple
detection only one cycle is required (7V=7V5O = 1), then for a 2:1 aspect ratio
target (« = 2):
MRTtarga = Д MRT^bar . (20-10)
This approach is not in the 1975 NVL model but has been incorporated
in some user models. This may explain, in part, differences in range performance
predicted by different organizations. The adjustment, Equation 20-9, is used only
for field predictions. It is not used for predicting laboratory MRT values. MRTtarget
equals MRTmotlel when 2Na = T„pec,.
20.2. TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION
Johnson used the minimum dimension in his work, whereas the critical
dimension is equal to the square root of the target area. The critical dimension is
hc
target *
(20-11)
The two-dimensional FLIR92 model uses the critical dimension approach in the
same manner that the 1975 NVL model uses the minimum dimension. Two-
dimensional discrimination may be applied to automatic target recognizers and
machine vision systems. Although called two-dimensional, FLIR92 is actually
a two-directional model. The two directions are horizontal and vertical. Two-
dimensional discrimination follows the FLIR92 approach.
20.2.1. PIXELS on TARGET
For large aspect ratio targets, rather than use the number of cycles, the
number of pixels on the target was selected. A pixel is the smallest element that
can be resolved by an imaging system. The conversion from pixels (picture
elements) to cycles (Johnson criterion) must be performed with extreme care.
O'Neill20 used television images of a ship model that was equivalent to a
ship 46 feet high and 520 feet long. His data was converted into pixels (Table 20-
8). Unfortunately, the terminology used by O'Neill is not consistent with the
Johnson terminology. Moser21 only used black and white silhouettes of ships. He
determined that detection required 36 pixels for broad side viewing, 100 pixels to
discern the object as a ship, and 500 pixels to determine superstructure location.
Table 20-8
SHIP DISCRIMINATION
(From reference 20)
DISCRIMINATION PIXELS REQUIRED RESOLUTION ON SHIP (FEET)
Detect object 36 25.78
Recognize as vessel 100 15.47
Recognize ship structure 500 6.90
Recognize ship type 1,000 4.89
Classify king posts 2,000 3.46
Discern radar detail 4,300 2.36
Detect 40 mm gun barrel 12,000 1.41
The number of pixels in a solid rectangle is well defined. It is simply the
horizontal number multiplied by the vertical number. For targets that have open
structure (ships and aircraft), the number is the maximum number of horizontal
pixels multiplied by the maximum number of vertical pixels. Although there is
open structure (e.g., areas with no target) we shall say that this product is the
number of pixels on the target. This is simply the rectangle that just encloses the
ship's outline.
Figure 20-9 is identical to Figure 14-5 (see Section 14.2.7., Pixels on
Target). From Figure 20-9b to 20-9e, there are approximately 14, 45, 200 and 850
pixels, respectively, on a circumscribed rectangle about the ship. Ship detection
takes place when the superstructure is just visible. The ship's type is discerned
when there are about 850 pixels on the target. These images are consistent with
Moser's and O'Neill's findings.
(a)
(b)
Figure 20-9. Ship silhouette that has been degraded into large
pixels. The pixel intensity is averaged over the area. Only
eight gray levels are shown, (a) Ship, (b) 14 pixels, (c) 45
pixels, (d) 200 pixels, and (e) 850 pixels contained in a
rectangle that circumscribes the ship. The number of pixels
varies with sample-scene phasing.
20.2.2. FLIR92 DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS
Although pixels and half-cycles are not necessarily identical, it is
convenient to use the Nyquist criterion that two pixels are required to uniquely
reproduce a sinusoid. With two pixels per cycle, the number of pixels on a
rectangular target of size Htarset x Wt(irget, at a distance R, is
< FT V H
, (20-12)
I K A K )
where Nx and Ny are the number of cycles across the target in the horizontal and
vertical directions, respectively and fx and fy are the spatial frequencies associated
with the target. Equating the rectangular target to a square target of equal area,
Neff
sj N pixels x у
Iw H
у target target
R
Jf* fy (20-13)
The FLIR92 methodology defines the target effective critical dimension as hc and
the effective discrimination frequency as feff
h
Neff=^feff (20-14)
The number of cycles on the target is Neff!2. For discrimination, these cycles are
across the critical (fictitious) dimension hc. Then
he
*2D=-^flD- (20-15)
For non-rectangular targets, this has been modified to
where (as before)
h = A
у target •
(20-16)
(20-17)
The original Johnson methodology was validated using common module
thermal imaging systems. Those systems typically had a 2:1 difference in
horizontal to vertical resolution. The vertical resolution was limited by the Nyquist
frequency of the detector center-to-center spacing. For validation purposes,
military vehicles were used and the minimum dimension tended to be in the
vertical direction although the predictions were based upon horizontal
performance. Converting to a two-dimension model requires removing the
directional bias imposed by the one-dimensional model. This is achieved by
reducing all values by 25%, or equivalently, multiplying22 all discrimination values
by 0.75 (Table 20-9). This adjustment then provides the same range performance
predictions for the common module scanning systems whether predicted by the
one-dimensional or two-dimensional model. Aim was replaced by classification
when FLIR92 was introduced.
Table 20-9
COMMON TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS
TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N50
Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75
Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00
The values given in Table 20-10 are only guidelines. Strongly cued
targets may require fewer cycles. When an analyst wishes to predict the
performance of a specific task, he should make a judgment about the difficulty of
the task and vary NS() accordingly.
Since the U.S. Army is the proponent agency for thermal imaging
systems, most of the data has centered on discriminating typical Army land-based
objects: tanks, armored personnel carriers, and vehicles. Table 20-10 represents the
average values used for targets with near unity aspect ratio. A man is a unique
target. TV50 = 0.75 for both detection and recognition since it is nearly a
simultaneous process. Identification is not defined for the man target.23
Table 20-10
EXTENDED TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS
(These descriptors can be used for machine vision systems)
TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N5()
Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. 0.38
The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75
The blob has a high probability of bemg the object sought because of motion, location, etc. 1.13
Orientation The object is approximately symmetric or asymmetric and its rough orientation may be discerned. 1.31
Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. 1.35
Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50
Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. 2.25
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00
Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. 4.50
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00
Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. 7.50
Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. 9.00
Table 20-10
EXTENDED TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS
(These descriptors can be used for machine vision systems)
TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N5()
Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. 0.38
The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75
The blob has a high probability of bemg the object sought because of motion, location, etc. 1.13
Orientation The object is approximately symmetric or asymmetric and its rough orientation may be discerned. 1.31
Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. 1.35
Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50
Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. 2.25
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00
Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. 4.50
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00
Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. 7.50
Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. 9.00
4. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
5. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 388-429, Plenum Press, New York (1975).
6. F. A. Resell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pp. 97-110, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
7. F. A. Resell, "Observer Resolution Requirements," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pp. 237-251, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
8. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems
Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 57-120. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and
Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993). This 64-page chapter contains 121 references.
9. F. A. Rosell, "Observer Resolution Requirements," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 248, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
10. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems
Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pp. 62-63. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and
Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993).
ILF. A. Rosell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 100, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
12. R. C. Harney, "Sensor Fusion for Target Recognition: A Review of Fundamentals and a Potential
Approach to Multisensor Requirements Allocation," in Infrared Technology XX, B. F. Andresen ed.,
SPIE Proceedings Vol. 226, pp. 316-335 (1994).
13. J. A. Ratches, "Static Performance Model for Thermal Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering,
15(6), pp. 525-530(1976).
14. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems
Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 92. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and
Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by
Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA
(1993).
15. G. C. Holst, "Applying the Log-normal Distribution to Target Detection," in Infrared Imaging
Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp.
213-216(1992).
16. P. R. Owen and J. A. Dawson, "Resolving the Differences in Oversampled and Undersampled
Imaging Sensors: Updated Target Acquisition Modeling Strategies for Staring and Scanning FLIR
Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed.,
SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 251-261 (1992).
17. D. E. Schmieder and M. R. Weathersby, "Detection Performance in Clutter with Variable
Resolution," IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-19(4), pp. 622-630
(1983).
18. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert. R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, pg. 15, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
19. F. A. Resell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging
Systems, F. Resell and G Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 101-102, Naval Research Laboratory,
Washington, D.C. (1979).
20. G. J. O'Neill, "The Quantification of Image Detail as a Function of Irradiance by Empirical Tests,"
NAVAIRDEVCEN Technical Memorandum NADC-202139:GJO, Naval Air Development Center,
Warminster, PA (1974).
21. P. M. Moser, "Mathematical Model of FLIR Performance," NAVAIRDEVCEN Technical
Memorandum NADC-20203:PMM, Naval Air Development Center, Warminster, PA (1972).
22. L. Scott and R. Tomkinson, "An Update on the C1 2 3 4 5NVEO FLIR90 and ACQUIRE Sensor
Performance Model," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing II, G. C.
Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 99-109 (1991).
23. M. Friedman, D. Tomkinson, L. Scott, В O'Kane, and J. D'Agostino, "Standard Night Vision
Thermal Modeling Parameters," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing
III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 204-212 (1992).
24. F. A. Resell and R. H. Wilson, "Performance Synthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," AFAL-TR-74,
Air Force Avionics Laboratory, Wright Patterson AFB, OFI (April 1974).
EXERCISES
1. You are analyzing an image intensifier. What values would you use for N50 for
detection, recognition, and identification?
2. Plot the TTPF for classical recognition using the range of values of N50
provided in Table 20-3. Discuss the variations. If you choose 10 cycles for
classical recognition, what values would you use for detection and identification?
3. Plot the TTPF using Equation 20-1 and Equation 20-4. Let7V5O = 1.
4. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of Equation 20-1 and Equation 20-4.
5. Although not used in FLIR92, what target aspect ratio and cycle criterion
should you use so that MRTtarget=MRT4.bar? Describe a scenario where these values
are appropriate.
21
RANGE PREDICTIONS
Optimal system performance is obtained after performing a series of
tradeoff analyses as a function of a variety of variables. Typical variables
include field-of-view, atmospheric transmittance, optical transmittance, target
size, target intensity, and line-of-sight stabilization. That is, range is plotted as a
function of, say, field-of-field. The optimum FOV might be the value that
provides the maximum range. Finding the optimum design is an iterative
decision process. Every step in the design process that has conflicting needs
requires a tradeoff analysis.
The various variables can be considered as different axes in
multidimensional space. Since it is not physically possible to illustrate more
than three dimensions any time, each tradeoff analysis represents only one plane
through this space. Each tradeoff provides a different view of overall
optimization.
Target discrimination (Johnson criterion) links the system performance
model with range performance. Using the MRT or MRC to predict range
performance means that the target is just barely perceptible and the perceived
signal-to-noise ratio is SNRth . The system analyst must know which factors
modify the MRT or MRC in the desired direction. To improve range
performance for a system that is resolution-limited requires changing the
system's resolution. Similarly, to improve range performance for a system that is
sensitivity-limited requires increasing the system's sensitivity. Those factors
(Table 21-1) which increase sensitivity often reduce resolution (Figure 21-1).
Table 21-1
FACTORS that AFFECT SENSITIVITY and RESOLUTION
SENSITIVITY RESOLUTION
Detector responsivity Optical transmittance f-number NEBW Detector area Subsystems MTFs Nyquist frequency DAS
MRT
SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 21-1. Changing the focal length affects both sensitivity
and resolution. An optimal system will balance sensitivity and
resolution.
It is commonly understood what is meant by a sensitivity-limited
system. Improvements include increasing D*, aperture diameter, optical
transmittance, and detector size. Resolution is not uniquely defined. The
system's resolution may be limited by the optical design, DAS, Nyquist
frequency or some electrical bandwidth. For example, in high speed line-
scanners, the detector time constant can significantly affect the overall system
MTF. The rules-of-the-thumb so often quoted are usually applicable only to
detector MTF limited systems. These "rules" are not universally valid and must
be considered in context with the system design and application.
According to Shumaker and Wood1, a model should answer four basic
questions:
1. What characteristics (specifications) must an electro-optical imaging system
have to do a given task?
2. What design parameters will enable a system to satisfy given specifications?
3. What laboratory performance values will verify that a design provides
desired characteristics?
4. Given an electro-optical imaging system design, how can it best be deployed
and what are the expected results?
Models are adequate for comparative analysis but may not predict
absolute performance. If a model does not predict the situation, the following
questions must be asked. Are the underlying assumptions valid? Were the
correct equations used? Were some parameters left out that should have been
included? Were the correct values used (actual hardware values versus design
values)? Are the test results statistically sound? Was the test procedure
appropriately controlled?
Range predictions and the shapes of the curves shown in this chapter
can only be considered representative. The shape changes depending upon the
discrimination level selected, target size, target-background differential
intensity, and atmospheric transmittance. Depending upon the system design,
particular performance curves may not look like those shown here.
The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 are the main analytic tools for
deriving system requirements and predicting performance. They are used for
comparative analysis and are reportedly accurate to ± 20% in range predictions2
for recognition under favorable target and atmospheric conditions. They were
validated for modest sized targets (tanks, tanks, and jeeps) at modest ranges (5
to 10 km). The accuracy of range predictions for large aspect ratio targets is
unknown.
Although FLIR92 is called dimensional, it is a \wo-directional
model. That is, the threshold resolution performance is predicted along two
orthogonal axes, taken as the vertical and horizontal directions. Resolution in
any other direction (e.g., 45°) is not used. When used with the Johnson criteria,
FLIR92 is probably better at predicting the range for rectangular objects whose
edges are aligned with the thermal imaging system axes.
21.1. RANGE PREDICTION METHODOLOGY
The Johnson criterion provides the link between the target angular
subtense and the spatial frequency scale on the MRT graph. The apparent target
△T at the system's entrance aperture becomes the threshold MRT.
21.1.1. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE
The spectrally weighted atmospheric transmittance is
(Л) ториа O)Re (Я)Ме (Л, Д T) ал
1 _ A________________________________
ave ~ 2
[?враа(Л)яе(Л)ме(Л,дт)ал
A
(21-1)
If Tatm(A) has no spectral features over [2j , ;2], then « ratm_ave and the
apparent temperature differential, &Tapp at the system's entrance aperture is
provided by the back-of-the-envelope approximation
д тр Д TT
app ~ Tatm-ave
(21-2)
If either f or /2 enter an atmospheric absorption band, then &Tapp is smaller than
the back-of-the-envelope approximation suggests.
The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 were validated during field tests
when the atmosphere was relatively clear (ratm_ave ~ 0.90/km). Extension to other
cases is hypothetical. LOWTRAN/MODTRAN is typically used to calculate
ratm(E). These models are excellent predictors at short and medium ranges (up to
20 km) but may be in error at extremely long ranges such as those encountered
in IRST applications (~ 100 km) due to the uncertainty in atmospheric
transmittance.
21.1.2. ACQUIRE
Developed by NVL, the ACQUIRE model3 4 provides range prediction
methodologies for both target discrimination and hot spot detection. Since it
uses target-background intensity, atmospheric transmittance, and discrimination
levels (Johnson criteria) it can be used for both visible and infrared sensors. The
MRT or MRC abscissa is converted into a range scale using a target
discrimination value. When using the 1975 NVL model, the number of cycles
that appear across the target is
(21-3)
where h is the minimum dimension and h/R is the target angular subtense at
range R. When using the FLIR92, the critical dimension is hc = (Лг)'/2 and
h
*2D=-^flD. (21-4)
К
For example, it the target size is 3 m and 4 cycles are required across this
dimension, then the conversion from spatial frequency to range is
3 3
R = —fx or R = —f2D . (21-5)
4 4
Table 21-2 provides the most common discrimination levels. Extended levels
are found in Table 20-4 and Table 20-10.
Table 21-2
COMMON DISCRIMINATION LEVELS
TASK DESCRIPTION l-D Nso 2-D N50
Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 1.0 0.75
Aim Aiming cross hairs on a target with sufficient accuracy to fire a missile. 2.5 -
Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. - 1.5
Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 4.0 3.0
Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 8.0 6.0
Based solely upon the Johnson criteria, recognition and identification ranges
should be 1/4 and 1/8 of the detection range (Figure 21-2). However, the MRT
and atmospheric transmittance change these range ratios. The intersection of the
MRT curve and &Tapp (Equation 21-2) is the range at which the target can be
discerned according to the discrimination level selected (Figure 21-3).
Detection Recognition
1 Cycle 4 Cycles
Identification
8 Cycles
Figure 21-2. One-dimensional discrimination. Based solely
upon the Johnson criteria, the target size ratios will be 1:4:8
for detection, recognition, and identification.
MRT MRT
Figure 21-3. Recognition range for a typical common module
system (one-dimensional), (a) MRT and (b) conversion of
spatial frequency into range. A'5O = 4, h = 3 m, and AT= 2.5° C.
Using Tatm_avei ETapp is a straight line when plotted in semi-
logarithmic coordinates. The average atmospheric attenuation
is 0.85/km. The recognition range is approximately 3.9 km.
21.1.3. RANGE PERFORMANCE PROBABILITY
The target transfer probability function (TTPF) is used to predict the
probability of range performance. Here, a range is selected and the kTapp is
calculated. This value intersects the MRT curve at what is called the critical
frequency. Multiplying the target angular subtense by the critical frequency
provides the number of cycles across the target. Referring to the TTPF, the
range probability is determined for that particular range. Then a new range is
selected and the process is repeated until the entire probability range is
determined (Figure 21-4).
SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 21-4. Methodology to determine range performance
probability.
21.1.4. SAMPLING EFFECTS
With staring arrays, the highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully
reproduced is the Nyquist frequency. With FLIR92, the MRT is shown to
approach infinity at fn. Figure 21-5 illustrates typical scanning and staring array
MRTs. When the probability of range detection is calculated using the target
transfer probability function, the Nyquist limit reduces the range (Figure 21-6).
This range reduction is an artifact of the FLIR92 model.
NVTherm (Section 19.3) incorporates the MTF squeeze (see Section
14.5., MTF Squeeze) which overcomes the artificially imposed Nyquist
frequency limit. As a result, range predictions using the MRT calculated by
NVTherm do not have the "brick wall" shown in Figure 21-6.
PROBABILITY MRT
RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 21-5. Representative MRTs for a scanning system and
staring system calculated by FLIR92. At Nyquist frequency,
the MRT is assumed to be infinity.
Figure 21-6. Range probability for a staring and an equivalent
scanning system. The shapes of the curves depend upon the
MRT, AT, atmospheric transmittance, andTV50. Since the MRT
is forced to infinity at the Nyquist frequency, the range hits a
"brick wall" at Nyquist frequency. This is an artifact created
by FLIR92.
21.2. TWO FIELDS-OF-VIEW
Optical zoom increases the ability to discern detail by changing the
focal length of the system. If a system is detector MTF limited system, optical
zoom increases range performance. Most systems have a fixed f-number. As the
focal length decreases, the aperture decreases to maintain the f-number.
Continuous zoom optics tend to be expensive. Instead, many imaging
systems have separate (discrete) fields-of-view. A wide field-of-view (WFOV)
is selected initially to provide situational awareness to the observer. After
detection, he then switches to a narrow field-of-view (NFOV) for target
recognition. Here it is assumed that the observer will concentrate on the target
and no longer needs situational awareness for this part of the mission. The
Johnson criterion has 4:1 difference in detection and recognition (TV50) values.
For detector MTF limited systems, this suggests that the WFOV/NFOV ratio
should be 4:1 (Figure 21-7).
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY
Figure 21-7. For detector MTF limited systems, the NFOV
should be approximately four times smaller than the WFOV
when the WFOV is used for detection and the NFOV is used
for recognition.
However, due to atmospheric transmittance effects (sensitivity
considerations), the ratio should be somewhat less. Depending upon the desired
discrimination, the ratio may be different. For systems mounted on high speed
aircraft, reaction time (time to switch FOV and reacquire the target) may dictate
a different FOV ratio. That is, during the switching time, the range to the target
may have decreased significantly and thereby require a different FOV.
21.3. RESOLUTION versus SENSITIVITY
Too often, range performance studies have considered sensitivity issues
or resolution issues only. The back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation,
tr AT
gppg — atm~ave
NEDT
(21-6)
does not include the observer's response. The back-of-the-envelope resolution
approximation is
Range ------------. (21 -7)
Resolution
Resolution usually refers to that spatial frequency where the MRT asymptotes to
infinity. Thus, the resolution range defined by Equation 21-7 can only be
achieved with a target whose AT also approaches infinity. In real systems, it is
sometimes difficult to specify a reasonable value for the resolution limit.
The shape of the range performance curves usually indicates whether a
system is operating near the resolution-limit or the sensitivity-limit. Figure 21-8
illustrates range as a function of target AT. For very low target signatures, the
system is starved for signal and is sensitivity-limited. For large ATs, range is
limited by the target angular subtense. Here the system is resolution-limited.
When approaching the resolution-limit, the target temperature is irrelevant. The
change from sensitivity-limited to resolution-limited is gradual. For sensitivity-
limited systems, detection ranges approximately follow the back-of-the-
envelope equation (Equation 21-6).
A system can change from a resolution-limited system to a sensitivity-
limited system as the focal length increases. For very long focal lengths (small
field-of-view), the system may be optics limited. As the focal length decreases,
the system may become limited by the detector (Figure 21-9).
20
15
b 10
5
0
resolution limited
sensitivity limited
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
RELATIVE RANGE
Figure 21-8. Representative range as a function of target AT.
The ordinate is proportional to the signal reaching the
detector. A similarly shaped curve is obtained when the
ordinate is optical transmittance.
RELATIVE RANGE (km)
Figure 21-9. Representative detection range as a function of
field-of-view. The maximum range occurs when resolution
and sensitivity are balanced. The optimum field-of-view and
the shape of the curve depend upon the discrimination task,
target size, and target AT.
When a system is resolution-limited, moderate change in atmospheric
transmittance produce only moderate change in range performance. On the other
hand, when a system is sensitivity-limited, moderate change in atmospheric
transmittance has a very large impact on range. The change from sensitivity-
limited to resolution-limited as the criterion changes from detection to
recognition is typical. (Figure 21-10).
u.
ш
О
о
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
RELATIVE RANGE
Figure 21-10. Representative range as a function of the
atmospheric attenuation coefficient, (a) Sensitivity-limited and
(b) resolution-limited systems. Note that the detection range
(a) is much greater than the recognition range (b). For a given
atmospheric transmittance, the ratio of ranges is not 4.
21.4. LINE-OF-SIGHT STABILIZATION
Random motion (jitter) adversely affects the high spatial frequencies.
For resolution-limited systems, jitter can reduce target range. Since jitter is often
induced by the platform to which the imaging system is attached, line-of-sight
stabilization is used to counteract the platform motion. Figure 21-11 illustrates a
typical range dependence upon residual jitter. The residual jitter is the random
motion that remains after stabilization has occurred. Jitter has little affect on
sensitivity-limited systems.
Figure 21-11. Representative range as a function of relative
residual jitter (rr/DAS) after line-of-sight stabilization. For a
system that is detector MTF limited, the knee in the curve
occurs approximately when the rms jitter is approximately
1/10 times the DAS (see Figure 6-16).
21.5. TARGET SIZE
As the target size increases, the apparent detection range appears to
have no bound. This occurs because the predicted MRT approaches zero as the
spatial frequency approaches zero. Large objects are treated as low spatial
frequencies. The apparent detection of larger targets at long distances is a result
of the Kornfeld-Lawson eye model used in both the 1975 NVL model and
FLIR92.
Figure 21-12 illustrates the range for three different eye models (see
Section 6.7.2., Eye MTF). With the inhibitory response, the detection range
actually decreases as the target size grows. Recall that the discrimination range
is that range at which the perceived signal-to-noise ratio is SNRth. The eye
requires more signal to perceive large targets and this manifests itself as a
decrease in range. The exceptionally large targets shown in Figure 21-12 are
well past the region where the 1975 NVL model was validated. The deviation of
the other eye models at 10 meters should not be interpreted to mean that they are
more accurate. Rather, the analyst should interpret range predictions for large
targets with extreme caution. Specifically, the range predictions for detection of
very large buildings (e.g., aircraft hangars), long bridges, railroad tracks,
extremely long trailers, and large ships should be approached with care.
Figure 21-12. Representative range predictions as a function
of target size. For very large targets, the image size presented
to the eye may be in the region of the inhibitory response.
Curve A is the Komfeld-Lawson eye model, Curve В is
simply MRT = к NEDT/MTF, and curve C is a model that
includes the eye/brain inhibitory response. The shape of the
curves depends upon the discrimination level selected,
atmospheric transmittance and target AT. With head
movement, the inhibitory response will not be present. That is,
Curve C will not exist with head movement.
21.6. ELECTRIC ZOOM
Electronic zoom only replicates pixels on the monitor. It does not
increase resolution. If the display is small, it provides some range performance
improvement. But this improvement is misleading because it is equivalent to
being physically closer to the display. If excessive zoom is used, the image
becomes blocky and is often considered unacceptable.
Models such as FLIR92 assume linear system theory is valid.
Generalized models cannot account for nonlinear processing and sampling
effects. As such, most models do not indicate when blockiness becomes
apparent.
21.7. STADIUM FLIR
As indicated in Section 19.3., STADIUM FLIR is a user-friendly shell4
around FLIR92 that permits numerous tradeoff analyses. Detection, recognition,
and identification ranges can be plotted as a function any desired input
parameter. This allows system optimization based upon specific requirements.
As with all tradeoff analyses, the maximum range is a function of the specific
scenario. If the atmospheric transmittance, target AT, target size, or
discrimination level changes, then the “optimum” design changes. This was
illustrated by the numerous examples in this text comparing sensitivity-limited
and resolution-limited systems. All the tradeoff analyses illustrated in this
chapter can be performed by STADIUM FLIR.
21.8. MWIR versus LWIR SYSTEMS
It was shown in Section 15.6., MWIR versus LWIR, that based solely
upon the atmospheric transmittance considerations the MWIR spectral region
may be preferred to the LWIR spectral region in a high humidity environment.
This is true if the target AT is sufficiently high and the system noise is
sufficiently low such that the target can be detected at long ranges.
Many arguments about the merits of one band over the other were
based upon either sensitivity-limited or resolution-limited systems. Real systems
are more complex and are a function of both sensitivity and resolution. Often
systems are sensitivity-limited for detection criterion and resolution-limited for
recognition criterion. As the discrimination task moves from one regime into the
other, the selection of MWIR to LWIR may change. Range performance
depends upon the MRT and therefore depends upon all the subsystem MTFs and
the NEDT.
It is commonplace to assign the same AT to the target for both the
MWIR and LWIR regions. This is valid if the emissivities (target and
background) are the same in both spectral regions. However, if different (they
are probably different), the variation in AT can significantly affect the selection
of MWIR over LWIR systems.
Which band is better? It depends upon the sensor type, design, and
operation. InSb, HgCdTe and PtSi detectors can all be used in MWIR systems.
HgCdTe, quantum well, and uncooled technology detectors can be LWIR
sensors. Some are scanning systems and others are staring systems. It depends
upon the system MTFs (Chapters 6 through 11), the environment (Chapters 15-
17), system noise (Chapter 18), and the required discrimination (Chapter 20).
This does not include the hardware design issues, cost, availability of
components, reliability, etc. So - which is better? It depends.
21.9. REAL TARGETS
Contextual cues can provide more information about the target than the
target itself. For example, if a blob is moving, it must be a vehicle. Contextual cues
cannot be included in any model for they are too complex and this can lead to
wide variations between predicted range performance and actual range
performance.
Signature models cannot be used without first analyzing their application.
For example, a simple area-weighted AT may be adequate for predicting common
module performance or when viewing the front of a tank. The use of an average
AT applies to some real targets without internal structure. A target's internal
structure may not be visible at long ranges and may not affect detection. However,
at shorter ranges, the internal structure provides cues for recognition and
identification. The precise shape of the silhouette and detailed temperature
distribution may be essential to an automatic target recognizer or other machine
vision systems.
- The Johnson criteria applies to an ensemble of targets. Specific target
features are exploited for higher discrimination levels. Table 21-3 provides some
features that may be exploited to identify a tank or a truck.3 These detailed features
cannot be included in any model since they can vary significantly from vehicle-to-
vehicle.
Table 21-3
INFRARED IMAGERY CUES USEFUL FOR IDENTIFICATION
(From reference 3)
M60/MBT HMMWV/TRUCK
rear engine compartment four wheel
six small wheels hot front grill
three rollers hot hood
rear drive wheel heated fenders
two exhaust panels warm tires
exhausts rearward cool windows
Ratches et. al. said2: One of the main problems in performance modeling
is to obtain an exact target signature ... The problem is further complicated by the
fact that one target can have many different signatures under various operational
and environmental conditions .... we cannot easily describe all the complex target
characteristics corresponding to the real-world IR signature ... Therefore we
utilize only the overall general features of the target such as size and average
temperature difference from the background. The resulting predictions then
correspond to the results of a large ensemble of experiments, However, the results
of any specific experiment with its unique target signature will not necessarily
come close to the predictions for the general ensemble.
Within the real world, there is a probability associated with every
parameter. The target AT is not one number but a range of values that follow a
diurnal cycle. The atmospheric transmittance is not fixed but can change in
minutes. There appears to be an overwhelming set of combinations and
permutations. Therefore, a few representative target ATs and a few
representative atmospheric conditions are selected and the performance range is
calculated for these conditions.
21.10. SEARCH
The static performance models assumed that the target was in the
center of the field-of-view or at least the observer knew where to look. This, of
course, is true for laboratory measurements. However, in the field, the target can
be anywhere within the field-of-view. The observer must search for the target.
The probability of detecting the target becomes
where Psearch(f) represents the conditional probability of detection after searching
for t seconds. Given an infinite amount of time, Psearch<fE) —>1. Pstatic is simply
the probability of detection used in FLIR92 (i.e., when TV50 = 0.75, Pstatic = 0.5).
is
p , (t) = 1 - e‘lmT
л search V )
(21-9)
where r is the mean detection time for an ensemble of observers and m is the
number of sensor fields-of-view within the search field-of-regard. For most
systems, m = 1. Experimental data suggest5 6 that
(21-10)
As indicated in Section 20.1.4., Clutter, clutter increases the difficulty in finding
the target. The ACQUIRE documentation3 recommends using the two-
dimensional detection levels listed in Table 21-4. Note that these definitions are
slightly different than those listed in Table 20-7. Clutter affects detection in two
ways. It increases the mean detection time and it increases the difficulty of
statically detecting the target.
Table 21-4
THRESHOLD CRITERIA FOR SEARCH
(From reference 3)
Clutter level Example ^50
Low Few or no target-like objects in the FOV 0.75
Moderate Intermittently distributed target-like objects in the FOV 1.5
High Numerous target-like objects in the FOV 3
Perhaps one short-coming of Equation 21 -10 is that the mean detection
time is independent of the field-of-view. One would think that as the field-of-
view increased, r would increase. This lack of dependency may simply be a
result of the validation tests: When validating the search model, all of the
systems had approximately the same field-of-view.5
Figure 21-13 provides Psearch(f) for two different search times. The long
search times suggest that the systems would not be useful for military
applications. But these times are realistic. Consider locating a bird in a tree.
Some individuals can spot it immediately and other may never see it. The lower
limit of 1.7 s may be too restrictive. For conspicuous targets, detection may
occur5 within 0.2 s suggesting that т < 0.005.
Figure 21-13. Search probability for 3 different detection
times.
21.11. REFERENCES
1. D. L. Shumaker and J. T. Wood, "Overview of Current IR Analysis Capabilities and Problem
Areas," in Infrared Systems and Components II, H. M. Liaw, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 890, pp.
74-80(1988).
2. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson,
"Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report
ECOM-7043, pg. 2, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
3. ACQUIRE Range Performance model for Target Acquisition Systems, Version 1, User's Guide, US
Army CECOM NVESD document, Ft. Belvoir, VA (May 1995).
4. STADIUM FLIR is manufactured by AET, 1900 S. Harbor City Boulevard, Suite 115,
Melbourne, FL 329012. It is available from JCD Publishing, 2932 Cove Trail, Winter Park, FL
32789, Tel: 407-629-5370.
5. J. D'Agostino, W. Lawson, and D. Wilson, "Concepts for Search and Detection Model
Improvements," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing VIII, G. C.
Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3063, pp. 14-22 (1997).
6. J. A. Ratches, "Night Vision Modeling: Historical Perspective," in Infrared Imaging Systems:
Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 2-12
(1999).
EXERCISES
1. List six parameters that affect sensitivity.
2. List six parameters that affect resolution.
3. Figure 21-1 illustrates three different MRT curves. For each MRT, estimate
range versus AT. That is, plot three curves similar to Figure 21-8.
4. For xatm_ave = 0.4, 0 6, and 0.8, plot \Tapp on Figure 21-3b. Estimate the
recognition range for a three-meter target.
5. A customer wants a system with three fields-of-view. What ratios would you
recommend?
6. Why do curves in Figure 21-10 have those particular shapes?
7. Show how high frequency jitter affects the MRT. Using this curve, explain
the shape of Figure 21-11.
8. A staring array is resolution limited by the array Nyquist frequency. How
does jitter affect range performance?
9. Explain the differences between the curves obtained in Exercise 7 and
Exercise 8.
10. What MRT curves would create Figure 21-12?
11. Figure 21-6 suggests that the range stops abruptly at the Nyquist frequency.
How would you explain this to a customer who is not knowledgeable in
sampling theory?
APPENDIX
F-NUMBER
The radiometric equations (Chapter 3) were derived from plane geometry
and paraxial ray approximations. For paraxial rays, the principal surfaces are
assumed to be planes (Figure A-l). This representation is shown in most
textbooks.
Figure A-l. The optical system can be considered as a single
lens. P, and P2 are the principal surfaces. The effective focal
length is measured from the second principal plane. The clear
aperture limits the amount of light reaching the detector.
Lens design theory1 assumes that the principal surfaces are spherical:
Every point on the surface is exactly a focal-length distance away (Figure A-2).
Figure A-2. Principal planes are typically spherical.
When using solid angles, the image incidance is proportional to svffU)
where LT is the maximum angle subtended by the lens. The numerical aperture is
another measure of the energy collected by the optical system. When the image is
in air (refractive index of unity) the numerical aperture is
NA = sint/' = — = —
2 fl 2F
(A-l)
Since the largest angle is л/2, the smallest theoretical value for F is lZ>. This
theoretical limit on F is not obvious from the radiometric equation.
Not all optical systems have spherical principal planes. Notably, the cold
shield on infrared detectors is planar (Figure 18-2). Here sin2(F) = 1/(4F2 + 1).
Whether 1/(4F2 + 1) or 1/4F2 is used in the radiometric equations depends upon the
f-number definition. If the analyst calculates the f-number from the effective lens
diameter and focal length, then 1/(4F2 +1) should be used. If the optical designer
supplies the f-number, then the analyst must consult with him to insure that the
appropriate factor is used. For large f-numbers, the factors are approximately
equal.
REFERENCE
1 W. J. Smith, Modern Optical Engineering, second edition, pp. 142-145, McGraw-Hill, New York
(1990).
A/D converter, 83
Absolute humidity, 252
Absorptance, 44
Absorption, 248
Absorptivity, 44
AC coupling, 115
Achromatize, 90
ACQUIRE, 412
Active targets, 315
Aerial reconnaissance, 202
Aerodynamic heating, 315
Aerosol MTF, 299
Aerosol scattering, 255
Afocal telescope, 32
Airborne reconnaissance, 29, 173
Airy disk, 31, 91, 200, 206, 241, 346
Aliased signal, 246
Aliasing, 73, 75, 227,351
Alphanumeric, 218
AMOP, 377
Amplifier noise, 325
AN/AAD-5, 174, 181
Anamorphic optic, 188
Anamorphic optics, 146, 200
Anti-aliasing filter, 85
Aperiodic transfer function, 51
Aperture correction, 132
Area-weighted target temperature, 306
Aspect ratio, 390, 398
Astronomical telescope, 31
Asymmetric sampling, 236
ATARS, 174
ATF, 51
Atmospheric constituents, 251
Atmospheric MTF, 289
Atmospheric transmittance, 3, 44, 248, 411,
420
Attenuation coefficient, 249
Automatic target recognizer, 142, 219, 382,
391,400, 424
Average modulation optimum phase, 377
Back-end, 141
Background limited, 27, 331
Bandgap engineered photodetector, 25
Battlefield obscurants, 286
Beer-Lambert law, 248
Bessel function, 96, 103
Bilinear interpolation, 156, 194, 239
Blackbody, 42
BLIP, 27, 331
Blockiness, 141, 157
Blur diameter, 49, 97, 200
Blur efficiency, 53, 204, 346
Bolometer, 25
Bomb blasts, 286
Boost, 34, 146, 222, 246, 344
Boost amplifier, 33, 133
Boundaiy layer, 263
Bow-tie, 174
Burning materiel, 286
Calibration points, 37
Camouflage, 313
Camouflage smokes, 286
Causality, 67
Cell area, 28
Central limit theorem, 104, 126
Characteristic frequency, 324
Charge transfer efficiency, 166
Charge well, 28,313,345
Charge-coupled device, 166
Classification, 386
Closely spaced objects, 200
Clouds, 311
Clutter, 317, 386, 397, 426
Cn2, 290
Coherence diameter, 293
Cold filter, 282
Cold shield efficiency, 337
Color corrected, 90
Commercial, 11
Common module, 10, 20, 30, 48, 83, 84, 88
Component/phenomenology model, 6
Concentration-pathlength product, 286
Contextual clue, 385
Contrast, 313
Contrast threshold, 118
Contrast transfer function, 355
Contrast transmittance, 261, 314
Convolution, 66
Cooled detectors, 24
Cooler
mechanical, 24
thermoelectric, 24
CosineN0, 18, 46
Critical dimension, 237, 386
Critical frequency, 414
CRT, 135, 184
Cuer, 142, 219, 382
Cutoff frequency, 97
D*, 27,331
Dark current, 326
DAS, 97, 198
Decision tree, 391
Defocusing, 85
Delta T, 55, 304
Detection, 235, 386
Detection time, 426
Detector angular subtense, 97
Detector pitch, 80
Digital filters, 150
Digital scan converter, 33, 140
Dirac delta, 65
Discrimination, 385
Dither, 168, 194
Diurnal variations, 308
Double correlated sampling, 326
DSC, 33, 140
Dwell time, 21, 107, 110
Earthshine, 315
Effective-instantaneous-field-of-view, 204
EIFOV, 204
Electronically multiplexed, 33, 140
Electro-Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects
Library, 286, 289
Electro-optically multiplexed, 33, 130
Emissivity, 44
Emittance, 44
EMUX, 33, 71, 140
Engine compartment, 315
Ensquared power, 53, 204, 346
EOMUX, 33, 130, 140
EOSAEL,286, 289
Equivalent bar pattern, 386
Equivalent pass band, 209, 220
Extended source, 40
Extinction, 248
Eye Response, 421
Eye-Iimked, 222
F tan(0), 23
Faceted model, 316
False resolution, 100
Far infrared, 3
Far-field, 293
FASCODE, 262
Fast mode, 294
Field-of-view, 417
Fill factor, 28, 168
Film, 185
Filter
anti-alias, 85, 140
averaging, 154, 351
boost, 184
Butterworth, 114, 161
Chebychev, 161, 239
cold, 282, 335
cosine, 153
digital, 150, 184
finite impulse response, 152
ideal, 86, 114, 160
infinite impulse response, 152
low pass, 85, 113, 140
matched, 363
median, 351
noise, 141, 367
N-pole, 114
post-reconstruction, 141, 160, 239
rank-order, 351
reconstruction, 141
recursive, 350
tolerance, 151
tuned, 134
warm, 335
Finding, 385
FIR, 3
First generation, 36
Fixed pattern noise, 28, 37, 327, 373
Fixed pattern ratio, 328, 373
Flat field, 240
Flicker, 109
FUR, 29
FLIR90, 362
FLIR92, 362
ARG-1, 90
ARG-2, 94
ARG-3, 97
ARG-4, 146
ARG-5, 142
ARG-6, 149
ARG-7, 99
ARG-8, 104
ARG-9, 102
ARG-11, 113
ARG-12, 115
ARG-13, 114
ARG-14, 133
ARG-16, 116 Humidity, 249
ARG-17, 153
ARG-18, 153 Identification, 386
ARG-21, 135 IEDT, 377
ARG-22, 166 IIRS, 202
ARG-23, 159 Image intensifier, 387
ARG-24, 123 Image quality, 6, 217, 289
ARG-25, 119 Image reconstruction, 141, 150
ARG-31,365 Image rectification, 177
ARG-33, 322 Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale, 202
ARG-36, 366 Imaging tubes, 131
ARG-37,366 Impulse response, 67
ARG-38, 366 Indentification, 245
ARG-41, 366 Indium antimonide, 26
ARG-42, 366 Infrared search and track, 11
ARG-43, 366 Inhibitory, 118, 381
ARG-44, 365 Inhomogeneity equivalent temperature
ARG-55, 365 difference, 377
default noise values, 371 In-phase, 149, 194
Flood illuminated, 45 Instantaneous-field-of-view, 97
Flux density, 348 Interlace, 21, 36, 100
f-number, 27, 46, 429 Interlace ratio, 107
f0, 324 International visibility code, 259
Focal plane array, 28 Interpolation, 194
Forward looking infrared, 29 IRLS, 173
FPN, 28, 327 IRST, 53, 204, 262
residual, 340 Isoplanatic, 71
Framerate, 107
Frictional heat, 315 Jaggies, 73
FO, 23 Jitter, 99, 188,421
Johnson criterion, 386, 417
Gain/level normalization, 18, 37 Johnson noise, 325
Gamma, 35, 120, 131 Johnson noise limited, 333
Gaussian, 120 JOLI, 333
Geometric distortion, 177
Gibbs phenomenon, 69 Kell factor, 150
Glare, 335 Kennedy scanner, 176
Glints Kirchkoffs law, 44
sun, 283 Koschmieder formula, 259
Gray scale, 197
GRD, 202 Lambertian source, 41
Ground coverage, 182 Landsat, 236
Ground resolution, 202 LED, 116
Ground resolved distance, 202 Light emitting diode, 30, 116
** Limiting resolution, 200
Half-cycle, 136,403 Line scanner, 29, 173
Halftone, 157 Linear filter theory, 65
Haze, 250 Linear motion, 99
Head movement, 123, 370 Linear phase shift, 62
HITRAN, 250, 262 Line-of-sight stabilization, 421
Hot spot detection, 406 Lines/PH, 131
Human visual system MTF, 117 Line-to-line interpolation, 33, 107, 194, 349
Long exposure, 293
Long wavelength infrared, 3
LOWTRAN, 250, 262
LWIR, 3
Machine vision, 219, 382, 391, 400, 424
Macroscale variation, 289
Magnification, 37, 45, 106, 118
Man-portable, 30
Maritime environment, 249
Mass extinction coefficient, 286
Matched filter, 363
MDT, 365
Mean detection time, 426
Measurement resolution, 201
Median filter, 351
Mercury cadmium telluride, 26
Meteorological range, 253, 259, 260
MFTD, 385
Microphonics, 321, 359
Microscan, 84, 168, 194
Mid-wavelength infrared, 3
Mie theory, 255
Military, 11
Minimum detectable temperature, 8, 365
Minimum dimension, 386
Minimum findable temperature difference,
385
Minimum resolvable contrast, 8, 355, 380
Minimum resolvable temperature, 8, 355
Minimum temperature difference perceived,
377
Minor motion, 106
MODTRAN, 250, 262
Modulation, 63
Modulation transfer function, 62
Moire pattern, 73
Monitor, 35, 135, 157
Monte Carlo, 378
Motion, 98, 141, 166, 183, 369, 421
MRC, 355, 380
MRT, 123, 355
two-dimensional, 374
MTDP, 377
MTF, 62, 63
aberrated, 94
aerosol, 299
amplifier, 113
atmospheric, 289
averaging filter, 154
bilinear interpolation, 156, 194
boost, 133
Butterworth, 114, 135, 161
central obscuration, 92
charge transfer efficiency, 166, 189
Chebychev, 161
cosine filter, 153
CRT, 184
defocus, 95, 179
detector, 77, 97, 188
diffraction, 69, 90
digital filter, 153, 189
eye, 119, 189
film, 185
Gaussian, 94, 104, 126, 132, 135
human visual system, 117
ideal, 160
ideal filter, 114
interpolation, 189
lead circuit, 134
LED, 116, 189
linear motion, 99
microscan, 168
mirror motion, 106
monitor, 135, 189
motion, 188
non-limiting, 123, 370
N-pole, 114
optics, 188
phase, 149, 188
polychromatic, 90
random motion, 104
rectangular aperture, 177
sample and hold, 159
sample-scene phase, 149
sinsoidal motion, 102
SPRITE, 146
squeeze, 243, 376
TDI, 143
time constant, 113, 183
tuned circuit, 134
turbulence, 293
vertical, 188
vidicon, 131, 189
visual optics, 116, 189
Multiplexer noise, 328
Multispectral scanner system, 236
MWIR, 3
MWIR versus LWIR, 206, 251, 255, 274,
281,283, 345, 423
N50, 395
Nadir, 175
Narrow field-of-view, 417
National Imagery Interpretability Rating
Scale, 202
Near-field, 293
NEBW, 322
NEDT, 340
NEI, 346
NEP, 331
Net lead, 134
Newton's relationship, 179
NURS, 202
Noise, 321
1/f, 322, 327
additive, 328
aliased, 352
amplifier, 325
dark cunent, 326
default values, 371
fixed pattern, 325, 327, 358
Johnson, 325
kTC, 328
microphonics, 359
multiplexer, 325, 328
multiplicative, 328
noise floor, 328
photon, 324, 335
quantization, 328
random, 358
readout, 325, 359
shot, 326
signal-dependent, 328
signal-independent, 328
streaks, 358
summary noise factors, 365
three-dimensional, 357
Noise equivalent bandwidth, 27, 322
Noise equivalent flux density, 320
Noise equivalent irradiance, 320
Noise equivalent power, 331
Noise equivalent temperature, 320
Noise equivalent temperature differential,
320
Noise filter, 141, 367
Noise floor, 328
Noise power spectral density, 322, 356
Noisy images, 123
Nonuniformity, 328, 339, 373
Nonuniformity correction, 37
Normalization, 57
NPSD, 322,351
NUC, 37
Numerical aperture, 179, 430
Nutation, 170
NVL model, 362, 371
NVTherm, 375,416
Nyquist frequency, 73, 375, 416
Obscurants, 286
Obscuration, 92
Operational model, 7
Optical shape factor, 53
Optical transfer function, 62
Optical transmittance, 45, 418
Optics, 17
Optimum design, 1
Orientation, 386
OTF, 62
Out-of-phase, 149
Oversample, 73
Overscan, 190
Overscan ratio, 107
Panoramic distortion, 177
Parralel scan, 21
PAS, 203
Path radiance, 261, 286, 312, 336
Peak-up, 194
PG720, 272
Phase shift, 71
Phase shift lens, 71
Phase transfer function, 62
Photoconductive, 24
Photometry, 57
Photon detector, 329
Photon noise, 324, 335
Photovoltaic, 25
Physically Reasonable infrared Signature
Model, 316
Picture height, 131
Pitch, 80
Pixel, 400
Pixel angular subtense, 203
Pixels on target, 231, 400
Planck s blackbody radiation law, 42
Platinum silicide, 26
Point source, 49
Point source detection, 204
Point spread function, 67
Point visibility factor, 53, 204, 346
Poisson statistics, 326
Post-amplifier, 30, 113
Post-filter, 141
Post-reconstruction, 35, 141
Pre-amplifier, 30, 113
Pre-ft Iter, 141
Principal plane, 429
PRISM, 316
PTF, 62
Pushbroom, 29, 173
PVF, 53
Pyroelectric, 25, 147
Quantum well, 25, 26
Quantum well detector, 330, 332
R384, 272
R400, 272
Radiant exitance, 40
Radiant flux, 40
Radiant intensity, 40
Radiant sterance, 40
Radiometry, 40
Random motion, 104
Range performance probability, 414
Range prediction, 411
Rank-order, 351
Raster, 157
Raster scan, 20
Rayleigh criterion, 200, 274
Rayleigh scattering, 255
Recognition, 233, 245, 386
Reconstruction, 35, 141, 348
Recursive filter, 350
Reference frequency, 324
Reflectance, 44
Reflectivity, 44
Refractive index structure parameter, 290
Re-imager, 106
Relative humidity, 252
Residual FPN, 340
Resolution, 8, 231, 418
grayscale, 197
spatial, 197
spectral, 197
temporal, 197
Resolution-limited, 409
Resolved source, 45
Responsivity, 46, 328, 329
Richardson emission constant, 327
Ringing, 69, 134, 154, 246
Ripple, 161
R,, 326
Rotating polygon, 111
Sagittal MTF, 90, 188
Sample correlation factor, 366
Sample per detector dimension, 229
Sample-and-hold, 159
Sampled-data system, 75, 149, 226
Samples per dwell, 228
Sample-scene phase, 149, 231
Sampling, 73
Sampling effects, 415
Sampling frequency, 149
Scan
bidirectional, 71
Scan conversion, 33, 130
Scan efficiency, 107
Scan time, 20
Scan velocity, 107, 110
Scanner, 20, 175, 183
axe-head, 175
Kennedy, 176
split aperture, 175
Scattering, 248
solar, 285
Schottky barrier diode, 25, 327, 330, 332
Scintillation, 289
Search, 425
Second generation, 36
Sensitivity, 8, 320, 418
Sensitivity-limited, 409
Serial scan, 20
Serial/parallel, 36
Shade's equivalent band pass, 220
Shift invariant, 71
Short exposure, 293
Short wavelength infrared, 3
Shrinking raster, 135
SIA, 359
Signal transfer function, 55
Signal-to-clutter ratio, 397
Signal-to-noise ratio, 220, 266, 280, 338,
370
Sine wave response, 116
Sinusoidal motion, 102
SiTF, 55
Situational awareness, 417
Sky, 314
Skyshine, 315
Sky-to-background ratio, 314
Slit response function, 201
Slow mode, 294
SNRth, 369
Solar absorption, 308
Solar heating, 308
Solar scattering, 285
Soot, 286
SPACE, 308
Sparrow criterion, 200
Spatial resolution, 197
Specific detectivity, 27, 331
Spectral Infrared Imaging of Targets and
Scenes, 316
SPIRITS, 316
SPRITE, 11, 20, 26, 143, 146, 188, 204,
332
Spurious resolution, 100
Spurious response, 227, 237, 243
Square wave response, 355
Square-root integral, 224
Squeeze, 243, 376
Stabilization, 421
STADIUM FLIR, 378, 423
Staggered array, 36
Staggered elements, 82
Star detection, 406
Staring array, 36, 165, 342
Static model, 357
Step-stare, 168
Stratosphere, 262
Subjective quality factor, 221
Summary noise factor, 365
Sun glints, 283
Sun, Precipitation, Atmosphere, Clouds,
Earth, 308
Sunshine, 315
Superposition, 65, 68
SWIR, 3
Synchronous integrator, 363
System cutoff, 80
System engineering, 2
System Image Analyzer, 359
System performance model, 7
Systeme Modulaire Thermique, 11
Tangential MTF, 90, 188
Taps, 153
Target discrimination, 317, 385, 409
Target signature, 12, 303
Target size, 421
Target size function, 53
Target transfer probability function, 394, 414
Targets, 424
TDI, 21, 143, 343,371
Telescope
afocal, 106
Cassegrainian, 92
Temperature reference, 37
Thermal crossover, 308
Thermal derivative, 56
Thermal detector, 330, 333
Thermal detectors, 25
Thermal imaging band, 3
Thermal Imaging Common Module, 11
Thermal inertia, 308
Thermal Range Model, 377
Thermal structure metrics, 317
Thermal time constant, 147
Thermoelectric cooler, 24
Three-dimensional noise, 357
Throughput, 32
TICM, 11
Time delay, 71
Time-delay and integration, 21
T-number, 47
Tolerance, 151
Tolerancing, 378
Tradeoff, 409
Tradeoff analysis, 1
Transfer efficiency, 166
Transmittance, 44
contrast, 261
Transverse coherence length, 293
TRM 3, 377
Tropical, 251
TTPF, 394, 414
Turbulence, 249, 289
TV limiting resolution, 200
TV limiting response, 135
Two point, 37
Two-dimensional MRT, 374
Two-point correction, 340
Uncooled detectors, 24
Uncooled technology, 140
Undersample, 73
V/H ratio, 174
Validation, 13
Vertical profile, 293
Very long wave infrared, 3
Video bandwidth, 135
Video timing, 133
Vidicon, 33, 130
Visibility, 258
Visible, 46
Visual angle, 118
Visual range, 260
VLWIR, 3
Warm filter, 335
Washed out, 311
Water vapor, 249, 252
Wave-front error, 94, 179
Weather conditions, 267
Weather Effects on Tactical Target
Acquisition, 268
WETTA, 268
Wide field-of-view, 417
Zoom, 118, 137, 156,417, 423